JP7716293B2 - gaming machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that allows gaming.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines and slot machines, are equipped with movable bodies that can be operated, and can perform movable body effects by moving the movable bodies while variable symbol displays are being performed.

In this type of gaming machine, when the power is turned on or when power is restored after a power outage, some machines are capable of performing an initial operation (long initial operation) that causes the movable body to operate in the same way as the presentation operation, or an initial operation (short initial operation) that causes the movable body to operate by omitting part of the presentation operation (see, for example, Patent Document 1) .

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-113217

There was room for improving the marketability of gaming machines having the functions and configurations of Patent Document 1 .

This invention was made in consideration of the above situation, and aims to provide a gaming machine with improved marketability.

The gaming machine according to claim 1 comprises:
A gaming machine that can execute variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body and
A performance control means;
a movable body control means,
the movable body control means is capable of performing a confirmation operation control to operate the movable body by an operation to confirm that the movable body operates normally when power is turned on,
the effect control means is capable of performing an action promotion effect that prompts a player to take an action during variable display based on a specific variable display pattern;
The specific variable display pattern is
A first part until the action prompting performance is executed;
A second part is executed after the first part, and a result of the action prompting performance is notified.
The invention comprises:
The movable body control means
The confirmation operation control can be performed using a first operation control pattern that operates the movable body for a first period and a second operation control pattern that operates the movable body for a second period that is shorter than the first period,
When a power outage occurs immediately before the end of variable display before the start of variable display based on the specific variable display pattern, and the power is then turned on, the movable body can be controlled so that the confirmation operation control is performed using the second operation control pattern during the execution of variable display based on the specific variable display pattern, and the confirmation operation control ends before the start of the second part,
The game device further includes a game control means capable of performing specific identification information light emission control, which is control of a plurality of light emitting means that indicate the results of variable display of the specific identification information, when the power is turned on;
the movable body control means is capable of starting the confirmation operation control after the specific identification information light emission control has been started,
During the variable display, it is possible to execute a movable body effect using the movable body, and to display an effect display corresponding to the movable body effect,
When the variable display that executes the movable body performance is started while the confirmation operation control is being performed, the confirmation operation control is continued, and the movable body performance is restricted during the confirmation operation control to display the effect display.
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can improve the marketability of the product.

The present invention may have only the specific features of the invention set forth in the claims of the present invention, or it may have both the specific features of the invention set forth in the claims of the present invention and features other than those specific features.

1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like installed in a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a performance control command. 10A is a diagram illustrating an example of a variable display result designation command, and FIG. 10B is a diagram illustrating an example of a game state background designation command. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing display result determination table 1, (B) is an explanatory diagram showing display result determination table 2, (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table (for the first special pattern), (D) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table (for the second special pattern), and (E) is an explanatory diagram showing a small jackpot type determination table. An explanatory diagram of the types of jackpots. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a game control data storage area. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the data holding area for performance control, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the command buffer received at the time of starting winning. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a special symbol process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a start winning determination process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a random number value determination process when a prize is won. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a normal special symbol processing. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a variation pattern setting process. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern determination table. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern determination table. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern determination table. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern determination table. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern determination table. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern determination table. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol stopping process. This is a flowchart showing an example of processing during small win release. This is a flowchart showing an example of small win end processing. A flowchart showing an example of a jackpot end process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an initial operation control process. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an origin placement control process. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an operation check control process. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an operation check control process. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a switching control table. 10A and 10B are explanatory diagrams of control during an execution period of confirmation control and control during an execution period of post-confirmation operation control. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a variable display start setting process. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display mode of an image displayed on an image display device. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display mode of an image displayed on an image display device. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display mode of an image displayed on an image display device. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display mode of an image displayed on an image display device. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display mode of an image displayed on an image display device. 1A shows a state in which the on-board movable body is located at the origin position, and FIG. 1B shows a state in which the on-board movable body is located at the performance position. 1A shows the state in which the under-board movable body is located at the origin position, and FIG. 1B shows the state in which the under-board movable body is located at the performance position. (A) is a diagram showing a state in which the frame-mounted movable body and the chance button are located at the origin position, and (B) is a diagram showing a state in which they are located at the performance position. A diagram showing a list of effects that can be executed by the effect control CPU. (A) is a diagram showing the effects that can be executed during the variable display period of the SP reach, and (B) is a diagram showing a list of effects that can be executed in the jackpot game state. A diagram showing an example of the operation of the pre-reading movable object announcement. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the start notice operation. A diagram showing an example of the operation of movable object preview and pseudo consecutive preview. A figure showing an example of the reach warning and button warning operations. A figure showing an example of the operation of SP reach notice. A diagram showing an example of the operation of a jackpot presentation. A figure showing an example of the operation of a jackpot effect (promotion effect). FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of state transition operation control. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of a customer waiting demo performance. 1A is a diagram illustrating the operation of a movable body, and FIG. 1B is a diagram illustrating the manner in which a lamp and sound are emitted in response to the operation of the movable body. 10A to 10J are diagrams illustrating an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control during cold start processing. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow when a power interruption occurs. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow when a power interruption occurs. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow when a power interruption occurs. This is a timing chart for when a moving body preview is performed after initial operation by cold start. This is a timing chart for limiting movable body advance notice during initial operation due to cold start. This is an explanatory diagram showing the situation when a starting win occurs during initial operation due to a cold start. This is an explanatory diagram showing the situation when a starting win occurs during initial operation due to a cold start. This is a timing chart for when a movable body preview is performed after initial operation by hot start. This is a timing chart for limiting movable body advance notice during initial operation due to cold start. This is a timing chart for limiting movable body advance notice after initial operation due to cold start. This is a timing chart for limiting the look-ahead movable body advance notice during the initial operation due to a cold start. This is a timing chart when a start winning occurs during the initial operation and variable 2 display that executes a movable body preview is started during the initial operation period in response to the start winning. This is a timing chart when a start winning occurs during the initial operation and a variable display that executes a movable body preview is started during the initial operation period in response to the start winning. This is a timing chart when a start winning occurs after the initial operation and a variable display that executes a movable body preview is started during the initial operation period in response to the start winning. This is a timing chart when a start winning occurs during the initial operation and a variable display that executes a movable body preview is started during the initial operation period in response to the start winning. This is a timing chart showing a case where the movable body moves to the performance position as an initial operation, and a case where the movable body does not move to the performance position as an initial operation. As a performance action of the moving object announcement, the moving object may move to the performance position, and as a performance action of the moving object announcement, the moving object may move to the performance position. This is a timing chart of a movable body preview when the movable body stops on its way from the origin position to the performance position as an initial operation. 10 is a timing chart showing an initial operation due to a cold start. 10 is a timing chart showing an initial operation by hot start. 10 is a timing chart showing an initial operation by hot start. This is a timing chart of a demonstration effect when a movable body stops midway from the origin position to the effect position during initial operation. This figure shows an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs just before the end of a jackpot fluctuation. A figure showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately after the start of a fanfare performance. A figure showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs just before the end of the fanfare performance. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating an example of operation when operation confirmation control is executed for fanfare performance. 1A is a diagram showing the relationship between an on-board movable body and various displays, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the relationship between an under-board movable body and various displays. A figure showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately after the start of a round of play. A figure showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs just before the end of one round of play. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power interruption occurs immediately after the start of a special interval. A diagram showing an example of the operation of operation confirmation control as a modified example when a power interruption occurs immediately after the start of a special interval. A figure showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs just before the start of a round of play in which a promotion effect is executed. A figure showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs just before the end of the final round of play. A figure showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately after the start of the ending performance. A figure showing an example of the operation of a movable body when a power outage occurs during time reduction and operation confirmation control is started based on the power being turned on afterwards. 1A is a diagram showing the relationship between an on-board movable body and various displays, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the relationship between an under-board movable body and various displays. This figure shows an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs just before the end of a fluctuation before the fluctuation in which the button notice is executed. This figure shows an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs just before the end of a fluctuation before the fluctuation for which a start-time notice is executed. This figure shows an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs just before the end of a fluctuation before the fluctuation in which the pseudo-continuous notification is executed. A figure showing an example of the operation of a movable body when a power outage occurs during normal fluctuation and operation confirmation control is started based on the power being turned on afterwards. 1A is a diagram showing the relationship between an on-board movable body and various displays, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the relationship between an under-board movable body and various displays. This figure shows an example of the operation of a movable body when a power outage occurs during a jackpot and operation confirmation control is initiated based on the power being turned on afterwards. 1A is a diagram showing the relationship between an on-board movable body and various displays, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the relationship between an under-board movable body and various displays. A figure showing an example of the operation of a movable body when a power outage occurs during time reduction and operation confirmation control is started based on the power being turned on afterwards. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an initial operation performed during a cold start. 10A and 10B are timing charts showing an initial operation by a cold start and a timing chart showing an initial operation by a hot start. 10 is a timing chart showing an initial operation by hot start. 10 is a timing chart showing an initial operation by hot start. 10 is a timing chart showing an initial operation by hot start. 10 is a timing chart showing an initial operation by hot start. 10 is a timing chart showing an initial operation by hot start. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating an example of the relationship between an initialization notification image and operation confirmation control. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating an example of the relationship between an initialization notification image and operation confirmation control. 10A to 10D are diagrams illustrating an example of the operation of the operation check control during cold start processing as a modified example. (A) to (D) are diagrams showing examples of the presentation operation of the win/lose button presentation as a modified example. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating an example of operation when an error occurs in the operation confirmation control. FIG. 1 is a front view showing a gaming machine according to a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like installed in a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a performance control command. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of jackpot types. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern determination table. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a game control data storage area. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the data holding area for performance control, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the command buffer received at the time of starting winning. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a special symbol process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a start winning determination process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a normal special symbol processing. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a variable display start setting process. This is a diagram for explaining decorative patterns and small patterns. (A1) and (A2) are figures showing the first presentation mode, (B1) and (B2) are figures showing the second presentation mode, (C1) and (C2) are figures showing the third presentation mode, and (D1) and (D2) are figures showing the fourth presentation mode. (A1) and (A2) are diagrams showing the relationship between the variable display area and the decorative pattern in the first presentation mode, and (B1) and (B2) are diagrams showing the relationship between the variable display area and the decorative pattern in the second presentation mode. (C1) and (C2) are diagrams showing the relationship between the variable display area and the decorative symbols in the third presentation mode, (D1) and (D2) are diagrams showing the relationship between the variable display area and the decorative symbols in the fourth presentation mode, and (E) is a diagram for explaining the manner in which the decorative symbols and the small symbols are displayed. 1A is a diagram showing the decorative pattern change start action, (B) is a change stop action, and (C) is a loop action. FIG. 10A is a diagram comparing various decorative pattern actions with the duration of lamp light emission control, and FIG. 10B is a diagram showing an example of loop lamp light emission control. (A1) to (A4) and (B1) to (B4) are diagrams illustrating examples of the operation of the hold display. A diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns in the first presentation mode. This is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns following Figure 139. A diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns in the second presentation mode. This is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns following Figure 141. A figure showing details of the flow of variable display of decorative patterns in Figure 141. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns as modified example 1. FIG. 145 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns following FIG. 144. A diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns in the third presentation mode. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining how the decorative pattern appears. A diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns in the fourth presentation mode. A diagram showing the flow of the stopped display of decorative patterns in the first presentation mode (second presentation mode). This is a diagram showing the flow of decorative pattern stop display following Figure 149. (A) to (G) are diagrams showing the flow of decorative pattern stop displays when the number of reserved memories is three in the first presentation mode (second presentation mode). (A) and (B) are diagrams showing the flow of the stopped display of decorative patterns in the fourth presentation mode (third presentation mode). (A1) is a diagram showing a first background image, (A2) is a diagram showing a first predetermined background image, and (B) is a diagram explaining a change in background. A diagram showing the flow of background changes in the first presentation mode. This is a timing chart showing the flow of each part of the variable display in the first presentation mode. This is a timing chart showing the flow of each part of the variable display in the second presentation mode. This is a timing chart showing the flow of each part of the variable display in the third and fourth presentation modes. (A) is a timing chart showing the state of each part at the start of variable display in the first presentation mode, (B) is the second presentation mode, and (C) is the third and fourth presentation modes. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of a customer waiting demo performance. This figure shows an example of operation when a start winning occurs during a customer waiting demo performance. A diagram showing the flow of pseudo-consecutive announcements. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the pseudo consecutive number of times displayed and the pattern color, (B) is a diagram showing the types of pseudo consecutive number of times displayed and the pattern color, and (C) is a diagram showing the pseudo consecutive number of times displayed color determination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the flow of reach effects. This is a diagram showing the flow of reach presentation following Figure 163. 10A to 10C are diagrams showing examples of the operation of each part in reach performance. A diagram showing the flow of SP reach presentation. This is a diagram showing the flow of the SP reach presentation following Figure 166. A diagram showing an example of the operation of each part in the SP reach performance. (A1) to (A7) are diagrams showing a second modification of the present invention. 10A to 10D are diagrams showing a third modified example of the present invention.

The following describes an embodiment of the gaming machine according to the present invention, with reference to the drawings.

(Feature 132SG form)
[Form 1]
The gaming machine of form 1-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Display means (e.g., image display device 5);
sound output means (e.g., speakers 8L and 8R);
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the on-frame movable body 132SG01, the chance button 631B),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The performance control means
It is possible to execute a movable body effect using the movable body during the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 45, a part where a movable body announcement can be executed in which the on-board movable body 32A vibrates up and down),
The display means can display an effect display corresponding to the movable body performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 49, an effect display 132SG407 is displayed on the image display device 5 in accordance with the movement of the on-board movable body 32A),
The sound output means can output a movable body effect sound corresponding to the movable body effect (for example, in the movable body preview shown in FIG. 49, the part where effect sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R),
The movable body control means
When the power is turned on, it is possible to perform confirmation movement control to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the operation confirmation control process shown in Figures 31 and 32, which performs the initial operation of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the above-frame movable body 132SG101).
When the movable body performance is executed, it is possible to perform performance movement control to move the movable body by a predetermined operation (for example, as shown in FIG. 47, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 moves the on-board movable body 32A up and down multiple times between the origin position and the intermediate position),
When the movable body performance is executed with a variable display that is started during a predetermined period in which the confirmation movable control is being performed at the time of power-on with initialization, when the movable body performance is executed during the predetermined period, the output of the performance movable control and the movable body performance sound is limited, while the display of the effect display is performed, and when the movable body performance is executed after the predetermined period, at least the performance movable control and the display of the effect display are performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 62, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a cold start, a start winning occurs during the initial operation period of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101, and based on the start winning, these on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG1 When a variable display that executes a movable body prediction is started during the initial operation period of 01, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as a movable body prediction and the output of the movable body prediction sound corresponding to the movable body prediction from the speakers 8L and 8R are not executed during the execution period of the movable body prediction, but the effect display 132SG407 is displayed on the image display device 5, and as shown in Figure 61, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a cold start, a start-up winning occurs after the initial operation period of the on-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the above-frame movable body 132SG101, and when a variable display that executes a movable body prediction is started based on the start-up winning, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as a movable body prediction and the effect display 132SG407 are displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the movable body prediction.
When the movable body performance is executed with a variable display that is started during the predetermined period in which the confirmation movable control is being performed when the power is turned on without initialization, the performance movable control is limited when the movable body performance is executed during the predetermined period, while the effect display is displayed and the movable body performance sound is output, and when the movable body performance is executed after the predetermined period, the performance movable control, the effect display is displayed, and the movable body performance sound is output (for example, as shown in FIG. 66, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a hot start, a start winning occurs during the initial operation period of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101, and based on the start winning, during the initial operation period of these on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101, When a variable display that executes a movable object prediction is started, the operation of the on-board movable object 32A as a movable object prediction is not executed during the execution period of the movable object prediction, but the effect display 132SG407 is displayed on the image display device 5 and a movable object prediction sound corresponding to the movable object prediction is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and as shown in Figure 65, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a hot start, a start-up winning occurs after the initial operation period of the on-board movable object 32A, the below-board movable object 32B, the chance button 631B, and the above-frame movable object 132SG101, and when a variable display that executes a movable object prediction is started based on the start-up winning, the operation of the on-board movable object 32A as a movable object prediction, the display of the effect display 132SG407 on the image display device 5, and the output of a movable object prediction sound corresponding to the movable object prediction are executed during the execution period of the movable object prediction.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a movable body presentation is executed using a variable display that is started during confirmation movable control, a gaming machine can be provided that can indicate to the player that a movable body presentation has been executed by outputting an effect display or movable body presentation sound, while preventing the presentation movable control from interfering with the confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 1-2 is
When the movable body performance is executed, the expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when it is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 45, when the movable body notice is executed, the expectation of a jackpot is set higher than when the movable body notice is not executed),
When the power is turned on with initialization, if the movable body effect is executed with a variable display that started during the predetermined period in which the confirmation movable control is being performed, when the movable body effect is executed during the predetermined period, the effect movable control and the output of the movable body effect sound are limited, and after the predetermined period ends, the effect movable control that is limited during the predetermined period is performed, while the movable body effect sound is not output (for example, as shown in Figure 62, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a cold start, a start winning occurs during the initial operation period of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101, and based on the start winning, In this case, when a variable display that executes a movable body prediction is started during the initial operation period of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as a movable body prediction and the output of a movable body prediction sound from the speakers 8L and 8R in response to the movable body prediction are not executed during the execution period of the movable body prediction, while after the initial operation of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101 is completed, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as a movable body prediction is executed again, but the output of a movable body prediction sound in response to the movable body prediction from the speakers 8L and 8R is not executed.
When the power is turned on without initialization, if the movable body effect is executed with a variable display that started during the predetermined period in which the confirmation movable control is being performed, when the movable body effect is executed during the predetermined period, the effect movable control is limited, and after the predetermined period ends, the effect movable control that is limited during the predetermined period is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 66, during the initial operation period of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the frame-top movable body 132SG101 when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a hot start, When a start winning occurs, and a variable display that executes a movable body prediction is started during the initial operation period of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the frame-top movable body 132SG101 based on the start winning, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as a movable body prediction is not executed during the execution period of the movable body prediction, but the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as a movable body prediction is executed again after the initial operation of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the frame-top movable body 132SG101 is completed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the effect of the presentation is not reduced by limiting the control of the movable body presentation, which has a high probability of being controlled to an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of form 1-3 is
The movable body includes a first movable body (e.g., an on-board movable body 32A) and a second movable body (e.g., a below-board movable body 32B),
When power is turned on, the movable body control means is capable of performing the confirmation movement control to move the first movable body and the second movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the first movable body and the second movable body are operating normally (for example, a part of the performance control CPU 120 that executes the operation confirmation control process shown in FIG. 31 and FIG. 32 ).
The confirmation movement control ends based on the completion of the movement of the second movable body (for example, as shown in FIG. 61, the initial movements of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101 are the last to end upon completion of the initial movement of the under-board movable body 32B).
The movable body effect is an effect using the first movable body (for example, as shown in FIG. 49, the movable body notice is a part that operates the on-board movable body 32A),
When the power is turned on, if the movable body effect is executed with a variable display that is started during the predetermined period in which the confirmation movement control is being performed, the effect movement control is limited when the movable body effect is executed during the predetermined period, and the effect movement control limited during the predetermined period is performed when the movement of the second movable body by the confirmation movement control is completed (for example, as shown in FIG. 62, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, the frame-up movable body 32A, the frame-up movable body 32B, the frame-up movable body 32B, the frame-up movable body 32B, the frame-up movable body 32C, the frame-up movable body 32D, the frame-up movable body 32D, the frame-up movable body 32D, the frame-up movable body 32E, the frame-up movable body 32F ... If a start winning occurs during the initial operation period of the movable body 132SG101, and a variable display that executes a movable body prediction is started during the initial operation period of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the frame-top movable body 132SG101 based on the start winning, the performance operation of the on-board movable body 32A as a movable body prediction is not executed during the execution period of the movable body prediction, and the performance operation of the on-board movable body 32A is executed again after the initial operation of the under-board movable body 32B is completed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine can be provided in which, when the movement of the first movable body by the confirmation movable control is completed, the performance movable control using the first movable body is executed, so that it is not possible to distinguish between the confirmation movable control and the performance movable control.

The gaming machine of form 1-4 is
The presentation control means is capable of executing an initialization notification corresponding to the initialization when power is turned on accompanied by initialization (for example, as shown in Figures 61 and 62, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are illuminated in a manner corresponding to the initialization notification, and an initialization notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R).
The execution period of the confirmation movable control and the execution period of the initialization notification overlap (for example, as shown in Figures 61 and 62, the initial operation period of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101 overlaps with the light emission period in a manner corresponding to the initialization notification of the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g, and the initialization notification sound output period from the speakers 8L and 8R).
The execution period of the initialization notification is longer than the execution period of the confirmation movable control (for example, as shown in Figures 61 and 62, the light emission period in a manner corresponding to the initialization notification of the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the upper-board movable body LED 9d, the lower-board movable body LED 9e, the upper-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g, and the period during which the initialization notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R are longer than the initial operation period of the upper-board movable body 32A, the lower-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the upper-frame movable body 132SG101).
After the execution period of the confirmation movable control has ended, if the movable body effect is executed with a variable display that was started during the execution period of the initialization notification, when the movable body effect is executed during the execution period of the initialization notification, the effect movable control and the display of the effect display are performed, but the movable body effect sound is not output (for example, as shown in FIG. 67, even if a variable display that executes a movable body preview is started during the initial operation of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the frame-top movable body 132SG101, if the execution period of the movable body preview is after the operation of each movable body has ended, the performance operation of the on-board movable body 32A and the display of the effect display 132SG407 on the image display device 5 are executed during the execution period of the movable body preview, but the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g are not lit in a manner corresponding to the initialization notification, and the initialization notification sound is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, even during the execution period of the initialization response notification, if the confirmation movement control has ended, the performance movement control is executed, thereby providing a gaming machine that does not reduce the performance effect of the movable body performance.

The gaming machine of form 1-5 is
The performance control means is capable of executing a pre-reading movable body performance that suggests that the movable body performance will be executed in a variable display prior to a variable display based on a specific variable display pattern in which the movable body performance is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 45, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 can execute a pre-reading movable body notice),
When the predictive movable body performance is executed, the movable body control means is capable of performing specific performance movement control to move the movable body by a specific action (for example, as shown in FIG. 47, the performance control CPU 120 controls the on-board movable body 32A to be a part that can move up and down multiple times between an origin position and an intermediate position as a predictive movable body notice),
The execution period of the variable display in which the pre-reading movable body performance is executed is shorter than the execution period of the confirmation movable control (for example, the special chart change time of the non-reach miss variable display is 12 seconds or less, and the period of the initial operation is 30 seconds),
When the power is turned on, if the start condition is met multiple times during the predetermined period in which the confirmation movable control is being performed, and the predictive movable body performance is executed in a variable display that is started based on the establishment of the start condition, when the predictive movable body performance is executed during the predetermined period, the specific movable control is limited,
When the variable display in which the pre-reading movable body effect is executed during the specified period ends, the specific movable body control limited to the specified period will not be executed after the end of the specified period (for example, as shown in Figure 68, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start, and the execution of the pre-reading movable body announcement is decided due to the occurrence of multiple variable displays during the confirmation operation of each movable body as initial operation control, if the execution period of the pre-reading movable body announcement overlaps with the confirmation operation period of each movable body or the period of initial operation control, the display of the effect display 132SG407 is executed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the pre-reading movable body announcement, and after the end of the variable display, the presentation operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the pre-reading movable body announcement is not executed again).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when the variable display is crossed, the restricted specific movable control is not executed during the confirmation movable control, so that it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not confuse the player by moving the movable body excessively after the confirmation movable control ends.

The gaming machine of form 1-6 is
The presentation control means is capable of executing, in one variable display, as the movable body presentation, a first movable body presentation (for example, the first movable body announcement shown in FIG. 69) and a second movable body presentation (for example, the second movable body announcement shown in FIG. 69) which has a higher probability of being controlled to the advantageous state when executed than the first movable body presentation,
The movable body control means
When the first movable body performance is executed, it is possible to perform a first performance movement control (for example, a part where the on-board movable body 32A is moved multiple times between the origin position and the intermediate position) that moves the movable body by a first predetermined operation,
When the second movable body performance is executed, a second performance movement control (for example, a part that moves the on-board movable body 32A between the origin position and the intermediate position multiple times) that moves the movable body by a second predetermined action can be performed.
When the power is turned on, if the first movable body performance and the second movable body performance are executed in one variable display that is started during the predetermined period in which the confirmation movable control is being performed, when the first movable body performance is executed during the predetermined period, the first performance movable control is limited, and after the predetermined period ends, the first performance movable control that is limited during the predetermined period is performed,
If the second movable body performance is executed before the restricted first performance movable control is performed, the first performance movable control is not performed and the second performance movable control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 69, if the initial operation of the movable body has already been performed during the execution period of the first movable body preview, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body preview is executed after the initial operation of the movable body is completed, but if the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the second movable body preview has already been executed before the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body preview, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body preview is not executed and the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the second movable body preview continues to be executed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the effect of the presentation is not reduced by the movement of the movable body in the first movable body presentation hindering the movement of the movable body in the second movable body presentation.

The gaming machine of form 1-7 is
Light-emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g);
Further provided with a light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, the above-board movable body 32A is provided with the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body 32B is provided with the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body 132SG101 is provided with the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B is provided with the chance button LED 9g).
The movable body includes a first movable body (e.g., an on-board movable body 32A) and a second movable body (e.g., a below-board movable body 32B),
The movable body control means is capable of performing special effect movement control to move the second movable body by a special operation to notify that the movable body is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 45, a part in which the effect control CPU 120 can execute a decisive effect of raising the under-board movable body 32B),
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control to make the light emitting means of the second movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 61, the performance control CPU 120 makes the under-board movable body 9e emit light in an initial highlighting mode (for example, red flashing as shown in FIG. 56(B)) when the under-board movable body 32B is initially operated),
It is possible to perform special light emission control to make the light emitting means of the second movable body, which is moved by the special effect movement control, emit light in a special light emission pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 51 (E5), the effect control CPU 120 controls the under-board movable body 9e to emit a predetermined light color (for example, a portion that emits light in a rainbow flash as shown in FIG. 56 (B9)) when the under-board movable body 32B rises),
When the special effect movable control is executed during the specific light emission control, the special light emission control is limited (for example, when the execution period of the deciding effect is reached during the initial operation of each movable body after a hot start, a part that limits the light emission (rainbow flash) of the under-board movable body LED9e in a manner corresponding to the deciding effect during the execution period of the deciding effect).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily determine whether confirmation movement control or special performance movement control is being performed by using specific light-emitting control and special light-emitting control.

The gaming machine of form 1-8 is
The operation mode of the second movable body by the confirmation movable control and the operation mode of the second movable body by the special performance movable control are common (for example, the initial operation and performance operation of the under-board movable body 32B are both operations between the origin position and the performance position),
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform the specific light emission control in which the light emitting means of the second movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, emits light in a specific light emission pattern until the movement of the second movable body is completed (for example, as shown in FIG. 56(B) and FIG. 61, the part in which the performance control CPU 120 causes the under-board movable body LED 9e to emit light in an initial highlight mode (flashing red)),
It is possible to perform the special light emission control such that the light emitting means of the second movable body, which is movable by the special effect movable control, emits light in a first special light emission pattern during a first period, and emits light in a second special light emission pattern having a light emission mode different from the first special light emission pattern during a second period after the end of the first period (for example, as shown in FIG. 56(B) , the effect control CPU 120 causes the under-board movable body LED 9e to flash in rainbows when the under-board movable body 32B advances, and causes the under-board movable body LED 9e to emit light in smooth rainbows when the under-board movable body 32B moves in a contrasting motion).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily determine whether confirmation movable control or special movable control is being performed by using specific light-emitting control and special light-emitting control.

The gaming machine of form 1-9 is
the movable body includes a first movable body and a second movable body,
Light-emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 9a and 9b, an on-board movable body LED 9d, an under-board movable body LED 9e, an on-board movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g);
Further provided with a light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The light emitting means is provided on the first movable body and the second movable body (for example, a portion where an on-board movable body LED 9d is provided on the on-board movable body 32A and an on-board movable body LED 9e is provided on the below-board movable body 32B),
The movable body control means can move the second movable body after moving the first movable body as the confirmation movable control (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 operates the above-board movable body 32A as an initial operation and then operates the below-board movable body 32B as shown in Figures 61 and 62).
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control to make the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moving due to the confirmation movement control, emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 61, the performance control CPU 120 makes the under-board movable body 9e emit light in an initial highlighting mode (for example, red flashing as shown in FIG. 56(B)) when the under-board movable body 32B is initially operating),
When the first movable body is moved by the confirmation movement control, the specific light emission control is not performed on the light emitting means of the second movable body, and the specific light emission control is performed on the light emitting means of the first movable body (for example, as shown in Figure 61, during the execution of the confirmation operation of the above-board movable body 32A, the above-board movable body LED 9d is made to emit light in an initial highlighting mode, and the below-board movable body LED 9e is made to emit light in an initialization notification mode).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can draw attention to a moving object that is moving through confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form 1-10 is
The movable body is movable between an initial position (e.g., an origin position) and an advanced position (e.g., a performance position),
The movable body control means
When the power is turned on, if the movable body is not positioned at the initial position, it is possible to perform return control to move the movable body to the initial position (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes the origin position control process shown in FIG. 30 ).
When the variable display is started, the return control can be performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 30, from the timing when the variable display is started, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the processing of 132SGS410 to 132SGS427).
When the power is turned on, if the variable display is started during the predetermined period in which the confirmation movable control is being performed, the return control is restricted (for example, if a start winning occurs during the initial operation of each movable body when the pachinko game machine 1 is started and the variable display based on the start winning occurs, the initial operation of each movable body is executed with priority over the operation of each movable body to its origin position).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the confirmation movable control is not interrupted by the return control.

The gaming machine of form 1-11 is
The movable body is movable between an initial position (e.g., an origin position) and an advanced position (e.g., a performance position),
The movable body control means
When the power is turned on, if the movable body is not positioned at the initial position, it is possible to perform return control to move the movable body to the initial position (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes the origin position control process shown in FIG. 30 ).
When the variable display ends and the game is put into a standby state, the return control can be performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 30, from the start timing of the customer waiting demo effect, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the processing of 132SGS410 to 132SGS427).
When the power is turned on, the variable display is started during the predetermined period during which the confirmation movable control is being performed, and if the variable display ends during the predetermined period and the game is put into the standby state, the return control is restricted (for example, if a customer waiting demo performance starts in response to the end of the variable display, a part that gives priority to the performance operation of the customer waiting demo performance of each movable body over the movement of each movable body to its origin position);
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the confirmation movable control is not interrupted by the return control.

The gaming machine of form 1-12 is
The performance control means can execute the movable body performance multiple times during one variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 70, the part where the first variable display notice and the second variable display notice are executed during one variable display),
When the power is turned on, if the movable body performance is executed with a variable display that was started during the specified period in which the confirmation movable control is being performed, the performance movable control is restricted when the movable body performance is executed during the specified period (for example, as shown in FIG. 70, if a variable display is executed during the initial operation of each movable body, if a first movable body announcement is executed during the initial operation, the performance operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body announcement is not executed).
When one of the movable body performances executed multiple times in one variable display is executed and the movement of the movable body by the performance movement control corresponding to that one movable body performance does not end normally, when the next movable body performance is executed, the performance movement control corresponding to the next movable body performance is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 71, even if the performance operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body preview does not end normally, when the execution period of the second movable body preview begins, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the second movable body preview is executed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can attempt a retry using the performance movable control corresponding to the next movable body performance even if the performance movable control corresponding to one movable body performance does not end normally.

The gaming machine of form 1-13 is
The performance control means is capable of executing, as the movable body performance, a first movable body performance (e.g., a first movable body announcement) and a second movable body performance (e.g., a second movable body announcement) which has a higher probability of being controlled to the advantageous state when executed than the first movable body performance,
The movable body control means
When the first movable body performance is executed, it is possible to perform first performance movement control that moves the movable body by a first predetermined action (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 moves the on-board movable body 32A between the origin position and the intermediate position multiple times as a first movable body notice),
When the second movable body performance is executed, it is possible to perform second performance movement control that moves the movable body by a second predetermined action (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 moves the on-board movable body 32A between the origin position and the intermediate position multiple times as a second movable body notice),
When the power is turned on, if the first movable body performance and the second movable body performance are executed in a variable display that is started during a predetermined period in which the confirmation movable control is being performed, when the first movable body performance is executed during the predetermined period, the first performance movable control is restricted, and after the predetermined period ends, the first performance movable control that is restricted during the predetermined period is executed (for example, if the execution period of the first movable body announcement occurs during the initial operation of each movable body, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body announcement is not executed during the execution period of the first movable body announcement, and the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body announcement is executed again after the initial operation of each movable body).
When the first movable body is moving due to the limited first performance movement control, when the second movable body performance is executed, the first performance movement control is interrupted and the second performance movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 72, when the execution period of the second movable body announcement occurs during the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body announcement in the initial operation of each movable body, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body announcement is interrupted and the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the second movable body announcement is started).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the effect of the presentation is not reduced by the movement of the movable body in the first movable body presentation hindering the movement of the movable body in the second movable body presentation.

The gaming machine of form 1-14 is
The movable body is movable between an initial position (e.g., an origin position) and an advanced position (e.g., a performance position),
a first detection means (e.g., origin position sensor 132SG123, 132SG133, 132SG103, 635C) capable of detecting that the movable body is placed at an initial position;
Further provided is a second detection means (e.g., performance position sensor 132SG124, 132SG134, 132SG104, 635D) capable of detecting that the movable body is positioned at the advanced position,
The confirmation movement control is a control for moving the movable body toward the advanced position over a first period based on the detection by the first detection means that the movable body is placed at the initial position, and for moving the movable body toward the initial position when the second detection means does not detect that the movable body has been placed at the advanced position during the first period (for example, as shown in FIG. 73, the performance control CPU 120 is a part that moves the movable body toward the origin position when the performance position sensor does not detect the movable body during the first period).
The performance movement control is a control that moves the movable body toward the advance position over a second period, and stops the movable body when the second detection means does not detect that the movable body has been placed at the advance position during the second period (for example, as shown in FIG. 74, the performance control CPU 120 is a part that stops the operation of the movable body when the performance position sensor does not detect the movable body during the second period).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a movable body presentation is executed during play, even if the movement of the movable body corresponding to the movable body presentation is not performed normally, the movement of the movable body based on the confirmation movement control is not performed, so it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the reduction in the presentation effect of a movable body presentation that was not performed normally.

The gaming machine of form 1-15 is
The movable body control means
If the movable body is unable to operate normally for a specific period of time, it is determined that an operation error has occurred, and the confirmation movement control can be performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 75, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 determines that an operation error has occurred when the movable body does not reach the performance position as an initial operation, and repeatedly performs the initial operation).
When a predetermined number of operation errors are determined, it is possible to perform error operation control to move the movable body for a longer operation period than the operation period of the movable body that is moved by the confirmation operation control (for example, as shown in FIG. 75, the performance control CPU 120 operates the movable body as a special initial operation by the fourth operation error determination (dead end determination)).
When the error movement control is performed, when the movable body performance is executed, the performance movement control is restricted, while the effect display is displayed and the movable body performance sound is output (for example, as shown in FIG. 75, in the movable body performance after a dead end is determined, the movement of the movable body is not executed, but the display of the effect display 132SG407 on the image display device 5, the light emission in a manner corresponding to the movable body announcement by the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g, and the sound output corresponding to the movable body announcement from the speakers 8L, 8R are executed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that prevents malfunctions caused by forcing the movable body to operate in a situation where the movable body cannot operate normally, while not reducing the presentation effect of the movable body presentation.

[Form 2]
The gaming machine of form 2-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the on-frame movable body 132SG01, the chance button 631B),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
When the power is turned on, the movable body control means can perform confirmation movement control to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the operation confirmation control process shown in Figures 31 and 32, thereby performing the initial operation of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the above-frame movable body 132SG101).
The performance control means can perform demo display control to display a demonstration display on the display means when the power is turned on (for example, as shown in FIG. 76 , a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 displays a customer waiting demo performance on the image display device 5).
When a power outage occurs and the power is turned on, the movable body control means controls the movable bodies so that the confirmation movable control ends before the demo display control is performed (for example, as shown in Figures 76 to 78, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started after a power outage, the initial operation control of each movable body is executed and then the customer waiting demo performance is displayed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the demonstration display is not obstructed by the movable body that operates under the confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 2-2 is
The movable body control means is capable of performing the confirmation movable control for a predetermined period of time (for example, the performance control CPU 120 requires 30 seconds for the initial operation of each movable body),
The performance control means can perform the demo display control after a period at least as long as the predetermined period has elapsed since the confirmation movement control was completed (for example, a part in which a customer waiting demo performance is executed 30 seconds after the initial movement of each movable body is completed),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the demonstration display is not displayed immediately after the confirmation movable control, thereby preventing the visibility of the demonstration display from being hindered.

The gaming machine of type 2-3 is
The effect control means can perform the demo display control at different timings when the power is turned on with initialization and when the power is turned on without initialization (for example, the period from the completion of the initial operation of each movable body until the customer waiting demo effect is executed differs depending on whether the pachinko game machine 1 is started up by a cold start or a hot start).
The movable body control means
The confirmation movement control can be performed in common when power is turned on with initialization and when power is supplied without initialization (for example, the period from the completion of the initial operation of each movable body until the customer waiting demo performance is executed differs between when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start and when it is started by a hot start).
When power is turned on with initialization, the movable body is controlled so that the confirmation movable control is completed before the demonstration display control is performed by the performance control means;
When power is turned on without initialization, the movable body is controlled so that the confirmation movable control is completed before the demonstration display control is performed by the performance control means (for example, in the case where the period from the completion of the initial operation of each movable body until the customer waiting demo performance is performed differs between when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a cold start and when it is started by a hot start, the customer waiting demo performance is performed after the completion of the initial operation of each movable body).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the demonstration display is not obstructed by the movable body that operates by the confirmation movable control, whether the power is turned on with initialization or without initialization.

The gaming machine of type 2-4 is
Light-emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g);
A light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
Further provided with an operation means (e.g., a selection button 132SG35),
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, the above-board movable body 32A is provided with the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body 32B is provided with the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body 132SG101 is provided with the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B is provided with the chance button LED 9g).
The brightness of the light-emitting means can be changed by operating the operation means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the volume/light intensity adjustment process shown in FIG. 28, and the light intensity (brightness) of the various lamps 9a to 9g can be adjusted by operating the selection button 132SG35).
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control to make the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moving due to the confirmation movement control, emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 61, the performance control CPU 120 makes the under-board movable body 9e emit light in an initial highlighting mode (for example, red flashing as shown in FIG. 56(B)) when the under-board movable body 32B is initially operating),
When the operation means is operated during the specific light emission control, at least the light emitting means emitting light by the specific light emission control is restricted so as not to have a brightness based on the operation (for example, as shown in FIG. 56(B) , when the initial operation of each movable body is performed, the light intensity (brightness) of the various lamps 9a to 9g cannot be adjusted by operating the selection button 132SG35).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the brightness of the light-emitting means provided on the movable body that moves due to the confirmation movement control is not changed, so it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not cause any problems in confirming the operation of the movable body.

The gaming machine of type 2-5 is
Light-emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g);
A light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
Further provided with an operation means (e.g., a selection button 132SG35),
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, the above-board movable body 32A is provided with the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body 32B is provided with the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body 132SG101 is provided with the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B is provided with the chance button LED 9g).
The brightness of the light-emitting means can be changed by operating the operation means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the volume/light intensity adjustment process shown in FIG. 28, and the light intensity (brightness) of the various lamps 9a to 9g can be adjusted by operating the selection button 132SG35).
The performance control means can display a changeable display indicating that the brightness of the light-emitting means can be changed by operating the operation means (for example, as shown in FIG. 55 , a portion of the image display device 5 where a menu/volume/light intensity adjustment display suggestion display 132SG480 is displayed),
The display of the changeable display is limited during the predetermined period, and the changeable display is displayed after the predetermined period has ended (for example, as shown in FIG. 55 , the menu/volume and light intensity adjustment display suggestion display 132SG480 is not displayed on the image display device 5 during the initial operation of each movable body, and the menu/volume and light intensity adjustment display suggestion display 132SG480 is displayed on the image display device 5 during the initial operation of each movable body).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying the changeable display during the confirmation movable control, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which attention to the confirmation movable control is not lost.

The gaming machine of type 2-6 is
The movable body includes a first movable body (e.g., an on-board movable body 32A) and a second movable body (e.g., a below-board movable body 32B),
Light-emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g);
Further provided with a light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The light emitting means is provided on the first movable body and the second movable body (for example, a portion where an on-board movable body LED 9d is provided on the on-board movable body 32A and an on-board movable body LED 9e is provided on the below-board movable body 32B),
The movable body control means, as the confirmation movable control, moves the first movable body and then moves the second movable body (for example, as shown in Figures 61 and 62, the performance control CPU 120 operates the above-board movable body 32A as an initial operation and then operates the below-board movable body 32B).
The light emission control means is capable of performing specific light emission control to cause the light emission means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 61, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 causes the under-board movable body 9e to emit light in an initial highlighting mode (for example, red flashing as shown in FIG. 56(B)) when the under-board movable body 32B is initially operated),
When the first movable body is moved by the confirmation movement control, the specific light emission control by the light emission control means is not performed on the light emitting means of the second movable body (for example, as shown in Figures 61 and 62, when the initial operation of the above-board movable body 32A is performed, the below-board movable body LED 9e is not illuminated in an initial highlighting mode).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can draw attention to a movable body that is moving through confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of type 2-7 is
The performance control means
A movable body effect using the movable body can be executed during the demonstration display (for example, as shown in FIG. 55, a portion capable of executing an effect in which the on-board movable body 32A is moved between the origin position and the effect position during the execution of the customer waiting demo effect),
The display means can display an effect display corresponding to the movable body performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 55, the part where the effect display 132SG407 is displayed on the image display device 5),
The movable body control means
When the movable body performance is executed, it is possible to perform a demo-in-motion control that moves the movable body in a motion manner common to the motion manner of the movable body that is moved by the confirmation motion control (for example, a part that moves the on-board movable body 32A from the origin position toward the performance position, and then moves the on-board movable body 32A from the performance position to the origin position).
If the movable body is unable to operate normally for a specific period of time, it is determined that an operation error has occurred, and the confirmation movement control can be performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 79, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 determines that an operation error has occurred when the movable body does not reach the performance position as an initial operation, and repeatedly executes the initial operation).
When a predetermined number of operation errors are determined, it is possible to perform error operation control to move the movable body for a longer operation period than the operation period of the movable body that is moved by the confirmation operation control (for example, as shown in FIG. 79, the performance control CPU 120 operates the movable body as a special initial operation by the fourth operation error determination (dead end determination)),
When the error movement control is performed, when the demonstration display is displayed, the movement control during the demonstration is restricted, while the effect display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 79, in the customer waiting demo performance after a dead end is determined, the movement of the movable body is not executed, but the display of the effect display 132SG407 on the image display device 5, and the light emission in a manner corresponding to the movable body announcement by the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are executed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that prevents malfunctions caused by forcing the movable body to operate in a situation where the movable body cannot operate normally, while not reducing the presentation effect of the demonstration display.

[Form 3]
The gaming machine of form 3-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, the on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means is capable of performing a round game in which, during the advantageous state, the variable means (e.g., the special variable winning ball device 7) is set to an easy-entry state (e.g., an open state) in which the game medium can enter, and then the variable means is set to an inaccessible state in which the game medium cannot enter,
the movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control (e.g., operation confirmation control) to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally when power is turned on,
The effect control means is capable of executing a fanfare effect during the advantageous state before control is exercised to play the round game,
The fanfare performance is as follows:
An introductory part (for example, an introductory part. See FIG. 52 (F2) to (F6)) that notifies the user of the advantageous state;
A launch direction notification part (for example, a right-hit notification part. See Figure 52 (F7) to (F8)) that is executed after the introduction part and notifies the player of the launch direction of the game medium;
It consists of
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the execution of the fanfare effect and the power is turned on, the confirmation movable control ends before the launch direction notification part starts (for example, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the execution of the fanfare effect and the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start, the movable body control means controls the movable body so that the initial operation ends before the fanfare effect (right hit notification part) involving the operation of the on-board movable body 32A starts. See FIG. 80).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the operation direction notification part in the fanfare performance is not obstructed by a movable body that operates by confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 3-2 is
There are several types of advantageous states (for example, jackpots A to E),
In the introduction part, it is possible to notify which of the plurality of types of advantageous states is the advantageous state, and as the notification, it is possible to display an advantageous state name display (for example, a jackpot type display 132SG421) corresponding to the advantageous state being controlled, and to display an introduction display before the advantageous state name display (for example, an introduction display before the jackpot type display 132SG422) before the advantageous state name display is displayed,
The confirmation movement control is a control for moving the movable body so as to complete an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally before the advantageous state name display is displayed (for example, in the operation confirmation control, the initial operation is completed before the jackpot type display 132SG421 is displayed in FIG. 52 (F6)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that makes it possible to know which advantageous state the game will be controlled to, even if confirmation movable control is performed during the fanfare performance.

The gaming machine of form 3-3 is
Light emitting means;
Further provided with a light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an above-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, a frame-top movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control to cause the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode),
When the fanfare performance is executed, it is possible to perform fanfare light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body that is not moving is caused to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the fanfare performance by the confirmation movement control,
The light emitting mode used in the specific light emitting pattern is not used in the light emitting pattern corresponding to the fanfare performance (for example, the initial highlight mode (white lighting) is not used in the light emitting mode corresponding to the fanfare performance (introduction part)),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can indicate that a movable body is under confirmation movement control even during a fanfare performance by using specific light emission control and fanfare light emission control.

The gaming machine of type 3-4 is
Light emitting means;
Further provided with a light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an above-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, a frame-top movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
The light emission control means
When the confirmation movement control is executed, it is possible to perform specific light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body moved by the confirmation movement control emits light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode),
When the fanfare performance is executed, fanfare light emission control can be performed to cause the light emitting means of the movable body to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the fanfare performance,
the movable body includes a first movable body and a second movable body,
When a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare performance and the power is then turned on, the light emission control means causes the light emitting means of the first movable body to emit light according to the specific light emission control when the first movable body is moving according to the confirmation movement control, while causing the light emitting means of the second movable body to emit light according to the fanfare light emission control (for example, when the first movable body is moving, the movable body LED of the first movable body emits light in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), while the movable body LED of the second movable body emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the fanfare performance (introduction part)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can indicate that a movable body is under confirmation movement control even during a fanfare performance.

The gaming machine of type 3-5 is
Light emitting means;
Further provided with a light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an above-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, a frame-top movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
The light emission control means
When the fanfare effect is executed, light emission control can be performed to cause the light emitting means to emit light at a first brightness in a light emission pattern corresponding to the fanfare effect,
If a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare effect and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform light emission control to make the light emitting means emit light at a second luminance in a light emission pattern corresponding to the fanfare effect during the predetermined period in which the confirmation movement control is being performed (for example, while the frame LEDs 9a and 9b emit light at a first luminance in a light emission mode corresponding to the fanfare effect, during the movement confirmation control, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, and the above-frame movable body LED 9f emit light at a second luminance (low luminance) lower than the first luminance (high luminance). See FIG. 56(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the load by suppressing the power consumption when the power is turned on.

The gaming machine of form 3-6 is
the movable body includes a first movable body and a second movable body,
Light emitting means;
Further provided with a light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The first movable body and the second movable body are provided with the light emitting means (for example, an above-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an above-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
the movable body control means, as the confirmation movable control, moves the first movable body and then moves the second movable body;
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control to cause the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode),
When the first movable body is moved by the confirmation movement control, the specific light emission control is not performed on the light emitting means of the second movable body, and the specific light emission control is performed on the light emitting means of the first movable body (for example, when the first movable body is operating, the movable body LED of the second movable body does not emit light in the initial highlighting mode, and the movable body LED of the first movable body emits light in the initial highlighting mode).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can draw attention to a moving object that is moving through confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of type 3-7 is
Light emitting means;
Further provided with a light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The first movable body and the second movable body are provided with the light emitting means (for example, an above-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an above-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
The performance control means is capable of executing a movable body performance using the movable body in the operation direction notification part,
The movable body control means is capable of performing special effect movement control to move the movable body by a special action when the movable body performance is executed,
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform the specific light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, emits light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode) until the movement of the movable body is completed,
It is possible to perform the special light emission control such that the light emitting means of the movable body, which is movable by the special effect movement control, emits light in a first special light emission pattern during a first period, and emits light in a second special light emission pattern having a light emission mode different from the first special light emission pattern during a second period after the end of the first period (for example, the movable body LED of the movable body during the initial operation emits light in a common initial highlight mode (white lighting) when the movable body advances from the origin position to the effect position and when it retreats from the effect position to the origin position, while the movable body LED of the movable body operated by the effect operation control can emit light in different light emission modes when the movable body advances from the origin position to the effect position and when it retreats from the effect position to the origin position. See FIG. 56(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily determine whether confirmation movement control or special movement control is being performed by using specific light-emitting control and special light-emitting control.

The gaming machine of form 3-8 is
Light emitting means;
A light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
sound output means (e.g., speakers 8L, 8R);
The first movable body and the second movable body are provided with the light emitting means (for example, an above-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an above-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
The performance control means is capable of executing a movable body performance using the movable body in the launch direction notification part,
When the movable body performance is executed, the movable body control means is capable of performing special performance movement control to move the movable body in a common operation mode with the operation mode of the movable body that is moved by the confirmation movement control,
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform the specific light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, emits light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode) until the movement of the movable body is completed,
It is possible to perform special light emission control such that the light emitting means of the movable body, which is movable by the special effect movable control, emits light in a special light emission pattern over the execution period of the movable body effect,
The sound output means limits sound output when the movable body is moved by the confirmation movable control, and outputs sound corresponding to the launch direction notification part when the movable body is moved by the special effect movable control (for example, in the movable body effect, light is emitted in a mode corresponding to the right hit notification part, which is different from the initial highlight mode (white lighting), and sound output is limited when the movable body moves by the initial operation, and in the movable body effect executed in the right hit notification part, sound corresponding to the right hit notification part is output).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily distinguish whether confirmation movement control or special performance movement control is being performed by using specific light-emitting control and special light-emitting control.

The gaming machine of form 3-9 is
Further provided with a display means (for example, an image display device 5),
The performance control means
In the launch direction notification part, a movable body performance (see FIG. 52 (F7)) using the movable body can be executed,
The display means can display an effect display corresponding to the movable body performance,
The movable body control means
When the movable body performance is executed, it is possible to perform special performance movement control to move the movable body by a special action,
If the confirmation movement control cannot be completed normally for a specific period of time, it is determined that an operation error has occurred, and the confirmation movement control can be performed again.
When the confirmation movement control is being performed over the specific period, when the movable body performance is executed, the special performance movement control is restricted, while the effect display is displayed (for example, when a movable body performance is executed in the right-hit notification part in a fanfare performance, the movable body is moved by a special action and an effect display corresponding to the movable body performance can be displayed, and if the action confirmation control cannot be completed normally over the specific period, it can be determined that an action error has occurred and the action confirmation control can be performed again, and when the action confirmation control is being performed over the specific period, when the movable body performance is executed, the special action is restricted, while the effect display is displayed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can show the player that a movable body effect has been executed by an effect display, while preventing the confirmation movable control from being interfered with by the special effect movable control.

[Form 4]
The gaming machine of form 4-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the on-frame movable body 132SG01, the chance button 631B),
Light emitting means;
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
A light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) is provided.
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an above-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, a frame-top movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
The movable body control means
When power is turned on, it is possible to perform a confirmation operation control (for example, an operation confirmation control) to move the movable body by an operation to confirm that the movable body operates normally,
When informing that the game is controlled to the advantageous state, it is possible to perform a performance movement control (for example, a moving body performance in a winning/losing button performance) that moves the moving body by an operation for informing that the game is controlled to the advantageous state,
The light emission control means
When the movable body control means performs the confirmation movable control, the movable body control means controls the light emitting means so that the luminance of the light emitting means becomes a first luminance;
When the movable body control means performs the performance movement control, the light emitting means is controlled so that the luminance of the light emitting means becomes a second luminance;
The first luminance is lower than the second luminance (for example, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g, which are movable bodies that perform initial operation, emit light in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), but emit light at a lower luminance than when emitting light in the performance operation control. See FIG. 56(B)).
The game control means, during the advantageous state, can set the variable means (e.g., the special variable winning ball device 7) to an easy-entry state (e.g., an open state) in which the game medium can enter, and then can perform a round game by setting the variable means to an inaccessible state (e.g., a closed state) in which the game medium cannot enter,
The effect control means is capable of executing a fanfare effect during the advantageous state before control is exercised to play the round game,
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, if a power outage occurs immediately after the fanfare effect is started by the effect control means and the power is then turned on, the confirmation movement control ends before the end of the execution period of the fanfare effect (for example, if a power outage occurs immediately after the fanfare effect is started and the pachinko game machine 1 is started in a hot start, the operation confirmation control ends before the round effect corresponding to the round game starts. See FIG. 81).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the load on the gaming machine is reduced by reducing the power consumption when the power is turned on, while the brightness of the light-emitting means provided on the movable body is set to the first brightness, preventing the movement of the movable body from being difficult to see due to glare.Furthermore, if the power is cut off at the same time as the fanfare effect is executed and the power is turned on, the confirmation movement control is terminated within the execution period of the fanfare effect, thereby providing a gaming machine that allows the player to enjoy an advantageous state without worrying about the movable body operating due to the confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form 4-2 is
The performance control means is capable of displaying a restoration display (for example, a restoration display 132SG510) on the display means in the following cases: when a power outage occurs during the variable display and then the power is turned on; and when a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare performance and then the power is turned on;
The light emission control means is capable of performing light emission control during recovery, in which the light emission means emits light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during recovery in the following cases: when a power outage occurs during the variable display and then the power is turned on; and when a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare performance and then the power is turned on;
The movable body control means is capable of performing the confirmation movement control in two cases: when a power outage occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on, and when a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare performance and then the power is turned on (for example, a part capable of performing operation confirmation control in two cases: when a power outage occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on, and when a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare performance and then the power is turned on).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the processing when the power is turned on is not complicated.

The gaming machine of form 4-3 is
The performance control means is capable of displaying a restoration display (e.g., restoration display 132SG510) on the display means when a power outage occurs during the fanfare performance and the power is then turned on,
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control to cause the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode),
If a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare effect and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform a light emission control during recovery that causes the light emitting means of the movable body that is not moving due to the confirmation movement control to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during recovery throughout the execution period of the fanfare effect,
The light emitting mode used in the specific light emitting pattern is not used in the light emitting pattern corresponding to the restoration display (for example, the initial highlight mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode (off) corresponding to the restoration display),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can draw attention to the moving body that moves through the performance movement control even during recovery.

The gaming machine of form 4-4 is
The performance control means is capable of displaying a restoration display (e.g., restoration display 132SG510) on the display means when a power outage occurs during the fanfare performance and the power is then turned on,
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform fanfare light emission control to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the fanfare effect during the execution period of the fanfare effect,
If a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare effect and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform light emission control during recovery, which causes the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during recovery, throughout the execution period of the fanfare effect,
The light emission control during recovery is performed at a lower brightness than the fanfare light emission control (for example, during power outage recovery, the part may be made to emit light at a lower brightness than the light emission brightness of the movable body LED in the performance movable control (movable body performance in the hit/miss button performance). See FIG. 56 (B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the load by suppressing the power consumption when the power is turned on.

The gaming machine of form 4-5 is
The performance control means is capable of displaying a restoration display (e.g., restoration display 132SG510) when a power outage occurs during the fanfare performance and the power is then turned on,
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform fanfare light emission control to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the fanfare effect during the execution period of the fanfare effect,
If a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare effect and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform light emission control during recovery, which causes the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during recovery, throughout the execution period of the fanfare effect,
The light emitting mode used in the light emitting pattern corresponding to the restoration display is not used in the light emitting pattern corresponding to the fanfare effect (for example, the mode corresponding to the restoration display (light off) is not used in the light emitting mode corresponding to the mode corresponding to the fanfare effect (music during a jackpot)),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can notify the user that power is being restored when the power is turned on, even if a fanfare performance was in progress before the power was cut off.

The gaming machine of form 4-6 is
The operation mode of the movable body by the confirmation movable control and the operation mode of the movable body by the performance movable control are common,
The light emission control means
The specific light emission control can be performed to cause the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern until the movement of the movable body is completed,
It is possible to perform the special light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body, which is movable by the effect movement control, emits light in a first special light emission pattern in a first period, and emits light in a second special light emission pattern having a light emission mode different from the first light emission pattern in a second period after the end of the first period (for example, the operation mode of each movable body by the operation confirmation control and the operation mode of each movable body by the effect movement control (for example, the operation mode of moving from the origin position to the effect position) are common, and the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button 631B of the movable body emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light) until the initial operation is completed in the operation confirmation control, and in the effect movement control (for example, win/lose button effect), emits light in a rainbow flash mode in the first period (for example, an advance movement period), and emits light in a smooth rainbow mode different from the rainbow flash mode in the second period (for example, a retreat movement period). See FIG. 56(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily determine whether confirmation movement control or performance movement control is being performed by using specific light-emitting control and special light-emitting control.

[Form 5]
The gaming machine of form 5-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, the on-frame movable body 132SG101),
Light emitting means;
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) is provided.
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an above-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, a frame-top movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
The movable body control means
When power is turned on, it is possible to perform a confirmation operation control (for example, an operation confirmation control) to move the movable body by an operation to confirm that the movable body operates normally,
When informing that the game is controlled to the advantageous state, it is possible to perform a performance movement control (for example, a moving body performance in a winning/losing button performance) that moves the moving body by an operation for informing that the game is controlled to the advantageous state,
The light emission control means
When the movable body control means performs the confirmation movable control, the movable body control means controls the light emitting means so that the luminance of the light emitting means becomes a first luminance;
When the movable body control means performs the performance movement control, the light emitting means is controlled so that the luminance of the light emitting means becomes a second luminance;
The first luminance is lower than the second luminance (for example, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g, which are movable bodies that perform initial operation, emit light in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), but emit light at a lower luminance than when emitting light in the performance operation control. See FIG. 56(B)).
The game control means, during the advantageous state, can set the variable means (e.g., the special variable winning ball device 7) to an easy-entry state (e.g., an open state) in which the game medium can enter, and then can perform a round game by setting the variable means to an inaccessible state (e.g., a closed state) in which the game medium cannot enter,
The effect control means is capable of executing a fanfare effect during the advantageous state before control is exercised to play the round game,
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the fanfare effect and the power is then turned on, the confirmation movement control is completed before the easy-entry state ends (for example, a part that makes it possible to complete the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the fanfare effect and the power is turned on before the opening control of the large prize opening in the first round of play ends. See FIG. 82).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the load on the gaming machine is reduced by suppressing the power consumption when the power is turned on, while the brightness of the light-emitting means provided on the movable body is set to the first brightness, preventing the movement of the movable body from being difficult to see due to the glare; furthermore, a gaming machine can be provided in which the power is cut off just before the fanfare performance ends, and the confirmation movement control when the power is turned on ends before the easy-to-enter state of the variable means ends (allowing the attacker to win even after the initial operation).

The gaming machine of form 5-2 is
The effect control means is capable of displaying, in a round game in which the variable means is controlled to the easy-entry state for a specified period after the fanfare effect has ended, a launch direction indication display (e.g., right hit promotion display 132SG430) indicating the launch direction of the game medium in a specific display area (e.g., right game area, second path), and a round game-related display (e.g., round number display 132SG451, winning ball number display 132SG452, ball number display 132SG453, number of consecutive wins/total ball number display 132SG454, etc.) relating to the round game in a special display area,
The confirmation movement control is a control for moving the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the special display area with respect to the specific display area (see FIGS. 83 and 84).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the launch direction indication display, which has a large impact on the game, is not obstructed by a movable body that moves through confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form 5-3 is
The effect control means can display, in a round of play after the fanfare effect has ended, a launch direction indication display (e.g., right-hit prompt display 132SG430) indicating the launch direction of the game medium in a specific display area, and an awarded game value display (e.g., winning ball number display 132SG452, number of balls issued display 132SG453, etc.) regarding the awarded game value in a special display area,
The confirmation movement control is a control for moving the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the special display area with respect to the specific display area (see FIGS. 83 and 84 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the launch direction indication display, which has a large impact on the game, is not obstructed by a movable body that moves through confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form 5-4 is
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control to cause the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode),
If a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the fanfare performance and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform a round-time light-emitting control in which the light-emitting means of the movable body that is not moving is illuminated with a lamp pattern corresponding to the round of play by the confirmation movement control.
The light emitting mode used in the specific light emitting pattern is not used in the light emitting pattern corresponding to the round game (for example, the initial highlight mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode corresponding to the music (round performance) during the jackpot. See FIG. 56 (B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can draw attention to a movable body that moves by confirmation movement control even during a round of play through specific light emission control.

The gaming machine of form 5-5 is
the movable body includes a first movable body and a second movable body,
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control to cause the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode),
If a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the fanfare performance and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform light emission control during a round, causing the light emitting means of the movable body to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the round of play.
When the first movable body is moved by the confirmation movement control, the light emitting means of the first movable body is caused to emit light by the specific light emitting control, while the light emitting means of the second movable body is caused to emit light by the in-round light emitting control (for example, when the first movable body is moved by the operation confirmation control, the movable body LED of the first movable body emits light in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), while the movable body LED of the second movable body emits light in a mode corresponding to the music (round performance) during a jackpot),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can indicate that the movable body is moving through confirmation movement control even during a round of play.

The gaming machine of form 5-6 is
The light emission control means
In a round game after the fanfare effect is executed, it is possible to perform a round light emission control in which the light emitting means emits light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the round game,
If a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the fanfare performance and the power is then turned on, the light emitting means can be made to emit light by the light emission control during the round.
The light emission control during a round, which is performed when a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of the fanfare effect and the power is turned on thereafter, has lower brightness than the light emission control during a round, which is performed when a power interruption does not occur immediately before the end of the fanfare effect (for example, the light emission brightness when the movable body LED of a movable body that has not performed the initial operation emits light in a manner corresponding to the music during a jackpot (round performance) in a round game in which the pachinko game machine 1 has not started up with a hot start after a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of the fanfare effect, may be lower brightness than the light emission brightness when the movable body LED of a movable body that has not performed the initial operation emits light in a manner corresponding to the music during a jackpot (round performance)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the load by suppressing the power consumption when the power is turned on.

The gaming machines of types 5-7 are:
The operation mode of the movable body by the confirmation movable control and the operation mode of the movable body by the performance movable control are common,
The light emission control means
The specific light emission control can be performed to cause the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern until the movement of the movable body is completed,
It is possible to perform the special light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body, which is movable by the effect movement control, emits light in a first special light emission pattern in a first period, and emits light in a second special light emission pattern having a light emission mode different from the first light emission pattern in a second period after the end of the first period (for example, the operation mode of each movable body by the operation confirmation control and the operation mode of each movable body by the effect movement control (for example, the operation mode of moving from the origin position to the effect position) are common, and the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button 631B of the movable body emit light in an initial highlight mode (white lighting) until the initial operation is completed in the operation confirmation control, and in the effect movement control (for example, win/lose button effect), emits light in a rainbow flash mode in the first period (for example, advance movement period), and emits light in a smooth rainbow mode different from the rainbow flash mode in the second period (for example, retreat movement period). See FIG. 56(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily determine whether confirmation movement control or performance movement control is being performed by using specific light-emitting control and special light-emitting control.

[Form 6]
The gaming machine of form 6-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, the on-frame movable body 132SG101),
Light emitting means;
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) is provided.
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an above-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an above-frame movable body LED 9f, a chance button LED 9g),
The movable body control means
When power is turned on, it is possible to perform a confirmation operation control (for example, an operation confirmation control) to move the movable body by an operation to confirm that the movable body operates normally,
When informing that the game is controlled to the advantageous state, it is possible to perform a performance movement control (for example, a movable body performance in a hit/miss button performance) that moves the movable body by an operation for informing that the game is controlled to the advantageous state,
The light emission control means
When the movable body control means performs the confirmation movable control, the movable body control means controls the light emitting means so that the luminance of the light emitting means becomes a first luminance;
When the movable body control means performs the performance movement control, the light emitting means is controlled so that the luminance of the light emitting means becomes a second luminance;
The first luminance is lower than the second luminance (for example, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g, which are movable bodies that perform initial operation, emit light in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), but emit light at a lower luminance than when emitting light in the performance operation control. See FIG. 56(B)).
The game control means is capable of setting the variable means (e.g., the special variable winning ball device 7) to an easy-entry state (e.g., an open state) in which the game medium can enter during the advantageous state,
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, when a power cut occurs at the same time as the easy-entry state is entered and the power is then turned on, the confirmation movable control ends before the easy-entry state ends (for example, a part that makes it possible to end the operation confirmation control when a power cut occurs immediately after the opening control of the large prize opening in the first round of play and the power is turned on before the opening control of the large prize opening in the first round of play ends; see FIG. 85).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the load on the gaming machine is reduced by suppressing the power consumption when the power is turned on, while the brightness of the light-emitting means provided on the movable body is set to the first brightness, preventing the movement of the movable body from being difficult to see due to glare; furthermore, a gaming machine can be provided in which the power is cut off as soon as the variable means enters an easy-to-enter state, and the confirmation movement control when the power is turned on is terminated before the easy-to-enter state of the variable means ends (allowing the attacker to win even after the initial operation).

The gaming machine of form 6-2 is
Further provided with a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The performance control means is capable of displaying a restoration display (for example, restoration display 132SG510) on the display means in the following cases: when a power outage occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on; and when a power outage occurs at the same time that the variable means is controlled to the easy-entry state and then the power is turned on;
The light emission control means is capable of performing light emission control during recovery, in which the light emission means emits light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during recovery, in the case where a power outage occurs during the variable display and then the power is turned on, and in the case where a power outage occurs at the same time as the variable means is controlled to the easy-entry state and then the power is turned on,
The movable body control means is capable of performing the confirmation movement control in two cases: when a power outage occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on, and when a power outage occurs at the same time that the variable means is controlled to the easy-entry state and then the power is turned on (for example, a part that is capable of performing operation confirmation control in two cases: when a power outage occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on, and when a power outage occurs at the same time that the big prize opening is controlled to the open state and then the power is turned on).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the processing when the power is turned on is not complicated.

The gaming machine of form 6-3 is
Further provided with a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The performance control means is capable of displaying a restoration display (for example, restoration display 132SG510) on the display means when a power outage occurs during the easy-entry state of the variable means and the power is then turned on,
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control to cause the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode),
When a power outage occurs at the same time as the variable means enters the easy-to-enter state and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform light emission control during recovery, which causes the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the recovery display, over the period from when the variable means enters the easy-to-enter state until when the variable means is controlled to enter an inaccessible state in which the game medium cannot enter,
The light emission mode used in the specific light emission pattern is not used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the restoration display (for example, the initial highlight mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode corresponding to the restoration display (off) see FIG. 56(B) ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can draw attention to the movable body that moves through confirmation movement control even during recovery.

The gaming machine of form 6-4 is
Further provided with a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The performance control means is capable of displaying a restoration display (for example, restoration display 132SG510) on the display means when a power outage occurs during the easy-entry state of the variable means and the power is then turned on,
The light emission control means
In one round of play in which the variable means is controlled to the easy-entry state for a specified period, it is possible to perform a round of light emission control in which the light emitting means emits light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the round of play,
When a power outage occurs at the same time as the start of the one round of play and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform light emission control during recovery, which causes the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the recovery display, for a period until the one round of play ends.
The light emission control during the recovery is performed at a lower brightness than the light emission control during the round (for example, during the power outage recovery, the part may be made to emit light at a lower brightness than the light emission brightness of the movable body LED in the performance movable control (movable body performance in the hit/miss button performance)),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce power consumption when the power is turned on, thereby reducing the load on the gaming machine, while also notifying the user that recovery is in progress.

The gaming machine of form 6-5 is
Further provided with a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The performance control means is capable of displaying a restoration display (for example, restoration display 132SG510) on the display means when a power outage occurs during control of the variable means to set the variable means to the easy-entry state and the power is then turned on,
The light emission control means
In one round of play in which the variable means is in the easy-entry state for a specified period of time, it is possible to perform a round of light emission control in which the light emitting means emits light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the round of play,
When a power outage occurs at the same time as the start of the one round of play and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform light emission control during recovery, which causes the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the recovery display, for a period until the one round of play ends.
The light emitting mode used in the light emitting pattern corresponding to the restoration display is not used in the light emitting pattern corresponding to the round game (for example, the mode (light off) corresponding to the restoration display is not used in the light emitting mode corresponding to the mode corresponding to the round performance (music during the jackpot). See FIG. 56 (B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can notify the player that power is being restored when the power is turned on, even if a round of play was in progress before the power outage.

[Form 7]
The gaming machine of form 7-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, the on-frame movable body 132SG101),
Light emitting means;
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) is provided.
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an above-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, a frame-top movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
The movable body control means
When power is turned on, it is possible to perform a confirmation operation control (for example, an operation confirmation control) to move the movable body by an operation to confirm that the movable body operates normally,
When informing that the game is controlled to the advantageous state, it is possible to perform a performance movement control (for example, a moving body performance in a winning/losing button performance) that moves the moving body by an operation for informing that the game is controlled to the advantageous state,
The light emission control means
When the movable body control means performs the confirmation movable control, the movable body control means controls the light emitting means so that the luminance of the light emitting means becomes a first luminance;
When the movable body control means performs the performance movement control, the light emitting means is controlled so that the luminance of the light emitting means becomes a second luminance;
The first luminance is lower than the second luminance (for example, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g, which are movable bodies that perform initial operation, emit light in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), but emit light at a lower luminance than when emitting light in the performance operation control. See FIG. 56(B)).
The game control means, during the advantageous state, can set the variable means (e.g., the special variable winning ball device 7) to an easy-entry state (e.g., an open state) in which the game medium can enter, and then can perform a round game by setting the variable means to an inaccessible state (e.g., a closed state) in which the game medium cannot enter,
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of the easy-entry state in one round of play and the power is then turned on, the confirmation movable control ends before the end of the easy-entry state in the next round of play (for example, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of the first round of play and the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a hot start, the opening control period of the large prize opening and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body ends within the period until the opening control of the large prize opening in the second round of play ends (see FIG. 52 (F10)). See FIG. 86).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the load on the gaming machine is reduced by suppressing the power consumption when the power is turned on, while the brightness of the light-emitting means provided on the movable body is set to the first brightness, thereby preventing the movement of the movable body from being difficult to see due to the glare; furthermore, when the power is cut off just before the end of one round of play and the power is turned on, the confirmation movement control is terminated before the end of the next round of play, thereby providing a gaming machine in which the player can continue playing the round of play even after the confirmation movement control has ended.

The gaming machine of form 7-2 is
Further provided with a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The effect control means is capable of displaying, in a round game in which the variable means is controlled to the easy-entry state for a specified period after the fanfare effect has ended, a launch direction indication display (e.g., right hit promotion display 132SG430) indicating the launch direction of the game medium in a specific display area (e.g., right game area, second path), and a round game-related display (e.g., round number display 132SG451, winning ball number display 132SG452, ball number display 132SG453, number of consecutive wins/total ball number display 132SG454, etc.) relating to the round game in a special display area,
The confirmation movement control is a control for moving the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the special display area with respect to the specific display area (see FIGS. 83 and 84).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the launch direction indication display, which has a large impact on the game, is not obstructed by a movable body that moves through confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form 7-3 is
Further provided with a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The presentation control means is capable of displaying, in the next round of play that is started when the first round of play is completed, a launch direction indication display (e.g., right-hit prompt display 132SG430) that indicates the launch direction of the game medium in the specific display area, and an awarded game value display (e.g., winning ball number display 132SG452, number of balls issued display 132SG453, etc.) regarding the awarded game value in the special display area,
The confirmation movement control is a control for moving the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the special display area with respect to the specific display area (see FIGS. 83 and 84 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the launch direction indication display, which has a large impact on the game, is not obstructed by a movable body that moves through confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form 7-4 is
When a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the easy-entry state of the variable means in one round of play and the power is then turned on, the movable body control means controls the variable means in one round of play to be in the impossible-entry state, and then moves the movable body by the confirmation movement control (see FIG. 86).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is capable of performing confirmation movable control in an appropriate manner.

The gaming machine of form 7-5 is
The operation mode of the movable body by the confirmation movable control and the operation mode of the movable body by the performance movable control are common,
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform the specific light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, emits light in a specific light emission pattern until the movement of the movable body is completed,
It is possible to perform the special light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body, which is movable by the effect movement control, emits light in a first special light emission pattern in a first period, and emits light in a second special light emission pattern having a light emission mode different from the first light emission pattern in a second period after the end of the first period (for example, the operation mode of each movable body by the operation confirmation control and the operation mode of each movable body by the effect movement control (for example, the operation mode of moving from the origin position to the effect position) are common, and the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button 631B of the movable body emit light in an initial highlight mode (white lighting) until the initial operation is completed in the operation confirmation control, and in the effect movement control (for example, win/lose button effect), emits light in a rainbow flash mode in the first period (for example, advance movement period), and emits light in a smooth rainbow mode different from the rainbow flash mode in the second period (for example, retreat movement period). See FIG. 56(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily determine whether confirmation movement control or performance movement control is being performed by using specific light-emitting control and special light-emitting control.

[Form 8]
The gaming machine of form 8-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, the on-frame movable body 132SG101),
Light emitting means;
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) is provided.
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an above-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, a frame-top movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
The movable body control means
When power is turned on, a confirmation operation control (for example, an operation confirmation control) is performed to operate the movable body by an operation to confirm that the movable body operates normally,
When informing that the game is controlled to the advantageous state, a performance movement control (for example, a moving body performance in a winning/losing button performance or a promotion performance) is performed to move the moving body by an operation for informing that the game is controlled to the advantageous state,
The light emission control means
When the movable body control means performs the confirmation movable control, the movable body control means controls the light emitting means so that the luminance of the light emitting means becomes a first luminance;
When the movable body control means performs the performance movement control, the light emitting means is controlled so that the luminance of the light emitting means becomes a second luminance;
The first luminance is lower than the second luminance (for example, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g, which are movable bodies that perform initial operation, emit light in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), but emit light at a lower luminance than when emitting light in the performance operation control. See FIG. 56(B)).
The game control means, during the advantageous state, can set the variable means (e.g., the special variable winning ball device 7) to an easy-entry state (e.g., an open state) in which the game medium can enter, and then can perform a round game by setting the variable means to an inaccessible state (e.g., a closed state) in which the game medium cannot enter,
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, when a power interruption occurs at the same time as control is made to the no-entry state in one round of play and power is then turned on, the movable body control means controls the movable body so that the confirmation movable control ends before the no-entry state ends (for example, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of the opening control of the large prize opening in the third round of play and then the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a hot start, the opening control of the large prize opening, the round interval period, and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body ends within the period until the end of the third special round interval period (see Figure 53 (F21) to (F29)). See Figure 87).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the load on the gaming machine is reduced by reducing the power consumption when the power is turned on, while the brightness of the light-emitting means provided on the movable body is set to the first brightness, preventing the movement of the movable body from being difficult to see due to the glare; furthermore, when the variable means becomes unable to enter during one round of play, the power is cut off at the same time, and the confirmation movement control when the power is turned on is terminated before the next round of play ends, thereby providing a gaming machine in which the player can continue playing a round of play even after the confirmation movement control has ended.

The gaming machine of form 8-2 is
Further provided with a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The performance control means is capable of displaying a restoration display (for example, restoration display 132SG510) on the display means in the following cases: when a power outage occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on; and when a power outage occurs at the same time that the variable means is controlled to an inaccessible state and then the power is turned on;
The light-emitting control means is capable of performing light-emitting control during recovery, in which the light-emitting means emits light in a light-emitting pattern corresponding to the display during recovery, in the case where a power outage occurs during the variable display and then the power is turned on, and in the case where a power outage occurs at the same time as the variable means is controlled to an inaccessible state and then the power is turned on,
The movable body control means is capable of performing the confirmation movement control in the cases where a power outage occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on, and where a power outage occurs at the same time that the variable means is controlled to an inaccessible state and then the power is turned on (for example, a part that is capable of performing operation confirmation control in the cases where a power outage occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on, and where a power outage occurs at the same time that the big prize opening is controlled to an open state and then the power is turned on).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the processing when the power is turned on is not complicated.

The gaming machine of form 8-3 is
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) is provided.
The performance control means is capable of displaying a recovery display (for example, a recovery display 132SG510) on the display means when a power outage occurs at the same time that the variable means is controlled to an inaccessible state during one round of play, and when the power is subsequently turned on,
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control to cause the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode),
In the case where a power outage occurs at the same time that the variable means is controlled to an inaccessible state during one round of play, and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform light emission control during recovery, which causes the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the recovery display, for a period from the end of the one round of play until the start of the next round of play,
The light emitting mode used in the specific light emitting pattern is not used in the light emitting pattern corresponding to the restoration display (for example, the initial highlight mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode corresponding to the restoration display (off). See FIG. 56(B) ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can draw attention to the movable body that moves through confirmation movement control even during recovery.

The gaming machine of form 8-4 is
Further provided with a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The performance control means
In the case where the variable means is controlled to an inaccessible state during one round of play and a power outage occurs at the same time, and then the power is turned on, it is possible to display a recovery display (for example, recovery display 132SG510) on the display means,
When the variable means is controlled to be in an entry-disabled state during one round of play, an interval performance can be executed;
The light emission control means
During the execution period of the interval performance, it is possible to perform interval light emission control to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the interval performance,
In the case where a power outage occurs at the same time that the variable means is controlled to an inaccessible state during one round of play, and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform light emission control during recovery, in which the light emitting means emits light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the recovery display, for a period from the end of the one round of play until the start of the next round of play,
The light emission control during recovery is performed at a lower brightness than the light emission control during the interval (for example, during power outage recovery, the part may be made to emit light at a lower brightness than the light emission brightness of the movable body LED in the performance movable control (movable body performance in the hit/miss button performance)),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce power consumption when the power is turned on, thereby reducing the load on the gaming machine, while also notifying the user that recovery is in progress.

The gaming machine of form 8-5 is
Further provided with a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The performance control means
In the one round of play, when the variable means is controlled to an inaccessible state and a power outage occurs at the same time, and when the power is turned on after the power outage, it is possible to display a recovery display (for example, recovery display 132SG510) on the display means,
When the variable means is controlled to be in an entry-disabled state during one round of play, an interval performance can be executed;
The light emission control means
During the execution period of the interval performance, it is possible to perform interval light emission control to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the interval performance,
In the case where a power outage occurs at the same time that the variable means is controlled to an inaccessible state during one round of play, and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform light emission control during recovery, in which the light emitting means emits light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the recovery display, for a period from the end of the one round of play until the start of the next round of play,
The light emitting mode used in the light emitting pattern corresponding to the recovery display is not used in the light emitting pattern corresponding to the interval effect (for example, the mode (off) corresponding to the recovery display is not used in the light emitting mode corresponding to the mode corresponding to the interval effect (music during a jackpot)),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can notify the user that recovery is in progress when the power is turned on.

The gaming machine of form 8-6 is
Further provided with a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The effect control means is capable of executing an interval effect that notifies whether the variable means is controlled to a special state when the variable means is controlled to an entry-prohibited state in the one round game,
The interval performance is
Introduction part (see Figure 53 (F21) to (F23)),
A result notification part (see (F24) to (F29) of FIG. 53) that is executed after the introduction part and notifies the result of the introduction part;
It consists of
The confirmation movement control is a control for moving the movable body so as to complete an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally before the result notification part is started.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the result notification part in the interval presentation is not obstructed by a movable body that operates by confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 8-7 is
sound output means (e.g., speakers 8L and 8R);
Further comprising a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The effect control means is capable of executing an interval effect that notifies whether the variable means is controlled to a special state when the variable means is controlled to an entry-prohibited state in the one round game,
The interval performance is as follows:
Introduction part (see Figure 53 (F21) to (F23)),
A result notification part (see (F24) to (F29) of FIG. 53) that is executed after the introduction part and notifies the result of the introduction part;
It consists of
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an above-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an above-frame movable body LED 9f, a chance button LED 9g),
The performance control means is capable of executing a movable body performance using the movable body in the result notification part,
When the movable body performance is executed, the movable body control means is capable of performing special performance movement control to move the movable body in a common operation mode with the operation mode of the movable body that is moved by the confirmation movement control,
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform the specific light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, emits light in a specific light emission pattern until the movement of the movable body is completed,
It is possible to perform special light emission control such that the light emitting means of the movable body, which is movable by the special effect movable control, emits light in a special light emission pattern over the execution period of the movable body effect,
The sound output means limits sound output when the movable body is moved by the confirmation movement control, and outputs a sound corresponding to the movable body effect when the movable body is moved by the special effect movement control (for example, a movable body effect using the under-board movable body 32B can be executed as a promotion effect in the result notification part (see Figure 53 (F24)), and when the movable body effect is executed, it is possible to perform effect operation control in an operation mode common to the operation mode of the under-board movable body 32B that operates by the operation confirmation control, and a part in which sound output is limited when the under-board movable body 32B operates by the operation confirmation control, and a sound corresponding to the movable body effect is output when the under-board movable body 32B operates in the movable body effect).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily determine whether confirmation movement control or special performance movement control is being performed by using specific light-emitting control and special light-emitting control.

The gaming machine of form 8-8 is
Further provided with a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The effect control means is capable of executing an interval effect that notifies whether the variable means is controlled to a special state when the variable means is controlled to an entry-prohibited state in the one round game,
The interval performance is
Introduction part (see Figure 53 (F21) to (F23)),
A result notification part (see (F24) to (F29) of FIG. 53) that is executed after the introduction part and notifies the result of the introduction part;
It consists of
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an above-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, a frame-top movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
The performance control means
In the result notification part, a movable body effect (see FIG. 53 (F24)) using the movable body can be executed,
The display means can display an effect display (see FIG. 53 (F24)) corresponding to the movable body performance,
The movable body control means
When the movable body performance is executed, it is possible to perform special performance movable control that moves the movable body in a common operation mode with the operation mode of the movable body that moves by the confirmation movable control,
If the confirmation movement control cannot be completed normally for a specific period of time, it is determined that an operation error has occurred, and the confirmation movement control can be performed again.
In the one round game in which the interval performance is executed, a power outage occurs immediately before the control is made to the inaccessible state, and thereafter, when the confirmation movable control that is started when the power is turned on does not end normally, the timing at which it is determined that an operation error has occurred overlaps with the execution period of the movable body performance,
If the movable body presentation is executed during the specific period in which the confirmation movement control is being performed, the special presentation movement control is restricted, while the effect display is displayed (for example, if the operation confirmation control cannot be completed normally over a specific period, it can be determined to be an operation error and the operation confirmation control can be performed again; if a power outage occurs just before the large prize opening is controlled to a closed state in one round of play in which an interval presentation is executed, and the operation confirmation control that starts when the power is turned on thereafter does not complete normally, the timing at which it is determined to be an operation error overlaps with the execution period of the promotion presentation, and if the promotion presentation is executed during the specific period in which the operation confirmation control is being performed, the movable body presentation may be restricted, while the effect display may be displayed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can show the player that a movable body effect has been executed by an effect display, while preventing the confirmation movable control from being interfered with by the special effect movable control.

The gaming machine of form 8-9 is
The operation mode of the movable body by the confirmation movable control and the operation mode of the movable body by the performance movable control are common,
The light emission control means
The specific light emission control can be performed to cause the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode) until the movement of the movable body is completed,
It is possible to perform the special light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body, which is movable by the effect movement control, emits light in a first special light emission pattern in a first period, and emits light in a second special light emission pattern having a light emission mode different from the first light emission pattern in a second period after the end of the first period (for example, the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button 631B of the movable body emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light) until the initial operation is completed in the operation confirmation control, and in the effect operation control (for example, in the case of successful promotion in the promotion effect), emits light in a rainbow flash mode in the first period (for example, an advance operation period), and emits light in a smooth rainbow mode different from the rainbow flash mode in the second period (for example, a retreat operation period). See FIG. 56(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily determine whether confirmation movement control or performance movement control is being performed by using specific light-emitting control and special light-emitting control.

[Form 9]
The gaming machine of form 9-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, the on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) is provided.
the movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control (e.g., operation confirmation control) to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally when power is turned on,
The game control means, during the advantageous state, can set the variable means (e.g., the special variable winning ball device 7) to an easy-entry state (e.g., an open state) in which the game medium can enter, and then can perform a round game by setting the variable means to an inaccessible state (e.g., a closed state) in which the game medium cannot enter,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state (e.g., jackpot A) and a second advantageous state (e.g., jackpot B) that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The effect control means is capable of executing a notification effect (for example, a promotion effect) that notifies which of the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state is in a specific round of play,
The notification performance is
An introduction part (see, for example, Figure 53 (F21) to (F23)),
A result notification part (see, for example, (F24) to (F29) in FIG. 53) that is executed after the introduction part and notifies the result of the introduction part;
It consists of
If the first advantageous state is reached, a performance corresponding to the first advantageous state is executed in the result notification part,
If the second advantageous state is reached, a performance corresponding to the second advantageous state is executed in the result notification part,
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the start of the specific round of play and the power is then turned on, the confirmation movable control ends before the result notification part starts (for example, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of the opening control of the large prize opening in the second round of play and the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a hot start, the opening control of the large prize opening, the round interval period, and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body ends before the result notification part of the promotion effect executed in the third round of play starts. See FIG. 89).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the result notification part in the notification performance is not obstructed by a movable body that operates by confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 9-2 is
Further provided with a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The effect control means is capable of displaying, in a round game in which the variable means is controlled to the easy-entry state for a specified period after the fanfare effect has ended, a launch direction indication display (e.g., right hit promotion display 132SG430) indicating the launch direction of the game medium in a specific display area (e.g., right game area, second path), and a round game-related display (e.g., round number display 132SG451, winning ball number display 132SG452, ball number display 132SG453, number of consecutive wins/total ball number display 132SG454, etc.) relating to the round game in a special display area,
The confirmation movement control is a control for moving the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the special display area with respect to the specific display area (see FIGS. 83 and 84).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the launch direction indication display, which has a large impact on the game, is not obstructed by a movable body that moves through confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form 9-3 is
Further provided with a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The presentation control means is capable of displaying, in the specific round of play, a launch direction indication display (e.g., right-hit promotion display 132SG430) indicating the launch direction of the game medium in a specific display area (upper right side of the display screen), and an awarded game value display (e.g., winning ball number display 132SG452, number of balls issued display 132SG453, etc.) relating to the awarded game value in a special display area,
The confirmation movement control is a control for moving the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the special display area with respect to the specific display area (see FIGS. 83 and 84 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the launch direction indication display, which has a large impact on the game, is not obstructed by a movable body that moves through confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form 9-4 is
Light emitting means;
light emission control means;
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an above-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, a frame-top movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control to cause the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode),
When the notification effect is executed, it is possible to perform notification light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body that is not moving due to the confirmation movement control emits light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the notification effect,
The light emitting mode used in the specific light emitting pattern is not used in the light emitting pattern corresponding to the notification effect (for example, the initial highlighting mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode corresponding to the promotion effect (introduction part). See FIG. 56(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can indicate that a movable body is under confirmation movable control even during an announcement performance by using specific light-emitting control and notification light-emitting control.

The gaming machine of form 9-5 is
Light emitting means;
Further provided with a light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an above-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an above-frame movable body LED 9f, a chance button LED 9g),
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control to cause the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode),
If a power outage occurs immediately before the start of the specific round game and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform notification light emission control to cause the light emitting means of the movable body to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the notification effect,
The light emission control means causes the light emission means of the movable body to emit light by the specific light emission control when a power outage occurs immediately before the start of the specific round of play and the power is turned on thereafter, and when the movable body is moving due to the confirmation movement control (for example, when a power outage occurs immediately before the start of the third round of play and the power is turned on thereafter, and when the movable body is moving due to the movement confirmation control, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g of the movable body that performs initial movement emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light emission) instead of a mode corresponding to the promotion performance (introduction part). See FIG. 56 (B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the load by suppressing the power consumption when the power is turned on.

The gaming machine of form 9-6 is
Light emitting means;
Further provided with a light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an above-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an above-frame movable body LED 9f, a chance button LED 9g),
The light emission control means
In the specific round game, it is possible to perform notification light emission control to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern (for example, a rainbow light emission mode) corresponding to the notification effect,
When a power outage occurs immediately before the start of the specific round game and the power is turned on after that, the light emitting means can be made to emit light by the notification light emission control,
The notification light emission control that is performed when a power outage occurs immediately before the start of the specific round of play and the power is then turned on has lower brightness than the notification light emission control that is performed when no power outage occurs immediately before the start of the specific round of play (for example, during the second round interval period or the third round of play, the operation confirmation control is started, and the initially operating movable bodies, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, the frame-top movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g, emit light in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), but emit light at a lower brightness than when emitting light in the performance operation control (promotion performance). See FIG. 56 (B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the load by suppressing the power consumption when the power is turned on.

The gaming machine of form 9-7 is
The effect control means is capable of executing an action prompting effect that prompts the player to take an action during the execution period of the notification effect (see FIG. 53 (F23)),
The action prompting performance is executed in the introduction part (see FIG. 53 (F21) to (F23)),
When a power outage occurs immediately before the start of the specific round of play and the power is then turned on, the movable body control means controls the movable body so that the confirmation movable control ends before the introduction part starts (for example, the operation prompt part of the introduction part of the promotion effect executed in the third round of play, i.e., the part where the initial operation of the movable body ends before the operation prompt effect that prompts the player to operate the chance button 631B starts).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the action promotion effect in the introductory part is not obstructed by the movable body that operates by confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form 9-8 is
Light emitting means;
A light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
sound output means (e.g., speakers 8L, 8R);
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an above-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, a frame-top movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
The performance control means can execute a movable body performance using the movable body in the result notification part (see FIG. 53 (F24)),
When the movable body performance is executed, the movable body control means is capable of performing special performance movement control to move the movable body in a common operation mode with the operation mode of the movable body that is moved by the confirmation movement control,
The light emission control means
The specific light emission control can be performed to cause the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern until the movement of the movable body is completed,
It is possible to perform special light emission control such that the light emitting means of the movable body, which is movable by the special effect movable control, emits light in a special light emission pattern over the execution period of the movable body effect,
The sound output means limits sound output when the movable body is moved by the confirmation movement control, and outputs sound corresponding to the movable body effect when the movable body is moved by the special effect movement control (for example, when performing an initial operation, the under-board movable body LED 9e emits light in a manner corresponding to the recovery display 132SG510 (for example, initial highlighting mode; white light), but the output of background sound (BGM) is limited, and when performing an effect operation in a promotion effect, the under-board movable body LED 9e emits light in a manner corresponding to the promotion effect (result notification part) (for example, rainbow mode, etc.), while a sound effect in a manner corresponding to the promotion effect (result notification part) is output).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily distinguish whether confirmation movement control or special performance movement control is being performed by using specific light-emitting control and special light-emitting control.

The gaming machine of form 9-9 is
The performance control means
In the result notification part, a movable body effect using the movable body can be executed,
The display means can display an effect display corresponding to the movable body performance,
The movable body control means
When the movable body performance is executed, it is possible to perform special performance movable control that moves the movable body in a common operation mode with the operation mode of the movable body that moves by the confirmation movable control,
If the confirmation movement control cannot be completed normally for a specific period of time, it is determined that an operation error has occurred, and the confirmation movement control can be performed again.
When a power outage occurs immediately before the start of the specific round game, and the confirmation movable control that starts when the power is turned on does not end normally, the timing at which it is determined that an operation error has occurred overlaps with the execution period of the movable body performance,
If the movable body performance is executed during the specific period in which the confirmation movement control is being performed, the special performance movement control is restricted, while the effect display is displayed (for example, if the operation confirmation control cannot be completed normally over a specific period, it can be determined that an operation error has occurred and the operation confirmation control can be performed again; if a power outage occurs immediately after the start of the third round performance in which a promotion performance is executed, and the operation confirmation control that is started when the power is turned on thereafter does not complete normally, the timing at which it is determined that an operation error has occurred overlaps with the execution period of the promotion performance, and if the promotion performance is executed during the specific period in which the operation confirmation control is being performed, the movable body performance can be restricted, while the effect display can be displayed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can show the player that a movable body effect has been executed by an effect display, while preventing the confirmation movable control from being interfered with by the special effect movable control.

[Form 10]
The gaming machine of form 10-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, the on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) is provided.
the movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control (e.g., operation confirmation control) to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally when power is turned on,
The game control means, during the advantageous state, can set the variable means (e.g., the special variable winning ball device 7) to an easy-to-enter state (e.g., an open state) in which the game medium can enter, and then perform a round game multiple times by setting the variable means to an inaccessible state (e.g., a closed state) in which the game medium cannot enter,
The effect control means can execute an ending effect after the final round of play has ended (see FIG. 52 (F12) to (F14)),
The ending performance is as follows:
Introduction part (see Figure 52 (F12) and Figure 53 (F31)),
A special state notification part (for example, a time-saving state notification part. See FIG. 52 (F13), FIG. 53 (F32), (F34)) that is executed after the introduction part and notifies about the special state that is controlled after the advantageous state;
It consists of
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of the easy-entry state in the final round of play and the power is turned on thereafter, the confirmation movable control ends before the special state notification part starts (for example, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of the 10th and final round of play and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, the ending period and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body ends before the start of the time-shortened state notification part (see (F32) and (F34) of Figure 53) in which information on the time-shortened state is notified in the ending period; see Figure 90).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the special state notification part in the ending performance is not obstructed by a movable body that operates by confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 10-2 is
Light emitting means;
Further provided with a light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an above-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, a frame-top movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control to cause the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode),
When a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the easy-entry state in the final round of play and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform ending light emission control, which causes the light emitting means of the movable body that is not moving due to the confirmation movement control to emit light in a lamp pattern corresponding to the ending performance,
The light emitting mode used in the specific light emitting pattern is not used in the light emitting pattern corresponding to the ending performance (for example, the initial highlighting mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode corresponding to the ending performance (introduction part). See FIG. 56(B) ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can indicate that a movable body is under confirmation movable control even during an ending performance by using specific light emission control and ending light emission control.

The gaming machine of form 10-3 is
Light emitting means;
Further provided with a light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an above-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, a frame-top movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control to cause the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode),
When a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the easy-entry state in the final round of play and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform ending light emission control, which causes the light emitting means of the movable body to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ending performance.
the movable body includes a first movable body and a second movable body,
When a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the easy-entry state in the final round of play and the power is then turned on, when the first movable body is moving due to the confirmation movement control, the light-emitting control means causes the light-emitting means of the first movable body to emit light according to the specific light-emitting control, while causing the light-emitting means of the second movable body to emit light according to the ending light-emitting control (for example, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g of the movable bodies that are performing the initial movement emit light in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), while the movable body LEDs of the other movable bodies that are not operating emit light in a mode corresponding to the ending performance (introduction part). See FIG. 56 (B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can indicate that the movable body is moving through confirmation movement control even during the ending presentation.

The gaming machine of form 10-4 is
Light emitting means;
Further provided with a light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an above-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, a frame-top movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
The light emission control means
When the ending performance is executed, it is possible to perform ending light emission control to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ending performance,
When a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the easy-entry state in the final round of play and the power is then turned on, the light emitting means can be made to emit light by the ending light emitting control.
The ending light emission control that is performed when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the easy-entry state in the final round of play and the power is then turned on has lower brightness than the ending light emission control that is performed when a power outage does not occur immediately before the end of the ending presentation (for example, when the movable body is moving due to the operation confirmation control, the movable body LED 9d on the board, the movable body LED 9e below the board, the movable body LED 9f on the frame, and the chance button LED 9g that perform the initial operation emit light at low brightness in an initial highlight mode (white lighting) rather than in a mode corresponding to the ending presentation (introduction part). See FIG. 56 (B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the load by suppressing the power consumption when the power is turned on.

[Form 11]
The gaming machine of form 11-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, the on-frame movable body 132SG101),
Light emitting means;
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) is provided.
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an above-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, a frame-top movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
The movable body control means
When power is turned on, it is possible to perform a confirmation operation control (for example, an operation confirmation control) to move the movable body by an operation to confirm that the movable body operates normally,
When informing that the game is controlled to the advantageous state, it is possible to perform a performance movement control (for example, a moving body performance in a winning/losing button performance) that moves the moving body by an operation for informing that the game is controlled to the advantageous state,
The light emission control means
When the movable body control means performs the confirmation movable control, the movable body control means controls the light emitting means so that the luminance of the light emitting means becomes a first luminance;
When the movable body control means performs the performance movement control, the light emitting means is controlled so that the luminance of the light emitting means becomes a second luminance;
The first luminance is lower than the second luminance (for example, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g, which are movable bodies that perform initial operation, emit light in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), but emit light at a lower luminance than when emitting light in the performance operation control. See FIG. 56(B)).
The game control means, during the advantageous state, can set the variable means (e.g., the special variable winning ball device 7) to an easy-to-enter state (e.g., an open state) in which the game medium can enter, and then perform a round game multiple times by setting the variable means to an inaccessible state (e.g., a closed state) in which the game medium cannot enter,
the effect control means is capable of executing an ending effect after the final round of play is completed;
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, when a power interruption occurs immediately after the start of the ending performance by the performance control means and the power is then turned on, the confirmation movable control ends before the end of the execution period of the ending performance (for example, when a power interruption occurs immediately after the start of the ending performance and the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start, the ending period and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body ends before the start of the time-shortened state notification part (see (F32) and (F34) of Figure 53) in which information regarding the time-shortened state is notified; see Figure 91).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that reduces the load on the gaming machine by reducing the power consumption when the power is turned on, cuts off the power at the same time as the ending performance is executed, and ends the confirmation movement control when the power is turned on within the execution period of the ending performance (allowing the player to enjoy the high base state without worrying about the moving body operating due to the confirmation movement control).

The gaming machine of form 11-2 is
The performance control means is capable of displaying a restoration display (for example, a restoration display 132SG510) on the display means in the following cases: when a power outage occurs during the variable display and then the power is turned on; and when a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the ending performance and then the power is turned on;
The light emission control means is capable of performing light emission control during recovery, in which the light emission means emits light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during recovery in the case where a power outage occurs during the variable display and then the power is turned on, and in the case where a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the ending performance and then the power is turned on,
The movable body control means is capable of performing the confirmation movement control in the cases where a power outage occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on, and where a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the ending performance and then the power is turned on (for example, a part capable of performing operation confirmation control in the cases where a power outage occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on, and where a power outage occurs simultaneously with the large prize opening being controlled to an open state and then the power is turned on).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the processing when the power is turned on is not complicated.

The gaming machine of form 11-3 is
The performance control means is capable of displaying a restoration display (for example, a restoration display 132SG510) on the display means when a power outage occurs during the ending performance and the power is then turned on,
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control to cause the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode),
When a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the ending performance by the performance control means and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform light emission control during recovery, which causes the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the recovery display throughout the execution period of the ending performance,
The light emission mode used in the specific light emission pattern is not used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the restoration display (for example, the initial highlight mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode corresponding to the restoration display (off) see FIG. 56(B) ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can draw attention to the movable body that moves through confirmation movement control even during recovery.

The gaming machine of form 11-4 is
The performance control means is capable of displaying a restoration display (for example, a restoration display 132SG510) on the display means when a power outage occurs during the ending performance and the power is then turned on,
The light emission control means
During the execution period of the ending performance, it is possible to perform ending light emission control to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ending performance,
If a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the ending performance and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform light emission control during recovery, which causes the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during recovery throughout the execution period of the ending performance,
The light emission control during recovery is performed at a lower brightness than the ending light emission control (for example, during power outage recovery, the part may be made to emit light at a lower brightness than the light emission brightness of the movable body LED in the performance movable control (movable body performance in the hit/miss button performance). See FIG. 56 (B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the load by suppressing the power consumption when the power is turned on.

The gaming machine of form 11-5 is
The performance control means is capable of displaying a restoration display (for example, a restoration display 132SG510) on the display means when a power outage occurs during the ending performance and the power is then turned on,
The light emission control means
During the execution period of the ending performance, it is possible to perform ending light emission control to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ending performance,
If a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the ending performance and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform light emission control during recovery, which causes the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during recovery throughout the execution period of the ending performance,
The light emitting mode used in the light emitting pattern corresponding to the restoration display is not used in the light emitting pattern corresponding to the ending presentation (for example, the mode (light off) corresponding to the restoration display is not used in the light emitting mode corresponding to the mode corresponding to the ending presentation (ending introduction). See FIG. 56(B) ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can notify the user that recovery is in progress when the power is turned on, even if the ending presentation was in progress before the power outage.

[Form 12]
The gaming machine of form 12-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, the on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
a display means (for example, an image display device 5),
There is a normal state (for example, a normal game state) and a special state (for example, a time-saving state) that is more advantageous than the normal state,
The specific identification information includes first identification information (e.g., a first special symbol) and second identification information (e.g., a second special symbol),
the normal state is a state in which the variable display of the first identification information is easily executed,
the special state is a state in which the variable display of the second identification information is likely to be executed,
During the special state, information about the advantageous state (for example, the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls displayed 132SG454) can be displayed in the first display area of the display means,
During the special state, the second display area of the display means can display hold information (for example, the second hold memory number or the second hold display 132SG002) related to the variable display of the second identification information,
the movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally when power is turned on,
The confirmation movable control is a control for moving the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the first display area with respect to the second display area (for example, when an initial operation is performed when a power outage occurs during time reduction, and then the machine is started up with a hot start and restored, each movable body is set to perform an initial operation so that the time during which the above-board movable body 32A overlaps with the second reserved memory number (display area 5SL) or the second reserved display 132SG002 (second reserved display area 132SG012) and is difficult (or impossible) for the player to see is shorter than the time during which the below-board movable body 32B overlaps with the jackpot information display (for example, the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454) regarding the jackpot. See FIG. 92).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the second display area, which is a movable body that operates by confirmation movable control and has a greater impact on the game, is not obstructed as much as the visibility of the first display area.

The gaming machine of form 12-2 is
The information relating to the advantageous state displayed in the first display area does not change during the special state, while the reserved information displayed in the second display area can change during the special state (for example, the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls played display 132SG454 does not change during the time-saving state, while the second reserved memory count (display area 5SL) and the second reserved display 132SG002 are parts whose display mode can change even during the time-saving state due to changes in the number of winnings or advance notices, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of pending information, which may change due to a movable body operating through confirmation movable control, is not hindered as much as information regarding an advantageous state, which does not change.

The gaming machine of form 12-3 is
The range in which the movable body that moves due to the confirmation movable control overlaps with the first display area is larger than the range in which the movable body that moves due to the confirmation movable control overlaps with the second display area (for example, the range in which the movable body on the board 32A overlaps with the display area of the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls issued display 132SG454 due to the initial operation is larger than the range in which the movable body on the board 32A overlaps with the display area 5SL of the second pending memory number and the second pending display area 132SG012 of the second pending display 132SG002 due to the initial operation).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the second display area, which is a movable body that operates by confirmation movable control and has a greater impact on the game, is not obstructed as much as the visibility of the first display area.

[Form 13]
The gaming machine of form 13-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, the on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) is provided.
the movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control (e.g., operation confirmation control) to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally when power is turned on,
the effect control means is capable of performing an action promotion effect that prompts a player to take an action during variable display based on a specific variable display pattern;
The specific variable display pattern is
A first part (for example, the period from (D1) to (D5) in FIG. 50) until the action prompting performance is executed;
A second part (for example, a result notification part of (D6) and (D7) of FIG. 50) that is executed after the first part and notifies the result of the action prompting performance;
The invention comprises:
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the start of the specific variable display and the power is then turned on, the confirmation movable control ends before the second part starts (for example, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of a variation preceding a variation in which a button notice is executed and the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start, the movable body is controlled so that the initial operation ends before the button notice (result notification part) starts. See FIG. 94).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the second part in the action promotion performance is not obstructed by a movable body that operates by confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form 13-2 is
Further comprising a game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
The game control means is capable of transmitting specific information regarding the specific variation (for example, a winning effect designation command that designates button advance notice execution, etc.) to the effect control means,
The effect control means is capable of performing the action prompting effect based on the specific information transmitted from the game control means,
The movable body control means is capable of changing the control content of the confirmation movable control based on the specific information when a power outage occurs immediately before the start of the specific variation and then the power is turned on (for example, when a variation pattern designation command designating a specific variation pattern (with button advance notice) is received within a specified time (for example, 4000 ms) after receiving a power outage recovery designation command, the means may interrupt the initial operation currently being performed (approximately 20 seconds) and switch to a shortened initial operation having an operation period shorter than the initial operation currently being performed (for example, 5 seconds, etc.)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to perform suitable confirmation movement control that takes into consideration the start of a specific fluctuation.

[Form 14]
The gaming machine of form 14-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, the on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) is provided.
the movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control (e.g., operation confirmation control) to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally when power is turned on,
the effect control means is capable of executing a start effect (for example, a start notice) when a variable display based on a specific variable display pattern is started,
The start performance is as follows:
Introduction part (see Figure 48 (B2) to (B6)),
A result notification part (see (B3a) to (B6a) of FIG. 48) that is executed after the introduction part and notifies the result of the introduction part;
It consists of
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the start of variable display based on the specific variable display pattern and the power is then turned on, the confirmation movable control ends before the result notification part starts (for example, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of a variation before a variation in which a start notice is executed and the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a hot start, the movable body control means controls the movable body so that the initial operation ends before the start notice (result notification part) starts. See FIG. 95).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the result notification part in the start-up performance is not obstructed by a movable body that operates by confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 14-2 is
Further comprising a game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
The game control means can transmit specific information regarding the specific variation (for example, a winning effect designation command that designates the execution of a notice at the start of a game) to the effect control means,
The effect control means is capable of performing the start effect based on the specific information transmitted from the game control means,
The movable body control means is capable of changing the control content of the confirmation movable control based on the specific information when a power outage occurs immediately before the specific variation is started and the power is then turned on (for example, a part that may be configured so that the performance control CPU 120 can change the execution period of the initial operation based on a specific performance control command so that the initial operation is completed before the notification part is started as a result of the start-time notice),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to perform suitable confirmation movement control that takes into consideration the start of a specific fluctuation.

[Form 15]
The gaming machine of form 15-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, the on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) is provided.
the movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control (e.g., operation confirmation control) to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally when power is turned on,
The effect control means is capable of executing a variable display of identification information based on a specific variable display pattern, and is capable of temporarily stopping the variable display of the identification information and then executing a variable display notification effect (for example, a pseudo consecutive announcement) that notifies the user that the variable display of the identification information will be executed again.
The reconfigurable display notification performance is
An introductory part (see (C3) to (C5) of FIG. 49) informing whether or not the re-variable display of the identification information is to be executed;
A result notification part (see (C6), (C10), and (C9) of FIG. 49) that is executed after the introduction part and notifies the result of the introduction part;
It consists of
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the start of variable display of identification information based on the specific variable display pattern and the power is then turned on, the movable body control means controls the movable body so that the confirmation movable control ends before the result notification part starts (for example, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of a variation before a variation in which a pseudo consecutive announcement is executed and the pachinko game machine 1 is started by hot start, the movable body control means controls the movable body so that the initial operation ends before the pseudo consecutive announcement (result notification part) starts. See FIG. 96).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the result notification part in the re-variable display notification performance is not obstructed by a movable body that operates by confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 15-2 is
Further comprising a game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
The game control means can transmit specific information regarding the specific variation (for example, a winning effect designation command that designates the execution of a pseudo consecutive announcement) to the effect control means,
The presentation control means is capable of performing the re-variable display notification presentation (for example, a pseudo consecutive announcement) based on the specific information transmitted from the game control means,
The movable body control means is capable of changing the control content of the confirmation movable control based on the specific information when a power outage occurs immediately before the specific variation is started and then the power is turned on (for example, a part that may be configured so that the performance control CPU 120 can change the execution period of the initial operation based on a specific performance control command so that the initial operation is completed before the notification part of the result of the pseudo-consecutive preview is started).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to perform suitable confirmation movement control that takes into consideration the start of a specific fluctuation.

[Form 16]
The gaming machine of form 16-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, the on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
a display means (for example, an image display device 5),
There is a normal state (for example, a normal game state) and a special state (for example, a time-saving state) that is more advantageous than the normal state,
The normal state is a state designed to launch the game medium toward the first game area (e.g., the left game area),
The special state is a state designed to launch the gaming medium toward the second gaming area (e.g., the right gaming area),
The display means, in the normal state, is capable of displaying a first game area side launch promotion display (for example, a left hit promotion display 132SG530) in a specific display area (upper right side of the display screen) to urge the player to launch the game medium toward the first game area, and is also capable of displaying a display corresponding to the normal state in a predetermined display area;
the movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control (e.g., operation confirmation control) to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally when power is turned on,
The confirmation movable control is a control for moving the movable body so that it does not overlap the specific display area more than the predetermined display area (for example, when a power outage occurs during variable display in the normal state, and then the machine is started up by hot start and restored, and an initial operation is performed, the part is set so that the time during which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the left hit prompt display 132SG530 and is difficult (or impossible) for the player to see is shortened. See Figures 97 and 98).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the first game area side promotion notification is not obstructed by a movable body that operates by confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 16-2 is
The display means is capable of displaying a restoration display (e.g., restoration display 132SG510) until the variable display ends when a power outage occurs during the variable display and the power is then turned on,
When the recovery display is displayed, it is possible to perform the first game area promotion notification (for example, left hit promotion display 132SG530),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can appropriately notify the direction in which gaming media are released even during recovery.

The gaming machine of form 16-3 is
As the first game area promotion notification, it is possible to display a first game area promotion notification display (for example, a left hit promotion display 132SG530) and output a first game area promotion notification sound,
When the confirmation movable control is performed based on power-on with initialization, the first game area promotion notification display is displayed in the specific display area, while the output of the first game area promotion notification sound is limited,
When the confirmation movement control is performed based on power-on without initialization, the first game area promotion notification display is displayed in the specific display area, and the first game area promotion notification sound is output (for example, the left hit promotion display 132SG530 is displayed in the upper right part of the display screen, while the left hit operation promotion notification sound is restricted, and when the operation confirmation control is performed based on starting up by hot start after a power outage occurs, the left hit promotion display 132SG530 is displayed in the upper right part of the display screen, while the left hit operation promotion notification sound is output).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide an appropriate first game area promotion notification that takes into account the situation when the power is turned on.

The gaming machine of form 16-4 is
In the normal state, when a gaming medium enters a predetermined area (for example, a passing gate 41) provided on the second gaming area side, the first gaming area promotion notification (for example, a left-hit promotion display 132SG530) can be performed.
In the normal state, a special first game area promotion notification having a higher priority than the first game area promotion notification can be made based on the entry of a specific number of game media into the predetermined area,
The confirmation movement control makes it possible to issue the special first game area promotion notification for a period longer than the period during which the movable body is movable (for example, in the normal state, it is possible to issue a special left-hit operation promotion notification that has a higher priority than a left-hit operation promotion notification based on the entry of a specific number of game balls (for example, 5 balls) into the gate switch 21, and it is possible to issue a special left-hit operation promotion notification for a period longer than the period during which the movable body is operating (for example, 20 seconds) through the operation confirmation control).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the special first game area promotion notification is not hindered by a movable body that moves through confirmation movable control.

[Form 17]
The gaming machine of form 17-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, the on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
Display means (e.g., image display device 5);
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
The game control means, during the advantageous state, can set the variable means (e.g., the special variable winning ball device 7) to an easy-entry state (e.g., an open state) in which the game medium can enter, and then can perform a round game by setting the variable means to an inaccessible state (e.g., a closed state) in which the game medium cannot enter,
The display means
If a power outage occurs during the round game and then the power is turned on, it is possible to display a recovery display (for example, a recovery display 132SG510) in a predetermined display area,
Thereafter, in the predetermined display area, it is possible to display a display corresponding to the round game (for example, a round number display 132SG451, a winning ball number display 132SG452, a ball number display 132SG453, a consecutive number of games/total number of balls displayed display 132SG454, etc.),
When either the display corresponding to the round game or the display during recovery is displayed, a launch direction indication display (for example, a right-hit prompt display 132SG430) indicating the launch direction of the game medium is displayed in the specific display area,
the movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control (e.g., operation confirmation control) to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally when power is turned on,
The confirmation movable control is a control for moving the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the specific display area more than the predetermined display area (for example, when an initial operation is performed after a power outage occurs during a round game in a jackpot game state and then the power is started by a hot start and restored, the on-board movable body 32A operates so that it does not overlap in front of the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 displayed in the operation confirmation control, rather than being superimposed in front of the predetermined area (see Figure 83 (A)) in which information corresponding to the round game (for example, the number of rounds display 132SG451, the number of winning balls display 132SG452, the number of balls dispensed display 132SG453, the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, etc.) is displayed; see Figures 99 and 100).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the launch direction indication display, which has a large impact on the game, is not obstructed by a movable body that moves through confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form 17-2 is
Further provided with a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The performance control means is capable of executing a movable body performance using the movable body,
The movable body control means is capable of performing predetermined movement control to move the movable body by a predetermined operation when the movable body performance is executed,
the movable body that is movable by the predetermined movement control is superimposed on the specific display area,
The confirmation movable control is capable of moving the movable body in a manner that does not include the predetermined operation in the predetermined movable control (for example, after a power outage occurs during variable display in a normal state, the initial operation when the power is turned on is performed in an operation manner that includes the performance operation (reciprocating operation between the origin position and the intermediate position) of the movable body announcement in which the support part 32b overlaps with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, while after a power outage occurs during variable display in a jackpot or time-saving state, the initial operation when the power is turned on is performed in an operation manner that does not include the performance operation (reciprocating operation between the origin position and the intermediate position) of the movable body announcement that overlaps with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the specific display area is not obstructed by a movable body that moves under confirmation movement control.

[Form 18]
The gaming machine of form 18-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, the on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
a display means (for example, an image display device 5),
The display means
If a power outage occurs and then the power is turned on, it is possible to display a restoration display (for example, restoration display 132SG510).
As the restoration in progress display, it is possible to display text information indicating that restoration is in progress in a predetermined display area,
Along with the recovery display, it is possible to display a launch direction indication display (for example, a right-hit prompt display 132SG430) indicating the launch direction of the gaming medium in a specific display area,
the movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control (e.g., operation confirmation control) to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally when power is turned on,
The confirmation movable control is a control for moving the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the specific display area more than the predetermined display area (for example, when an initial operation is performed after a power outage occurs during a round of play in a jackpot game state and the initial operation is performed when the game is started up by a hot start and restored, the on-board movable body 32A does not overlap the front side of the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 displayed in the operation confirmation control, rather than being superimposed on the front side of the recovery in progress display 132SG510. See Figures 99 and 100).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the launch direction indication, which has a large impact on the game and is a movable body that operates by confirmation movable control, is not obstructed more than the text information indicating that recovery is in progress.

The gaming machine of form 18-2 is
Further provided with a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The performance control means is capable of executing a movable body performance using the movable body,
The movable body control means is capable of performing predetermined performance movement control to move the movable body by a predetermined operation when the movable body performance is executed,
The movable body that is movable by the predetermined performance movable control is superimposed on the specific display area,
The confirmation movable control is capable of moving the movable body in a manner that does not include the predetermined operation in the predetermined effect movable control (for example, after a power outage occurs during variable display in a normal state, the initial operation when the power is turned on is performed in an operation manner that includes the effect operation (reciprocating operation between the origin position and the intermediate position) of the movable body preview in which the support part 32b overlaps with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, while after a power outage occurs during variable display during a jackpot or in a time-saving state, the initial operation when the power is turned on is performed in an operation manner that does not include the effect operation (reciprocating operation between the origin position and the intermediate position) of the movable body preview that overlaps with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the specific display area is not obstructed by a movable body that moves under confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form 18-3 is
Further provided with a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The performance control means is capable of executing a movable body performance using the movable body,
The movable body control means is capable of performing special effect movement control to move the movable body by a special action when the movable body performance is executed,
the movable body that is movable by the special movable control is superimposed on the predetermined display area,
the confirmation movement control is capable of moving the movable body in a manner including the special action in the special movement control,
When a power outage occurs during the advantageous state and the power is then turned on, the movable body that is moved by the special movable control stays in the predetermined display area for a longer period of time than the movable body that is moved by the confirmation movable control that is performed in such a case (for example, the time that the under-board movable body 32B stays in the performance position that overlaps with the recovery display 132SG510 may be set to be shorter than the performance operation of the movable body performance in the initial operation).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a power outage occurs during an advantageous state and the power is then turned on, the movable body that moves due to the confirmation movable control is not superimposed on the specified display area for a long period of time, thereby providing a gaming machine that does not cause any problems in determining whether or not recovery is in progress.

[Form 19]
The gaming machine of form 19-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, the on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
a display means (for example, an image display device 5),
There is a normal state (for example, a normal game state) and a special state (for example, a time-saving state) that is more advantageous than the normal state,
The display means
If a power outage occurs during the special state and the power is then turned on, a restoration display (e.g., restoration display 132SG510) can be displayed in a predetermined display area,
Thereafter, a display corresponding to the special state can be displayed in the predetermined display area,
When either the display corresponding to the special state or the restoration display is displayed, a launch direction indication display (for example, a right-hit prompt display 132SG430) indicating the launch direction of the gaming medium is displayed in the specific display area,
the movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control (e.g., operation confirmation control) to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally when power is turned on,
The confirmation movable control is a control for moving the movable body so that it does not overlap the specific display area more than the predetermined display area (for example, when an initial operation is performed after a power outage occurs during variable display in a time-saving state and then the initial operation is performed when the power is started by a hot start and restored, the on-board movable body 32A is not superimposed on the front side of the predetermined area (see Figure 101 (B) (C)) where information corresponding to the time-saving state (for example, the performance mode display 132SG221, the remaining time-saving display 132SG201, the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls output display 132SG454, etc.) is displayed, but is not overlapped on the front side of the specific area (see Figure 101 (A)) where the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 displayed in the operation confirmation control is displayed. See Figure 101).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the launch direction indication display, which is a movable body that moves by confirmation movement control and has a large impact on the game, is not obstructed as much as the recovery in progress display.

The gaming machine of form 19-2 is
Further provided with a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The performance control means is capable of executing a movable body performance using the movable body,
The movable body control means is capable of performing predetermined performance movement control to move the movable body by a predetermined operation when the movable body performance is executed,
The movable body that is movable by the predetermined performance movable control is superimposed on the specific display area,
The confirmation movable control is capable of moving the movable body in a manner that does not include the predetermined operation in the predetermined effect movable control (for example, the initial operation is performed in an operation manner that includes the effect operation (reciprocating movement between the origin position and the intermediate position) of the movable body preview in which the support part 32b overlaps with the right hit prompt display 132SG430, while the initial operation at the time of power-on after a power outage occurs during a jackpot or during variable display in the time-saving state is performed in an operation manner that does not include the effect operation (reciprocating movement between the origin position and the intermediate position) of the movable body preview that overlaps with the right hit prompt display 132SG430).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the specific display area is not obstructed by a movable body that moves under confirmation movement control.

[Form 20]
The gaming machine of form 20-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
A movable body and
A movable body control means;
a display means;
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state,
the display means is capable of displaying a launch direction indication display indicating a launch direction of the game medium in a specific display area in the special state, and is also capable of displaying information relating to the advantageous state in a predetermined display area;
the movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally when power is turned on,
the confirmation movement control is a control for moving the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the specific display area more than the predetermined display area;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the launch direction indication, which has a large impact on the game and is a movable body that operates by confirmation movable control, is not obstructed more than the information regarding the advantageous state.

The gaming machine of form 20-2 is
Further comprising a performance control means,
The performance control means is capable of executing a movable body performance using the movable body,
The movable body control means is capable of performing predetermined performance movement control to move the movable body by a predetermined operation when the movable body performance is executed,
The movable body that is movable by the predetermined performance movable control is superimposed on the specific display area,
The confirmation movable control can move the movable body in a manner that does not include the predetermined action in the predetermined performance movable control.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the specific display area is not obstructed by a movable body that moves under confirmation movement control.

[Form 21]
The gaming machine of form 21-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the on-frame movable body 132SG01, the chance button 631B),
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
Display means (e.g., image display device 5);
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) is provided.
When the power is turned on, the movable body control means can perform confirmation movement control to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the operation confirmation control process shown in Figures 31 and 32, thereby performing the initial operation of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the above-frame movable body 132SG101).
The game control means is capable of performing specific identification information light emission control to indicate the result of the variable display of the specific identification information by a plurality of light emitting means (for example, the CPU 103 is a part that can light up a plurality of lamps constituting a special pattern in a combination according to the variable display result when the variable display is stopped),
The display means is capable of displaying a startup preparation display (for example, a startup preparation display 132SG500 shown in FIG. 102(D)) when the power is turned on,
When the power is turned on,
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 103(A), the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Thereafter, the specific identification information light emission control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 103(A), the special symbol lamps constituting the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are illuminated in a manner indicating a miss),
Thereafter, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 103(A), the initial movement of each movable body is performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is easy to recognize that power supply to the gaming machine has started through the startup preparation display, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows confirmation of specific identification light-emitting control, which has a high impact on gameplay, without being distracted by the movable body that operates through the confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 21-2 is
When the power is turned on,
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 103(B), the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Thereafter, the specific identification information light emission control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 103(B), the special symbol lamps constituting the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are illuminated in a manner indicating a miss),
Thereafter, when the variable display is started based on the establishment of the start condition while the start preparation display is being displayed and before the confirmation movable control is performed, the display means displays the restoration display (for example, as shown in FIG. 103(B), the portion where the restoration display 132SG510 is displayed),
Thereafter, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 103(B), the initial movement of each movable body is performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the movement of the movable body due to the confirmation movement control is not started when a display corresponding to the variable display is displayed on the display means (which would interfere with the confirmation work).

The gaming machine of form 21-3 is
If a power outage occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on (for example, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by hot start),
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 104(A), the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Thereafter, the specific identification information light emission control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 104(A), the special symbol lamps constituting the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are illuminated in a manner indicating a miss),
Thereafter, when the variable display that was being executed before the power failure is not completed while the start-up preparation display is being displayed and before the confirmation movable control is performed, the display means displays a restoration display (for example, as shown in FIG. 104(A), the portion where the restoration display 132SG510 is displayed),
Thereafter, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 103(B), the initial movement of each movable body is performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is capable of performing confirmation movable control in an appropriate manner.
The gaming machine of form 21-4 is
Further provided with a reservation storage means (for example, a special chart reservation storage unit 132SG151 shown in FIG. 9) capable of storing reservation information related to variable display,
If a power outage occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on (for example, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by hot start),
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 104(B), the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Thereafter, the specific identification information light emission control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 104(B), the special symbol lamps constituting the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are illuminated in a manner indicating a miss),
Thereafter, while the start-up preparation display is being displayed and before the confirmation movable control is performed, when the variable display that was being executed before the power outage is terminated and the variable display is started based on the hold information that was stored before the power outage, the display means displays the restoration in progress display (for example, as shown in FIG. 104(B), the portion where the restoration in progress display 132SG510 is displayed),
Thereafter, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 104(B), the initial movement of each movable body is performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the movement of the movable body due to the confirmation movement control is not started when a display corresponding to the variable display is displayed on the display means (which would interfere with the confirmation work).

[Form 22]
The gaming machine of form 22-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the on-frame movable body 132SG01, the chance button 631B),
A light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
Display means (e.g., image display device 5);
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) is provided.
When the power is turned on, the movable body control means can perform confirmation movement control to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the operation confirmation control process shown in Figures 31 and 32, thereby performing the initial operation of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the above-frame movable body 132SG101).
The light emission control means can perform initialization-responsive light emission control to cause a plurality of light emission means to emit light in a manner corresponding to initialization (for example, as shown in Figures 61 and 62, a portion that causes frame LEDs 9a and 9b, an on-board movable body LED 9d, an under-board movable body LED 9e, an on-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g to emit light in an initialization notification manner).
The display means is capable of displaying a startup preparation display (for example, a startup preparation display 132SG500 shown in FIG. 102(D)) when the power is turned on,
When power is turned on with initialization (for example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start),
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 61, the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Thereafter, the initialization-compatible light emission control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 61, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board-mounted movable body LED 9d, the board-mounted movable body LED 9e, the frame-mounted movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are illuminated in an initialization notification mode).
Thereafter, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 61, the initial operations of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board face-line 32B, the on-frame movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B are performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is easy to recognize that power supply to the gaming machine has started through the startup preparation display, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows confirmation of the initialization-compatible light-emitting control without being distracted by the movable body operating through the confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 22-2 is
Further provided with light emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 9a and 9b, an on-board movable body LED 9d, an under-board movable body LED 9e, an on-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
If a power outage occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on (for example, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by hot start),
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 105(A), the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Thereafter, a light emission control during recovery is performed to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a pattern during recovery (for example, as shown in FIG. 105(A), the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper board movable body LED 9d, the lower board movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are caused to emit light in a manner corresponding to the state that recovery is being performed).
Thereafter, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 105(A), the initial movement of each movable body is performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the movement of the movable body due to the confirmation movement control does not begin when the light-emitting means is emitting light in a light-emitting pattern corresponding to the variable display (which would interfere with the confirmation work).

The gaming machine of form 22-3 is
Further provided with light emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 9a and 9b, an on-board movable body LED 9d, an under-board movable body LED 9e, an on-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
If a power outage occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on (for example, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by hot start),
The startup preparation display is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 105(B), the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Thereafter, a light emission control during recovery is performed to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a pattern during recovery (for example, as shown in FIG. 105(B), the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper board movable body LED 9d, the lower board movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are caused to emit light in a manner corresponding to the state of being in recovery).
Thereafter, when the variable display that was being executed before the power outage is completed while the start-up preparation display is being displayed and before the confirmation movable control is performed, background display corresponding light emission control is performed, in which the light emission control means causes the light emission means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the background display (for example, as shown in FIG. 105(B), a portion that causes the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the board movable body LED 9d, the board movable body LED 9e, the frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g to emit light in a manner corresponding to the background image).
Thereafter, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 105(B), the initial movement of each movable body is performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the movement of the movable body due to the confirmation movement control does not begin when the light-emitting means is emitting light in a light-emitting pattern corresponding to the variable display (which would interfere with the confirmation work).

The gaming machine of form 22-4 is
Further provided with light emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 9a and 9b, an on-board movable body LED 9d, an under-board movable body LED 9e, an on-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
When a power outage occurs during one of multiple round games and the power is then turned on (for example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a hot start after a power outage occurs during a round game),
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 106(A), the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Thereafter, a light emission control during recovery is performed to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a pattern during recovery (for example, as shown in FIG. 106(A), the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper board movable body LED 9d, the lower board movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are caused to emit light in a manner corresponding to the state of being in recovery).
Thereafter, if the one round of play that was being executed before the power outage has not ended while the start preparation display is being displayed and before the confirmation movement control is performed, the light emission control during recovery continues (for example, as shown in FIG. 106(A), if the round of play that was executed before the power outage has not ended while the start preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed, the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the upper board movable body LED 9d, the lower board movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g continue to emit light in a manner corresponding to the fact that they are being restored).
Thereafter, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 105(B), the initial movement of each movable body is performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the movement of the movable body due to the confirmation movement control is not started (when the light emitting means is emitting light in a light emitting pattern corresponding to round play (which would interfere with the confirmation work)).

The gaming machine of form 22-5 is
Further provided with light emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 9a and 9b, an on-board movable body LED 9d, an under-board movable body LED 9e, an on-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
When a power outage occurs during one of multiple round games and the power is then turned on (for example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a hot start after a power outage occurs during a round game),
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 106(A), the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Thereafter, a light emission control during recovery is performed to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a pattern during recovery (for example, as shown in FIG. 106(A), the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper board movable body LED 9d, the lower board movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are caused to emit light in a manner corresponding to the state of being in recovery).
Thereafter, when the one round of play that was being executed before the power outage ends and the next round of play is started while the start preparation display is being displayed and before the confirmation movement control is performed, the light emission control during recovery continues (for example, as shown in FIG. 106(B) , when the round of play that was executed before the power outage ends while the start preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper board movable body LED 9d, the lower board movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g continue to emit light in a manner corresponding to the fact that they are being restored).
Thereafter, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 106(B), the initial movement of each movable body is performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the movement of the movable body due to the confirmation movement control is not started when the light-emitting means is emitting light in a light-emitting pattern corresponding to round play (which would interfere with the confirmation work).

[Form 23]
The gaming machine of form 23-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the on-frame movable body 132SG01, the chance button 631B),
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
Display means (e.g., image display device 5);
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) is provided.
The movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally when the power is turned on (for example, a part that performs the initial operation of the on-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101 by the performance control CPU 120 executing the operation confirmation control process shown in Figures 31 and 32).
The game control means
When the result of the variable display of the normal identification information is a predetermined display result, it is possible to control the normal variable means to be in an easy-to-enter state (for example, when the result of the variable display of the normal pattern is a win (normal pattern win), an opening control is executed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B in an open state for a predetermined period),
When a power outage occurs when the normal variable means is in the easy-entry state and the power is turned on, it is possible to perform special control to return the normal variable means to the easy-entry state (for example, if a power outage occurs when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state based on the occurrence of a normal symbol win, a portion controls the variable winning ball device 6B to the open state again based on the pachinko game machine 1 being started by a hot start).
The display means is capable of displaying a startup preparation display (e.g., startup preparation display 132SG500) when the power is turned on,
When the power is cut off while the normal variable means is in the easy-entry state and then the power is turned on (for example, when the power is cut off when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, and then the pachinko game machine 1 is turned off and then started up by a hot start),
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 107(A), the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Then, the special control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 107(A), the variable winning ball device 6B is changed to the open state),
Thereafter, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 107(A), the initial movement of each movable body is performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is easy to recognize that power supply to the gaming machine has started by the start-up preparation display, and when the power is cut off when the normal variable means is in an easy-to-enter state, and when the power is turned on (power outage is restored), it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows the player to quickly confirm that the normal variable means is in the same easy-to-enter state as before the power was cut off, without being distracted by the movable body that operates by the confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 23-2 is
When the power is cut off while the normal variable means is in the easy-entry state and then the power is turned on (for example, when the power is cut off when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, and then the pachinko game machine 1 is turned off and then started up by a hot start),
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 107(A), the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Then, the special control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 107(A), the variable winning ball device 6B is changed to the open state),
Thereafter, when the game medium enters the normal variable means, which is in the easy-to-enter state due to the special control, while the start-up preparation display is being displayed and before the confirmation movable control is performed, the display means displays a recovery display (for example, as shown in FIG. 107(A), the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed after a game ball enters the variable winning ball device 6B, which is in the open state),
Thereafter, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 107(A), the initial movement of each movable body is performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is capable of performing confirmation movable control in an appropriate manner.

The gaming machine of form 23-3 is
When a power outage occurs during the variable display of normal identification information, resulting in a predetermined display result, and the power is then turned on (for example, when the variable display of normal symbols has been executed before the power outage occurs and the pachinko game machine 1 has been started in a hot start mode),
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 107(B), the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Thereafter, the normal variable means is controlled to be in the easy-entry state (for example, as shown in FIG. 107(B), the variable winning ball device 6B is changed to the open state),
Thereafter, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 107(A), the initial movement of each movable body is performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is capable of performing confirmation movable control in an appropriate manner.

[Form 24]
The gaming machine of form 24-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the on-frame movable body 132SG01, the chance button 631B),
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
Display means (e.g., image display device 5);
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) is provided.
The movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally when the power is turned on (for example, a part that performs the initial operation of the on-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101 by the performance control CPU 120 executing the operation confirmation control process shown in Figures 31 and 32).
The game control means
During the advantageous state, it is possible to control the variable means to an easy-entry state in which the game medium is easy to enter (for example, a part that controls the special variable winning ball device 7 to an open state),
When a power interruption occurs while the variable means is in the easy-entry state, and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform special control to return the variable means to the easy-entry state (for example, if a power interruption occurs while the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the open state, a portion controls the special variable winning ball device 7 to the open state again based on the fact that the pachinko game machine 1 has been started by a hot start).
The display means
When the power is turned on, it is possible to display a startup preparation display (for example, the startup preparation display 132SG500 shown in FIG. 102(D)).
When a power outage occurs during the advantageous state and the power is then turned on, it is possible to display a restoration display (for example, as shown in FIG. 108, the portion where the restoration display 132SG510 is displayed),
When the power is cut off during the advantageous state while the variable means is in the easy-entry state and control is being performed, and then the power is turned on (for example, when a power cut occurs during a jackpot game while the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the open state as a round game, and the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a hot start),
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 108, the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Then, the special control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 108, the part that changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the open state),
Thereafter, the restoration in progress display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 108, the restoration in progress display 132SG510 is displayed),
Thereafter, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 108, the initial movement of each movable body is performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is easy to recognize that power supply to the gaming machine has started by the start-up preparation display, and when the power is cut off when the variable means is in an easy-to-enter state, and when the power is turned on (power outage is restored), it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows the player to quickly confirm that the variable means is in the same easy-to-enter state as before the power was cut off, without being distracted by the movable body that operates by the confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 24-2 is
In the advantageous state, it is possible to play multiple rounds of games (for example, as shown in FIG. 8, a portion in which 3 to 10 rounds of games can be played as a jackpot game),
In a round game, it is possible to control the variable means to the easy-entry state and control the variable means to the non-entry state (for example, a part that controls the special winning ball device 7 to an open state and a part that controls it to a closed state in a round game).
When the power is cut off while the variable means is in the easy-entry state and the power is then turned on (for example, when a power cut occurs during a jackpot game and the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the open state as a round game, and the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a hot start),
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 108, the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Then, the special control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 108, the part that changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the open state),
Thereafter, when the special control in one round of play ends and control is performed to make the variable means in the next round of play unable to enter while the start-up preparation display is being displayed, the recovery display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 108, when the round of play ends and the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the wall s state while the start-up preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed, the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed).
Thereafter, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 108, the initial movement of each movable body is performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is capable of performing confirmation movable control in an appropriate manner.

[Form 25]
The gaming machine of form 25-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, the on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
a display means (for example, an image display device 5),
the movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control (e.g., operation confirmation control) to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally when power is turned on,
The display means
When power is turned on with initialization (for example, cold start processing), an initialization display (for example, initialization notification display 132SG600) indicating that initialization has been performed can be displayed.
When power is turned on with initialization,
The initialization display is displayed,
Thereafter, the confirmation movable control is performed,
After that, after the confirmation movable control is completed, the display of the initialization display is terminated (see FIGS. 109 and 110).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to quickly confirm that the gaming machine has been initialized without being distracted by the movable body that operates by the confirmation movable control, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not prevent confirmation of whether the visual initialization notification has been completed by the movable body that operates by the confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 25-2 is
The period from power-on with initialization to the confirmation movement control being performed is longer than the period from power-on without initialization to the confirmation movement control being performed (for example, the period from power-on with initialization (startup with cold start processing) to the operation confirmation control being performed is longer than the period from power-on without initialization (startup with hot start processing) to the operation confirmation control being performed),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which, when the power is turned on to initialize the machine, confirmation movement control is immediately performed, so that the display of the initialization display does not become visibly observable.

The gaming machine of form 25-3 is
The initialization display is displayed for a predetermined execution period and is hidden after the end of the predetermined execution period;
Even if the start condition is met while the initialization display is being displayed, the initialization display is not hidden (for example, the initialization notification display 132SG600 is displayed for a predetermined execution period (for example, 30 seconds) and is hidden after the predetermined execution period ends, and even if a start winning occurs while the initialization notification display 132SG600 is being displayed, the initialization notification display 132SG600 is hidden and the variable display is not started).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is capable of performing confirmation movable control in an appropriate manner.

The gaming machine of form 25-4 is
If the execution period of the variable display that is started based on the satisfaction of the start condition is longer than the execution period of the initialization display, the initialization display will continue to be displayed until the end of the execution period of the variable display (for example, if the execution period of the variable display that is started based on the occurrence of a start winning is longer than the display period of the initialization notification display 132SG600, the initialization display will continue to be displayed until the end of the execution period of the variable display).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to perform the operation check control in an appropriate manner.

The gaming machine of form 25-5 is
If the execution period of the variable display that starts based on the establishment of the start condition is longer than the execution period of the initialization display, the initialization display continues to be displayed until the end of the execution period of the variable display (for example, after power-on without initialization (startup by hot start processing), the initialization notification display 132SG600 is not displayed, and the background display is performed based on the game status background designation command).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is capable of performing confirmation movable control in an appropriate manner.

[Form 26]
The gaming machine of form 26-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
A first movable body (for example, the chance button 631B),
A second movable body (for example, the on-board movable body 32A),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) is provided.
The distance between the first movable body and the second movable body is closer when the first movable body is located at the advanced position and the second movable body is located at the advanced position than when the first movable body is located at the initial position and the second movable body is located at the initial position (see Figure 111).
The movable body control means
When power is turned on, it is possible to perform a confirmation operation control (e.g., an operation confirmation control) that moves the first movable body and the second movable body by an operation to confirm that the first movable body and the second movable body are operating normally,
The confirmation movement control is a control in which the first movable body is moved from the initial position to the advanced position and the second movable body is moved from the initial position to the advanced position so that the movement periods of the first movable body and the second movable body overlap, and then the first movable body is moved from the advanced position to the initial position and the second movable body is moved from the advanced position to the initial position so that the movement periods of the first movable body and the second movable body do not overlap (for example, in the movement confirmation control, the chance button 631B and the on-board movable body 32A simultaneously start moving from the origin position to the performance position so that their respective initial movement periods overlap (see FIG. 111(B)), and then the chance button 631B moves downward from the performance position and stops at the origin position so that their respective initial movement periods do not overlap (see FIG. 111(C)), and then the on-board movable body 32A moves upward from the performance position and stops at the origin position (see FIG. 111(D)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to simultaneously confirm that the first movable body can operate normally in the advanced position and that the second movable body can operate normally in the advanced position, thereby simplifying the confirmation work, and at the same time, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows the movement of the first movable body from the advanced position to the origin position and the movement of the second movable body from the advanced position to the origin position, which are difficult to confirm, to be confirmed individually.

The gaming machine of form 26-2 is
Further provided with a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The performance execution means is capable of executing a movable body performance using the first movable body and the second movable body,
When the movable body performance is executed, the movement control means is capable of performing a performance movement control in which the first movable body is moved from an initial position to an advanced position and the second movable body is moved from the initial position to an advanced position so that the movement periods of the first movable body and the second movable body do not overlap, and thereafter the first movable body is moved from the advanced position to the initial position and the second movable body is moved from the advanced position to the initial position so that the movement periods of the first movable body and the second movable body overlap,
The confirmation movement control is a control for moving the first movable body and the second movable body in a manner that does not include the movement of the first movable body and the second movable body in the performance movement control (for example, for the on-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B that perform a performance movement in which the first movable body and the second movable body come into contact (or overlap), in the movement confirmation control, an initial movement is performed in an operation manner that does not include the performance movement described in Figures 112 (B) to (D) (for example, a manner in which the on-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B are moved forward separately)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is capable of performing confirmation movable control in an appropriate manner.

The gaming machine of form 26-3 is
Further provided is a detection means (for example, a performance position sensor 132SG134) capable of detecting that the second movable body is disposed at the advanced position,
The movement of the first movable body arranged at the advance position in the confirmation movement control toward the initial position is performed on the condition that the second movable body is arranged at the advance position by the detection means (for example, a part that causes the movement of the first movable body (e.g., the on-board movable body 32A) arranged at the performance position in the movement confirmation control toward the origin position to be performed on the condition that the second movable body (e.g., the below-board movable body 32B) is detected by the performance position sensor 132SG134).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is capable of performing confirmation movable control in an appropriate manner.

The gaming machine of form 26-4 is
The movable body control means is capable of performing return control to move the movable body, including the first movable body and the second movable body, to the initial position when the movable body is not positioned at the initial position when the power is turned on (for example, before the long initial operation control is started, when the movable body, including the first movable body and the second movable body, is not positioned at the origin position, return control to move the movable body to the initial position (for example, a part where short initial operation control of the on-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101) is performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is capable of performing confirmation movable control in an appropriate manner.

[Form 27]
The gaming machine of form 27-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
A first movable body (for example, the under-board movable body 32B),
A second movable body (for example, a frame-mounted movable body 132SG101),
a movable body control means,
The first movable body is provided on a game board (for example, a game board 2),
The second movable body is provided in a game frame (for example, an opening/closing door frame 3a),
The movable body control means
When power is turned on, it is possible to perform a confirmation movement control (e.g., an operation confirmation control) that moves the first movable body and the second movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the first movable body and the second movable body are operating normally,
As the confirmation movement control, an operation is performed to move the first movable body from the initial position to the advanced position, and while the first movable body is stopped at the advanced position, an operation is performed to confirm that the second movable body is operating normally (for example, while the under-board movable body 32B moves from the origin position to the performance position and stops at the performance position (see Figure 57 (F)), the frame-mounted movable body 132SG101 moves from the origin position to the performance position, and then moves from the performance position to the origin position; see Figures 57 (G) to (I)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine can be provided in which the first movable body being placed in the advance position during confirmation movable control indicates that the confirmation movable control has not ended, and the operation of the second movable body is started when the first movable body is placed in the advance position, so that the confirmation movable control of the second movable body is not overlooked.

The gaming machine of form 27-2 is
Further provided is a detection means (for example, a performance position sensor 132SG104) capable of detecting that the second movable body is placed in an initial position,
The movement of the first movable body arranged at the advance position in the confirmation movement control toward the initial position is performed on the condition that the second movable body is arranged at the initial position by the detection means (for example, the movement of the first movable body (e.g., the under-board movable body 32B) arranged at the performance position in the movement confirmation control toward the origin position is performed on the condition that the second movable body (e.g., the under-board movable body 32B) is detected by the performance position sensor 132SG104).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is capable of performing confirmation movable control in an appropriate manner.

An embodiment of a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. In the following, the front side of Figure 1 will be referred to as the front (front face) side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the back side will be referred to as the rear (rear face) side, and the description will be based on the up, down, left, and right directions when viewing the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the front side. Note that the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment refers to the surface facing the player playing on the pachinko gaming machine 1. Furthermore, in describing each step in a flowchart, for example, "Step S1" may be abbreviated as "S1" or "132SGS1," and "Normal Reach" may be abbreviated as "N Reach" and "Super Reach" as "SP Reach."

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of its main components. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is broadly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 that forms the gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. A gaming area is formed on the gaming board 2, and gaming balls, serving as gaming media, are launched into this gaming area by a predetermined ball launching device. A door frame 3a with a glass window is provided on the gaming machine frame 3 so as to be rotatable about its left side. The door frame 3a is configured to open and close the gaming area, and the gaming area can be seen through the glass window when the door frame 3a is closed.

Note that "variable display" of special symbols refers to, for example, the variable display of multiple types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described below). Variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. When special symbols or the normal symbols described below vary, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. When decorative symbols described below vary, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that variation also includes the display of a certain symbol flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as the display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described below). Note that variable display is sometimes referred to as variable display or variation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as the "first special symbol," and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as the "second special symbol." A special symbol game using the first special symbol is also referred to as the "first special symbol game," and a special symbol game using the second special symbol is also referred to as the "second special symbol game." The special symbol display device that variably displays the special symbols may be of one type. The special symbols on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are composed of multiple lamps (LEDs). When the variable display is stopped, the CPU 103 can light up these multiple lamps in a combination that corresponds to the variable display result.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or organic EL (electroluminescence) display, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, a variable display of multiple types of decorative symbols (such as symbols showing numbers, etc.) as decorative identification information different from the special symbols is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Note that the special symbol games and variable display of decorative symbols that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

The screen of the image display device 5 may be provided with a display area for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display that is currently being executed. The pending display and active display are collectively referred to as a variable display-compatible display corresponding to a variable display.

The number of reserved variable displays is also referred to as the reserved memory number. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, each consisting of multiple LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold indicator 25A displays the number of first hold memories by the number of lit LEDs. The second hold indicator 25B displays the number of second hold memories by the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided to the right of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept open to allow game balls to enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning opening, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (a standard electric device) forms a second start winning opening that changes between a closed state and an open state due to the solenoid 81 (see Figure 2). The variable winning ball device 6B, for example, includes a device with a movable piece that can move back and forth. When the solenoid 81 is off, the movable piece is retracted from the game board surface to a retracted position, making it difficult for game balls to flow down the top surface of the movable piece, resulting in a closed state where game balls cannot enter the second start winning opening (also referred to as the second start winning opening being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is on, the variable winning ball device 6B has a movable piece that protrudes forward from the game board surface to a protruding position, allowing game balls to flow down the top surface of the movable piece, resulting in an open state where game balls can enter the second start winning opening (also referred to as the second start winning opening being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number of prize balls (e.g., three) are paid out and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to the above-mentioned device, as long as it can change between a closed state and an open state.

General winning openings 10 are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in Figure 1, three locations at the bottom left of the game area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), and are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) are paid out as prize balls.

To the right of the variable prize ball device 6B is a special variable prize ball device 7 with a large prize opening. The special variable prize ball device 7 has a large prize opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 2), and the large prize opening door forms the large prize opening as a specific area that can be switched between an open state and a closed state.

As an example, in the special variable prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize door (for the special electric device) is in the off state, the large prize door closes the large prize door, preventing game balls from entering (passing through) the large prize door. On the other hand, in the special variable prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize door is in the on state, the large prize door opens the large prize door, making it easier for game balls to enter the large prize door.

When a gaming ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of gaming balls (for example, 14) are paid out as prize balls. When a gaming ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a gaming ball enters, for example, the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10.

When a game ball enters any of the prize slots, including the general prize slot 10, it is also referred to as a "win." In particular, a win at a start slot (first start slot, second start slot) is also referred to as a start slot.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in Figure 1, the lower left of the play area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like, and displays a variety of normal symbols as normal identification information that differs from special symbols. Normal symbols are represented by numbers from "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". Normal symbols may also include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This type of variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

Below the variable winning ball device 6B, a passing gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a regular game is played.

A regular symbol pending indicator 25C is provided below the regular symbol display 20. The regular symbol pending indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the regular symbol pending memory count, which is the number of regular symbol games pending execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is equipped with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls as they flow down, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L and 8R are provided at the upper left and right positions of the opening and closing door frame 3a to play and output sound effects, etc. Frame LEDs 9a and 9b are provided at the top and left and right sides of the opening and closing door frame 3a to surround the game area. Furthermore, an attacker LED 9c is provided near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (above the image display device 5 in Figure 1), there are provided an above-board movable body 32A and an below-board movable body 32B that operate in accordance with the effects. Furthermore, the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B are provided with movable body LEDs 9d and 9e, the frame-top movable body 132SG121 is provided with a frame-top movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B is provided with a chance button LED 9g. The movable body LEDs 9d and 9e, the button LED 9g, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, and the attack LED 9c are sometimes collectively referred to as the game effect lamp 9.

A ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided at the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3. The ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is operated by the player or the like to launch gaming balls toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

A ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided at a predetermined position on the opening and closing door frame 3a below the gaming area to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or gaming balls loaned from a designated ball loaning machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may also be provided with a payout section (ball supply tray) separate from the upper tray, from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

In addition, an operation unit 600 is provided in the center of the bottom of the opening and closing door frame 3a. The operation unit 600 includes a chance button 631B that can be pressed by the player, and a lever body 631A that can be pushed and pulled back and forth by the player and is rotatable. The chance button 631B can move up and down between an origin position and an operation detection position below the origin position, and can also move between the origin position and a protruding position that protrudes upward from the origin position. In addition, a cross key that constitutes the selection button 132SG35 for setting effects such as volume is provided in the upper tray portion of the opening and closing door frame 3a.

The operation unit 600 is provided with a button sensor 635B (see Figure 2) for detecting the player's operation (action) on the chance button 631B, an origin position sensor 635C (see Figure 2) for detecting whether the chance button 631B is located at the origin position, a protruding position sensor 635D (see Figure 2) for detecting whether the chance button 631B is located at the protruding position, a vibration motor 635E (see Figure 2) for vibrating the chance button 631B, an advance/retract motor 635F (see Figure 2) for moving the chance button 631B back and forth between the origin position and the protruding position, a push/pull sensor 625Y (see Figure 2) consisting of a push sensor and a pull sensor for detecting the forward/backward movement of the lever body 631A, and a protruding position sensor 625C for detecting whether the lever body 631A is located at the protruding position. The selection button 132SG35 is also provided with an up/down/left/right sensor 132SG36 (see Figure 2), which consists of an up sensor, a down sensor, a left sensor, and a right sensor that detects operation of the selection button 132SG35's cross key in the up/down/left/right directions.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a lever body 631A and a chance button 631B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

The opening and closing door frame 3a has three performance units: the first performance unit 132SG100 attached to the upper center, the second performance unit 132SG200 attached to the upper left, and the third performance unit 132SG300 attached to the upper right. The first performance unit 132SG100 is provided with a frame-mounted movable body 132SG121 that can move between the origin position and the performance position, as described below.

The back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11 housed in a board case (not shown). The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting change switch 52 (see Figure 2). As will be described later, the jackpot probability in this feature section 132SG is set to 1/200, but the present invention is not limited to this. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be placed in a setting change state by operating the setting change switch 52, and the jackpot probability may be changed by operating the setting key 51 in this setting change state.

A display monitor 29 (see Figure 2) is located in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 30 (see Figure 2) is located to the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and display changeover switch 30 are located directly in front of the main board 11 when viewing the back side of the gaming board 2 with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as the consecutive win ratio, winning combination ratio, and base. The consecutive win ratio is the proportion of the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning slot (attacker) out of the total number of winning balls. The winning combination ratio is the proportion of the number of winning balls that have entered the second start winning slot (electric chute) and the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning slot (attacker) out of the total number of winning balls. The base is the proportion of the total number of winning balls to the number of game balls shot out.
The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed by the opening and closing door frame 3a.

(Outline of game progress)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player rotating the ball-hitting operation handle provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 while the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on that passage cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on that passage is put on hold up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed, the normal symbol display result will be "normal winning." On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as the confirmed normal symbol, the normal symbol display result will be "normal losing." When a "normal winning" occurs, opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B.

Furthermore, if a game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when a special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to the jackpot game state described below (when a start winning occurs but the special game based on that start winning cannot be played immediately), the execution of the special game based on that entry will be suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In a special game, if a specific special symbol (a jackpot symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol varies depending on the type of jackpot, as described below) is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it is a "jackpot," and if a special symbol other than the jackpot symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as a stopped symbol, it is a "miss." Note that "misses" in this pachinko gaming machine 1 include "misses with time reduction," in which the next variable display is controlled to a high base state (time-reduced state) without going through a jackpot game.

Once the display result in the special game shows "jackpot," the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state, which is advantageous for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or until the number of game balls entering the large prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). This predetermined period is the maximum period during which the large prize opening can be opened in one round, and will hereinafter be referred to as the maximum opening period. This cycle in which the large prize opening is opened is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined maximum number of times (10 times, 3 times, etc.) is reached.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can win prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is advantageous to the player. The more rounds played in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the maximum opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A "jackpot" has a set type of jackpot. For example, there are multiple types of jackpot opening modes (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after a jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, etc.), and the jackpot type is set accordingly. There may be jackpot types that offer many prize balls, jackpot types that offer few prize balls, or jackpot types that offer almost no prize balls.

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may enter a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (the period during which the special symbol fluctuates) compared to the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning slot by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (the period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) compared to the normal state and by increasing the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in a regular symbol game compared to the normal state. The time-saving state is advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of fluctuation of special symbols (especially the second special symbol).

The time-saving state continues until one of the following conditions is met: a predetermined number of special games have been played, or the next jackpot game state has begun. When the condition for the time-saving state is met, the predetermined number of special games have been played, this is also called a "time-saving state with a cut-off count" (time-saving with a cut-off count).

The normal state refers to a gaming state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot gaming state that are advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state. It is a state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in a normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the display result in a special game will be a "jackpot," is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified recovery process is not executed after power is turned on). A state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and a state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state.

(Progression of the production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (such as notifying the progress of the game or adding excitement to the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. These effects are described below. Note that these effects are executed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of these displays, they may also be executed as sound output from the speakers 8L, 8R, the turning on and off of the game effect lamp 9, the movement of the movable body 32, or as effects using any effect device including some or all of these.

As an effect that is executed in accordance with the progress of the game, the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 begin to display variable decorative symbols in response to the start of the first or second special symbol game. At the timing when the display result (also called the confirmed special symbol) in the first or second special symbol game is statically displayed, the confirmed decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols is also statically displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols begins to when it ends, the variable display of the decorative symbols may assume a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, as described below.

In addition, when the above-mentioned reach mode is reached during the variable display of decorative symbols, a reach effect is executed. Pachinko gaming machine 1 executes multiple types of reach effects, with different rates (also called jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation) of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" depending on the effect mode. Reach effects include, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot," a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative pattern (for example, "7") is displayed stopped and aligned on a predetermined effective line in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

When the display result of the special game is a "miss," the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may display a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may display a fixed decorative symbol of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. Other effects, such as preview effects that predict the jackpot reliability, are executed during the variable display of decorative symbols. Preview effects include preview effects that predict the jackpot reliability in the currently executing variable display, and pre-read preview effects that predict the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is reserved). Pre-read preview effects may be executed that change the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode that is different from normal.

In addition, the image display device 5 may temporarily stop the decorative symbols while they are being displayed in a variable manner, and then resume the variable display, thereby executing a pseudo-consecutive effect that makes a single variable display appear as multiple variable displays.

Even during a jackpot gaming state, a jackpot effect is executed to notify the player of the jackpot gaming state. The jackpot effect may include an effect to notify the number of rounds or an upgrade effect to indicate that the value of the jackpot gaming state is increasing.

In addition, during the first round of a jackpot (first jackpot) in normal mode, the large prize opening is opened in the jackpot opening pattern (always open), so the effect shown in Figure 52 (F8) is displayed.In the first round of a jackpot in time-saving mode, the large prize opening is opened in the small prize opening pattern (repeatedly opening and closing for a short period of time), so the effect shown in Figure 40 (C2) is displayed.In addition, during the second round of a jackpot in time-saving mode, the large prize opening is opened in the jackpot opening pattern (always open), so the displays, various lamps, and sounds will be different between the first and second rounds.

Also, for example, when a special game or the like is not being played, a demo image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like, as shown in Fig. 3. In addition, various boards, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board, are arranged on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also equipped. The various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards configured to realize specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on electronic circuit boards.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17, and by operating the power switch 91 (turning it on), power from an AC power source, such as an external power source like a commercial power supply, such as 100V AC, can be supplied from the power supply board 17 to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 is equipped with, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), and a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (for example, 12V DC or 5V DC).

The main board 11 is the main control board and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of special games (including reserved game management), execution of regular games (including reserved game management), jackpot game status, game status, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a single-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock 106.

The CPU 103 executes the program stored in ROM 101 to control the progress of the game (processing that realizes the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in ROM 101 (such as data on variation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) is used, and RAM 102 is used as the main memory. RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM, where the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if part or all of the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. Note that all or part of the program stored in ROM 101 may be deployed to RAM 102 and executed on RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (gaming random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The gaming random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specified computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals that control (drive) the first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first hold display device 25A, second hold display device 25B, normal symbol hold display device 25C, etc., and solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as detection signals indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switches (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B) and count switches (first count switch 132SG023, second count switch 132SG024) and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The switch circuit 110 receives a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal that stops control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal turns off when the specified power supply voltage used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 exceeds a specified value, and turns on when the specified power supply voltage remains below the specified value for a period of time that exceeds the power-off reference time. The clear signal turns on, for example, in response to pressing the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The output circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81 or solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

The main board 11 is connected to a display monitor 29, a display switch 30, a setting key 51, a setting switch 52, and a door open sensor 90. The door open sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3, including the opening and closing door frame 3a.

As part of its control of the game's progress, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the game's progress, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 in accordance with the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. These presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various decisions made by the main board 11 (e.g., the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable patterns used when executing the special game (details will be described later)), the game status (e.g., the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot slot, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, error notifications, and notifications of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, ROM 121, RAM 122, display control unit 123, random number circuit 124, and I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes programs stored in ROM 121, and performs processing to execute performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing to realize the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). During this processing, various data (such as data from various tables) stored in ROM 121 is used, and RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute an effect based on detection signals (signals output when an operation by the player is detected, and which appropriately indicate the content of the operation) from the push/pull sensor 625Y, protruding position sensor 625C, button sensor 635B, origin position sensor 635C, protruding position sensor 635D, up/down/left/right sensor 132SG36, origin position sensors 132SG103, 132SG113, 132SG123, 132SG133, and effect position sensors 132SG104, 132SG114, 132SG124, 132SG134.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes presentations based on instructions to execute presentations from the presentation control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays effect images on the image display unit 5 by supplying the image display unit 5 with video signals corresponding to the effect to be executed based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 also supplies sound designation signals (signals designating the sound to be output) to the audio control board 13 and lamp signals (signals designating the lamp on/off state) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect images and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies signals to operate the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the above-frame movable body 132SG121, and the chance button 631B to the drive circuits that drive each movable body or the vibration motor 635E, the advance/retract motor 635F, and the drive motors 132SG102, 132SG112, 132SG122, and 132SG132 of each movable body.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the on/off of the lamp.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 may be configured to perform control of sound output, lamp on/off (such as supplying sound designation signals and lamp signals), and control of the above-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, above-frame movable body 132SG121, and chance button 631B (such as supplying signals to operate each movable body).

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (performance random numbers) used to execute various performances. The performance random numbers may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for receiving performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, sound control board 13, and lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

Figure 13 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S25 shown in Figure 12. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

The start winning determination process detects the occurrence of a start winning, stores pending information in a specified area of RAM 102, and updates the number of pending memories. When a start winning occurs, a random number value is extracted to determine the display result (including the type of jackpot) and variation pattern, and this is stored as pending information. A process may also be executed to predict the display result and variation pattern based on the extracted random number value. After the pending information and number of pending memories are stored, transmission settings are made to send a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the determination results, such as the occurrence of a start winning, the number of pending memories, and the predictive determination. The performance control command for the start winning that has been transmitted and set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special symbol process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 (see FIG. 12).

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag stored in RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S120), transmission settings are made to transmit the corresponding effect control command to the effect control board 12.

The normal special symbol processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). This normal special symbol processing determines whether to start the first or second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. Furthermore, the normal special symbol processing determines (predetermines) whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "jackpot" and, if so, the type of jackpot, before the display result is derived and displayed, based on a random number value for determining the display result. Furthermore, the normal special symbol processing determines a fixed special symbol (either a jackpot symbol or a losing symbol) to be displayed in the special symbol game in accordance with the determined display result. The value of the special symbol process flag is then updated to "1," and the normal special symbol processing ends. The special symbol game using the second special symbol may be executed with priority over the special symbol game using the first special symbol (also known as special symbol 2 priority consumption). Additionally, the order in which game balls enter the first and second starting winning slots may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also known as winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which the decision value compared with the random number value is assigned to the decision result) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern to determine one of several types of fluctuation pattern, based on the results of a pre-determined decision on whether or not the display result will be a "jackpot". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when a fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2", and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special symbol change process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol change process includes processes for making settings to change the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and for measuring the elapsed time since the special symbol began to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special symbol change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special symbol began to change reaches the special symbol change time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol change process ends.

The special symbol stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3." This special symbol stop process includes a setting process to stop the variation of special symbols on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and to stop displaying (derive) the confirmed special symbol that will result in the display of the special symbol. If the display result is a "jackpot," the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4." If the display result is a "miss," the game state is also updated if the game is in a time-saving state or a special probability state and the end of the number-cutting period is confirmed. Once the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop process ends.

The pre-jackpot opening process in step S114 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "4." This pre-jackpot opening process includes processing to start the execution of a round in the jackpot game state and set the large prize opening to an open state, based on factors such as the display result being "jackpot." When the large prize opening is set to an open state, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door. At this time, the maximum open period for the large prize opening to be set and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set, depending on, for example, the type of jackpot. Once these settings are complete, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "5," and the pre-jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "5." This jackpot opening process includes processes such as measuring the time elapsed since the large prize opening was opened, and determining whether it is time to return the large prize opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the large prize opening is to be returned to a closed state, processes such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door are executed, and then the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "6," and the jackpot opening process ends.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "6." This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of rounds that open the large prize slot has been executed has reached the set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. If the number of rounds executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "5." However, if the number of rounds executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "7." Once the value of the special symbol process flag has been updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7." This jackpot end process includes processes such as waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation, which serves as a presentation operation to notify players of the end of the jackpot game state, has elapsed, and making various settings to initiate variable rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When these settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0," and the jackpot end process ends.

Figure 3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a performance control command used in this feature unit 132SG. A performance control command is, for example, two bytes long, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). The first bit of the MODE data (bit 7) is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in Figure 3 is just one example, and other command formats may also be used. Also, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in Figure 3, command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B. Command 81XXH is a variable pattern specification command that specifies the variable pattern (variable display time) of decorative symbols and the like that are variably displayed in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game. Here, XXH represents an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is set according to the instructions given by the performance control command. Note that the variable pattern specification command sets different EXT data depending on the specified variable pattern, etc.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is a presentation control command that specifies variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. For example, as shown in Figure 4 (A), the variable display result notification command sets different EXT data depending on the determination result (pre-determined result) of whether the variable display result is a "miss," "jackpot," or "minor hit," and the determination result (jackpot type determination result) of which of several types of jackpot type will be used if the variable display result is a "jackpot."

For example, as shown in Figure 4 (A), in the variable display result notification commands, command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined result that the variable display result will be "miss." Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command notifying the predetermined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "jackpot A." Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command notifying the predetermined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "jackpot B." Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command notifying the predetermined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "small hit" and the small hit type will be "small hit A." Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command that notifies the predetermined result that the variable display result is "small hit" and the small hit type is "small hit B."

Command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command that specifies the stopping (confirmation) of the variable display of decorative patterns in each of the "left," "center," and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5.

Command 9000H is a power-on command that specifies that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has cold started (the power was turned on with the clear switch 92 pressed down (step S6 was executed because the recovery condition was not met in step S3 of the game control main processing in Figure 12)).

Command 9200H is a power outage recovery command that specifies that the pachinko gaming machine has been hot started (the power was turned on without the clear switch 92 being pressed (step S4 was executed when the recovery condition was met in step S3 of the game control main processing in Figure 12).

Command 95XXH is a game state background designation command that specifies the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game state background designation command is also a command that specifies that the background image displayed on the image display device 5 be updated to a background image that corresponds to the game state. With the game state background designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example.

As shown in FIG. 4(B), as a specific example, command 9500H is a first game state background designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is not performed (low base state, normal state). Command 9501H is a second game state background designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed in the variable display of the second special symbol once after the end of jackpot play for jackpot A (high base state, time-saving state A). Command 9502H is a third game state background designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed in the variable display of the second special symbol up to 685 times after the end of jackpot play for jackpot B (high base state, time-saving state C1). Command 9503H is a fourth game state background designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed in the variable display of the second special symbol up to seven times after the end of jackpot play for jackpot C (high base state, time-saving state B). Command 9504H is a fifth game state background designation command corresponding to a game state (high base state, time-saving state B) in which time-saving control is performed on the variable display of the second special chart up to seven times after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot D. Command 9504H is a sixth game state background designation command corresponding to a game state (high base state, time-saving state C2) in which time-saving control is performed on the variable display of the second special chart up to 685 times after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot E.

Command A0XXH is a start-of-win command (also known as a "fanfare command") that specifies the display of a presentation image indicating the start of a jackpot or small win game state. Command A1XXH is a large prize opening notification command that notifies players that the large prize opening is in an open state during a jackpot or small win game state. Command A2XXH is a large prize opening post-opening notification command that notifies players that the large prize opening has changed from an open state to a closed state during a jackpot or small win game state. Command A3XXH is a end-of-win command that specifies the display of a presentation image at the end of a jackpot or small win game state.

In the hit start designation command and hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set depending on the pre-determined result or the jackpot type determination result, for example by setting the same EXT data as in the variable display result notification command. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. In the large prize opening notification command and the large prize opening after opening notification command, different EXT data is set depending on the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game state or small prize game state (for example, "1" to "10").

Command B100H is a first start port entry designation command that notifies that the first start condition for executing a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A has been met, based on the occurrence of a start prize (first start prize) when a gaming ball that has passed through (entered) the first start port formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first start port switch 22A. Command B200H is a second start port entry designation command that notifies that the second start condition for executing a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B has been met, based on the occurrence of a start prize (second start prize) when a gaming ball that has passed through (entered) the second start port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second start port switch 22B.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command that notifies the first special reserved memory number so that the number of reserved special memory numbers can be identified and displayed in the reserved memory display area 132SG005D, etc. Command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command that notifies the second special reserved memory number so that the number of reserved special memory numbers can be identified and displayed in the reserved memory display area 132SG005D, etc. The first reserved memory number notification command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when a first start port entry designation command is sent, for example, based on the first start condition being met when a gaming ball passes (enters) the first start port. The second reserved memory number notification command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when a second start port entry designation command is sent, for example, based on the second start condition being met when a gaming ball passes (enters) the second start port. Additionally, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command may be sent in response to the start of execution of the special game when either the first or second start condition is met (when the pending memory number decreases).

Instead of the first pending memory count notification command or the second pending memory count notification command, a total pending memory count notification command may be sent to notify the total number of pending memories. In other words, the total pending memory count notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total number of pending memories.

Command C4XXH is a symbol designation command that specifies the winning result at the time of the initial winning. Command C6XXH is a variable category designation command that specifies the variable category of the winning result at the time of the initial winning.

Command D100H is a V-winning notification command that notifies that a V-winning has occurred, that is, that the second count switch 132SG024 has been turned on as a result of the game ball passing through it. Command D2XXH is a remaining second special pattern time-saving count notification command that notifies the number of remaining time-saving controls for the second special pattern in the time-saving state. Command D3XX is a prize ball count notification command that notifies the number of prize balls generated (awarded) as a result of the game ball entering the winning slot. Command E100H is a customer waiting demo specification command that specifies the execution of a customer waiting demo (demo performance).

Figure 5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random number values counted on the main board 11. As shown in Figure 5, in this feature unit 132SG, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of win, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, the random number value MR4 for determining the normal symbol display result, and the random number value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled so that they can be counted on the main board 11. Note that other random number values may be used to enhance the gaming effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by the CPU 103 using different random counters updated by software, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built into the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip separate from the game control microcomputer 100. These random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called gaming random numbers.

Figure 6 shows the variation patterns in this feature section 132SG. In this feature section 132SG, multiple variation patterns are prepared in advance to correspond to the cases where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" or "reach," respectively, and also to correspond to the cases where the variable display result is a "jackpot" or a "small hit." Note that the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" is referred to as the non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as the "non-reach miss variation pattern"), and the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "reach" is referred to as the reach variation pattern (also referred to as the "reach miss variation pattern"). Furthermore, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the miss variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss." The variation pattern corresponding to the variable display result being a "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern. The variation pattern corresponding to the variable display result being a "small hit" is called a small hit variation pattern.

Of these variation patterns, for the jackpot variation pattern, after the same special chart variable display time as the miss variation pattern, an additional 15 seconds of special chart display time is set aside to execute a congratulatory effect to celebrate the fact that the variable display result is a jackpot.

Here, the jackpot fluctuation pattern and the loss fluctuation pattern in this feature unit 132SG have the same period until the variable display result is announced, preventing the player from recognizing in advance whether the variable display result is a jackpot or a loss based on the length of the period until the variable display result is announced.

Note that the jackpot variation pattern in this feature unit 132SG exemplifies a form in which an additional 15-second special chart variable display time is provided for executing a congratulatory effect after the same special chart variable display time as the miss variation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special chart variable display time for executing a congratulatory effect provided in the jackpot variation pattern is not limited to 15 seconds and may vary depending on the game status.

As shown in Figures 6(A) and 6(B), this feature section 132SG has multiple different variation patterns pre-set depending on the special symbol that executes the variable display.

As shown in Figure 6 (A), the fluctuation patterns of the first special symbol, such as the jackpot fluctuation pattern and reach fluctuation pattern, include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed, a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach effect such as Super Reach α or Super Reach β is executed, and a non-reach fluctuation pattern in which no reach effect is executed. Note that while this feature section 132SG has only one normal reach fluctuation pattern, the present invention is not limited to this, and similar to the super reach, multiple normal reach fluctuation patterns may be established, such as normal reach α, normal reach β, etc. Furthermore, three or more super reach fluctuation patterns may also be established for the super reach fluctuation pattern.

The normal reach variation pattern, super reach α variation pattern, and super reach β variation pattern for the first special symbol also include a variation pattern in which a pseudo consecutive effect is executed 1 to 3 times, in which the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and then re-variably displayed during variable display. In this feature unit 132SG, the reach effect executed - normal reach, super reach α, or super reach β - differs depending on the number of times the pseudo consecutive effect is executed. For example, if a pseudo consecutive effect is executed once during variable display, a normal reach reach effect is executed afterwards; if a pseudo consecutive effect is executed twice during variable display, a super reach α reach effect is executed afterwards; and if a pseudo consecutive effect is executed three times during variable display, a super reach β reach effect is executed afterwards.

Furthermore, of the reach effects that can be executed in the variable display of the second special symbol, the Super Reach β reach effect is set to have the highest jackpot expectation, while the Super Reach α reach effect is set to have a lower jackpot expectation than the Super Reach β reach effect. Furthermore, the normal reach reach effect is set to have a lower jackpot expectation than the Super Reach α reach effect (jackpot expectation of reach effects: Super Reach β > Super Reach α > Normal Reach). In other words, in this feature unit 132SG, the more pseudo consecutive effects executed during the variable display, the higher the jackpot expectation of that variable display.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 6 (B), the second special symbol fluctuation patterns in this feature unit 132SG include jackpot fluctuation patterns, small jackpot fluctuation patterns, and miss fluctuation patterns, which are non-reach fluctuation patterns and reach fluctuation patterns with special symbol variable display times that differ from the first special symbol fluctuation patterns (normal reach fluctuation patterns in which the reach performance of a normal reach is executed, and super reach γ fluctuation patterns in which the reach performance of a super reach γ is executed). Of these second special symbol fluctuation patterns, the super reach γ fluctuation pattern is set to have the highest jackpot expectation, and the non-reach fluctuation pattern is set to have the lowest jackpot expectation (jackpot expectation for second special symbols: super reach γ > normal reach > non-reach).

In addition, as will be described later, in this feature unit 132SG, rather than first determining the type of variation pattern, such as a non-reach type, a normal reach type, or a super reach type, and then determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to that determined type, these variation patterns are determined using only the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining the type. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number value for determining the variation pattern type may be provided, and the type of variation pattern may be determined first from these random number values for determining the variation pattern type, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to that determined type.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101 and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of games in the pachinko game machine 1. The CPU 103 also executes a random number generation program, enabling it to generate all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11.

The ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores not only the game control program but also various table data used to control the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting multiple judgment tables shown in Figure 7 and other figures, which are prepared so that the CPU 103 can make various judgments and decisions. The ROM 101 also stores table data constituting multiple control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, as well as a variation pattern judgment table (see Figures 14 to 19) that stores multiple variation patterns that determine the variation modes of each symbol in variable displays such as special and normal symbols.

The determination tables stored in ROM 101 include, for example, display result determination table 1 shown in Figure 7(A), display result determination table 2 shown in Figure 7(B), jackpot type determination table (for first special symbol) shown in Figure 7(C), jackpot type determination table (for second special symbol) shown in Figure 7(D), small jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 7(E), as well as various first special symbol variation pattern determination tables (see Figures 14 and 19), various second special symbol variation pattern determination tables (see Figures 20 to 19), and regular symbol variation pattern determination tables (not shown).

Figures 7(A) and 7(B) are explanatory diagrams showing display result determination table 1 and display result determination table 2. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in ROM 101, and is a table in which a win determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. Display result determination table 1 sets the determination value for a big win and a small win when the variable display special symbol designation buffer (a value that specifies the special symbol that will be variable displayed and is set by the CPU 103 when normal special symbol processing is executed) is 1 (first), i.e., when the first special symbol is the target of variable display. Display result determination table 2 sets the determination value for a big win and a small win when the variable display special symbol designation buffer (a value that specifies the special symbol that will be variable displayed and is set by the CPU 103 when normal special symbol processing is executed) is 2 (second), i.e., when the second special symbol is the target of variable display.

As shown in Figure 7 (A), when the variable display special symbol designation buffer is set to 1, a judgment value corresponding to a big win is set, but a judgment value corresponding to a small win is not set. Therefore, when the first special symbol is the target of variable display, a big win is possible, but a small win will not occur. Furthermore, the probability of winning a big win when the variable display special symbol designation buffer is set to 1 is approximately 1/200.

Also, as shown in Figure 7 (B), when the variable display special designation buffer is set to the second setting, a judgment value corresponding to a big win and a judgment value corresponding to a small win are set. Furthermore, when the variable display special designation buffer is set to the second setting, the probability of winning a big win is approximately 1/200, and the probability of winning a small win is approximately 1/7.

In other words, when the variable display special symbol designation buffer is the first (when the special symbol that performs the variable display is the first special symbol), if the value of MR1 matches one of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hits shown in FIG. 7(A), the CPU 103 determines that the variable display result is a big hit (Big Hit A or Big Hit B). Also, when the variable display special symbol designation buffer is the second (when the special symbol that performs the variable display is the second special symbol), if the value of MR1 matches one of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hits shown in FIG. 7(B), the CPU 103 determines that the variable display result is a big hit (Big Hit B), and if the value of MR1 matches one of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hits shown in FIG. 7(B), the CPU 103 determines that the variable display result is a small hit.

The "probabilities" shown in Figures 7(A) and 7(B) indicate the probability (percentage) of a big hit and the probability (percentage) of a small hit. Furthermore, deciding whether to have a big hit means deciding whether to control the game to a big hit gaming state, but also deciding whether to make the stopped pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A or the second special pattern display device 4B a big hit pattern. Furthermore, deciding whether to have a small hit means deciding whether to control the game to a small hit gaming state, but also deciding whether to make the stopped pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B a small hit pattern.

In addition, in this feature unit 132SG, the CPU 103 determines whether the variable display result is a big hit or a small hit using the display result determination tables shown in Figures 7(A) and 7(B). However, a big hit determination table and a small hit determination table may be provided separately, and the determination of a big hit may be made using a common table for the variable display of the first special pattern and the variable display of the second special pattern, regardless of the variable display special pattern designation buffer, and the determination of a small hit may be made using a separate table depending on the variable display special pattern designation buffer.

In addition, with this feature unit 132SG, when the variable display special chart designation buffer is set to first, no judgment values other than those corresponding to big wins are set as judgment values corresponding to small wins, meaning that small wins are not won. However, some of the judgment values other than those corresponding to big wins can be set as judgment values corresponding to small wins, allowing small wins to be won.

Figures 7(C) and 7(D) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in ROM 101. Of these, Figure 7(C) is a table used when determining the jackpot type using reserved memory based on the gaming ball entering the first start winning slot (i.e., when the first special symbol is variably displayed). Also, Figure 7(D) is a table used when determining the jackpot type using reserved memory based on the gaming ball entering the second start winning slot (i.e., when the second special symbol is variably displayed).

The jackpot type determination table is a table that is referenced to determine the type of jackpot, either jackpot A or jackpot B, based on the jackpot type determination random number (MR2) when a determination is made that the variable display result will be a jackpot pattern. Note that, in this feature unit 132SG, as shown in Figures 7(C) and (D), the jackpot type determination table (for the first special pattern) has two types of jackpots, jackpot A and jackpot B, while the jackpot type determination table (for the second special pattern) has only one type of jackpot, jackpot B. In other words, when the first special pattern is displayed in a variable manner, the jackpot that occurs will be either jackpot A or jackpot B, while when the second special pattern is displayed in a variable manner, only jackpot B will occur.

Figure 7 (E) is an explanatory diagram showing the small win type determination table stored in ROM 101. The small win type determination table is a table that is referenced to determine the type of small win as small win A or small win B based on the random number (MR2) for determining the win type when a determination is made that the variable display result will be a small win pattern. Furthermore, in this feature unit 132SG, if the game ball passes through the second count switch 132SG024 during the small hit game of small hit A, i.e., if a V-winning jackpot occurs, a jackpot game of jackpot type C will be executed, if the game ball passes through the second count switch 132SG024 during the small hit game of small hit B, i.e., if a V-winning jackpot occurs, a jackpot game of jackpot type D or jackpot E will be executed, and if the game ball passes through the second count switch 132SG024 during the small hit game of small hit B, i.e., if a V-winning jackpot occurs, a jackpot game of jackpot type E will be executed. In other words, jackpots C to E are not determined by the random number value MR2 used to determine the type of jackpot extracted at the time of the initial winning, but by whether the game ball passes through the second count switch 132SG024 during play of small jackpot A or small jackpot B.

Here, referring to Figure 8, the jackpot types in this feature section 132SG are explained. In this feature section 132SG, jackpot types A to E are set as jackpot types, and time-saving control is executed after the jackpot gaming state ends.

Of these jackpots A through E, jackpot A is a jackpot in which the large prize entry port is repeatedly changed to a second state advantageous to the player three times (so-called three rounds). Furthermore, the interval period between each round in jackpot A is set to 0.5 seconds. Furthermore, after the jackpot gaming state ends, time-saving control is executed in time-saving state A until a special game is played once for the variable display of the second special symbol, and up to five times for the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol.

Jackpot B is a jackpot in which the large prize slot is changed to a second state advantageous to the player ten times (so-called 10 rounds). The interval period between each round in Jackpot B is set to 0.5 seconds. Furthermore, after the jackpot gaming state ends, time-saving control is executed in time-saving state C1 until a maximum of 685 special game games have been executed targeting the variable display of the second special symbol, or a maximum of 689 special game games have been executed targeting the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol.

Jackpot C is a jackpot in which three rounds (so-called three rounds) are repeated, changing the jackpot entry port to a second state advantageous to the player. Furthermore, the interval period between each round in Jackpot C is set to 0.5 seconds for the first and second rounds, and 30 seconds for the third round. Furthermore, after the jackpot gaming state ends, time-saving control is executed in time-saving state B until a maximum of seven special game games have been played targeting the variable display of the second special symbol, or a maximum of 11 special game games have been played targeting the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol.

Jackpot D is a jackpot that is executed nine times (so-called nine rounds) to change the jackpot entry port to a second state that is advantageous to the player. Furthermore, the interval period between each round in jackpot D is set to 0.5 seconds for the first, second, and fourth through ninth rounds, with the interval period for the third round being set to 30 seconds. Furthermore, after the jackpot game state of jackpot D ends, time-saving control is executed in time-saving state B until a maximum of seven special game games have been executed targeting the variable display of the second special symbol, or until a maximum of 11 special game games have been executed targeting the variable display of the first and second special symbols.

Jackpot E is a jackpot that is executed nine times (so-called nine rounds) to change the jackpot entry port to a second state that is advantageous to the player. Furthermore, the interval period between each round in Jackpot E is set to 0.5 seconds for the first, second, and fourth through ninth rounds, with the interval period for the third round being set to 30 seconds. Furthermore, after the jackpot gaming state of Jackpot E ends, time-saving control is executed in time-saving state C2 until a maximum of 685 special game games have been executed targeting the variable display of the second special symbol, or until a maximum of 689 special game games have been executed targeting the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol.

As such, the interval period between the third round of jackpots C, E, and E is set to 30 seconds, and this feature unit 132SG can execute the promotion effect, described below, as an effect suggesting that the jackpot game will continue through the ninth round over those 30 seconds.

In addition, in each time-saving state, the probability of a "normal hit" increases, making it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole formed by variable winning ball device 6B. In other words, the occurrence of a second start winning makes it easier for the variable display of the second special symbol to be executed, making small hits more likely to occur than in the normal state. Therefore, in the time-saving state and the variable display of the second special symbol up to four times immediately after the time-saving state ends, a jackpot may occur as a result of the variable display of the second special symbol, or a jackpot may occur when the game ball enters a V-shaped hole during a small hit game, resulting in a so-called consecutive jackpot state in which jackpot game states are more likely to occur consecutively.

Furthermore, in time-saving state A after the end of jackpot play for jackpot A, the number of special games in which time-saving control targeting the second special symbol is executed is set to one, and therefore the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot or small jackpot for that one variable display of the second special symbol and any of the variable displays of the second special symbol based on up to four reserved memories that occur during that one variable display of the second special symbol (the total of the probability of a jackpot or small jackpot occurring in the total of five variable displays of the second special symbol mentioned above and the probability of a jackpot occurring when the game ball enters a V) is set to approximately 54%.

Furthermore, in the time-saving state after the end of jackpot play for jackpot D, the number of special games in which time-saving control targeting the second special symbol is executed is set to seven, so the percentage of variable display results in a jackpot or small jackpot for those seven variable displays of the second special symbol and any of the variable displays of the second special symbol based on up to four reserved memories that occur during those seven variable displays of the second special symbol (the sum of the percentage of jackpots or small jackpots occurring in the total of 11 variable displays of the second special symbol mentioned above and the percentage of jackpots occurring when the game ball enters a V) is set to approximately 83%.

Furthermore, in time-saving state C2 after jackpot play on jackpot B or jackpot E ends, the number of special games in which time-saving control targeting the second special symbol is executed is set to 685, so the percentage of variable display results in a jackpot or small jackpot for those 685 variable displays of the second special symbol and for any of the variable displays of the second special symbol based on up to four reserved memories that occur during those 685 variable displays of the second special symbol (the sum of the percentage of jackpots or small jackpots occurring in the above total of 685 variable displays of the second special symbol and the percentage of jackpots occurring when the game ball enters a V) is set to nearly 100%.

Note that, in this feature section 132SG, four types of jackpots are provided: jackpot A to jackpot E; however, the present invention is not limited to this; there may be five or more types of jackpots, or three or fewer types.

The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in Figure 2 may be a backup RAM, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power supply created on a specified power supply board. In other words, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 will be preserved for a specified period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power supply discharges and the backup power supply is no longer able to supply power). In particular, at least data corresponding to the game status, i.e., the control status of the game control means (such as a special chart process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid balls should be stored in the backup RAM. Data corresponding to the control status of the game control means is data necessary to restore the control status to before the power outage, etc., based on that data, when power is restored after a power outage, etc. Furthermore, the data corresponding to the control status and the data indicating the number of unpaid balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

This RAM 102 has a game control data holding area 132SG150, as shown in FIG. 9, which is an area for holding various data used to control the progress of games on the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control data holding area 132SG150 shown in FIG. 9 includes a special game reserve memory unit 132SG151, a regular game reserve memory unit 132SG151C, a game control flag setting unit 132SG152, a game control timer setting unit 132SG153, a game control counter setting unit 132SG154, and a game control buffer setting unit 132SG155.

The special symbol reserve memory unit 132SG151 stores, in order of winning, reserved data for special symbol games (special symbol games using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) in which a game ball has passed (entered) through the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A, resulting in a start winning (first start winning), but which have not yet started, and reserved data for special symbol games (special symbol games using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) in which a game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, resulting in a start winning (second start winning), but which have not yet started.

As an example, the special chart reserve memory unit 132SG151 associates the order of winning (the order of game ball detection) at the first start winning slot or the second start winning slot with a reserve number, and stores numerical data indicating the start slot buffer value, the random number value MR1 for determining the variable display result extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104 based on the first start condition being met when the game ball passes (enters), the random number value MR2 for determining the type of win, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, as reserve data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (e.g., "8"). The maximum number of reserve data items stored in response to winning at the first start winning slot and the maximum number of reserve data items stored in response to winning at the second start winning slot are each four.

The reserved data stored in the special symbol reserved memory unit 132SG151 thus indicates that the execution of a special symbol game using the first special symbol or a special symbol game using the second special symbol is on hold, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will occur based on the variable display results (special symbol display results) in these special symbol games.

In addition, the hold information (first hold information) based on the fulfillment of the first start condition when the gaming ball passes (enters) the first start entry port, and the hold information (second hold information) based on the fulfillment of the second start entry when the gaming ball passes (enters) the second start entry port, may be stored in separate hold memory units in association with hold numbers. Furthermore, when the hold information (first hold information) based on the fulfillment of the first start condition when the gaming ball passes (enters) the first start entry port, and the hold information (second hold information) based on the fulfillment of the second start entry when the gaming ball passes (enters) the second start entry port, are stored in separate hold memory units in association with hold numbers, one of the variable display based on the first hold information and the variable display based on the second hold memory information may be executed in priority over the variable display based on the other hold information.

The normal symbol reserve memory unit 132SG151C stores reserve information for normal symbol games in which a gaming ball has been detected by the gate switch 21 but which have not yet been started by the normal symbol display device 20. For example, the normal symbol reserve memory unit 132SG151C associates the gaming balls with reserve numbers in the order in which they are detected by the gate switch 21, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the normal symbol display result extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., based on the passage of the gaming ball as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 132SG152 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated depending on the progress of play on the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 132SG152 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 132SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of games on the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 132SG153 stores data indicating the timer values of multiple types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 132SG154 is provided with multiple types of counters for calculating count values used to control the progress of play in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 132SG154 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 132SG154 may be provided with a random counter that counts some or all of the game random numbers in a manner that allows the CPU 103 to update them using software.

The random counter of the game control counter setting unit 132SG154 stores random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, such as numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR4, as random count values, and the numerical data indicating each random number value is updated periodically or irregularly in accordance with the execution of software by the CPU 103. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be software that updates the random count value separately from the update operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or software that updates the random count value by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 104.

The game control buffer setting unit 132SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of games on the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 132SG155 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of multiple types of buffers.

The ROM 121 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in Figure 2 stores not only performance control programs but also various data tables used to control performance operations. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data constituting multiple judgment tables prepared so that the performance control CPU 120 can make various judgments, decisions, and settings, as well as pattern data constituting various performance control patterns.

As an example, the ROM 121 stores a presentation control pattern table that contains multiple presentation control patterns that the presentation control CPU 120 uses to control presentation operations by various presentation devices (e.g., the image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9, decorative LEDs, presentation models, etc.). The presentation control patterns correspond to various presentation operations executed according to the progress of play on the pachinko gaming machine 1 and are composed of data indicating the control content of those operations. The presentation control pattern table may store, for example, presentation control patterns for when special charts are variable displayed, preview presentation control patterns, and various other presentation control patterns.

The special symbol variable display presentation control pattern corresponds to multiple types of variation patterns and is composed of data indicating the control content of various presentation operations, such as the variable display operation of decorative symbols, presentation display operations in reach presentations, re-lottery presentations, etc., or various presentation display operations that do not involve the variable display of decorative symbols, during the period from when the special symbol begins to vary in the special symbol game until the confirmed special symbol that results in the special symbol display is derived and displayed. The preview presentation control pattern is composed of data indicating the control content of presentation operations that result in preview presentations that are executed in response to preview patterns, of which multiple patterns are prepared in advance. The various presentation control patterns correspond to various presentation operations that are executed depending on the progress of play on the pachinko gaming machine 1 and are composed of data indicating the control content.

The effect control patterns for variable display of special charts may include, for example, multiple types of reach effect control patterns that differ in the effect mode of each reach effect for each variable pattern that executes the reach effect.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in Figure 2 has an area for storing various data used to control performance operations, such as a performance control data storage area 132SG190 as shown in Figure 10(A). The performance control data storage area 132SG190 shown in Figure 10(A) includes a performance control flag setting unit 132SG191, a performance control timer setting unit 132SG192, a performance control counter setting unit 132SG193, and a performance control buffer setting unit 132SG194.

The performance control flag setting unit 132SG191 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated in response to performance operation states, such as the display state of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5, and performance control commands sent from the main board 11. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 132SG191 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 132SG192 is provided with multiple types of timers used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as the display operation of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the performance control timer setting unit 132SG192 stores data indicating the timer values of each of the multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting unit 132SG193 is provided with multiple types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control counter setting unit 132SG193 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit 132SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting unit 132SG194 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of multiple types of buffers.

In this feature unit 132SG, data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 132SG194A, as shown in FIG. 10(B), is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting unit 132SG194. The start winning reception command buffer 132SG194A has a storage area (an area corresponding to buffer numbers "1" through "8") corresponding to the maximum total number of reserved memories for the first and second special symbol reserved memories (e.g., "8"), and a storage area (an area corresponding to buffer number "0") corresponding to the first special symbol being variably displayed. When a start winning occurs in the first or second start winning slot, a set of three commands is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12: a start slot winning designation command (first start slot winning designation command or second start slot winning designation command), a symbol designation command, and a reserved memory count notification command (first reserved memory count notification command or second reserved memory count notification command). The storage area of the start winning reception command buffer 132SG194A has a storage area (entry) reserved for associating the start winning designation command, pattern designation command, variable category designation command, and reserved memory count notification command, and storing the first special symbol reserved memory and the second special symbol reserved memory together.

When the start conditions are met and the variable display of the top-level reserved memory (buffer number "1") begins, the contents of these storage areas (entries) are shifted up one by one, as described below. Furthermore, the contents of buffer number "0," which stores the contents of the reserved memory for which the start conditions are met, are cleared during the decorative pattern change stop process, which is executed when the variable display ends.

Furthermore, the start winning time reception command buffer 132SG194A of this feature unit 132SG has a memory area reserved for each buffer number for setting a hold display flag value indicating the display mode of the hold display or active display in the advance notice setting process (Figure 35) described below, and a memory area for setting a panel display flag value indicating the pattern (panel pattern) of the variable display corresponding panel or second special chart hold memory corresponding panel displayed on the image display device 5 in time-saving state A.

When a start win occurs, the performance control CPU 120 stores commands in the start win reception command buffer 132SG194A, starting from the first free entry (the entry with the lowest buffer number). When a start win occurs, commands from the start win designation command to the pending memory count notification command are sent in sequence. Therefore, when commands are received, the start win designation command, pattern designation command, variable category designation command, and pending memory count notification command are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the end of the buffer numbers corresponding to the pending memories, in that order.

Whenever the variable display of decorative symbols begins, the commands stored in the start winning time receive command buffer 132SG194A shown in Figure 10(B) are deleted from the entry (buffer number "0") corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that just ended, and the contents of the entry corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that is about to begin (entry corresponding to buffer number "1") and the contents of the entries after the reserved memory of the variable display that just began are shifted. For example, when the variable display of decorative symbols ends in the storage state shown in Figure 10(B), the commands stored in buffer number "0" are deleted, the commands stored in buffer number "1" are shifted to buffer number "0," the commands stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" are shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1," and the commands stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3," "4," "5," etc. are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2," "3," "4," etc. Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes the area (entry) for storing the commands related to the reserved memory currently being displayed.

In addition, in this feature section 132SG, when the performance control CPU 120 executes the command analysis process (S75), it determines whether or not it has received a start winning designation command, a designation command, or a pending memory count notification command, and if these commands have been received, it stores these commands as pending memories for each special symbol at the beginning of the free space in the start winning time reception command buffer 132SG194A.

(operation)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main board 11)
First, we will explain the main operations of the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts, the game control microcomputer 100 starts up and game control main processing is executed by the CPU 103. Figure 11 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main processing shown in Figure 11, the CPU 103 first disables interrupts (step S1). Next, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). These initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and making the RAM 102 accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery conditions are met (step S3). The recovery conditions can be met when the clear signal is off, backup data is available, and the backup RAM is normal. When power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, if a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17, for example, is pressed, an on-state clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it is determined in step S3 that the recovery conditions are not met. The backup data only needs to be able to be saved in RAM 102, which serves as backup RAM for game control. In step S3, it is determined whether the recovery conditions can be met by checking or inspecting the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors.

If the recovery condition is met (Step S3: Yes), recovery processing (Step S4) is executed. The recovery processing in Step S4 sets a working area based on the contents stored in RAM 102. By setting the working area using the backup data stored in RAM 102, the game state when the power supply was stopped is restored; for example, if a special symbol was changing, it is sufficient if the change of the special symbol can be resumed from the state before the power supply was stopped.

If the recovery conditions are not met (Step S3: No), initialization processing (Step S6) is executed. The initialization processing in Step S6 includes clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clearing processing.

When the performance control board 12 receives a setting confirmation start command or a setting change start command, it may perform control to notify the user that the setting is being confirmed or changed. For example, it may display a specific image on the image display device 5, output a specific sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, or cause a light-emitting element such as the game effect lamp 9 to emit light in a specific manner.

After executing the recovery process or initialization process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, it sets the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time interval (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S9), and enables the interrupt (step S10). It then enters a loop process. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 2 ms), allowing the CPU 103 to periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

After executing this game control main processing, the CPU 103 receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, then executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. 12. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 12 begins, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch processing to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches, such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23, via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, the CPU 103 executes a predetermined main error processing to diagnose abnormalities in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and, if necessary, issue a warning based on the diagnosis results (step S22). After this, the CPU 103 executes a predetermined information output processing to output data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots), start information (information indicating the number of start wins), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the game has entered a probability variable state) to be supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output process, a gaming random number update process is executed to update at least a portion of the gaming random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 is able to manage the execution and reservation of special symbol games, control the jackpot gaming state, control the gaming state, and so on.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). By the CPU 103 executing the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, it is possible to execute the normal symbol game and manage reserves based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), as well as control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol win." The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting the normal symbol reserve display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed. Then, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set a presentation control command to be sent during each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, the presentation control command that has been set to be sent is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the presentation control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Figure 13 is a flowchart showing the special symbol process in this feature unit 132SG. In the special symbol process in this feature unit 132SG, the normal special symbol process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal special symbol process, a determination is made as to whether to start the first or second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. Furthermore, in the normal special symbol process, based on a random number value for determining the display result, whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is to be a "big hit" or a "small hit," as well as the type of big hit if it is a "big hit," and the type of small hit if it is a "small hit," are determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the normal special symbol process, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a miss symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set corresponding to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" and the normal special symbol processing ends. This feature unit 132SG stores the order in which the game balls enter the first and second start winning slots, and the conditions for starting the special symbol game are met in the order in which the balls enter (also known as winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which the decision value compared with the random number value is assigned to the decision result) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern to determine one of several types of fluctuation pattern based on a pre-determined result of whether the display result will be "big hit", "small hit", or "miss". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when a fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2", and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variable pattern specifies the execution time of the special symbol game (variable special symbol display time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special symbol change process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol change process includes processes for making settings to change the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and processes for measuring the elapsed time since the special symbol began to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special symbol variable display time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special symbol began to change reaches the special symbol variable display time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol change process ends.

The special symbol stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3." This special symbol stop process includes settings to stop the variation of special symbols on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B and to stop and display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that will result in the display of the special symbol. If the display result is a "jackpot," the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4." On the other hand, if the jackpot flag is off and the display result is a "small hit," the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "8." If the display result is a "miss," the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0." If the display result is a "small hit" or "miss," the game state is also updated if the time-saving state is in effect and the end of the play count is confirmed. Once the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop process ends.

The pre-jackpot opening process in step S114 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "4." This pre-jackpot opening process includes processing to start the execution of a round in the jackpot game state and set the large prize opening to an open state, based on factors such as the display result being "jackpot." When the large prize opening is set to an open state, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door. At this time, the maximum open period for the large prize opening to be set and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set, depending on, for example, the type of jackpot. Once these settings are complete, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "5," and the pre-jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "5." This jackpot opening process includes processes such as measuring the time elapsed since the large prize opening was opened, and determining whether it is time to return the large prize opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 132SGS023. When the large prize opening is to be returned to a closed state, processes such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door are executed, and then the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "6," and the jackpot opening process ends.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "6." This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of rounds that open the large prize slot has been executed has reached the set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. If the number of rounds executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "5." However, if the number of rounds executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "7." Once the value of the special symbol process flag has been updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7." This jackpot end process includes processes such as waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation, which serves as a presentation operation to notify players of the end of the jackpot game state, has elapsed, and making various settings to initiate variable rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When these settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0," and the jackpot end process ends.

Step 132: The pre-processing for opening a small win in SGS118 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "8." This pre-processing for opening a small win includes processing to set the large prize opening to an open state in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win." At this time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "9," and the pre-processing for opening a small win ends.

The small win opening process of step 132SGS119 is executed when the value of the special prize process flag is "9." This small win opening process includes measuring the time elapsed since the large prize opening was opened, determining whether it is time to return the large prize opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 132SGS023, and determining whether game balls have been detected by the second count switch 132SG024. When the large prize opening is returned to a closed state and it is time to end the small win game state, the value of the special prize process flag is updated to "10" and the small win opening process ends.

The small win termination process of step 132SGS120 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "10." This small win termination process includes waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which the presentation operation announcing the end of the small win gaming state is executed has elapsed. Here, if a gaming ball is detected by the second count switch 132SG024 when the small win gaming state ends, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4" and the small win processing ends. Furthermore, if a gaming ball is not detected by the second count switch 132SG024 when the small win gaming state ends, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small win gaming state was entered continues. When the waiting time at the end of the small win gaming state has elapsed, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0" and the small win termination processing ends.

Figure 14 is a flowchart showing the start winning determination process (S101) shown in Figure 13. In the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 first determines whether the first starting gate switch 22A, which is provided corresponding to the first starting gate formed by the winning ball device 6A, is on (132SGS101) based on a detection signal from the switch. If the first starting gate switch 22A is on (132SGS101; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the first special symbol reserved memory count, which is the number of reserved memories for the special symbol game using the first special symbol, has reached a predetermined upper limit (e.g., "4") (132SGS102). The CPU 103 can determine the number of reserved first symbol memories by, for example, reading the first reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the first reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 132SG154. When the number of reserved first special symbols in 132SGS102 is not the upper limit (132SGS102; N), for example, the value stored in the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 132SG155 is set to "1" (132SGS103).

When the first start opening switch 22A in 132SGS101 is off (132SGS101; N) or when the number of reserved first special symbols in 132SGS102 has reached the upper limit (132SGS102; Y), a determination is made as to whether the second start opening switch 22B, which is provided corresponding to the second start opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, is on (132SGS104) based on a detection signal from the second start opening switch 22B. If the second start opening switch 22B is on (132SGS104; Y), a determination is made as to whether the second special symbol reserved number, which is the number of reserved symbols for the special symbol game using the second special symbol, has reached a predetermined upper limit (e.g., the upper limit of "4") (132SGS105). The CPU 103 can determine the number of reserved second special symbols by, for example, reading the second reserved symbol count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved symbol count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 132SG154. When the second reserved symbol count in 132SGS105 is not the upper limit (132SGS105; N), for example, the value stored in the start buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 132SG155 is set to "2" (132SGS106).

After executing either of the processes 132SGS103 or 132SGS106, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the value stored in the start port buffer, is updated by adding 1 (132SGS107). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1," the first reserved symbol count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2," the second reserved symbol count value is added by 1. Thus, the first reserved symbol count value is updated to increase by 1 when the gaming ball passes (enters) the first start port and the first start condition corresponding to the special symbol game using the first special symbol is met. Furthermore, the second reserved symbol count value is updated to increase by 1 when the gaming ball passes (enters) the second start port and the second start condition corresponding to the special symbol game using the second special symbol is met. At this time, the total reserved symbol count is also updated to increase by 1 (132SGS108). For example, the total reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 132SG154, can be updated to add 1.

After executing the processing of 132SGS108, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of win, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 132SG154 (132SGS109). The numerical data indicating each of the extracted random numbers and the start opening buffer value are stored by being set as reserve information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special symbol reserve memory unit (132SGS110).

The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the type of win are used to determine whether the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "big hit" or a "small hit," and further to determine the type of big hit or small hit when the variable display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern, including the variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol. By executing the processing of 132SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used to determine the variable display mode, including the variable display result and variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol.

Following the processing of 132SGS110, a setting for sending a start port winning designation command according to the start port buffer value is made (132SGS111). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1," the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, thereby making a setting for sending a first start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2," the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, thereby making a setting for sending a second start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. The start port winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special symbol process processing is completed, by executing the command control processing of S27 shown in FIG. 12.

Following the processing of 132SGS111, the CPU 103 executes a winning random number determination process (132SGS112). Then, for example, by storing the storage address of the reserved memory number notification command table in ROM 101 in a buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the CPU 103 performs settings to send the reserved memory number notification command to the performance control board 12 (132SGS113). The reserved memory number notification command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 12 after the special symbol process processing has ended.

After executing the processing of 132SGS113, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is "1" (132SGS114). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" (Y in 132SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (132SGS115), and then processing of 2390SGS104 proceeds. On the other hand, if the start port buffer value is "2" (N in 132SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (132SGS116), and then the start winning processing ends. This ensures that processing based on the detection of both valid start winnings can be completed reliably, even if both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect valid game ball start winnings.

Figure 15 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed by 132SGS112 in Figure 14 as a random number value determination process at the time of winning. In this feature unit 132SG, when the variable display of a special symbol or decorative symbol is initiated, the normal special symbol process (S110 in Figure 13) determines whether the special symbol display result (the variable display result of the special symbol) should be controlled as a "big hit" to a big hit game state or a "small hit" to a small hit game state. Furthermore, the variable pattern setting process (S111 in Figure 13) determines a variable pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative symbol. Separately from these determinations, when a game ball is detected in the starting winning slot (first starting winning slot or second starting winning slot), the CPU 103 executes the random number value determination process at S112 at the time of winning to determine whether a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol should be derived and displayed as the special symbol display result. As a result, before the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of a gaming ball entering the starting winning slot begins, in other words, before it is determined at the start of the variable display whether or not it will be a big hit or a small hit, it is determined that the special symbol display result will be a "big hit" or a "small hit," and based on this determination result, the presentation control CPU 120 and other devices will execute advance warnings such as panel display presentations and hold preview presentations, as described below.

In the winning random number determination process shown in Figure 15, the CPU 103 first determines whether the game state is normal or time-saving (step 132SGS121). It then determines whether the set start opening buffer value is 1 (step 132SGS122a). If the start opening buffer value is 1, it selects display result determination table 1 shown in Figure 7(A) and proceeds to step 132SGS123a (step 132SGS122b). If the start opening buffer value is 2, it selects display result determination table 2 shown in Figure 7(B) and proceeds to step 132SGS123a (step 132SGS122c).

In step 132SGS123a, the CPU 103 compares the random number value MR1 extracted in step 132SGS109 with the selected display result determination table to determine whether the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range. If the random number value MR1 is outside the jackpot determination range, it determines whether the random number value MR1 is within the small jackpot determination range (step 132SGS123b).

In step 132SGS123b, if the random number value MR1 is outside the small win determination value range, i.e., if the variable display result is a miss, the CPU 103 sets the transmission of a symbol designation command corresponding to the miss (step 132SGS126a). Then, it determines whether the start opening buffer value is 1 (step 132SGS126b). If the start opening buffer value is 1, if the game state is normal, it selects the first special symbol variation pattern determination table A shown in FIG. 18(A). If the game state is either a time-saving state, it selects the first special symbol variation pattern determination table D shown in FIG. 19(A), and proceeds to step 132SGS131 (step 132SGS126c).

Also, if the start port buffer value is 2, if the gaming state is time-saving state A, second special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table A shown in FIG. 20 (A) is selected; if the gaming state is time-saving state B, time-saving state C1 or time-saving state C2, second special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table D shown in FIG. 21 (A) is selected; if the gaming state is time-saving state C2, time-saving state C2, or the eighth or subsequent variable display, second special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table G shown in FIG. 18 (A) is selected, and proceed to step 132SGS131 (step 132SGS126d).

Furthermore, in step 132SGS123b, if the random number value MR1 is within the small win determination value range, the CPU 103 sets the transmission of a symbol designation command corresponding to a small win (step 132SGS127). Then, if the gaming state is time-saving state A, it selects second special symbol variation pattern determination table C shown in FIG. 20(C); if the gaming state is time-saving state B, time-saving state C1, or time-saving state C2, it selects second special symbol variation pattern determination table F shown in FIG. 21(C); or if the gaming state is normal state or time-saving state C2, it selects second special symbol variation pattern determination table I shown in FIG. 18(C), and proceeds to step 132SGS131 (step 132SGS128).

Furthermore, in step 132SGS123a, if the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination value range, the CPU 103 sets the transmission of a symbol designation command corresponding to a jackpot (step 132SGS129). Then, it determines whether the start port buffer value is 1 (step 132SGS130a). If the start port buffer value is 1, and the game state is normal, it selects first special symbol variation pattern determination table C shown in FIG. 18(C). If the game state is either a time-saving state, it selects first special symbol variation pattern determination table E shown in FIG. 19(B), and proceeds to step 132SGS131 (132SGS130b).

Also, if the start port buffer value is 2, when the game state is normal, if the game state is time-saving state A, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table B shown in Figure 20 (B) is selected; if the game state is time-saving state B, time-saving state C1 or time-saving state C2, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table E shown in Figure 21 (B) is selected; if the game state is normal or time-saving state C2, the eighth or subsequent variable display, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table J shown in Figure 22 (B) is selected, and proceed to step 132SGS131 (step 132SGS130c).

In step 132SGS131, the CPU 103 compares the selected fluctuation pattern determination table with the random number value MR3 extracted in step 132SGS109 to determine the fluctuation category from non-reach, super reach, or other (normal reach). Then, it sets up the transmission of a fluctuation category designation command (one of those shown in Figure 15 (B)) according to the determination result, and ends the random number value determination process when a prize is won (step 132SGS132).

The commands set for transmission in steps 132SGS124, 132SGS126a, 132SGS127, 132SGS129, and 132SGS132 are transmitted to the performance control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process shown in FIG. 12.

Figure 16 is a flowchart showing the normal special symbol processing (step S110) shown in Figure 13. In the normal special symbol processing, the CPU 103 first determines whether there is any reserved memory in the special symbol reserved memory unit 132SGS151 (step 132SGS541). If there is no reserved memory in the special symbol reserved memory unit 132SGS151, demo display settings such as sending settings for a customer waiting demo designation command are made, and the normal special symbol processing ends (step 132SGS572). Note that the customer waiting demo designation command is sent to the performance control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control processing (see Figure 12).

If there is a reserved memory in the special chart reserved memory unit 132SGS151, the start port buffer value and random number values MR1 to MR3 are read and identified from the reserved number "1" in the special chart reserved memory unit 132SGS151 (step 132SGS542). The values of the number of reserved special charts to be displayed variably and the total number of reserved special charts are decremented by 1, and the contents of the special chart reserved memory unit 132SGS151 are shifted (step 132SGS543).

It also determines whether the start opening buffer value identified in step 132SGS542 is 1 (step 132SGS554a). If the start opening buffer value is 1, the variable display special designation buffer value is set to 1 (step 132SGS544b). If the start opening buffer value is 2, the variable display special designation buffer value is set to 2 (step 132SGS544c).

Next, a display result determination table is set according to the variable display special designation buffer value (step 132SGS555). The random number value MR1 read in step 132SGS542 is then compared with the display result determination table set in step 132SGS555 to determine whether the value of random number value MR1 is within the jackpot range (step 132SGS556). If the value of random number value MR1 is outside the jackpot range, it is further determined whether the value of random number value MR1 is within the small jackpot range (step 132SGS557). If the value of random number value MR1 is within the small jackpot range, i.e., if the variable display result is a small jackpot, a small jackpot flag is set (step 132SGS558). Then, a small win type determination table (see FIG. 7(E)) is selected (step 132SGS558a), and the small win type is determined by comparing the selected small win type determination table with the random number value MR2 read in step 132SGS542 (step 132SGS558b). A small win type buffer value corresponding to the determined small win type is then set, and the process proceeds to step 132SGS570 (step 132SGS558c). Note that if the value of the random number value MR1 is outside the range for a small win, i.e., if the variable display result is a miss, the process proceeds to step 132SGS570.

Furthermore, if the value of the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot range in step 132SGS556, that is, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the jackpot flag is set (step 132SGS566). Then, a jackpot type determination table (see Figure 7(C) or 7(D)) corresponding to the variable display special chart designation buffer is selected (step 132SGS567), and the jackpot type is determined by comparing the selected jackpot type determination table with the random number value MR1 read in step 132SGS542 (step 132SGS568). Then, a jackpot type buffer value corresponding to the determined jackpot type is set, and processing proceeds to step 132SGS570 (step 132SGS569).

In step 132SGS570, the CPU 103 determines the confirmed special symbol according to the variable display result. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value according to the variable pattern setting process, and the normal special symbol processing is terminated (step 132SGS571).

Figure 17 is a flowchart showing the variable pattern setting process (step S111) shown in Figure 13. In the variable pattern setting process, the CPU 103 first determines whether the variable display to be executed is the variable display of the first special symbol (step 132SGS131). Whether the variable display to be executed is the variable display of the first special symbol can be determined, for example, by whether the variable display special symbol designation buffer value is 1. If it is the variable display of the first special symbol, a variable pattern determination table is selected from the variable pattern determination tables shown in Figures 18 and 19 according to the variable display result, game status, and number of reserved memories, and the process proceeds to step 132SGS135 (step 132SGS132).

For example, if the variable display result is a miss, the game state is normal, and the number of first special symbol reserved memories is two or less, the first special symbol variation pattern determination table A shown in Figure 18 (A) is selected; if the variable display result is a miss, the game state is normal, and the number of first special symbol reserved memories is three or more, the first special symbol variation pattern determination table B shown in Figure 18 (B) is selected; and if the variable display result is a jackpot and the game state is normal, the first special symbol variation pattern determination table C shown in Figure 18 (C) is selected.

Furthermore, if the variable display result is a miss and the game state is either a time-saving state, the first special symbol variable pattern determination table D shown in Figure 19 (A) is selected, and if the variable display result is a jackpot and the game state is either a time-saving state, the first special symbol variable pattern determination table E shown in Figure 19 (B) is selected.

Furthermore, if the variable display executed in step 132SGS131 is the variable display of the second special chart, a variable pattern determination table is selected from Figures 20 to 23 according to the variable display result, game status, value of the time-saving state variable display count counter (number of variable displays in each time-saving state), etc., and the process proceeds to step 132SGS135 (step 132SGS134).

For example, if the variable display result is a miss and the game state is time-saving state A, then the second special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table A shown in FIG. 20(A) is selected; if the variable display result is a big win and the game state is time-saving state A, then the second special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table B shown in FIG. 20(B) is selected; and if the variable display result is a small win and the game state is time-saving state A, then the second special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table C shown in FIG. 20(C) is selected.

Furthermore, if the variable display result is a miss and the game state is the 1st to 7th variable display and the 12th to 685th variable display in time-saving state B, time-saving state C1, or time-saving state C2, then variable pattern determination table D for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 21(A) is selected; if the variable display result is a big win and the game state is the 1st to 7th variable display and the 12th to 685th variable display in time-saving state B, time-saving state C1, or time-saving state C2, then variable pattern determination table E for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 21(B) is selected; and if the variable display result is a small win and the game state is the 1st to 7th variable display and the 12th to 685th variable display in time-saving state B, time-saving state C1, or time-saving state C2, then variable pattern determination table F for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 21(A) is selected.

Furthermore, if the variable display result is a miss and the game state is the normal state or the 8th to 10th variable display in the time-saving state C2, the second special symbol variable pattern determination table G shown in FIG. 22(A) is selected; if the variable display result is a big win and the game state is the normal state or the 8th to 10th variable display in the time-saving state C2, the second special symbol variable pattern determination table H shown in FIG. 22(A) is selected; and if the variable display result is a small win and the game state is the normal state or the 8th to 10th variable display in the time-saving state C2, the second special symbol variable pattern determination table I shown in FIG. 22(A) is selected.

Furthermore, if the variable display result is a miss and the game state is the 11th variable display in time-saving state C2, the second special symbol variable pattern determination table J shown in Figure 23 (A) is selected; if the variable display result is a big win and the game state is the 11th variable display in time-saving state C2, the second special symbol variable pattern determination table K shown in Figure 23 (B) is selected; and if the variable display result is a small win and the game state is the 11th variable display in time-saving state C2, the second special symbol variable pattern determination table L shown in Figure 23 (C) is selected.

After executing step 132SGS132 or step 132SGS134a, the CPU 103 compares the selected variation pattern determination table with the random number value MR3 read in step 132SGS542 of the normal special symbol processing to determine the variation pattern (step 132SGS135). In the processing of step 132SGS135, the CPU 103 identifies a variation pattern that includes the random number value MR3 read in step 132SGS542 of the normal special symbol processing from the variation patterns included in the selected variation pattern determination table, and determines the identified variation pattern as the variation pattern that will execute the variable display.

Then, settings are made to start the variable display of the special symbol (step 132SGS136), and various commands for starting the variable display, such as a variable pattern specification command and a variable display result specification command according to the determined variable pattern, are set for transmission (step 132SGS137), and a variable display time timer according to the variable pattern is set (step 132SGS138). Finally, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value according to the special symbol variable processing, and the variable pattern setting process is terminated (step 132SGS139). The various commands set for transmission in step 132SGS137 are sent to the performance control board 12 in the command control process shown in Figure 12.

In addition, with regard to the miss variation pattern in the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal control state, the allocation of random number value MR3 is set as shown in Figures 18 and 19, so the non-reach variation pattern is most likely to be determined, and the normal reach, Super Reach α, and Super Reach β variation patterns are least likely to be determined. On the other hand, with regard to the jackpot variation pattern in the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal control state, the allocation of random number value MR3 is set as shown in Figures 22 and 23, so the Super Reach β variation pattern is most likely to be determined, and the Super Reach α and normal reach variation patterns are least likely to be determined. For this reason, with regard to the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal state, when the variable display is executed in a non-reach variation pattern, the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot (jackpot expectation probability) is lowest, and the normal reach, Super Reach α, and Super Reach β variation patterns are set to be highest in that order. In other words, the shorter the special chart change time, the lower the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot, and the longer the special chart change time, the higher the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot.

Furthermore, among the multiple variation patterns, for variation patterns that execute a common reach effect, variation patterns that execute pseudo-consecutive effects are set to have a higher jackpot expectation. For example, for variation patterns that execute the reach effect of Super Reach β, variation patterns that execute pseudo-consecutive effects and variation patterns that do not execute pseudo-consecutive effects are provided, but the variation pattern of Super Reach β that executes pseudo-consecutive effects is set to have a higher jackpot expectation than the variation pattern of Super Reach β that does not execute pseudo-consecutive effects. Similarly, for variation patterns that execute the reach effect of Super Reach α, variation patterns that execute pseudo-consecutive effects and variation patterns that do not execute pseudo-consecutive effects are provided, but the variation pattern of Super Reach α that executes pseudo-consecutive effects is set to have a higher jackpot expectation than the variation pattern of Super Reach α that does not execute pseudo-consecutive effects. Furthermore, for variation patterns that execute the reach effect of normal Reach, variation patterns that execute pseudo-consecutive effects and variation patterns that do not execute pseudo-consecutive effects are provided, but the variation pattern of normal Reach that executes pseudo-consecutive effects is set to have a higher jackpot expectation than the variation pattern of normal Reach that does not execute pseudo-consecutive effects.

Figure 24 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop process (step S113) shown in Figure 13. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 first determines whether the symbol determination period timer described below is running (step 132SGS201). If the symbol determination period is not running, the CPU 103 causes the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B to derive and display the stopped symbol of the special symbol (step 132SGS202), and sets up the transmission of a symbol determination command (step 132SGS203). The symbol determination command is transmitted to the performance control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process shown in Figure 12.

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot flag is set (step 132SGS204). If the jackpot flag is set, if any time-saving flags are set, the time-saving flags and other game state flags are cleared (step 132SGS205), and the value of the time-saving state variable display count counter is cleared (step 132SGS206). Furthermore, depending on the type of jackpot, the CPU 103 sets the transmission settings for the hit start 1 designation command or the hit start 2 designation command, and sets the transmission settings for the game state background designation command indicating that the game state is normal, and then proceeds to step 132SGS242 (steps 132SGS207, step 132SGS208). The hit start designation command and game state background designation command are transmitted to the performance control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process shown in FIG. 12.

Also, if the symbol determination period timer is running in step 132SGS201, the CPU 103 decrements the symbol determination period timer by 1 (step 132SGS209) and determines whether the symbol determination period timer has timed out (step 132SGS210). If the symbol determination period timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 terminates the special symbol stop processing. If the symbol determination period timer has timed out, the CPU 103 further determines whether the derivatively displayed stopped symbol is a losing symbol (step 132SGS211). If the derivatively displayed stopped symbol is a losing symbol, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the normal special symbol processing and terminates the special symbol stop processing (step 132SGS212). If the derivatively displayed stopped symbol is not a losing symbol, the CPU 103 determines whether the derivatively displayed stopped symbol is a jackpot symbol (step 132SGS213). If the derived and displayed stopped pattern is a jackpot pattern, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot release pre-processing and the special pattern stop processing is terminated (step 132 SGS214); if the derived and displayed stopped pattern is not a jackpot pattern, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small jackpot release pre-processing and the special pattern stop processing is terminated (step 132 SGS215).

Also, if the jackpot flag is not set in step 132SGS204, the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the total time-saving count counter is 1 or greater (step 132SGS216). The total time-saving count counter is set to the sum of the maximum number of time-saving control cycles for the first special symbol and the maximum number of time-saving control cycles for the second special symbol in the time-saving state (either "5," "11," or "689").

If the value of the total time-saving count counter is 1 or greater, the value of the total time-saving count counter is decremented by 1 (step 132SGS217). Furthermore, it is determined whether the variable display special symbol designation buffer value is 1, i.e., whether the completed variable display is the variable display of the first special symbol (step 132SGS218). If the variable display special symbol designation buffer value is 1, the process proceeds to step 132SGS224. If the variable display special symbol designation buffer value is 2 (the completed variable display is the variable display of the second special symbol), the value of the second special symbol time-saving count counter is decremented by 1, and the process proceeds to step 132SGS224 (step 132SGS219). The second special symbol time-saving count counter is a counter that is set to the maximum number of time-saving control times for the second special symbol (either "1," "7," or "685") during time-saving mode.

In step 132SGS224, the CPU 103 determines whether any time-saving flags are set (whether the system is controlled to any time-saving state). If no time-saving flags are set, the process proceeds to step 132SGS240. If any time-saving flags are set, the process further determines whether the value of the total time-saving count counter has reached 0, i.e., whether the variable display of the maximum number of time-saving control cycles has ended in the controlled time-saving state (step 132SGS225). If the value of the total time-saving count counter is not 0, the process proceeds to step 132SGS240. If the value of the total time-saving count counter is 0, the process clears the set time-saving flag (step 132SGS226), clears the value of the total time-saving count counter, and proceeds to step 132SGS240 (step 132SGS227).

In step 132SGS240, the CPU 103 determines whether the small hit flag is set. If the small hit flag is set, it sets the transmission of the hit start 3 designation command or the hit 4 start designation command according to the type of small hit, and proceeds to step 132SGS242. The hit start 3 designation command and the hit 4 start designation command are transmitted to the performance control board 12 by the CP 103 executing the command control process shown in Figure 12. If the small hit flag is not set, it proceeds to step 132SGS242.

Then, in step 132SGS242, the CPU 103 sets the symbol determination period timer to a value corresponding to the symbol determination period (a value corresponding to 0.5 seconds in the case of this feature unit 132SG), and sets the transmission of a symbol determination period designation command corresponding to the set value. Furthermore, it sets the transmission of a game state background designation command corresponding to the game state, and ends the special symbol stop processing (step 132SGS243).

The symbol determination period designation command and game state background designation command are sent to the effect control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process shown in Figure 12.

Figure 25 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in S119 of Figure 13 as the small win release processing. In the small win release processing, the CPU 103 first decrements the value of the release time timer by 1 (132SGS281). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether the release time timer has timed out (132SGS282).

If the opening timer has timed out, the process proceeds to 132SGS293. If the opening timer has not timed out, the process determines whether it is time to open the large prize opening (132SGS283). If it is time to open the large prize opening, the CPU 103 controls the large prize opening to an open state by activating solenoid 132SG083 (132SGS284). Then, the process sets up the transmission of a command specifying that the large prize opening is open according to the round (132SGS285), and the process proceeds to 132SGS286. The command specifying that the large prize opening is open, set up for transmission in 132SGS285, is sent to the performance control board 12 by the command control process described above. If it is not time to open the large prize opening, the process proceeds to 132SGS286 without passing through 132SGS284 and 132SGS285.

In 132SGS286, the CPU 103 determines whether it is time to close the large prize opening (132SGS286). If it is time to close the large prize opening, the CPU 103 activates solenoid 132SG083 to control the large prize opening to a closed state (132SGS287). Then, it sets the transmission of a command to specify when the large prize opening is to be opened according to the round (132SGS288), and proceeds to 132SGS289. The command to specify when the large prize opening is open, set for transmission in 132SGS288, is transmitted to the performance control board 12 by the command control process described above. If it is not time to close the large prize opening, it proceeds to 132SGS289 without passing through 132SGS287 and 132SGS288.

In step 132SGS289, the CPU 103 determines whether the second count switch 132SG024 has been turned on (132SGS289). If the second count switch 132SG024 is not on, the small win release process is terminated. If the second count switch 132SG024 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether the V winning flag, which indicates that the second count switch 132SG024 has already been turned on, i.e., that the gaming ball has passed through the second count switch 132SG024, has been set (132SGS290). If the V winning flag is set, the small win release process is terminated. If the V winning flag is not set, the CPU 103 sets the V winning flag (132SGS291).

Then, the CPU 103 sets up the transmission of a V winning notification command to the performance control board 12 (132SGS292). Note that the V winning notification command is transmitted to the performance control board 12 in the command control process described above.

Then, in 132SGS293, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "10," which corresponds to the small win end processing (S120) (132SGS293), and ends the small win release processing.

Figure 26 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed by 132SGS120 in Figure 13 as small win end processing. During small win end processing, the CPU 103 determines whether the small win end display timer is running (132SGS301). If the small win end display timer is not running (132SGS301; N), the small win flag is cleared (132SGS302) and a win end designation command corresponding to the small win is set to the presentation control board 12 (132SGS303). The win end designation command is sent to the presentation control board 12 during the command control processing described above. Then, the small win end display timer is set to a value corresponding to the small win end display time (132SGS304), and the small win end processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if the small win end display timer is running, the value of the small win end display timer is decremented by 1 (132SGS305). Then, it is determined whether the small win end display time has elapsed, that is, whether the small win end display timer has timed out (132SGS306). If the small win end display time has not elapsed, the CPU 103 determines whether the second count switch 132SG024 has been turned on (132SGS307). If the second count switch 132SG024 has not been turned on, the small win end processing is terminated. If the second count switch 132SG024 has been turned on, it determines whether the V winning flag has been set, indicating that the second count switch 132SG024 has already been turned on, that is, whether the game ball has passed through the second count switch 132SG024 (132SGS308). If the V prize flag is set, the small win end process ends; if the V prize flag is not set, the V prize flag is set (132SGS309).

Then, the CPU 103 sets up the transmission of a V winning notification command to the effect control board 12 (132SGS310) and ends the small win end processing. Note that the V winning notification command is sent to the effect control board 12 during the command control processing described above.

Also, when the small win end display time has elapsed in 132SGS306, CPU 103 determines whether the V prize flag is set (132SGS311). If the V prize flag is set, CPU 103 clears the V prize flag and sets the big win flag (132SGS312, 132SGS313). Then, CPU 103 determines the big win type from "Big Win C" to "Big Win E" based on the type of small win that resulted in the V prize (132SGS314). As shown in FIG. 7(E), if the small win type resulting from the V winning is a "small win A," the jackpot type is determined to be a "jackpot C." If the small win type resulting from the V winning is a "small win B," the jackpot type is determined to be a "jackpot D." If the small win type resulting from the V winning is a "small win C," the jackpot type is determined to be a "jackpot E." The determined jackpot type is stored in accordance with the determined jackpot type, for example, by setting the jackpot type buffer value, which is the stored value in the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 132SG155 (132SGS315).

In addition, the time-saving flag and the time-saving state variable display count counter are cleared (steps 132SGS316 and 132SGS317), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4," which corresponds to the pre-big win release processing (S114) (132SGS318), and the small win end processing is terminated.

In other words, this feature unit 132SG allows the game ball to pass through the second count switch 132SG024 not only during small win play, but also during the period after the small win play ends until the small win end display time has elapsed. Therefore, even if a game ball enters the big win slot just before the small win play ends, the game ball will pass through the second count switch 132SG024, and the big win play will be executed after the small win end processing has ended.

If the V prize flag is not set in 132SGS311, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "0" (132SGS319), which corresponds to the normal special symbol processing (S110), and ends the small win end processing.

Figure 27 is a flowchart of the jackpot end processing shown in Figure 13. In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 first determines whether the jackpot end display timer is running (step 103SGS321). If the jackpot end display timer is not running, the CPU 103 clears the jackpot flag (step 132SGS322a) and sets the transmission of a jackpot end designation command corresponding to the jackpot type (step 132SGS322b). The jackpot end designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 12 in the command control processing described above. The CPU 103 then sets the jackpot end display timer to a value corresponding to the display time during which the jackpot end display is being displayed on the image display device 5 (jackpot end display time), and ends the jackpot end processing (step 132SGS322c).

Also, if the jackpot end display timer is running in step 132SGS321, the value of the jackpot end display timer is decremented by 1 (step 132SGS323), and it is determined whether the jackpot end display timer has timed out (step 132SGS324). If the jackpot end display timer has not timed out, the jackpot end processing is terminated. If the jackpot end display timer has timed out, it is determined whether the jackpot type of the jackpot is jackpot A (step 132SGS325). If the jackpot type of the jackpot is jackpot A, the second special time-saving count counter is set to "1" and the total time-saving count counter is set to "5" (steps 132SGS326, 132SGS327). Then, the time-saving A flag is set, indicating that the game is in time-saving state A, and the process proceeds to step 132SGS339 (step 132SGS327a).

Furthermore, if the jackpot type of the jackpot in question is not jackpot A, it is determined whether the jackpot type of the jackpot in question is jackpot B or jackpot E (step 132SGS328). If the jackpot type of the jackpot in question is jackpot B or jackpot E, the second special chart time-saving count counter is set to "685" and the total time-saving count counter is set to "689" (steps 132SGS329, 132SGS330). Then, it is determined whether the jackpot type of the jackpot in question is jackpot B (step 132SGS328). If the jackpot type is jackpot B, the time-saving C1 flag is set to indicate that the time-saving state is C1, and proceed to step 132SGS339b (step 132SGS330a). If the jackpot type is jackpot E, the time-saving C2 flag is set to indicate that the time-saving state is C2, and proceed to step 132SGS339b (step 132SGS330b).

Also, if the jackpot type of the jackpot is not jackpot B or jackpot E, the jackpot type is determined to be jackpot D, the second special time-saving count counter is set to "7", and the total time-saving count counter is set to "11" (steps 132SGS335 and 132SGS336). Then, the time-saving B flag is set, indicating that the game is in time-saving state B, and the program proceeds to step 132SGS339b (step 132SGS336a).

In step 132SGS339b, the CPU 103 sets up the transmission of a game status background designation command corresponding to the type of jackpot that was executed (step 132SGS339b). The game status background designation command is transmitted to the presentation control board 12 in the command control process described above. The CPU 103 also stores the game status background designation command that has been set up for transmission (step 132SGS340), and terminates the jackpot termination process.

(Major operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be described. When the performance control board 12 receives a supply of power voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 28. When the performance control main process shown in FIG. 28 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first performs a startup preparation display process (step 132SGS70) to display a startup preparation display on the image display device 5, and then performs a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clearing RAM 122, setting various initial values, and setting registers for the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12. The initial operation control process also executes an initial operation control process (step S72). The initial operation control process executes control for initializing the movable body 32, such as driving the movable body 32 to return it to its origin position and performing predetermined operation checks.

In this embodiment, the terms "display" and "image" are sometimes used, for example, the "boot preparation display" described in the embodiment is referred to as a "boot preparation image" in the drawings. However, since "display" and "image" are the same thing, "display" may also be referred to as "image" and "image" as "display."

Furthermore, the initialization process of step S71 prevents the startup preparation display displayed by the startup preparation display process of step SGS70 from being initialized. Furthermore, by displaying the startup preparation display, it is possible to quickly know that power has been supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, and to confirm that the image display device 5 can display the display normally.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on, for example, the register settings of the CTC. If the timer interrupt flag is off at this time (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed, an interrupt occurs to receive performance control commands from the main board 11. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 turns on. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal turning on, the performance control CPU 120 automatically disables the interrupt. However, if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt disable command (DI command). In response to the interrupt due to the performance control INT signal turning on, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a specified command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, the performance control command is captured from a specified input port included in the I/O 125 that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The captured performance control command is stored in a performance control command reception buffer, for example, provided in RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then enables interrupts and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 on the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read effect control commands are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a specified area of RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in RAM 122 may be turned on, so that the effect control process process can confirm which effect control command was received and the content specified by the effect control command. Furthermore, if the effect control command specifies the game status, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game status.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, a power outage recovery display process (step 132SGS75b) is executed to display a power outage recovery display on the image display device 5 based on the power outage recovery designation command received from the CPU 103, and an initial operation control process (step 132SGS75c) is executed to execute the initial operation of each movable body when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started.

The startup preparation display process in this characteristic unit 132SG includes processing to set a cold start flag indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started up with a cold start when it is determined that a power-on command has been received, and the power outage recovery display process in this characteristic unit 132SG includes processing to set a hot start flag indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started up with a hot start when it is determined that a power outage recovery command has been received.

Furthermore, after the initial operation control processing, the performance control process processing is executed (step S76). The performance control process processing controls the operation of various performance devices, such as the display operation of performance images in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, and the driving operation of the movable body 32. Furthermore, judgments, decisions, and settings are made regarding the control content of performance operations using various performance devices in accordance with performance control commands, etc. transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process of step S76, an effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 is updated by software. Furthermore, after the effect random number value update process (step S77), a demo effect control process (step S78) for executing a demo effect on the pachinko gaming machine 1, a volume/light intensity adjustment process (step 132SGS79) for adjusting the volume of the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the light intensity of each LED, and a background image update process (step 132SGS80) for updating the background image displayed on the image display device 5 based on the background image designation command received from the CPU 103 to a background image corresponding to the received background image designation command are executed. Then, processing returns to step S73. Other processing may be executed before returning to step S73.

In the demo performance control process, the performance control CPU 120 may, for example, set a timer, such as a customer waiting demo performance start waiting timer, until the customer waiting demo performance begins based on receiving a customer waiting demo designation command, and may start the customer waiting demo performance when the timer expires without the variable display starting. If the variable display starts while the customer waiting demo performance start waiting timer is operating or while the customer waiting demo performance is being executed, the customer waiting demo performance start waiting timer may be cleared, the customer waiting demo performance may be interrupted, and the display on the image display device 5 may be switched to a variable display of decorative patterns.

As shown in FIG. 29, the initial operation control process broadly includes two processes: an origin placement control process (step 132SGS100) that places the movable bodies (above-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, above-frame movable body 132SG101) provided on the pachinko gaming machine 1 at their respective origin positions, and an operation confirmation control process (step 132SGS200) that confirms the operation of these movable bodies (above-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, above-frame movable body 132SG101).

Figure 30 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in the origin placement control processing in Figure 29. In the origin placement control processing shown in Figure 30, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the origin operation period timer is counting (step 132SGS401). If the origin operation period timer is not operating, it further determines whether the startup origin placement control completed flag is set (step 132SGS402). If the startup origin placement control completed flag is not set, it determines whether it is time to start a demo performance (step 132SGS403). Whether it is time to start a demo performance can be determined by, for example, determining whether the process timer for the demo performance is operating or whether the value of the process timer for the demo performance is a value corresponding to the start timing of the demo performance.

If it is not the start timing of the demo performance, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the variable display (132SGS404). Whether it is the start timing of the variable display can be determined, for example, by determining whether the process timer for the variable display of the decorative pattern is running, and whether the value of the process timer for the variable display of the decorative pattern is a value corresponding to the start timing of the variable display. If it is not the start timing of the variable display, the origin placement control process is terminated.

Then, if the start-up origin placement control completed flag is not set in step 132SGS402, if it is not the start timing of the demo performance in step 132SGS403, or if it is not the start timing of the variable display in step 132SGS404, the performance control CPU 120 identifies the detection status of the origin position sensor (origin position sensor 132SG123, 132SG133, 132SG103, 635C) of the movable body to be controlled (step 132SGS410), and determines whether there is a movable body that is not detected by the origin position sensor (step 132SGS411). If there are any movable bodies not detected by the origin position sensor, these movable bodies not detected by the origin position sensor (non-detected movable bodies) are identified (step 132SG412), and movement control of the non-detected movable bodies toward the origin is initiated by means such as driving a motor corresponding to the non-detected movable body (step 132SGS413), and the process proceeds to step 132SGS414. Note that if there are no movable bodies not detected by the origin position sensor in step 132SGS411, i.e., if all movable bodies are positioned at their respective origin positions, the process proceeds to step 132SGS414 without executing steps 132SGS412 and 132SGS413.

In step 132SGS414, the performance control CPU 120 identifies the detected movable body (the movable body located at the origin position). Then, it sets the detection operation process data for the detected movable body (step 132SGS415), starts the timer count of the detection operation process timer, and starts operation control of the movable body (detected movable body), as well as display control of the image display device 5, sound output control of speakers 8L and 8Rk, and light emission control of each LED (step 132SGS416). Furthermore, it starts the timer count of the origin operation period timer, and ends the origin placement control process (step 132SGS417).

Also, if the origin operation period timer is counting in step 132SGS401, the performance control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the values of both the detection operation process timer and the origin operation period timer (step 132SGS420). It then determines whether the subtracted origin operation period timer has timed out (step 132SGS421). If the subtracted origin operation period timer has not timed out, it controls the operation based on the process data corresponding to the subtracted detection operation process timer value, and ends the origin placement control process (step 132SGS422).

Also, if the origin operation period timer has expired in step 132SGS421, the operation of each movable body is stopped (step 132SGS423), and the detection status of the origin position sensors (origin position sensors 132SG123, 132SG133, 132SG103, 635C) of each movable body to be controlled is identified (step 132SGS424). It is then determined whether there are any movable bodies not detected by the origin position sensors (step 132SGS425).

If there are any movable bodies that are not detected by the origin position sensor, these movable bodies that are not detected by the origin position sensor (non-detected movable bodies) are identified (step 132SG426), and if the startup origin placement control completed flag is not set, the flag is set and the origin placement control process ends (step 132SGS427). Note that if there are no movable bodies that are not detected by the origin position sensor, the process of step 132SGS427 is executed and the origin placement control process ends.

Figures 31 and 32 are flowcharts showing an example of the processing executed in the operation confirmation control processing in Figure 29. As mentioned above, a cold start in this characteristic section 132SG refers to the pachinko gaming machine 1 being powered on with the clear switch 92 pressed down, i.e., the initialization processing (step S6) being executed in the game control main processing when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up. A hot start in this characteristic section 132SG refers to the pachinko gaming machine 1 being powered on with the clear switch 92 not pressed down, i.e., the recovery processing (step S4) being executed in the game control main processing when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up.

In the operation confirmation control process, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the post-confirmation operation execution flag is set (step 132SGS501). If the post-confirmation operation execution flag is not set, it determines whether the operation confirmation execution flag is set (step 132SGS502). If the operation confirmation execution flag is not set, it determines whether the operation confirmed flag is set (step 132SGS503).

If the operation confirmation flag is set, the operation confirmation control process is terminated. If the operation confirmation flag is not set, it is further determined whether the startup origin placement control flag is set (step 132SGS504). If the startup origin placement control flag is not set, the operation confirmation control process is terminated. If the startup origin placement control flag is set, the operation confirmation in progress flag is set (step 132SGS505), and it is determined whether an undetected movable object is stored (step 132SGS506). If an undetected movable object is not stored, proceed to step 132SGS508. If an undetected movable object is stored, the operation of the undetected movable object is restricted before proceeding to step 132SGS508 (step 132SGS507).

In step 132SGS508, the presentation control CPU 120 identifies the startup type (whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 was started as a cold start or a hot start) and sets the operation confirmation process data (upper order) corresponding to the startup type. Furthermore, in step 132SGS508, it identifies whether the cold start flag or the hot start flag is set, and if the cold start flag is set, it identifies the startup type as a cold start and sets the operation confirmation process data (upper order) corresponding to the cold start; and if the hot start flag is set, it identifies the startup type as a hot start and sets the operation confirmation process data (upper order) corresponding to the hot start.

Then, the operation confirmation process timer (upper) starts counting, and the operation control of the movable body, display control of the image display device 5, sound output control from speakers 8L and 8R, and light emission control of each LED are started, and the operation confirmation control process ends (step 132SGS509).

If the operation confirmation in progress flag is set in step 132SGS502, the performance control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the operation confirmation process timer (upper) (step 132SGS510) and identifies the process data corresponding to the value of the operation confirmation process timer after the subtraction (step 132SGS511). It then determines whether the identified process data is completion data (step 132SGS512). If the identified process data is not completion data, it further determines whether the identified process data is data corresponding to the performance position (step 132SGS513). If the identified process data is not data corresponding to the performance position, it proceeds to step 132SGS515. If the identified process data is data corresponding to the performance position, it stores the performance results of the performance position sensor of the corresponding movable body and then proceeds to step 132SGS515 (step 132SGS514).

In step 132SGS515, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the process switching flag is set. If the process switching flag is set, the operation confirmation control process is terminated. If the process switching flag is not set, the CPU 120 further determines whether it is time to start the target variable display in which the movable body performance will be executed (step 132SGS516). If it is not time to start the target variable display in which the movable body performance will be executed, the CPU 120 controls the operation of the movable body, the display image on the image display device 5, the sound output from speakers 8L and 8R, and the illumination of each LED based on the process data identified in step 132SGS511, and terminates the operation confirmation control process (step 132SGS517).

Furthermore, if it is the start timing of the target variable display in which the movable body effect is executed, the activation type (whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 was activated by a cold start or a hot start) is identified, and the lower-level switching control type associated with the switching control table shown in FIG. 33 is identified according to the identified activation type (step 132SGS518).

For example, as shown in FIG. 33, if the identified startup type is a cold start, image display control on the image display device 5 and LED light emission control are identified as the lower-level switching control types; if the identified startup type is a hot start, image display control on the image display device 5 and sound output control from speakers 8L and 8R are identified as the lower-level switching control types.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 executes control to switch the control process data corresponding to the lower-level switching control type to lower-level process data among the process data identified in step 132SGS518 (step 132SGS219) and sets the process switching flag (step 132SGS520). It also executes control based on the non-switched process data among the process data identified in step 132SGS218, and terminates the operation confirmation control processing (step 132SGS521).

Also, in step 132SGS512, if the process data identified in step 132SGS511 is not completion data, the performance control CPU 120 stores the detected positions of the origin position sensors (origin position sensors 132SG123, 132SG133, 132SG103, 635C) of each movable body (step 132SGS530), and identifies malfunctioning movable bodies from the detection results of the performance position sensors (performance position sensors 132SG124, 132SG134, 132SG104, 635D) and the origin position sensors (origin position sensors 132SG123, 132SG133, 132SG103, 635C) and stores them as operation-restricted movable bodies (step 132SGS531). Furthermore, the operation check in progress flag is cleared (step 132SGS532), and it is determined whether the process switching in progress flag is set (step 132SGS533).

If the process switching flag is not set, the operation confirmation flag is set (step 132SGS534), and control is executed to switch all control process data to performance control process data (lower), terminating the operation confirmation control processing (step 132SGS535). If the process switching flag is set, the process switching flag is cleared (step 132SGS536), and if the target type is a cold start, control is executed to switch the sound output control process data to performance control process data (lower) (step 132SGS536a). The chance button and on-board movable objects are identified as the movable objects to be operated, and post-confirmation operation process data (upper) is set (step 132SGS537). The post-confirmation operation process timer (upper) is started to count, and operation control and LED illumination control of the chance button and on-board movable objects are initiated (step 132SGS538). The post-confirmation operation execution flag is set, terminating the operation confirmation control processing (step 132SGS539).

Also, if the post-confirmation operation execution flag is set in step 132SGS501, the performance control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the post-confirmation operation process timer (upper) (step 132SGS540) and identifies the process data corresponding to the post-confirmation operation process timer value after the subtraction (step 132SGS541). It then determines whether the identified process data is completed data (step 132SGS542).

If the identified process data is not completion data, it is further determined whether the identified process data corresponds to a presentation position (step 132SGS543). If the identified process data is not data corresponding to a presentation position, the operation confirmation control process is terminated. If the identified process data is data corresponding to a presentation position, the detection results of the presentation position sensors (protruding position sensor 635D and presentation position sensor 132SG124) of the chance button 631B and on-board movable body 32A are stored, and the operation confirmation control process is terminated (step 132SGS544).

Furthermore, if the identified process data is completion data, the performance control CPU 120 stores the detection results of the origin position sensors (origin position sensor 635C and origin position sensor 132SG123) of the chance button 631B and the on-board movable body 32A (step 132SGS545), and determines whether the chance button 631B is located at the origin position (step 132SGS546). If the chance button 631B is located at the origin position, the process proceeds to step 132SGS548; if the chance button 631B is not located at the origin position, the process stores the chance button 631B as a movement-restricted movable body and proceeds to step 132SGS548 (step 132SGS547).

In step 132SGS548, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the on-board movable body 32A is located at the origin position. If the on-board movable body 32A is located at the origin position, the process proceeds to step 132SGS550. If the on-board movable body 32A is not located at the origin position, the on-board movable body 32A is stored as a movement-restricted movable body and the process proceeds to step 132SGS550 (step 132SGS549).

In step 132SGS550, the performance control CPU 120 executes control to switch the process data for movable body control and LED light emission control to performance control process data (lower level). It then clears the operation check execution flag and terminates the operation check control process (step 132SGS551).

By executing the origin placement control process and operation confirmation control process as described above, as shown in Figure 34 (A), during the execution period of switching control when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up by a cold start, movable body control, sound output control, and LED light emission control are executed based on the operation confirmation process data (higher order), and display control is executed based on the presentation control process data (lower order).

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 34 (B), during the execution period of switching control when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a hot start, movable body control and LED light emission control are executed based on the operation confirmation process data (higher order), and display control and sound output control are executed based on the performance control process data (lower order).

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 34 (C), during the execution period of post-confirmation operation control, operation control of the chance button 631B and on-board movable body (movable body control) and LED light emission control are executed based on post-confirmation operation process data (higher order), and display control and sound output control are executed based on performance control process data (lower order).

Figure 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of Figure 28 as the presentation control process. In the presentation control process shown in Figure 35, the presentation control CPU 120 first executes the advance notice setting process in this feature unit 132SG, based on the presentation control command sent from the main board 11 at the time of the initial winning, to execute a hold display notice effect as an advance notice, which suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot based on the display mode of the hold display, and a panel image is displayed on the image display device 5 for one variable display of the second special pattern in time-saving state A and four variable displays of the second special pattern immediately thereafter, and a panel effect suggesting that the variable display result will be a jackpot at different rates depending on the display mode of these panel images. Furthermore, if it is decided to execute a pending display preview effect, a value corresponding to the determined display mode of the pending display is set as the pending display flag value corresponding to the pending memory to be executed in the start winning time receiving command buffer 132SGS194A, and if it is decided to execute a panel display effect, a value corresponding to the determined display mode of the panel display is set as the panel display flag value corresponding to the pending memory to be executed in the start winning time receiving command buffer 132SGS194A, thereby starting the display of these pending displays and panel displays (see Figure 10 (B)).

The effect control CPU 120 also executes a result effect execution process (step 132SGS162). In the result effect execution process, for example, the number of jackpot games that have occurred and the number of prize balls paid out since the first win occurs are counted, and when the last variable display in the time-saving state (time-saving state A is the four variable displays immediately after the end of the time-saving state) ends and control is returned to the normal state (during the pattern determination period), processing is performed to execute a result effect that displays the number of jackpot games that have occurred and the number of prize balls paid out on the image display device 5. Note that, in this feature unit 132SG, when controlled to time-saving state C2, there are exceptional cases in which a result effect is executed from the pattern determination period of the seventh variable display of the second special chart to the eleventh variable display.

The effect control CPU 120 also executes a break-in effect execution process (step 132SGS163). The break-in effect execution process executes a break-in effect that notifies players that the game has been controlled to a time-saving state, for example, during the ending effect of the jackpot game and during the first variable display after the jackpot game.

After executing the processing of step 132SGS163, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processing steps S170 to S175, step 132SGS176, or step 132SGS177, depending on the value of the performance process flag stored in RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (confirmed decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various effects such as reach effects and various preview effects will be executed, their mode, and the start timing of execution are determined based on the display result and variation pattern specified by the effect control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute an effect) that reflects the determined results is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display effect processing of step S172 is executed when the effect process flag value is "2." In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, drive the movable body 32, output audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R in response to a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13, and turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs in response to a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14. After performing these effect controls, the CPU 120 displays the fixed decorative pattern, which is the result of the display of the decorative pattern, in a static state, for example, in response to reading an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the effect control pattern or receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying the static display of the fixed decorative pattern. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a static state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3" and the variable display effect processing ends.

The special symbol hit waiting process of step S173 is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "3." In this special symbol hit waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 stops the variable display of the decorative symbol for the symbol fixation period indicated by the symbol fixation command, based on receiving a command (one of the first symbol fixation command, second symbol fixation command, third symbol fixation command, and fourth symbol fixation command) that specifies the static display of the fixed decorative symbol received in the variable display performance process.

Furthermore, at the end of the pattern determination period, the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether a presentation control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a presentation control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state is received, if the command specifies the start of a big win game state, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "6", which corresponds to the small win presentation processing. Furthermore, if a command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state has not been received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is determined that the display result in the special symbol game was a "miss", and the value of the presentation process flag is updated to its initial value of "0". Once the value of the presentation process flag is updated, the special symbol hit waiting process ends.

The jackpot presentation processing of step S174 is executed when the presentation process flag value is "6." In this jackpot presentation processing, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern, etc., corresponding to the presentation content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. Furthermore, in the jackpot presentation processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying the end of the jackpot gaming state, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "5," which corresponds to the ending presentation processing, and the jackpot presentation processing ends.

The ending presentation process of step S175 is executed when the presentation process flag value is "7". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the settings. The presentation process flag value is then updated to its initial value of "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

The small win presentation processing of step 132SGS176 is executed when the presentation process flag value is "6." During this small win presentation processing, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern, etc., corresponding to the presentation content in the small win gaming state, and executes various presentation controls in the small win gaming state based on the set content. Furthermore, during the small win presentation processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying the end of the small win gaming state, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "7," which corresponds to the small win end presentation, and the small win presentation processing is terminated.

The small win end presentation processing of step 132SGS177 is executed when the presentation process flag value is "7". In this small win end presentation processing, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of the small win game state, and executes various presentation controls at the end of the small win game state based on the settings. The presentation process flag value is then updated to its initial value of "0", and the small win end presentation processing is terminated.

Figure 36 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process shown in Figure 35. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the variable display start command reception flag is set, that is, whether the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command has been received (step 132SGS601). If the variable display start command reception flag is set, the various command data stored in association with buffer numbers "1" to "8" of the special chart reserve memory in the start winning time reception command buffer 132SG194A is shifted up by one buffer number (step 132SGS602). Note that the contents of buffer number "0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so it is erased. Furthermore, if the variable display start command reception flag is not set, the variable display start setting process is terminated. After executing step 132SGS602, the performance control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 132SGS605) and determines the decorative pattern to be stopped according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (step 132SGS606).

The effect control CPU 120 then executes a remaining time-saving count display process (step 132SGS608) for displaying on the image display device 5 the remaining number of time-saving controls in the time-saving state (remaining time-saving counts), a time-saving end countdown display process (step 132SGS609) for displaying on the image display device 5 a countdown of the remaining number of times until the time-saving control ends (also called a countdown effect or time-saving end countdown) when the remaining number of time-saving controls in the time-saving state reaches a predetermined number, and a variable display preview effect determination process (step 132SGS610) for executing a variable display preview effect that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot during the variable display.

Then, the presentation control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the variation pattern, game status, and variable display result (step 132SGS611) and starts the process timer (step 132SGS612).

In each process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, sound control execution data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the lever body 631A and chance button 631B are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbered 1 to N).

Note that, as described below, this characteristic unit 132SG illustrates an example in which the image display device 5 displays the remaining number of time-saving plays in the time-saving state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to either time-saving state B, time-saving state C2, time-saving state B, or time-saving state C2, and power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to a power outage or the like during variable display, the display of the remaining number of time-saving plays may not resume during the variable display even if power is restored, but may resume at the start of the next variable display (when the value of the time-saving play counter is updated). Also, even when power supply is stopped while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to either time-saving state B, time-saving state C2, time-saving state B, or time-saving state C2, but there is no reserved memory and variable display is not being executed (during customer waiting mode), the display of the remaining number of time-saving plays may not resume even if power is restored, but may resume at the start of the next variable display or from the variable display after the value of the time-saving play counter is updated.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance devices (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps and speakers 8L and 8R as performance components, and the operation unit (chance button 631B, etc.)) in accordance with the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, and operation unit control execution data 1) (132SGS613). For example, it outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to display an image corresponding to the fluctuation pattern on the image display device 5. It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 to control the on/off of various lamps. It also outputs a control signal (sound number data) to the sound control board 13 to output sound from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this feature section 132SG, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display so that decorative patterns are variably displayed according to a variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one with the variation pattern designation command, but the performance control CPU 120 may also select a variation pattern to use from multiple types of variation patterns that correspond to the variation pattern designation command.

Then, the variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern specification command (132SGS614). A predetermined time is also set to the variable display control timer (132SGS615). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms. Each time the predetermined time elapses, the performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display status of the left, center, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM. The display control unit 123 outputs a signal corresponding to the image data written to the VRAM to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing the variable display of the decorative patterns. Next, the value of the performance control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the performance processing during variable display (S172) (132SGS616).

In addition, during the variable display performance processing, the values of the process timer, variable display time timer, and variable display control timer are each set to -1. Then, control of the performance device is executed according to the value of the process timer, the variable display of the decorative pattern is realized as described above according to the value of the variable display control timer, the variable display of the decorative pattern is stopped according to the value of the variable display time timer, and the value of the performance control process flag is set to a value according to the special pattern hit waiting processing (S173).

(Flow of the performance)
Next, the flow of the variable display effects in this feature section 132SG will be explained. First, as shown in FIG. 37, when the game state is normal, the progress of the variable display of the first special symbol starts the reach effect of the super reach effect, and after a predetermined period has elapsed, an operation prompt image prompting the player to operate the chance button 631B is displayed on the image display device 5 as part of the reach effect (X1 to X5). At this time, if the variable display result is a jackpot, when the player operates the chance button 631B or the operation acceptance period for the chance button 631B ends, a movable body effect is executed in which the under-board movable body 32B operates as part of the reach effect, and then the decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped combination indicating a jackpot (X6 to X10). After that, the image display device 5 displays an information image informing the player that the variable display result has become a jackpot, and then a right hit information is displayed to inform the player that the jackpot game state is a state in which the game balls are shot toward the right game area to make them enter the big prize slot, and a round effect during the round game is displayed (X11 to X13).

If the jackpot game is a jackpot A jackpot game, as shown in Figures 38 and 39, when the jackpot game ends, a jackpot ending effect is displayed, followed by a break-in effect A, indicating that the game has been controlled to time-saving state A. During the execution of break-in effect A, if there is a reserved memory of the first special symbol, the variable display based on this reserved memory of the first special symbol is executed in an extremely short special symbol change time (0.5 seconds). In addition to being controlled to time-saving state A, break-in effect A also includes a right-hit notification (A1-A4) that notifies the player that time-saving state A is in a state in which the game ball is launched toward the right game area, causing the game ball to enter the second start winning slot and causing the variable display of the second special symbol to be executed.

When the player hits the gaming ball toward the right gaming area in accordance with entry effect A, the gaming ball enters the second start winning slot, and the variable display of the second special symbol begins. At this time, a panel image corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed on the image display device 5 as a panel effect. Then, when the player continues to hit the gaming ball toward the right gaming area and the gaming ball enters the second start winning slot, additional panel images corresponding to each reserved memory of the second special symbol are displayed on the image display device 5 as a panel effect. Note that a maximum of five of these panel images are displayed (A5 to A7) based on the variable display of the second special symbol currently being executed and the maximum number of reserved memories for the second special symbol ("4").

When one variable display of the second special symbol in time-saving state A ends, the game state is controlled from time-saving state A to normal state, and the variable display corresponding to the first reserved memory of the second special symbol begins. During this variable display, if the decorative symbols stop in a reach combination, an operation prompt image is displayed on the image display device 5 to encourage the player to operate the chance button 631B (A8-A10).

At this time, if the variable display result is a small win, when the player operates the chance button 631B, or when the operation acceptance period for the chance button 631B ends, a movable body effect is executed in which the under-board movable body 32B operates, and then the decorative symbols are displayed stopped in a combination indicating a small win. After that, an image (an image displaying "Aim for V!") instructing the player to shoot the gaming ball toward the right gaming area to have the gaming ball detected by the second count switch 130SG024 is displayed on the image display device 5 (B1-B3).

When the player hits a game ball toward the right game area during a small win game in accordance with the image and one of the game balls is detected by the second count switch 130SG024, the image display device 5 displays an image informing the player that the second count switch 130SG024 has detected a game ball during a small win game, i.e., that a V win has occurred, and then displays an image indicating that the game will be controlled to a big win game (B4-B5).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, when the player operates the chance button 631B or the operation acceptance period for the chance button 631B ends, the decorative symbols stop in a combination indicating a miss, and it is announced that the variable display result is a miss. After that, in the variable displays corresponding to the second to fourth reserved memories of the second special design, the image display device 5 notifies the player of the remaining number of variable displays for the second special design, and then an image similar to the first reserved memory of the second special design is displayed (B6-B8).

If all of the variable displays corresponding to the reserved memories of the second special symbol are misses, during the final symbol determination period for the variable display of the second special symbol, the image display device 5 displays an image indicating that all of the variable displays corresponding to the reserved memories of the second special symbol have ended (an image displaying "FINAL BATTLE END..."). Thereafter, while the dedicated stage image is displayed on the image display device 5, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed 10 times. Furthermore, while the dedicated stage image is displayed, an image instructing the player to shoot the game ball toward the left game area is also displayed for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 5 seconds) (B9-B12).

In either of the time-saving states, when the player hits the game ball into the right game area, the game ball enters the second start winning hole, and the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. After the big win game via the small win of the second special symbol ends, the game is controlled to time-saving state B or time-saving state C2.
As will be described later, if power is interrupted and restored during the period shown in Figures 38(A1) to 38(A4), the image display device 5 displays the "Restoring" display until Figure 38(A5), and the movable body performs a 26-second initial operation. Also, if power is interrupted and restored immediately before the end of Figure 38(A4) (within 5 seconds of the end), and the display period of the startup preparation display overlaps with the period shown in Figure 38(A5), the image display device 5 displays the "Restoring" display from Figure 38(A6) onward (the timing at which the "Restoring" display disappears is shown in Figures 39(B3) and 39(B7)), and the movable body performs a 26-second initial operation. Also, if power is interrupted and restored during Figure 38(A5), the image display device 5 displays the "Restoring" display until the variable display corresponding to the second panel is initiated, and the movable body performs a 26-second initial operation (the first time-saving variable time is longer than 26 seconds). Furthermore, if the power is cut off and then restored in Figure 38 (A10) (more than 5 seconds until the end of the fluctuation) (miss pattern), the image display device 5 displays the restoration display up to Figure 38 (B7), and the movable body performs the normal initial operation up to Figure 39 (B6), and the shortened initial operation from Figure 39 (B7) (taking into account the button effects). Furthermore, if the power is cut off and then restored in Figure 38 (A10) (win pattern), the image display device 5 displays the restoration display up to Figure 39 (B3), and the movable body performs the normal initial operation up to Figure 39 (B2), and the shortened initial operation from Figure 39 (B3) (taking into account the "Aim for V"). Note that the light emission mode of the under-board movable body LED 9e when the under-board movable body 32B is operating differs between the initial operation and Figure 39 (B1).

Furthermore, if power is interrupted and restored in Figure 39 (B2) (within 5 seconds until the end of the variable display) and the display period of the start-up preparation display overlaps with the period of Figure 39 (B5), the image display device 5 will display "Aim for V" after the display period of the start-up preparation display has elapsed, and the movable body will change the initial operation after the start-up preparation display is hidden to a shortened mode based on the main command (small win start command or small win open command) received in Figure 39 (B3). Furthermore, the large prize opening will begin opening during the display period of the start-up preparation display. Furthermore, if power is interrupted and restored in Figure 39 (B3) (at the start (2 seconds left until the next round)), the image display device 5 will display a recovery display in a special mode (notifying that a small win has occurred) until the open command (second round) is received after the V win (round 1), and the movable body will perform the initial operation in the normal mode (which will end before the start of the next round), and the large prize opening will begin opening during the display period of the start-up preparation display.

When the game is controlled to time-saving state B after the end of a big win game, that is, when the variable display result is a small win and the small win type is small win A or small win B, as shown in Figure 40, first, the decorative symbols are displayed as a combination indicating a small win as the variable display of the second special chart. After that, an image (an image displaying "Aim for V!") is displayed on the image display device 5 instructing the player to shoot the game ball toward the right game area to have the game ball detected by the second count switch 130SG024. When the player hits a game ball toward the right game area during a small win game in accordance with the image and one of the game balls is detected by the second count switch 130SG024, the image display device 5 displays an image informing the player that the second count switch 130SG024 has detected a game ball during a small win game, i.e., that a V win has occurred, and then displays an image indicating that the game will be controlled to a big win game (the "FEVER" image) (C1-C4).

Next, when the jackpot game via the small jackpot ends, an ending effect is displayed on the image display device 5 according to the number of prize balls won in the jackpot game. Then, after the entry effect B is executed, in which a part of the image displayed on the image display device 5 differs depending on the number of times already controlled in the time-saving state, the first variable display of the second special symbol in the time-saving state B begins. Furthermore, during the time-saving state B, a variable display of decorative symbols is executed while a background image of a city at night (second background display) is displayed on the image display device 5 (C5-C8).

If seven variable displays (seven variable displays of the second special symbol) end without the variable display result being either a big win or a small win in time-saving state B, a result effect will begin during the symbol determination period of the seventh variable display. The result effect displays a value corresponding to the number of times the game has been controlled to a big win game state since the initial win or one of the time-saving states, as well as the total number of prize balls acquired. Furthermore, if there is a reserved memory of a second special symbol when the result effect begins, the variable display of the second special symbol will be executed up to four times in an extremely short special symbol change time (0.5 seconds) according to the remaining reserved memory of the second special symbol (remaining reserved memory) (C9-C11).

If none of the variable displays corresponding to the remaining reserved memory result in a big win or a small win, the image display device 5 begins displaying a stage background image, and also displays an image instructing the player to shoot the game ball toward the left game area for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 5 seconds). Thereafter, the stage background image is displayed on the image display device 5 until 10 variable displays are completed (C12-C14).

Furthermore, when the time-saving mode C2 is entered after a jackpot game via a small win ends, i.e., when the time-saving mode C2 is entered after a jackpot game of jackpot E ends, the following actions are performed first, as when the time-saving mode B is entered: a stop display of a combination of decorative symbols indicating a small win; the display of an image on the image display device 5 displaying "Aim for V!"; the display of an image announcing the occurrence of a V win during the small win game; the display of an image indicating that the game is entering a jackpot game (the "FEVER" image); the display of an image corresponding to the number of balls won in the jackpot game; a break-in effect B in which a portion of the image displayed on the image display device 5 changes depending on the number of times the game has already been entered into the time-saving mode; and the display of seven variable decorative symbols while the second background display is displayed (see C1-C9 in Figure 40).

As shown in Figure 41, when the seventh variable display of the decorative pattern (seven variable displays of the second special pattern) ends without the variable display result being either a big win or a small win, a result effect begins during the pattern determination period of the seventh variable display. The result effect displays a value corresponding to the number of times the game has been controlled to a big win game state since the initial win or one of the time-saving states, as well as the total number of prize balls acquired. Furthermore, during the execution period of the result effect, three variable displays of the decorative pattern (variable display of the second special pattern) are executed in an extremely short special pattern change time (0.5 seconds). If the variable display result is neither a big win nor a small win in the three variable displays of the decorative pattern (eighth to tenth variable displays), another variable display of the decorative pattern (eleventh variable display) is executed (D1 to D3).

If the variable display result in the 11th variable display is neither a big hit nor a small hit, the on-board movable body 32A moves and an illumination effect image corresponding to the movement of the on-board movable body 32A is displayed on the image display device 5. After the on-board movable body 32A falls, when the on-board movable body 32A returns to its standby position before falling (the upper position of the image display device 5), the image displayed on the image display device 5 is dimmed (displayed in black). After the dimming ends, an image indicating that the time-saving state has not yet ended is displayed on the image display device 5 (D4 to D6).

Furthermore, the image display device 5 displays an operation prompt image prompting the player to operate the chance button 631B. When the player operates the chance button 631B or the operation acceptance period for the chance button 631B ends, the image display device 5 executes a V-stock effect, informing the player that the number of time-saving control cycles in the time-saving state is 685, i.e., that the variable display result during the time-saving state is essentially a big win or a small win. Thereafter, when the V-stock effect ends with the completion of the eleventh variable display, the image display device 5 starts the twelfth and subsequent variable displays while displaying the second background display (D7-D9). In particular, as shown in Figures 41 (D2) to 41 (D8), in the transition from the result effect during time-saving state C2 to the V-stock effect, unlike the result effect corresponding to time-saving state B, the right-hit notification image in the upper right corner of the image display device 5 is temporarily hidden to prevent the player from noticing in advance that the time-saving control continues even after the result effect ends. The right-hit notification image in the upper right corner of the image display device 5 will resume from the start of the 12th variable display.

[Display screen of image display device 5]
37 to 41, when the game state is the normal game state, an active display area 132SG013 is provided in the lower center of the display screen of the image display device 5, and a first hold display area 132SG011 corresponding to the first hold memory is provided on the left side thereof. For example, in response to the execution of variable display of the first special pattern, an active display 132SG003 is displayed in the active display area 132SG013, and in response to the value of the first hold memory count being 4, four first hold displays 132SG001 are displayed horizontally in the first hold display area 132SG011.

Furthermore, when the game state is in the time-saving state, an active display area 132SG013 is provided in the lower left corner of the display screen of the image display device 5, and above that a second hold display area 132SG012 corresponding to the second hold memory is provided (see Figure 92). For example, in response to the variable display of the second special pattern being executed, active display 132SG003 is displayed in active display area 132SG013 provided at the left edge of the display area, and in response to the value of the second hold memory count being 4, four second hold displays 132SG002 are displayed vertically in second hold display area 132SG012.

In this embodiment, in order to consume winnings in order, if a second hold memory is stored in normal game mode, the second hold display 132SG002 is not displayed in the first hold display area 132SG011, and if a second hold memory is stored in time-saving mode, the first hold display 132SG001 is not displayed in the second hold display area 132SG012. However, for example, it may be possible to display both the first hold display 132SG001 and the second hold display 132SG002 in the first hold display area 132SG011.

In addition, a display area 5SL is provided in the upper left corner of the display screen of the image display device 5 for displaying the first reserved memory number (for example, the number "0"), the second reserved memory number (for example, the number "4"), and a small pattern corresponding to the decorative pattern (for example, an arrow "↓↓↓"), and the small pattern is displayed variably in synchronization with the variable display of the decorative pattern.

The above-mentioned first reserved memory count, second reserved memory count, reserved display, small symbols, error display (not shown) indicating an error state that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1, remaining time reduction display 132SG201, right-hit prompt display 132SG430, etc. may be displayed in front of (on a higher layer than) the effect images such as characters to prevent overlapping of the effect images and reducing the visibility of the first reserved memory count, second reserved memory count, small symbols, and error display, while the decorative symbols may be displayed behind (on a lower layer than) the effect images to prevent overlapping of the decorative symbols and reducing the visibility of the effect images.

The small symbol is also referred to as the fourth symbol. The fourth symbol is a symbol indicating that a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is being variably displayed, and is variably displayed by a certain operation in a manner that is always visible on a display device such as the image display device 5. The variably displayed fourth symbol can be used to perform effects such as a momentary disappearance of the effect content, including the variable display of the decorative symbol, from the screen, or an effect in which the above-board movable body 32A or the below-board movable body 32B obscure all or part of the screen of the image display device 5, making it possible to determine whether or not the decorative symbol is currently being variably displayed, even if it is difficult to recognize the decorative symbol. Upon receiving the first variable display start command, the effect control CPU operates the image display device 5 to variably display the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol. Furthermore, upon receiving the second variable display start command, the effect control CPU operates the image display device 5 to variably display the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol.

In addition, the pattern displayed on a fourth pattern display device provided in a location other than the image display device 5 (such as the special variable winning ball device 7, which is a predetermined location on the game board 2), such as the first special symbol LED or second special symbol LED, is also referred to as the fourth symbol.

[Various movable bodies]
Next, each movable body will be explained based on Fig. 42 to Fig. 44. Fig. 42 is a diagram showing (A) a state in which the on-board movable body is located at the origin position, and (B) a state in which it is located at the effect position. Fig. 43 is a diagram showing (A) a state in which the under-board movable body is located at the origin position, and (B) a state in which it is located at the effect position. Fig. 44 is a diagram showing (A) a state in which the on-frame movable body and chance button are located at the origin position, and (B) a state in which they are located at the effect position.

As shown in Figures 42 and 43, an above-board movable body 32A and an below-board movable body 32B are provided on the front side of the gaming board 2. These above-board movable body 32A and below-board movable body 32B are also referred to as "board-side movable bodies" because they are provided on the gaming board 2. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 44, an above-frame movable body 132SG101 and a chance button 631B are provided on the opening and closing door frame 3a. These above-frame movable body 132SG101 and chance button 631B are also referred to as "frame-side movable bodies" because they are provided on the opening and closing door frame 3a. The board-side movable body is a movable body that is provided so that it cannot be touched by the player when the opening and closing door frame 3a is in the closed state, and the frame-side movable body is a movable body that is provided so that it can be touched by the player when the opening and closing door frame 3a is in the closed state.

As shown in Figure 42, the on-board movable body 32A is formed in a roughly trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front, and has a performance section 32a with the letters "XXX" displayed on the front, and support sections 32b that support the performance section 32a from the left and right sides. It is movable up and down by a drive mechanism (not shown) that includes a drive motor 132SG122 and a power transmission member that transmits the power of the drive motor 132SG122 to the on-board movable body 32A. In more detail, the on-board movable body 32A is movable between an origin position at the top front of the display screen of the image display device 5 as shown in Figure 42(A), and a performance position approximately in the center front of the display screen of the image display device 5 as shown in Figure 42(B); at the origin position, a portion (the lower part) overlaps the display area, and at the performance position, the entire area overlaps the display area.

The on-board movable body 32A is detected at the origin position by an origin position sensor 132SG123, and at the performance position by a performance position sensor 132SG124. Multiple on-board movable body LEDs 9d are also provided inside, and these on-board movable body LEDs 9d can emit light from the front.

As shown in Figure 43, the under-board movable body 32B is shaped roughly like a fist when viewed from the front, and has a performance section 32c with decoration displayed on the front, and a support section 32d that supports the performance section 32c from below. It is movable up and down by a drive mechanism (not shown) that includes a drive motor 132SG132 and a power transmission member that transmits the power of the drive motor 132SG132 to the under-board movable body 32B. In more detail, the under-board movable body 32B is movable between an origin position at the front and bottom of the display screen of the image display device 5 as shown in Figure 43(A), and a performance position at approximately the center of the front of the display screen of the image display device 5 as shown in Figure 43(B). At the origin position, a portion (upper portion) overlaps the display area, and at the performance position, the entire area overlaps the display area.

The under-board movable body 32B is detected at the origin position by an origin position sensor 132SG133, and at the performance position by a performance position sensor 132SG134. Multiple under-board movable body LEDs 9e are also provided inside, and these under-board movable body LEDs 9e can emit light from the front.

As shown in Figure 44, the first effect unit 132SG100 has a plate-shaped base member 132SG105 that protrudes upward and forward from the upper edge of the opening and closing door frame 3a, and a frame-mounted movable body 132SG101 that is movable up and down on the front side of the base member 132SG105. The frame-mounted movable body 132SG101 is shaped to resemble a character (not shown) displayed in various effects on the pachinko gaming machine 1, and frame-mounted decorative parts 132SG111L, 132SG111R that are shaped to resemble the character's wings are movably mounted on the back side.

The first performance unit 132SG100 includes a drive mechanism (not shown) including a drive motor 132SG102 and a power transmission member that transmits the power of the drive motor 132SG102 to the frame-mounted movable body 132SG101, an origin position sensor 132SG103 for detecting that the frame-mounted movable body 132SG101 is located at the origin position, a performance position sensor 132SG104 for detecting that the frame-mounted movable body 132SG101 is located at the performance position, and a drive motor 132SG112 and a power transmission member that transmits the power of the drive motor 132SG112 to the frame-mounted decorative part 132SG It has a drive mechanism (not shown) including a power transmission member that transmits power to the frame-top decorative parts 132SG111L and 132SG111R, an origin position sensor 132SG113 for detecting that the frame-top decorative parts 132SG111L and 132SG111R are located at the origin position, a performance position sensor 132SG134 for detecting that the frame-top decorative parts 132SG111L and 132SG111R are located at the performance position, and a frame-top movable body LED 9f for illuminating the front of the frame-top movable body 132SG101 and the frame-top decorative parts 132SG111L and 132SG111R.

In this way, the frame-top movable body 132SG101 is capable of moving vertically between the origin position shown in Figure 44(A) and the performance position shown in Figure 44(B) at the upper front (above the glass window) of the opening and closing door frame 3a. Furthermore, the frame-top decorative parts 132SG111L, 132SG111R are capable of changing between a non-deployed state in which they are stored in the origin position on the left and right sides of the back of the frame-top movable body 132SG101 and a deployed state in which they protrude to spread out to the performance positions on the upper left and right sides of the back. They change from the non-deployed state to the deployed state in response to the upward movement of the frame-top movable body 132SG101, and change from the deployed state to the non-deployed state in response to the downward movement of the frame-top movable body 132SG101.

Also, as shown in Figure 44, the chance button 631B consists of a cylindrical member with an operation surface formed on the top, and is arranged so that it can move up and down relative to the base part 600A formed on the top of the operation unit 600. In detail, the chance button 631B is movable up and down between an origin position (see Figure 44 (A)) where the operation surface protrudes slightly upward from the base part 600A, and an operation detection position where the operation surface is lower than the origin position, and is biased upward so that it is always held in the origin position; when the player presses it, it moves from the origin position to the operation detection position, and the pressing operation is detected by the button sensor 635B.

The chance button 631B can be moved up and down between an origin position (see Figure 44(A)) and an effect position where the operation surface is higher than the origin position, by a drive mechanism (not shown) including an advance/retract motor 635F and a power transmission member that transmits the power of the advance/retract motor 635F to the chance button 631B. In other words, the chance button 631B can be changed by the advance/retract motor 635F between a first operable state in which it is located at the origin position and a second operable state in which it is located at the effect position, and can be pressed up to the operation detection position in either the first operable state or the second operable state.

The chance button 631B is detected by the origin position sensor 635C at the origin position, by the button sensor 635B at the operation detection position, and by the protrusion position sensor 635D at the performance position. Multiple chance button LEDs 9g are also provided inside, and these chance button LEDs 9g allow the operation surface to emit light.

In this embodiment, the board-side movable body provided on the game board 2 is exemplified by the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B, and the frame-side movable body provided on the opening and closing door frame 3a is exemplified by the chance button 631B and the above-frame movable body 132SG101. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the board-side movable body and frame-side movable body are not limited to those described above, and the number, position, shape, and operating mode of each can be changed in various ways.

[Various performances]
Next, various effects that can be executed by the effect control CPU 120 will be explained with reference to Figures 45 and 46. Figure 45 is a diagram showing a list of effects that can be executed by the effect control CPU. Figure 46 (A) is a diagram showing effects that can be executed during the variable display period of SP reach, and (B) is a diagram showing a list of effects that can be executed in the jackpot gaming state.

As shown in Figure 45, the effect control CPU 120 can execute multiple effects. In more detail, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a "pre-reading movable object prediction" that suggests the reliability of a jackpot in the variable display (also called target variation) that is the subject of the pre-reading prediction before the variable display begins.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 can execute "start-time announcement," "pseudo consecutive announcement," "moving object announcement," "reach announcement," and "button announcement" as advance announcement effects that indicate that the variable display will be controlled to a jackpot.

In addition, the presentation control CPU 120 can execute a "win/lose button presentation" as a deciding presentation that notifies players whether or not they will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state in a variable display based on a super reach jackpot variation pattern (for example, SP reach A to E, etc.).

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the following jackpot effects during jackpot gaming: "fanfare effect," "round effect," "promotion effect," and "ending effect."

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 can execute "time-saving effects" and "result effects" as time-saving effects that can be executed in the special states of time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and time-saving state C.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a "customer waiting demo effect" as a standby effect that can be executed in a standby state where no game is being played.

As shown in Figure 46 (A), the "Start Notice," "Moving Object Notice/Pseudo-Continuous Notice," and "Reach Notice/Button Notice" are effects that can be executed, for example, before the variable display mode becomes the N Reach mode and the N Reach effect is executed, or before the variable display mode becomes the SP Reach mode and the SP Reach effect is executed. In addition, the "Win/Loss Button Effect" is an effect that can be executed in the latter half of the SP Reach effect.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 46 (B), the "fanfare effect" is executed during the fanfare period from when control of the jackpot game state begins until the start of round play, when the large prize opening is opened; the "round effect" is executed during the period when control of the large prize opening is being executed during round play, where the large prize opening alternates between open and closed states; the "interval effect" is executed during the period when control of the large prize opening is being executed during round play; and the "ending effect" is executed during the ending period from when round play ends until the jackpot game state ends. These fanfare periods, round play periods, and ending periods are managed by the CPU 103. Note that in the first round of jackpots C, D, and E, the large prize opening is opened in a small prize opening pattern (repeatedly opening and closing for a short period of time).

In addition, the "promotion effect" is executed during the special round interval period from the end of the third round opening period of the large prize slot for jackpots C, D, and E until the start of the fourth round opening period.

(Predictive moving object announcement)
As shown in Figure 45, the "pre-reading movable body announcement" is an effect in which the movable body 32A on the board operates in multiple variable displays corresponding to reserved memories that were not the subject of the pre-reading announcement effect, which are executed before the variable display (hereinafter referred to as target change) of the reserved memory that was the subject of the pre-reading announcement effect is executed.

Specifically, for example, as shown in Figure 47 (A1), if a start win occurs when the number of reserved memories for the first special pattern is "2" and the variable display is being executed, and a decision is made to execute a predictive movable body announcement because the variable display based on the reserved memory prior to the start win is a non-reach miss (i.e., the special pattern change time is 12 seconds or less), then after the variable display is stopped (see Figure 47 (A2)), when the reserved memory is consumed and the variable display starts, the on-board movable body 32A will vibrate up and down multiple times between the origin position and the intermediate position, and effect display 132SG401 emphasizing the on-board movable body 32A will be displayed and sound effects will be output (see Figure 47 (A3)), and it will then return to the origin position before the variable display is stopped (see Figure 47 (A4)). This action is performed when the variable display that is executed before the start of the variable display (target change) based on the reserved memory that is the subject of the preview preview performance begins, and when the variable display (target change) based on the reserved memory that is the subject of the preview preview performance begins (see Figures 47 (A5) to (A7)).

In this embodiment, the pre-reading movable object announcement is shown as an example of a presentation pattern in which it continues across multiple variable displays until the target movement begins, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may also be possible to implement a presentation pattern with a low expectation level in which the pre-reading movable object announcement ends before the target movement begins. It may also be possible to implement multiple presentation patterns with different jackpot expectations depending on the movement speed of the on-board movable object 32A as it descends to the intermediate position and the display color of the effect display 132SG401.

(Notice at the start)
As shown in Figure 45, the "start notice" is an effect that indicates whether the display color of the active display 132SG003 will change when the variable display starts. The display color of the active display 132SG003 is white as the base color and can change to blue, green, and red, and the display color at the end of the start notice indicates the likelihood of a jackpot. In this embodiment, an effect pattern that ends in white, an effect pattern that ends in blue, an effect pattern that ends in green, and an effect pattern that ends in red are executable, with the effect patterns having the highest likelihood of a jackpot being white, blue, green, and red, in that order.

Specifically, for example, as shown in Figure 48 (B1), when it is decided to execute the start notice upon the start of the variable display, the entire display area is turned off or becomes dark with low brightness, and the character display 132SG402 "!!" is displayed approximately in the middle of the display area (see Figure 48 (B2)). Next, the active display 132SG003 and its surroundings are displayed in white and become brighter (see Figure 48 (B3)).

In the case of a presentation pattern that ends in white, the display color of the active display 132SG003 and its surroundings does not change or enlarge, and when a predetermined time has passed since the active display 132SG003 and its surroundings were displayed in white in Figure 48 (B3), a "?" character display 132SG403 is displayed above the active display 132SG003, indicating that the final display color will be white (see Figure 48 (B3a)).

In the case of an effect pattern that ends in blue, the display color of active display 132SG003 and its surroundings changes from white to blue and is enlarged (see Figure 48 (B4)). When a predetermined time has passed since active display 132SG003 and its surroundings turned white in Figure 48 (B3), active display 132SG003 breaks and the character display 132SG404 "!?" is displayed, indicating that the final display color will be blue (see Figure 48 (B4a)).

In the case of a presentation pattern that ends in green, the display color of active display 132SG003 and its surroundings gradually changes from white to blue to green and is enlarged (see Figures 48 (B4) (B5)). After a predetermined time has passed since active display 132SG003 and its surroundings turned white in Figure 48 (B3), active display 132SG003 breaks up and the word "heat" 132SG405 is displayed, indicating that the final display color will be green (see Figure 48 (B5a)).

For a presentation pattern that ends in red, the display color of the active display 132SG003 and its surrounding area gradually changes from white to blue, green, and red in order, and is enlarged (see Figures 48 (B4) to (B6)). After a predetermined time has passed since the active display 132SG003 was displayed in white in Figure 48 (B3), the word "Super Hot" 132SG406 is displayed above the active display 132SG003, indicating that the final display color will be red (see Figure 48 (B6a)).

In this way, the "start notice" includes an introductory part (see Figures 48 (B2) to (B6)) that serves as a period during which the hold display will change or not, and a result notification part (see Figures 48 (B3a), (B4a), (B5a), (B6a)) that serves as a period during which the result of the hold display change is notified.

In this embodiment, the example shows how the likelihood of a jackpot is suggested by changing the display mode, such as the display color and size, of the active display 132SG003. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the likelihood of a jackpot may be suggested by changing display modes other than the display color and size. Furthermore, the likelihood of a jackpot may be suggested by changing the display mode of not only the active display 132SG003, but also the first hold display 132SG001 and the second hold display 132SG002. Furthermore, the change patterns for the display color and size are not limited to those described above, and other change patterns may be possible.

(Movable object preview)
As shown in Fig. 45, the "movable object preview" is an effect in which the on-board movable object 32A vibrates up and down multiple times between the origin position and the intermediate position, and the chance button 631B vibrates, before the pseudo consecutive effect described later is executed in the variable display. The effect patterns of the movable object preview include a "vibration (small) pattern" in which the amplitude of the vertical vibration is small, and a "vibration (large) pattern" in which the amplitude of the vertical vibration is larger than the vibration (small) and the likelihood of a jackpot is high, and either the "vibration (small) pattern" or the "vibration (large) pattern" is determined depending on the result of the variable display.

Specifically, for example, as shown in Figure 49 (C1), when it is decided to execute a movable object preview upon the start of the variable display, at a predetermined timing before the pseudo consecutive performance begins, the on-board movable object 32A vibrates up and down multiple times between the origin position and the intermediate position, and the chance button 631B vibrates (see Figure 49 (C2)). In addition, an effect display 132SG407 emphasizing the on-board movable object 32A is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, and performance sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this embodiment, an example has been given of a form in which a moving object announcement is made in a variable display in which a pseudo consecutive performance is performed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a moving object announcement may also be made in a variable display in which a pseudo consecutive performance is not performed (for example, a non-reach variable pattern).

In addition, it is possible to operate the vibration motor 635E (Pattern A) before the start of operation of the chance button 631B during the initial operation described below, or in conjunction with the advancement operation. Furthermore, as a performance during movement, the vibration motor 635E can be operated (Pattern B) to indicate the degree of expectation, or it can be operated (Pattern C) as decoration (entertainment) when a jackpot is hit or when the moving body is moving. Each of these Patterns A, B, and C has a different vibration pattern (strength of movement, rhythm of movement, and movement time), as well as a different lamp pattern (Pattern A: initial emphasis; Pattern B: rapid white flashing, rapid red flashing; Pattern C: rainbow colors, lighting in a color corresponding to the effect displayed when the moving body is moving) and sound output pattern (Pattern A: initialization notification or silence; Pattern B: background music during movement; Pattern C: celebratory sound upon jackpot, moving body performance sound).

As will be described later, the initial highlighting mode is a lighting pattern (brightness, lighting time, etc.) that is dedicated to initial actions, and is therefore not used in any performance action control (see Figure 56 (B)).

(Pseudo consecutive announcement)
As shown in Figure 45, the "pseudo consecutive announcement" is an effect that suggests whether or not the variable display will resume after temporarily stopping the decorative symbols during the variable display of the decorative symbols, that is, whether or not one variable display will be made to look like multiple variable displays. The pseudo consecutive effects include a double pattern in which the variable display resumes twice, and a triple pattern in which the variable display resumes three times, which has a higher probability of winning than the double pattern, and either the double pattern or the triple pattern is determined depending on the variable display result.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 49 (C1), when a variable display in which a pseudo consecutive prediction is executed is initiated, if it is decided to execute a moving object prediction, the moving object prediction is executed (see FIG. 49 (C2)). After that, the decorative pattern that was variably displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed (see FIG. 49 (C3)), and then a decorative pattern with a number one larger than the decorative pattern temporarily displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R (see FIG. 49 (C4)), and then a decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern temporarily displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R is decelerated and displayed just before the stopped display position in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C (see FIG. 49 (C5)).

After that, in the case of a variable display in which a pseudo consecutive prediction is executed, a decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern temporarily displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R is temporarily displayed at the stopped display position in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C (see FIG. 49 (C6)), and then the variable display of decorative patterns is resumed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, and the right decorative pattern display area 5R (see FIG. 49 (C7)). On the other hand, in the case of a variable display in which a pseudo consecutive prediction is not executed, a decorative pattern with a number one larger than the decorative pattern temporarily displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R is temporarily displayed at the stopped display position in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, and a variable display result of a miss is displayed (see FIG. 49 (C10)).

Also, in Figure 49 (C7), after the variable display of decorative symbols is resumed, in the case of a pseudo-consecutive announcement of a double pattern, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the decorative symbol that was variably displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is temporarily displayed in a stopped state (see Figure 49 (C8)), and a decorative symbol with the same number as the decorative symbol temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is temporarily displayed in a stopped state in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, resulting in a reach mode (see Figure 49 (C9)), and the presentation develops into an SP reach mode. Also, in Figure 49 (C7), after the variable display of decorative symbols is resumed, in the case of a pseudo-consecutive announcement of a triple pattern, the sequence of Figures 49 (C3) to (C7) is repeated, and then the presentation develops into a reach mode in Figures 49 (C8) and (C9), and the presentation develops into an SP reach mode.

In this way, the "pseudo consecutive announcement" includes an introductory part (see Figures 49 (C3) to (B5)) that serves as a period to tease whether or not the variable display will resume, and a result notification part (see Figures 49 (C6), (C10), and (C9)) that serves as a period to notify the result of whether or not the variable display has resumed.

(Reach notice)
As shown in Figure 45, the "reach preview" is a presentation that indicates whether or not a decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L will be displayed in a stopped state in the right decorative pattern display area 5R after the variable display of the decorative pattern has begun and the decorative pattern that was displayed in a stopped state in the left decorative pattern display area 5L has been displayed in a stopped state, i.e., whether or not a reach state will occur.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 50 (D1), after the variable display begins and the decorative symbol that was variably displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is displayed as a static symbol (see FIG. 50 (D2)), a decelerating display of a decorative symbol with the same number as the decorative symbol displayed as a static symbol in the left decorative symbol display area 5L begins just before the static display position in the variably displayed right decorative symbol display area 5R (see FIG. 50 (D3)). Then, if a player's operation is detected within a predetermined valid operation period after the decelerating display begins, or if no operation is detected and the valid operation period has elapsed, and a reach-win state is not reached, a decorative symbol with the same number as the decorative symbol displayed as a static symbol in the left decorative symbol display area 5L passes the static display position and the next decorative symbol is displayed as a static symbol (see FIGS. 50 (D4), (D5), (D7)). If a reach-win state is reached, a decorative symbol with the same number as the decorative symbol displayed as a static symbol in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is displayed as a static symbol at the static display position (see FIGS. 50 (D4), (D5), (D6)).

Note that a reach mode is a mode (also known as a reach effect) in which, from the start of the variable display of decorative symbols (identification information) until the display result is derived and displayed, all decorative symbols (e.g., the left and right symbols) excluding one decorative symbol (e.g., the middle symbol) from the combination of multiple decorative symbols (e.g., "333") that make up the jackpot display result are displayed statically, and then the one decorative symbol (e.g., the middle symbol) is displayed variably.

(Button preview)
As shown in Figure 45, when the above-mentioned reach prediction is executed, the "button prediction" is executed during the period from when the deceleration display of the decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern displayed in a stopped state in the left decorative pattern display area 5L begins in the right decorative pattern display area 5R until the specified operation valid period has elapsed, and is an effect that promotes button operation to determine whether or not the reach state will occur.

Specifically, for example, as shown in Figures 50 (D4) to (D5), this is an operation prompt effect that encourages operation of the chance button 631B from the start of the deceleration display of the decorative pattern until the lapse of a specified valid operation period. It begins with the display of an operation prompt display and a button image that resembles the chance button 631B, and ends when operation of the chance button 631B is detected within the valid operation period, or when the valid operation period has lapsed without operation being detected, and the operation prompt display and button image are no longer displayed.

The button preview presentation patterns (operation prompting modes) include a "long press pattern" that prompts the player to press and hold the chance button 631B for a specified operation period, a "rapid press pattern" that prompts the player to repeatedly press the chance button 631B for a specified operation period, and a "single hit pattern" that prompts the player to press the chance button 631B once. Depending on the variable display result, either non-execution, "long press pattern," "rapid press pattern," or "single hit pattern" is determined. Note that the presentation patterns are not limited to the above, and four or more types may be set, or two or less types may be set. The operation prompting display is "Long press!" for the "long press pattern," "rapid press!" for the "rapid press pattern," and "Press!" for the "single hit pattern."

In this way, the "button announcement" includes an operation prompting part (see Figure 50 (D5)) that serves as a period for encouraging the operation of the chance button 631B, and a result notification part (see Figures 50 (D6) and (D7)) that serves as a period for notifying the result of whether or not the operation has resulted in a reach state.

(Win/lose button effect)
As shown in Figure 45, the "win/lose button effect" is an effect that, at the end of the SP reach effect in the variable display of the super reach variation pattern, encourages button operation to determine whether the variable display result will be a jackpot or not, and notifies the user of the result of whether or not it will be a jackpot.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 51 (E1), a reach title, which is a type of SP reach presentation, is announced in the variable display of the super reach variation pattern, and after the SP reach presentation (for example, a battle between an ally character and an enemy character) has begun (see FIGS. 51 (E2) and (E3)), the presentation begins by displaying an operation prompt display 132SG411 consisting of the words "PRESS!!" to prompt the operation of the chance button 631B, and a button display 132SG412 imitating the chance button 631B, from the time the battle is concluded until a predetermined valid operation period has elapsed (see FIG. 51 (E4)).

Then, when operation of the chance button 631B is detected within the valid operation period, or when the valid operation period has elapsed without any operation being detected, the operation prompt display 132SG411 and button display 132SG412 are hidden and the game ends. If the variable display result is a jackpot, the movable body LED 9e lights up in a predetermined light color, the under-board movable body 32B rises from the origin position to the effect position, the effect display 132SG413 highlighting the under-board movable body 32B is displayed, and a predetermined effect sound is output, indicating that the game has been controlled to a jackpot game state (see Figure 51 (E5)). After that, an image (not shown) indicating that the ally character has won the battle against the enemy character is displayed, and then the jackpot confirmation symbol combination is statically displayed, indicating that a jackpot has occurred (see Figures 51 (E6) to (E9)).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, the under-board movable body 32B does not rise from the origin position to the presentation position, and a display 132SG414 is displayed indicating that the ally character has lost the battle with the enemy character, after which a notification is given that the variable display result is a miss (see Figure 51 (E10) to (E12)).

Note that possible presentation patterns include one in which the chance button 631B remains in the origin position and an operation prompt is displayed, and one in which the chance button 631B moves from the origin position to a presentation position and an operation prompt is displayed, resulting in a higher chance of winning than when the chance button 631B is in the origin position. Furthermore, the presentation patterns are not limited to the above, and three or more types may be set, or only one type may be set.

In this way, the "win/lose button effect" includes an operation promotion part (see Figure 51 (E4)) that serves as a period for promoting the operation of the chance button 631B, and a result notification part (see Figures 51 (E5) and (E10)) that serves as a period for notifying the user of the variable display result of whether or not the result is a jackpot by the under-board movable body 32B.

(Fanfare performance)
As shown in Fig. 45, the "fanfare effect" is an effect that notifies information about the controlled jackpot during the period from when the jackpot game state is controlled to when the round game starts. Note that the information about the jackpot is, for example, information about the type of jackpot, the number of rounds, the number of balls dispensed, the game state after the jackpot ends (time-saving states A, B, C1, C2), etc., and may also include other information.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 52 (F1), after a combination of jackpot confirmation symbols is displayed statically and the variable display result indicates a jackpot, the jackpot gaming state begins, and display 132SG420 indicating that a jackpot has started is displayed (see FIG. 52 (F2)). Furthermore, when the gaming state is controlled to the jackpot gaming state, as shown in FIGS. 54 (A1) and (A2), the frame-mounted movable body 132SG101 rises from the origin position to the presentation position, and after the jackpot gaming state ends, it is maintained in the presentation position until the time-saving state ends.

Next, information indicating the jackpot type (jackpots A to E) is displayed. Specifically, in the case of a 10-round jackpot, the jackpot type display 132SG421 that makes up "BIG BONUS!!" is framed in from the right side of the display screen of the image display device 5 a predetermined number of times (e.g., one character) at a time and moved to the center of the display screen (see Figure 52 (F3) to (F6)). Also, in the case of a 3-round jackpot, the character images that make up "SMALL BONUS!!" are framed in from the right side of the display screen of the image display device 5 a predetermined number of times (e.g., one character) at a time and moved to the center of the display screen (not shown).

Next, the on-board movable body 32A descends from the origin position to the presentation position and displays a right-hit prompt display 132SG431 that encourages the player to shoot the game ball into the right game area (see Figure 52 (F7)), after which the on-board movable body 32A returns to the origin position and displays a right-hit prompt display 132SG432 that indicates that the player should aim for the big prize slot (see Figure 52 (F8)).

In this way, the "fanfare effect" includes an introductory part that serves as a period during which information regarding a jackpot is announced (see Figures 52 (F2) to (F6)), and an operation direction announcement part that announces the operation direction of the ball-hitting control handle, i.e., an operation to hit to the right (see Figures 52 (F7) and (F8)).

(Round performance)
As shown in Figure 45, the "round effect" is an effect in which winning information during a round is announced after the game is controlled to a jackpot game state and the fanfare period ends, and the large winning opening of the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened during the round play.

Specifically, for example, as shown in Figures 52 (F9) to (F11), during round play, the following are displayed: a character display 132SG450; a round number display 132SG451 indicating the number of rounds; a winning ball count display 132SG452 indicating the number of winning balls in that round; a ball count display 132SG453 indicating the number of balls paid out since the jackpot game state began up to the present; a consecutive jackpot count/total ball count display 132SG454 indicating the number of consecutive jackpots and the total number of balls paid out during the jackpot streak; and a right-hit prompt display 132SG430 which prompts the player to perform a right-hit operation.

If a jackpot occurs during the time-saving mode, the "Aim for V!!" effect shown in Figure 40 (C2) will be executed during the operation direction notification part of Figure 52 (F8). The "Aim for V!!" effect will also continue during the round effect period of Figure 52 (F9).

The images displayed in the round presentation may also be moving images, and each round may include a picture-story presentation to explain the characters, explain the "FINAL BATTLE," or present a story. For example, if an explanation presentation for character A is being shown in the first round, an explanation presentation for character B will be shown in the second round. However, if power is lost during the first round and then restored, a "restoration" message will be displayed until the end of the first round, and then, when the second round begins, the explanation presentation for character A that was shown in the first round will be shown again. In the event of a power outage, the presentation control CPU 120 will not remember what was displayed before the power outage, so by displaying it from the beginning in the second round, consideration can be given to players who want to see character A's explanation presentation to the end.

In addition, a promotional video corresponding to the selected song may be displayed during the round performance. For example, if a promotional video corresponding to selected song A (up to the chorus) was displayed during the first round, and there was no change in the song, the promotional video corresponding to selected song A (chorus portion) would continue during the second round. However, if power is interrupted during the first round and power is restored, a message indicating that the power is being restored (and there is no sound) will be displayed until the end of the first round. After that, when the second round begins, the promotional video corresponding to selected song A (the verse) will be displayed again. Also, if selected song A is changed to selected song B during the first round, a promotional video corresponding to selected song B will be displayed during the first round, and then promotional video corresponding to selected song B will continue during the second round. However, if power is interrupted during the first round and power is restored, a message indicating that the power is being restored (and there is no sound) will be displayed until the end of the first round. After that, when the second round begins, the promotional video corresponding to selected song A will be displayed. If the power is interrupted, the presentation control CPU 120 will not remember what was displayed before the power interruption, so in the second round, a PV presentation based on the default selected song A will be displayed (for example, if the ball output display shows "150" during one round of play and the power is restored after a power interruption, the ball output display displayed during the next round of play will show "0").

(Promotion performance)
As shown in Figure 45, the "promotion effect" is a round promotion effect that notifies whether or not the round play will continue (round promotion) (whether or not the jackpot will be promoted to jackpot D or E (10 rounds), which has a larger number of rounds than jackpot C (3 rounds)) during the round interval in the third round play of jackpot C to E, in other words, when the variable display result of the second special pattern becomes a jackpot display result.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 53 (F21), the background image is switched to the fourth background display 132SG350, and the character display 132SG352 and the planned ball number counter display 132SG351, which indicates the planned number of balls to be awarded in the jackpot game state, are displayed, and the promotion effect begins.

Next, an image of an ally character attacking an enemy character is displayed, and an additional ball count display 132SG353 (e.g., "+50") is displayed in response to the attack, and the displayed planned number of balls is added to the counter value displayed on the planned ball count counter display 132SG351 (see FIG. 53 (F22)). Then, when the counter value displayed on the planned ball count counter display 132SG351 reaches a predetermined value (e.g., "300"), a button display 132SG354 imitating the chance button 631B, an operation prompt display 132SG355 such as "Press!!", and a gauge display 132SG356 showing the remaining valid operation period are displayed, and an operation prompt effect is executed to encourage a single press of the chance button 631B (see FIG. 53 (F23)).

Next, if the jackpot type is jackpot D or jackpot E, when a press of the chance button 631B is detected before the specified valid operation period has elapsed, or when the valid operation period has elapsed without a press being detected, the under-board movable body 32B rises from the origin position to the performance position (see FIG. 53 (F24)), the ally character attacks, the counter value of the planned ball output counter display 132SG351 is displayed variably (see FIG. 53 (F24)), and the enemy character is displayed faded out (see FIG. 59 (F25)). Then, the planned ball output counter display 132SG351 is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen, and a specified counter value (for example, "1500," the planned number of balls that can be obtained in the case of a "10R jackpot") is displayed as a static value, and it is announced that the jackpot has been upgraded to a 10-round jackpot (see FIG. 53 (F26)).

Furthermore, if the jackpot type is jackpot C, when a press of the chance button 631B is detected before the specified valid operation period has elapsed, or when the valid operation period has elapsed without a press being detected, an image (not shown) is displayed in which the under-board movable body 32B does not rise from the origin position to the performance position and the enemy character has not been defeated, indicating that it was not a 10-round jackpot, i.e., that promotion to a 10-round jackpot has failed (see Figure 53 (F27)).

In this way, the "promotion effect" includes an introductory part that hypes up whether or not the player will be promoted (see Figure 53 (F21) to (F23)), and a result notification part that notifies the player of whether or not they have been promoted (see Figure 53 (F24) to (F27)).

(Ending performance)
As shown in Figure 45, the "ending presentation" is a presentation in which the end of the jackpot is announced and information about the game state that will be controlled after the jackpot ends is announced.

Specifically, for example, as shown in Figures 52 (F12) to (F14), if the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot C, when the third round of play ends, a notification is displayed that the "FINAL BATTLE presentation" will begin after the jackpot ends (time-saving state A will be entered), and a right-hit prompting display 132SG430 is displayed, instructing the player to shoot the game ball into the right play area and aim for the variable winning ball device 6B.

Also, if the jackpot type is jackpot B, when the third round of play ends, it is announced that the "BATTLE RUSH effect" will start after the jackpot ends (time-saving state C1 will be entered) (see Figures 52 (F32) and (F34)).Also, if the jackpot type is jackpot C, when the promotion effect (promotion failure) ends, it is announced that the "BATTLE RUSH effect" will start after the jackpot ends (time-saving state B will be entered) (see Figures 53 (F32) and (F34)).Also, if the jackpot type is jackpot D or jackpot E, when the ninth round of play ends, it is announced that the "BATTLE RUSH effect" will start after the jackpot ends (time-saving state B or time-saving state C1 will be entered) (see Figures 53 (F32) and (F34)).

In this way, the "ending performance" includes an introductory part as an introductory period (see Figures 52 (F12) and 53 (F31)), a time-saving state notification part in which information regarding the time-saving state is notified (see Figures 52 (F13), 53 (F32), and (F34)), and an operation direction notification part in which the operation direction of the ball-hitting operation handle, i.e., an operation to hit to the right, is notified (see Figure 52 (F14)).

(Performance during time-saving)
As shown in FIG. 45, the "time-saving effect" is an effect that notifies that the "FINAL BATTLE effect" or the "BATTLE RUSH effect" is being executed, that is, that the game is being controlled to a time-saving state (see FIGS. 38 and 40).

(Results presentation)
As shown in Fig. 45, the "result effect" is an effect that notifies the player that the "FINAL BATTLE effect" or the "BATTLE RUSH effect" has ended, that is, that the control of the time-saving state has ended (see Figs. 39 and 40). Also, when the game state is controlled from the time-saving state to the normal state, as shown in Figs. 54 (B1) and (B2), the frame-mounted movable body 132SG101 descends from the effect position to the origin position and is maintained at the origin position.

(Customer waiting demo performance)
As shown in Figure 45, the "customer waiting demo effect" is an effect that notifies the user that the device is in a customer waiting (waiting to play) state, and is an effect that starts when a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has passed since the customer waiting demo designation command output from the main board 11 was received without receiving a control command such as a variable display start designation command.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 55 (G1), when the power is turned on, the initial operation is initiated in the initial operation control process, and when the initial operation is completed (see FIG. 55 (G2)), the menu/volume and light intensity adjustment display suggestion indicator 132SG480 is displayed (see FIG. 55 (G3)). Then, when a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has passed since the power was turned on in FIG. 55 (G1) without any variable display, the menu/volume and light intensity adjustment display suggestion indicator 132SG480 is no longer displayed, and a customer waiting demo performance begins (see FIG. 55 (G4)).

In the customer waiting demo performance, after displaying moving images sequentially introducing the multiple ally characters A-D (which may include enemy character images) appearing in various performances and the content itself (see FIG. 55 (G4)-(G7)), an image of allied characters A-D gathered together remains displayed (see FIG. 55 (G8)), while the on-board movable body 32A descends from the origin position to the performance position, and after a predetermined time has passed, it rises back to the origin position (see FIG. 55 (G9)-(G10)). The first background display 132SG310, which shows a daytime city corresponding to the normal state as the background image, is displayed, and the performance ends (see FIG. 55 (G11)). When the customer waiting demo performance ends, the menu/volume and light intensity adjustment display suggestion display 132SG480 is displayed (see FIG. 55 (G12)).

If a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has passed since the customer waiting demo performance ended without any variable display being performed, the customer waiting demo performance will start again. Even after that, the customer waiting demo performance will be performed periodically as long as the standby state continues. The customer waiting demo performance may be performed multiple times repeatedly while in standby state, or may not be performed after being performed a predetermined number of times.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, examples have been given of forms in which the various effects shown in Figure 45 can be executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and effects other than those described above may be executed. Furthermore, the execution mode of each effect can be changed in various ways, and the effect may be executed in a mode other than those described above.

[Initial operation control]
Next, the operation of the movable body, the lamp, and the sound will be described with reference to Fig. 56. Fig. 56 (A) is a diagram for explaining the operation of the movable body, and (B) is a diagram showing the lamp and sound modes according to the operation of the movable body.

As shown in Figure 56 (A), the performance control CPU 120 is capable of performing initial operation control, which causes the movable bodies (above-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, above-frame movable body 132SG101) to perform their initial operation (initial operation) when the power is turned on (during cold start processing or hot start processing), and performance operation control, which causes the movable bodies (above-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, above-frame movable body 132SG101) to operate in a manner appropriate to the performance during various performances.

"Initial operation control" includes "origin placement control (short initial operation control)," which includes non-detection operation control that returns the movable body to the origin position when it is located other than the origin position, and non-detection operation control that temporarily moves the movable body away from the origin position when it is located at the origin position and then returns it to the origin position from that position away from the origin position; and "operation confirmation control (long initial operation control)," which is a confirmation operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally, in which the movable body is moved from the origin position to the performance position and then moved from the performance position to the origin position.

In more detail, if the movable body is not detected by the origin position sensor when executing the initial operation process, that is, if the movable body is in a position other than the origin position (for example, a specified position between the origin position and the performance position) for some reason (for example, if the movable body has moved from the origin position during transportation or installation on the play area, if it was unable to return to the origin position during the previous operation (for example, if an operation error (abnormal operation) occurs during performance execution, such as the movable body being unable to return to the origin or becoming unable to operate due to a motor out-of-step, malfunction, or jamming), or if it has moved from the origin position due to vibration of the gaming machine), the performance control CPU 120 executes non-detection operation control to return the movable body to the origin position. When this non-detection operation control is executed, the movable body is located away from the origin position, so the only operation is to move the movable body toward the origin position.

In addition, if the movable body is detected by the origin position sensor when the initial operation process is executed, the performance control CPU 120 executes detection operation control. For example, in cases where a predetermined range of movement (e.g., play) is set between the time the movable body is detected by the origin detection sensor and the time the movement of the movable body toward the origin position is restricted so that the movable body can be reliably detected by the origin detection sensor, the movable body may return to the origin and stop at a position further back than the position detected by the origin position sensor. Therefore, even if the movable body is detected by the origin detection sensor, detection operation control is executed to return the movable body to a more accurate origin position.

This detection operation control requires the movable body to be moved away from the origin position to temporarily cancel the detection state by the origin position sensor, and then returned to the origin position. However, since it is not necessary to move it to the performance position, the movable body is moved from the origin position to a detection operation position near the origin position, and then returned to the origin position. In other words, it is moved back and forth over a distance shorter than the long initial operation.

Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 executes non-detection operation control or detection operation control in the initial operation process, and then executes operation confirmation control processing. The operation confirmation control processing is an operation control to confirm that the movable bodies are operating normally, and therefore it is an operation control to move each movable body from its respective origin position to the performance position farthest from the origin position, and then return it to the origin position. In other words, the movement to the performance position is the maximum advance operation. Furthermore, the operation confirmation control processing for the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B is the same as the performance operation controls 3 and 4 described below, but the operation confirmation control processing for each movable body does not necessarily have to be the same as either of the performance operation controls.

"Performance operation control" is the operation control of movable bodies in various performances, and includes multiple types of operation control with different types of target movable bodies and different operation modes. In more detail, 1. "Prediction" is operation control that vibrates the on-board movable body 32A up and down between the origin position and the intermediate position before the target change begins, such as in the pre-read movable body announcement. 2. "Applicable" is operation control that vibrates the on-board movable body 32A up and down between the origin position and the intermediate position in the applicable change, such as in the movable body announcement, and vibrates the chance button 631B with the vibration motor 635E. 3. "Jackpot notification, round promotion, V promotion" is operation control that moves the under-board movable body 32B from the origin position to the performance position in the case of jackpot notification, round promotion, V promotion, etc., and then returns it to the origin position. 4. "Fanfare right hit, customer waiting demo effect" is an operation control that moves the on-board movable body 32A from the origin position to the effect position during fanfare right hit, customer waiting demo effect, etc., and then returns it to the origin position. 5. "Jackpot game state transition" is an operation control that moves the on-board movable body 32A from the origin position to the effect position when the game state transitions from the normal game state to the jackpot game state. 6. "Normal game state transition" is an operation control that moves the on-board movable body 32A from the effect position to the origin position when the game state transitions from the time-saving state to the normal game state. 7. "Operation promotion" is an operation control that moves the chance button 631B from the origin position to the effect position during the win/lose button effect.

In this embodiment, when the performance control CPU 120 executes non-detection operation control or detection operation control as short initial operation control, it controls the movable body so that it always operates at a single (constant) operation speed based on the minimum control speed (low speed) set in the operation confirmation control. Note that these minimum speeds are the minimum speeds in the operation confirmation control corresponding to the movable body, and are not common operation speeds when there are multiple movable bodies, so the minimum speed for each movable body may be different.

Specifically, the first movable body and the other second movable body differ in size, weight, operating mode, operating distance, and drive mechanism including the drive motor, so even if the same control speed is set, the actual operating speed of the movable body will differ. Furthermore, even if different control speeds are set for each movable body, the actual operating speed of the movable body will also differ. In this way, the minimum speed is an operating speed based on the control speed set for each movable body, and the movable body is controlled to operate at the minimum speed optimal for it, making it possible to reliably detect multiple movable bodies with different modes at the origin position.

In addition, the maximum control speed (high speed) set in the operation confirmation control is the same as the maximum control speed (high speed) set in the performance operation control (for example, the operation control when performing a movable body performance in which a movable body is operated in various performances such as the pre-reading performance, preview performance, deciding performance, and jackpot performance shown in Figure 45), so the maximum speed in the operation confirmation control is the same as the maximum speed in the performance operation control.However, as long as it is possible to check whether the movable body is operating normally, the maximum speed in the operation confirmation control and the maximum speed in the performance operation control do not necessarily have to be the same speed.

(Operation confirmation control (long initial operation control))
Next, an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control executed by the performance control CPU 120 will be described with reference to Fig. 57. Fig. 57 (A) to (J) are diagrams showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control during cold start processing.

As shown in Figure 57 (A), when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 begins (when the power is turned on), if the CPU 103 executes the initialization process (cold start process) of step S6 in the game control main process, the presentation control CPU 120 first displays a predetermined startup preparation display 132SG500 on the display screen of the image display device 5.

Then, upon receiving a power-on command from the main board 11 after a predetermined time (e.g., 3000 ms) has elapsed since the power was turned on, an initialization notification is initiated indicating that a cold start process has been performed. Also, upon a predetermined time (e.g., 3000 ms) having elapsed since the initialization notification was initiated, initial operation control of the movable bodies (upper-board movable body 32A, lower-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, upper-frame movable body 132SG101) begins (see FIG. 57(B)). During the initialization notification, as described below, the lamps (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, upper-board movable body LED 9d, lower-board movable body LED 9e, upper-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) begin to light up in a predetermined initialization notification mode, and speakers 8L, 8R begin to emit a predetermined initialization notification sound (see FIG. 61).

In the initial operation control, first, short initial operation control is performed for each movable body (above-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, above-frame movable body 132SG101), followed by operation confirmation control. Below, illustrations of the operation modes based on short initial operation control will be omitted, and only the operation modes based on operation confirmation control will be explained.

In the operation confirmation control, first, the chance button 631B moves upward from the origin position to the performance position and stops (see Figure 57(B)), after which the on-board movable body 32A moves downward from the origin position to the performance position and stops (see Figure 57(C)). Next, the chance button 631B moves downward from the performance position and stops at the origin position (see Figure 57(D)), after which the on-board movable body 32A moves upward from the performance position and stops at the origin position (see Figure 57(E)). Next, the below-board movable body 32B moves upward from the origin position to the performance position and stops (see Figure 57(F)), after which the on-frame movable body 132SG101 moves upward from the origin position to the performance position and stops (see Figure 57(G)). Next, the frame-top movable body 132SG101 moves downward from the performance position and stops at the origin position (see Figure 57(H)), and then the under-board movable body 32B moves downward from the performance position and stops at the origin position, and the operation confirmation control ends (see Figure 57(I)). After that, when a predetermined time (for example, approximately 10 seconds) has passed, the initialization notification ends and the operation confirmation control (initialization operation control) ends.

In this way, during operation confirmation control, the initial operation of each movable body is initiated in the order of chance button 631B, on-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, and above-frame movable body 132SG101. However, since the initial operation period of above-board movable body 32A overlaps with part of the initial operation period of chance button 631B, and the initial operation control of above-frame movable body 132SG101 overlaps with part of the initial operation period of below-board movable body 32B, the operation confirmation control period of multiple movable bodies can be shortened.

In addition, when the initial movement control of one movable body is being performed while the movement control of another movable body is being performed, while one movable body (e.g., chance button 631B, below-board movable body 32B) is stopped at the performance position, the other movable body (e.g., above-board movable body 32A, above-frame movable body 132SG101) moves to the performance position or origin position, so even when the initial movement control of two or more movable bodies is being performed in parallel, the movement of each movable body can be confirmed.

In addition, while an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control during cold start processing was explained above based on Figure 57, the operation confirmation control during hot start processing does not issue an initialization notification using a lamp or sound, but the operation confirmation control for the moving body is performed in the same manner as during cold start processing.

Also, as shown in Figure 56 (B), the movable body LED of a movable body that is not operating and is stopped during operation confirmation control flashes red during cold start processing (during initialization notification), is turned off during hot start processing (during recovery), and lights up in a "mode corresponding to the background image" during hot start processing (when variable display is stopped). On the other hand, the movable body LED of a movable body that is not operating and is stopped during performance operation control lights up in a "mode corresponding to the background image." Note that the background image (background display) may have, for example, background images A and B, and if background image A is displayed and there is a power outage and then recovery, background image A will always be displayed, and the lamp will always light up in a mode corresponding to background image A.

In addition, during operation confirmation control, the movable body LED of the movable body during the advance operation moving from the origin position to the performance position and during the retreat operation moving from the performance position to the origin position lights up in "white" during cold start processing (during initialization notification), hot start processing (during recovery), and hot start processing (when variable display is stopped). On the other hand, during performance operation control (for example, operation control of the under-board movable body 32B in the win/lose button performance), the movable body LED of the movable body during the advance operation moving from the origin position to the performance position lights up in a first light-emitting mode (for example, a rainbow flash mode in which various colors corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are illuminated in sequence at predetermined intervals with extinguishing periods in between), whereas the movable body LED of the movable body during the retreat operation moving from the performance position to the origin position lights up in a second light-emitting mode (for example, a smooth rainbow mode in which various colors corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are illuminated in sequence at predetermined intervals).

In other words, while the operation mode of each movable body is the same for both operation confirmation control and presentation operation control, the movable body LED of each movable body emits light in the same manner (white illumination) for advancing and retreating operations in operation confirmation control (the first and second light emission modes are the same), while it emits light in different manners (rainbow flash and smooth rainbow) for advancing and retreating operations in presentation operation control (the first and second light emission modes are different). This makes it possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine 1 that makes it easy to distinguish whether operation confirmation control or presentation operation control is being performed. In particular, in operation confirmation control, the light color and lighting mode do not constantly change, like rainbow flash or smooth rainbow, making it easier to confirm the operation of the movable body.

Note that in Figure 56 (B), rainbow flash and smooth rainbow are shown as examples of the first and second light emission modes of the movable body LED in performance operation control, but these light emission modes may differ depending on the type of performance.

In addition, the light emission brightness during operation confirmation control is lower than the light emission brightness during performance operation control, which reduces power consumption when the power is turned on and reduces the load on the pachinko gaming machine 1, while the brightness of the movable body LED is set to a low level, preventing the movable body's operation from being difficult to confirm due to glare.

Also, as shown in Figure 56 (B), during cold start processing (during initialization notification) in operation confirmation control, a predetermined initialization notification sound is output from speakers 8L, 8R over the initialization notification period. The predetermined initialization notification sound is a sound that indicates that initialization notification is being executed, and is a different sound from the effect sound output during other effect operation control. Furthermore, during hot start processing (during recovery or when variable display is stopped), no sound is output from speakers 8L, 8R (silent).

In addition, the menu/volume and light intensity adjustment display suggestion indicator 132SG480 (see Figure 55 (G3)) is displayed during the valid operation period when menu display and volume and light intensity adjustment operations are validly accepted. By operating the selection button 132SG35 while the menu/volume and light intensity adjustment display suggestion indicator 132SG480 is displayed, it is possible to display a specified menu screen (not shown) or adjust the volume output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the light intensity (brightness) of the various lamps 9a to 9g.

In this embodiment, during the execution period of operation confirmation control (during cold start processing or hot start processing), the menu display and volume/light intensity adjustment are not controlled during the valid operation period. Therefore, even if the light intensity is adjusted using the selection button 132SG35 during operation confirmation control, the light intensity of the various lamps 9a-9g does not change, and they continue to emit light at the brightness currently being used. More specifically, during operation confirmation control, it is not possible to adjust the brightness of a movable body that is operating while emitting light in "low brightness" "white" (initial highlighting mode).

Furthermore, during hot start processing, it may be possible to adjust the volume and light intensity while the operation confirmation control is being executed, allowing players to quickly adjust to an environment that suits their preferences.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is not possible to display menus or adjust volume and light intensity while the operation confirmation control is being executed. However, after the operation confirmation control is completed, the menu/volume and light intensity adjustment display suggestion display 132SG480 is displayed, so that if the selection button 132SG35 is operated during the operation confirmation control, it is possible to confirm whether or not brightness adjustment was performed as a result of that operation.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a command to specify the start of a jackpot or a command to specify the opening of a large prize slot is received while the start preparation display 132SG500 is displayed, the display of a fanfare effect or a round effect may begin on a display layer lower than the recovery display 132SG510, and when the start preparation display 132SG500 is no longer displayed, the display of the fanfare effect or round effect may become visible partway through on the lower layer.

Furthermore, if a command to specify the start of a jackpot or a command to specify the opening of a large prize slot is received while the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed, the recovery display 132SG510 may be displayed until the next command (a command related to the start of a round of play) is received.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 58 to 60, power outages can occur in the pachinko gaming machine 1 at various times, such as when the variable display is stopped and the machine is in a game standby state, when the variable display is being executed, or when a jackpot game is being executed. Although not shown in detail, at any time a power outage occurs, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may start up using cold start processing or hot start processing, but the operating mode of each movable body, the light emission mode of each movable body LED, background sound, etc. may differ depending on the time the power outage occurred.

[Initial operation control during cold start and hot start]
Next, a description will be given of a case where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up by a cold start and a case where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up by a hot start. Note that a hot start will be described assuming that the gaming state is in the normal state.

Mode 1 (Initial operation control during cold start)
61 and 62, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, the display of the start-up preparation display 132SG500 is started from the start timing on the image display device 5. When 3 seconds (3000 ms) have elapsed since the start-up preparation display 132SG500 started to be displayed, the special symbol lamps constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B start to light up, and based on the fact that the performance control CPU 120 has received a power-on designation command, a first game state background designation command, and a customer waiting demo designation command from the CPU 103, the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, the chance button LED 9g, and the on-frame movable body LED 9f start to emit light in an initialization notification mode from the timing of receiving the power-on designation command, the first game state background designation command, and the customer waiting demo designation command, and the output of an initialization notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R starts.

In addition, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable unit LED 9d, the below-board movable unit LED 9e, the above-frame movable unit LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g in this feature unit 132SG light up during initialization notification. After turning off for one second from the time the performance control CPU 120 receives the power-on command, background image command, or customer waiting demo command, they repeatedly turn on and off in red (light emission).

Then, two seconds (2000 ms) after the effect control CPU 120 receives the power-on command, first game state background command, and customer waiting demo command from CPU 103, the display of the startup preparation display 132SG500 on the image display device 5 ends, and the startup preparation display 132SG500 is replaced by a background image showing the variable display stopped in the normal state. From this point on, as initial operation control, the operation (confirmation operation) of the above-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, and above-frame movable body 132SG101 is started.

First, four seconds after the display of the startup preparation display 132SG500 ends (six seconds (6000 ms) after the power-on command, first game state background command, and customer waiting demo command are received), the chance button 631B begins advancing from its home position to its presentation position. The chance button LED 9g begins illuminating (white) in an initial highlighting mode from the start of this advancing motion. Once the chance button 631B has completed its movement to its presentation position, the chance button 631 remains in this presentation position for a predetermined period of time. After remaining in this position for the predetermined period of time, the chance button 631B retreats from its presentation position to its home position. The chance button LED 9g's illumination in the initial highlighting mode ends when the chance button 631's retreating motion ends, and it returns to illuminating in the initialization notification mode (see Figures 63 (A) to (C)).

Furthermore, at the end of the advancement movement of the chance button 631B, the on-board movable body 32A begins to advance from the origin position to the performance position. When the on-board movable body 32A begins to advance from the origin position to the performance position, the on-board movable body LED 9d begins to emit light (white light) in an initial highlighting mode from the start of the advancement movement. Then, after the predetermined period of time has passed, the on-board movable body 32A performs a retreat movement from the performance position to the origin position. Note that the on-board movable body LED 9d ends emitting light in the initial highlighting mode at the end of the retreat movement of the on-board movable body 32A, and returns to emitting light in the initialization notification mode.

Furthermore, at the end of the retraction operation of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B starts advancing from the origin position to the performance position. When the below-board movable body 32B starts advancing from the origin position to the performance position, the below-board movable body LED 9e starts emitting light in the initial highlight mode (white light) from the start of the advancing operation. Then, after the predetermined period of time has passed, the below-board movable body 32B executes the retraction operation from the performance position to the origin position. Note that the illumination of the below-board movable body LED 9e in the initial highlight mode ends at the end of the retraction operation of the below-board movable body 32B, and returns to illumination in the initialization notification mode.

Furthermore, while the under-board movable body 32B is stopped at the performance position, the above-frame movable body LED 9f emits light in an initial highlighting mode (illuminated in white) as the above-frame movable body 132SG101 advances from the origin position to the performance position and retreats from the performance position to the origin position. The above-frame movable body LED 9f emits light in the initial highlighting mode at the end of the retreating motion of the above-frame movable body 132SG101, and returns to emitting light in the initialization notification mode.

In addition, the operation (confirmation operation) of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the above-frame movable body 132SG101 during a cold start in this feature part 132SG ends 20 seconds (20,000 ms) after the start of the advancement operation of the chance button 631B. Furthermore, after the operations (confirmation operations) of the above-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, and above-frame movable body 132SG101 are completed, 4 seconds (4,000 ms) after the completion of the operations (confirmation operations) of the above-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, and above-frame movable body 132SG101 are completed, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g cease to emit light in the initialization notification mode, and the output of the initialization notification sound from speakers 8L and 8R ceases, and all initial operation control is completed. In other words, the initial operation control during a cold start in this feature part 132SG is executed for 30 seconds (30,000 ms).

Here, we will explain the case where a starting win occurs after initial operation control, and a variable display is initiated in which a movable body prediction is executed based on that starting win. First, as shown in Figure 61, after initial operation control of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the above-frame movable body 132SG101, the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, and above-frame movable body LED 9f emit light in a manner corresponding to the background image (background image corresponding to the normal state), and the chance button LED 9g emits light in a default manner (e.g., white light emission). Additionally, the speakers 8L and 8R are in a state in which sound output is stopped.

When a starting win occurs in the above state and the variable display of the special and decorative symbols begins, the background image on the image display device 5 switches to the background image for variable display in the normal state, and speakers 8L and 8R begin to output background music corresponding to the background image for variable display in the normal state.

During the period in which the movable object prediction is being performed, the image display device 5 displays an effect image (movable object effect) corresponding to the movable object prediction. Furthermore, the on-board movable object 32A moves back and forth between the origin position and the intermediate position multiple times, and the chance button 631B vibrates continuously. In addition, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-board movable object LED 9d, the below-board movable object LED 9e, and the on-frame movable object LED 9f emit light in a manner corresponding to the movable object prediction, and the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound corresponding to the movable object prediction (movable object prediction sound).

In the example shown in Figure 61, the movable object prediction is exemplified by displaying an effect image (effect display 132SG407) corresponding to the movable object prediction on the image display device 5, causing the on-board movable object 32A to move back and forth between the origin position and the intermediate position, vibrating the chance button 631B, outputting a sound (movable object prediction sound) corresponding to the movable object prediction from the speakers 8L and 8R, and causing the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable object LED 9d, below-board movable object LED 9e, and on-frame movable object LED 9f to emit light in a manner corresponding to the movable object prediction.However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable object prediction may be exemplified by displaying an effect image (effect display 132SG407) corresponding to the movable object prediction on the image display device 5, and causing the on-board movable object 32A to move back and forth between the origin position and the intermediate position. Furthermore, the movable object warning may involve the display of an effect image (effect display 132SG407) corresponding to the movable object warning on the image display device 5, the reciprocating movement of the on-board movable object 32A between the origin position and the intermediate position, as well as one or more of the following: vibration of the chance button 631B, output of a sound (movable object warning sound) corresponding to the movable object warning from the speakers 8L and 8R, and illumination of the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable object LED 9d, below-board movable object LED 9e, and on-frame movable object LED 9f in a manner corresponding to the movable object warning.

Next, we will explain the case where a starting win occurs during initial operation control, and a variable display in which a movable body prediction is executed based on that starting win is initiated. First, as shown in Figure 62, when a starting win occurs during the initial operation control of the on-board movable body 32A (more precisely, when the on-board movable body 32A remains in the performance position), the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols begins from the timing of the starting win. At this time, the background image on the image display device 5 switches to the background image for variable display in the normal state, and speakers 8L and 8R begin to output background music corresponding to the background image for variable display in the normal state.

Furthermore, after the variable display starts, initial operation control of the on-board movable body 32A continues to be executed, and after the initial operation control of the on-board movable body 32A, initial operation control of the below-board movable body 32B and the on-frame movable body 132SG101 is executed.

If the movable body preview execution period occurs during the initial operation control period of these on-board movable bodies 32A and below-board movable bodies 32B, a movable body effect image will be displayed on the image display device 5 during the movable body preview execution period, while the initial operation control of the on-board movable bodies 32A, below-board movable bodies 32B, and above-frame movable body 132SG101 will continue to be executed (see Figures 63 (D) to (E)).

In addition, during the operation of each movable body, the illumination patterns of the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g will follow the background image (background image corresponding to the normal state) displayed on the image display device 5 or the initial highlighting pattern of each movable body, and will not illuminate in an illumination pattern corresponding to the movable body preview.

Then, when the movable object preview execution period in the variable display ends and all movable objects have finished moving, the up and down movement of the on-board movable object 32A between the origin position and the intermediate position, and the vibration of the chance button 631B, which would have been executed during the movable object preview execution period, are executed from the timing at which the movement ends (Figures 63 (F)-(J) and 64 (K)-(L)). Note that while the on-board movable object 32A is moving up and down, the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable object LED 9d, below-board movable object LED 9e, on-frame movable object LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g are illuminated in a manner corresponding to the movable object preview, but the speakers 8L, 8R output background music corresponding to the background image for the variable display in the normal state, and no sound corresponding to the movable object preview (movable object preview sound) is output.

(Initial operation control during hot start)
As shown in Figures 65 and 66, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a hot start, the display of the start-up preparation display 132SG500 begins on the image display device 5 from the start timing. After 3 seconds (3000 ms) have elapsed since the start-up preparation display 132SG500 began displaying, the performance control CPU 120 receives a power outage recovery designation command, a first game state background designation command, and a customer waiting demo designation command from the CPU 103. Based on this, the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the board-mounted movable body LED 9d, the board-mounted movable body LED 9e, the chance button LED 9g, and the frame-mounted movable body LED 9f each begin emitting light in a manner corresponding to the background image in the normal state from the time of receiving the power outage recovery designation command, the first game state background designation command, and the customer waiting demo designation command. Note that no sound is output from the speakers 8L, 8R (silence) from the time of receiving the power outage recovery designation command, the first game state background designation command, and the customer waiting demo designation command.

In addition, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, upper board movable element LED 9d, lower board movable element LED 9e, upper frame movable element LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g in this feature unit 132SG emit light in accordance with the background image in the normal state, and after turning off for one second from the time the performance control CPU 120 receives the power outage recovery designation command, background image designation command, or customer waiting demo designation command, they emit light in an emission color (e.g., white) corresponding to the normal state. In addition, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start in the time-saving state (low probability high base state) or the probability variable state (high probability high base state), the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, upper board movable element LED 9d, lower board movable element LED 9e, upper frame movable element LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g emit light in an emission color or emission pattern different from that in the normal state, corresponding to the background image in the time-saving state or the probability variable state.

Then, two seconds (2000 ms) after the effect control CPU 120 receives the power outage recovery command, the first game state background command, and the customer waiting demo command from CPU 103, the display of the start-up preparation display 132SG500 on the image display device 5 ends, and the start-up preparation display 132SG500 is replaced by a background image showing a stopped variable display according to the normal state. From this point on, as initial operation control, the operation (confirmation operation) of the above-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, and above-frame movable body 132SG101 is started.

First, four seconds after the display of the startup preparation display 132SG500 ends (six seconds (6000 ms) after the power-on command, first game state background command, and customer waiting demo command are received), the chance button 631B begins advancing from its home position to its presentation position. The chance button LED 9g begins illuminating in an initial highlight mode (white illumination) from the start of this advancing motion. Once the chance button 631B has completed its movement to its presentation position, the chance button 631 remains in this presentation position for a predetermined period of time. After remaining in this position for the predetermined period of time, the chance button 631B retreats from its presentation position to its home position. The chance button LED 9g's illumination in the initial highlight mode ends when the chance button 631's retreating motion ends, and the chance button LED 9g changes to its default illumination mode (e.g., white illumination).

Furthermore, at the end of the advancement movement of the chance button 631B, the on-board movable body 32A begins to advance from the origin position to the performance position. When the on-board movable body 32A begins to advance from the origin position to the performance position, the on-board movable body LED 9d begins to emit light (white light) in an initial highlighting mode from the start of the advancement movement. Then, after the predetermined period of time has passed, the on-board movable body 32A executes a retreat movement from the performance position to the origin position. Note that the on-board movable body LED 9d's illumination in the initial highlighting mode ends at the end of the retreat movement of the on-board movable body 32A, and returns to illumination in a mode corresponding to the background image in the normal state.

Furthermore, at the end of the retraction operation of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B begins to advance from the origin position to the performance position. When the below-board movable body 32B begins to advance from the origin position to the performance position, the below-board movable body LED 9e begins to emit light (white light) in an initial highlighting mode from the start of the advancing operation. Then, after the predetermined period of time has passed, the below-board movable body 32B executes a retraction operation from the performance position to the origin position. Note that the illumination of the below-board movable body LED 9e in the initial highlighting mode ends at the end of the retraction operation of the below-board movable body 32B, and the illumination returns to a mode corresponding to the background image in the normal state.

Furthermore, while the under-board movable body 32B is stopped at the performance position, the above-frame movable body LED 9f emits light in an initial highlight mode (illuminated in white) as the above-frame movable body 132SG101 advances from the origin position to the performance position and retreats from the performance position to the origin position. The above-frame movable body LED 9f emits light in an initial highlight mode at the end of the retreating movement of the above-frame movable body 132SG101, and returns to emitting light in a mode corresponding to the background image in the normal state.

Note that the operation (confirmation operation) of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the above-frame movable body 132SG101 during a hot start in this characteristic part 132SG ends 20 seconds (20,000 ms) after the chance button 631B begins advancing. Note that, unlike when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a hot start, the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g are not illuminated in the form of an initialization notification, and the speakers 8L, 8R do not output an initialization notification sound. For this reason, the initial operation control during a hot start in this feature part 132SG is such that the operations (confirmation operations) of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631, and the above-frame movable body 132SG101 are executed over a period of 26 seconds, as shown in Figures 65 and 66.

Here, we will explain the case where a starting win occurs after initial operation control, and a variable display is initiated in which a movable body prediction is executed based on that starting win. First, as shown in Figure 65, after initial operation control of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101, the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, and the on-frame movable body LED 9f emit light in a manner corresponding to the background image (background image corresponding to the normal state), and the chance button LED 9g emits light in a default manner (e.g., white light emission). In addition, the speakers 8L and 8R are in a state in which sound output is stopped (silent).

When a starting win occurs in the above state and the variable display of the special and decorative symbols begins, the background image on the image display device 5 switches to the background image for variable display in the normal state, and speakers 8L and 8R begin to output background music corresponding to the background image for variable display in the normal state.

During the period in which the movable object prediction is being performed, the image display device 5 displays an effect image (movable object effect) corresponding to the movable object prediction. Furthermore, the on-board movable object 32A moves back and forth between the origin position and the intermediate position multiple times, and the chance button 631B vibrates continuously. In addition, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-board movable object LED 9d, the below-board movable object LED 9e, and the on-frame movable object LED 9f emit light in a manner corresponding to the movable object prediction, and the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound corresponding to the movable object prediction (movable object prediction sound).

Next, we will explain the case where a starting win occurs during initial operation control, and a variable display in which a movable body prediction is executed based on that starting win is initiated. First, as shown in Figure 66, when a starting win occurs during the initial operation control of the on-board movable body 32A (more precisely, when the on-board movable body 32A remains in the performance position), the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols begins from the timing of the starting win. At this time, the background image on the image display device 5 switches to the background image for variable display in the normal state, and speakers 8L and 8R begin to output background music corresponding to the background image for variable display in the normal state.

Furthermore, after the variable display starts, initial operation control of the on-board movable body 32A continues to be executed, and after the initial operation control of the on-board movable body 32A, initial operation control of the below-board movable body 32B and the on-frame movable body 132SG101 is executed.

If the movable body preview execution period occurs during the initial operation control period of these above-board movable bodies 32A and below-board movable bodies 32B, a movable body effect image will be displayed on the image display device 5 during the movable body preview execution period, while the initial operation control of the above-board movable bodies 32A, below-board movable bodies 32B, and above-frame movable body 132SG101 will continue to be executed.

In addition, during the operation of each movable body, the illumination patterns of the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g will follow the background image (background image corresponding to the normal state) displayed on the image display device 5 or the initial highlighting pattern of each movable body, and will not illuminate in an illumination pattern corresponding to the movable body preview.

Then, when the execution period of the movable body preview in the variable display ends and the operation of all movable bodies ends (initial operation control ends), from the timing at which the operation ends, the up and down movement of the on-board movable body 32A between the origin position and the intermediate position and the vibration of the chance button 631B, which would normally be executed during the execution period of the movable body preview, are executed. Note that while the on-board movable body 32A is moving up and down, the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g are illuminated in a manner corresponding to the movable body preview, but the speakers 8L, 8R output background music corresponding to the background image for the variable display in the normal state, and no sound corresponding to the movable body preview (movable body preview sound) is output.

As described above, this feature unit 132SG operates the on-board movable body 32A (and the below-board movable body 32B, the frame-mounted movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B) as initial operation control when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start and when it is started by a hot start. Furthermore, if a start-up win occurs during the confirmation operation of each movable body during the initial operation control when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, and a variable display that executes a movable body preview based on the start-up win is initiated, if the execution period of the movable body preview and the confirmation operation period overlap, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A and the sound output from speakers 8L and 8R corresponding to the movable body preview are restricted as a performance operation for the movable body preview. Furthermore, if a start-up win occurs during the confirmation operation when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a hot start, and a variable display that executes a movable body prediction is initiated based on the start-up win, only the movement of the on-board movable body 32A is restricted as a performance operation for the movable body prediction.

By doing this, when a movable object prediction is executed using a variable display that is started during the confirmation operation of each movable object during initial operation control, the initial operation control is not hindered by the operation of the on-board movable object 32A as a performance operation of the movable object prediction, and the player can be notified that a movable object prediction has been executed by the display of a movable object effect on the image display device 5 and by the lighting of each LED (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable object LED 9d, below-board movable object LED 9e, on-frame movable object LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) in accordance with the movable object prediction.

In this feature section 132SG, as shown in FIG. 66, a pachinko gaming machine 1 in which an electric step occurs during the execution of a variable display including the execution of a movable body preview is started with a hot start, and if the execution period of the movable body preview occurs during the initial operation of each movable body after the hot start, the operation of the above-board movable body 32A as the movable body preview is not executed during the execution period of the movable body preview. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 in which an electric step occurs during the execution of a variable display including a winning effect (i.e., a variable display of a jackpot) is started with a hot start, and if the execution period of the winning effect occurs during the initial operation of each movable body after the hot start, the operation of the below-board movable body 32B as the winning effect and the light emission (rainbow flash) of the below-board movable body LED 9e in a manner corresponding to the winning effect may be restricted during the execution period of the winning effect. In this way, it is possible to determine whether the below-board movable body 32B is operating as an initial operation or as a winning effect based on the light emission pattern of the below-board movable body LED 9e.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 30, this feature section 132SG illustrates an example in which the presentation control CPU 120 executes an origin placement control process at the start of variable display to place each movable body at its respective origin position, but the present invention is not limited to this. If a start win occurs during the initial movement of each movable body when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started and variable display based on this start win is initiated, the initial movement of each movable body may be executed with priority over the movement of each movable body to its origin position. This prevents the initial movement of each movable body from being interrupted by the movement of each movable body to its origin position.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 30, this feature section 132SG illustrates an example in which the effect control CPU 120 executes an origin placement control process at the start of the customer waiting demo effect to place each movable body at its respective origin position. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When a starting winning occurs during the initial operation of each movable body when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, and a variable display based on the starting winning occurs, the variable display ends during the initial operation period, and the customer waiting demo effect starts in response to the end of the variable display, the performance operation of the customer waiting demo effect of each movable body may be executed with priority over the movement of each movable body to its origin position. This prevents the operation of the customer waiting demo effect of each movable body from being interrupted by the movement of each movable body to its origin position.

(Initial Operation Control Modification 1)
In addition, in this characteristic part 132SG, as shown in FIG. 62, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start and a variable display that executes a movable body prediction is started during the operation of the movable body as initial operation control, if the execution period of the movable body prediction overlaps with the operation period of the movable body, only the display of the movable body effect is executed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the movable body prediction, and after the initial operation control is completed, the operation of the movable body that is the target of the movable body prediction (in the case of this characteristic part 132SG, the on-board movable body 32A and the chance button 631B), the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, b. An example has been given of a form in which the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g emit light in a manner corresponding to the movable body preview, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example, as shown in Figure 67, even if a variable display that executes a movable body preview is started during the operation of a movable body as initial operation control, if the execution period of the movable body preview is after the operation of each movable body has ended, the target movable body (the above-board movable body 32A and the chance button 631B) may be operated during the execution period of the movable body preview.

Furthermore, if the initial operation control period (operation control of each movable body, illumination of each LED in an initialization notification mode, and output of initialization notification sound from speakers 8L and 8R) ends during the execution period of the movable body preview, as shown in FIG. 67, from the timing when the control of the initial operation ends to the timing when the movable body preview ends, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g may be illuminated in a mode corresponding to the movable body preview, and a sound corresponding to the movable body preview may be output from speakers 8L and 8R.

As described above, during the initial operation control period, if the operation control of each movable body has ended but the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g continue to emit light in accordance with the initialization notification mode, and the speakers 8L and 8R continue to output an initialization notification sound, and a movable body preview is executed, the operation of the above-board movable body 32A and chance button 631B in accordance with the movable body preview is executed, while the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g do not emit light in accordance with the movable body preview mode, and the speakers 8L and 8R do not output sound in accordance with the movable body preview, thereby making it possible to avoid reducing the dramatic effect of the movable body preview.

(Initial Operation Control Modification 2)
In addition, in this characteristic part 132SG, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a cold start, and a variable display is started to execute a movable body prediction that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot during the confirmation operation of each movable body as an initial operation control, the operation of the movable body (on-board movable body 32A, chance button 631B), the display of movable body effects on the image display device 5, the illumination of the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g, and sound output from the speakers 8L, 8R have been described, but as a modified example, as shown in FIG. 68, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a cold start, and a variable display that executes a movable body prediction that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot during the confirmation operation of each movable body as an initial operation control, In the case where a decision is made to execute a pre-read movable body preview due to multiple occurrences of variable display during the moving body confirmation operation, if the execution period of the pre-read movable body preview overlaps with the confirmation operation period or the initial operation control period for each movable body, only the display of movable body effects is executed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the pre-read movable body preview, and the operation of the target movable body (on-board movable body 32A and chance button 631B), the illumination of the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g in a manner corresponding to the pre-read movable body preview, and sound output from speakers 8L, 8R in a manner corresponding to the pre-read movable body preview are not executed. Furthermore, if the variable display that is the subject of the pre-read movable body prediction is executed after the initial operation control is completed, during the execution period of the movable body prediction during the variable display, the image display device 5 displays a movable body effect image, the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g emit light in a manner corresponding to the movable body prediction, and the speakers 8L, 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the movable body prediction.

By doing this, even if the period for executing the pre-read movable object prediction occurs during the confirmation operation of each movable object, the operation of the on-board movable object 32A or chance button 631B as the pre-read movable object prediction will not be executed, making it possible to prevent confusion for the player caused by excessive operation of the on-board movable object 32A or chance button 631B after the initial operation control has ended.

(Initial Operation Control Modification 3)
Furthermore, in this feature section 132SG, an example has been given of a form in which a movable body preview can be executed in which the on-board movable body 32A moves between the origin position and the intermediate position as an effect suggesting that the variable display result will be a jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this, and during the variable display, a movable body preview (second movable body preview) can be executed again after the movable body preview (first movable body preview) as an effect suggesting that the variable display result will be a jackpot, and the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot varies depending on the number of times the movable body preview is executed during the variable display (for example, the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot is higher when the second movable body preview is executed in addition to the first movable body preview than when only the first movable body preview is executed).

In addition, in cases where multiple movable body announcements (first movable body announcement and second movable body announcement) can be made during the variable display in this manner, as shown in FIG. 69 as a modified example, when a start winning occurs during the initial motion control and a variable display that makes the first movable body announcement and the second movable body announcement is started based on the start winning, if the execution period of the first movable body announcement overlaps with the execution period of the initial motion control, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body announcement may be executed after the initial motion control ends (the first movable body announcement may be re-executed). However, if the second movable body announcement has already started during the re-execution period of the first movable body announcement, the second movable body announcement that is currently being executed may be executed with priority, and the first movable body announcement may not be re-executed, as shown in FIG. 69.

In this way, if the second movable body announcement is already being executed during the re-execution period of the first movable body announcement, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A due to the second movable body announcement is given priority, and the operation of the on-board movable body 32A is not executed even as the first movable body announcement, thereby preventing a decrease in the performance effect of the movable body announcement due to the operation of the on-board movable body 32A due to the second movable body announcement being hindered by the operation of the on-board movable body 32A due to the first movable body announcement.

In the example shown in Figure 69, a form in which the first movable body preview and the second movable body preview can be executed during one variable display is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation modes of the on-board movable body 32A as these first movable body preview and second movable body preview may be the same (for example, the first movable body preview and the second movable body preview both involve the on-board movable body 32A moving multiple times between the origin position and the intermediate position), or the operation modes of the on-board movable body 32A as these first movable body preview and second movable body preview may be different (for example, the first movable body preview may involve the on-board movable body 32A moving multiple times between the origin position and the intermediate position, while the second movable body may involve the on-board movable body 32A moving multiple times between the origin position and the preview position).

(Initial Operation Control Modification 4)
Furthermore, in the case where multiple movable body announcements (first movable body announcement and second movable body announcement) can be made during the variable display as shown in Figure 69, as a modified example, as shown in Figure 70, when a start winning occurs during the initial operation control and a variable display that makes the first movable body announcement and the second movable body announcement is started based on the start winning, if the execution period of the first movable body announcement overlaps with the execution period of the initial operation control, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body announcement can be controlled not to be executed, while only the second movable body announcement after the initial operation control can be controlled to be executed. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 71, when a start winning occurs after the initial operation control and a variable display that performs the first movable body prediction and the second movable body prediction is started based on the start winning, that is, when the operation of the on-board movable body 32A is executed as the first movable body prediction and the second movable body prediction during the variable display, if the operation of the on-board movable body 32A stops midway due to a loss of synchronism or the like during the execution period of the first movable body prediction, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A may be controlled to start as the second movable body prediction during the execution period of the second movable body prediction.

In this way, even if the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body preview does not end normally, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the next movable body preview, the second movable body preview, is executed, so that the operation of the on-board movable body 32A can be retried.

(Initial Operation Control Modification 5)
In addition, in Figure 69, when a start winning occurs during the initial operation control and a variable display that performs the first movable body prediction and the second movable body prediction is started based on the start winning, if the execution period of the first movable body prediction overlaps with the execution period of the initial operation control, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body prediction can be executed after the initial operation control ends, while if the re-execution period of the first movable body prediction is within the execution period of the second movable body prediction, priority is given to the execution of the second movable body prediction and the first movable body prediction is not re-executed.However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example, as shown in Figure 72, if the execution period of the second movable body prediction occurs during the re-execution period of the first movable body prediction, the re-execution of the first movable body prediction may be interrupted at the start of the execution period of the second movable body prediction, and thereafter the on-board movable body 32A may be operated as the second movable body prediction.

In this way, if the execution period for the second movable body announcement begins during the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body announcement, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body announcement is interrupted and the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the second movable body announcement is started, thereby preventing a reduction in the presentation effect caused by the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body announcement interfering with the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the second movable body announcement.

(Initial Operation Control Modification 6)
Furthermore, in the characteristic section 132SG, an example has been given in which the on-board movable body 32A is operated between the origin position and the performance position as the initial operation control, while the on-board movable body 32A is operated between the origin position and the intermediate position as the performance operation of the movable body preview, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the on-board movable body 32A may be operated between the origin position and the performance position in both the initial operation control and the performance operation of the movable body preview.

Furthermore, in cases where the on-board movable body 32A is operated between the origin position and the performance position in both the initial operation control and the movable body preview performance operation, when the on-board movable body 32A is operated as the initial operation, the initial operation is continuously executed until the on-board movable body 32A is detected by the performance position sensor 132SG124 or the origin position sensor 132SG123, whereas when the on-board movable body 32A is operated as the on-board movable body preview performance operation, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A may be stopped in accordance with the process data for the movable body preview, regardless of whether the on-board movable body 32A is detected by the performance position sensor 132SG124 or the origin position sensor 132SG123.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 73(A) and 73(B) as a modified example, when operating the on-board movable body 32A as initial operation control, the performance control CPU 120 drives the drive motor 132SG122 in the forward direction based on the detection of the on-board movable body 32A by the origin position sensor, thereby moving the on-board movable body 32A toward the performance position over a first period (1000 ms). At this time, the performance control CPU 120 stops the forward drive of the drive motor 132SG122 on the condition that the on-board movable body 32A is detected by the performance position sensor 132SG124 (the on-board movable body 32A has moved to the performance position). Then, based on the detection of the on-board movable body 32A by the performance position sensor 132SG124, drives the drive motor 132SG122 in the reverse direction to move the on-board movable body 32A toward the origin position. Furthermore, when the on-board movable body 32A is detected by the origin position sensor 132SG123 (when the on-board movable body 32A has moved to the origin position), the reverse rotation of the drive motor 132SG122 is stopped.

73(B), for example, if a step-out or the like occurs during the operation of the on-board movable body 32A toward the presentation position, causing the on-board movable body 32A to stop between the origin position and the presentation position, the presentation control CPU 120 continues the forward rotation of the drive motor 132SG122 beyond the first period because the presentation position sensor 132SG124 does not detect the on-board movable body 32A. At this time, if the presentation position sensor 132SG124 does not detect the on-board movable body 32A for a predetermined period (a period longer than the first period from the start of the initial operation control), the presentation control CPU 120 determines that there is an operation error in the on-board movable body 32A, and operates the on-board movable body 32A toward the origin position over 6000 ms by driving the drive motor 132SG122 in the reverse direction from the timing of the determination of the operation error. Then, when the origin position sensor 132SG123 detects the on-board movable body 32A, the driving of the driving motor 132SG122 is stopped.
74(A) and 74(B), when the on-board movable body 32A is operated as a performance operation of the movable body preview, the performance control CPU 120 drives the drive motor 132SG122 in the forward direction based on the process data of the movable body preview, thereby moving the on-board movable body 32A toward the performance position over a second period that is longer than the first period. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 stops the on-board movable body 32A at the performance position by stopping the forward drive of the drive motor 132SG122 based on the process data of the movable body preview. At the same time, the performance position sensor 132SG124 detects the on-board movable body 32A. Then, while the on-board movable body 32A is stopped at the performance position, the performance control CPU 120 drives the drive motor 132SG122 in the reverse direction based on the process data of the movable body preview, thereby moving the on-board movable body 32A toward the origin position. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 stops the on-board movable body 32A at the origin position by stopping the reverse drive of the drive motor 132SG122 based on the movable body advance notice process data. At the same time, the on-board movable body 32A is detected by the origin position sensor 132SG123.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 74 (B), for example, if a step-out occurs while the on-board movable body 32A is moving toward the presentation position and the on-board movable body 32A stops between the origin position and the presentation position, the presentation control CPU 120 continues to drive the drive motor 132SG122 in the forward direction based on the movable body preview process data until the second period has elapsed. In other words, at the end of the second period, the presentation control CPU 120 stops the forward drive of the drive motor 132SG122 based on the movable body preview process data, regardless of whether the on-board movable body 32A has been detected by the presentation position sensor 132SG124.

If the on-board movable body 32A is not detected by the performance position sensor 132SG124 for a predetermined period (a period longer than the second period from the start of initial operation control), the performance control CPU 120 determines that there is an operation error in the on-board movable body 32A, and from the timing of the operation error determination, drives the drive motor 132SG122 in the reverse direction to move the on-board movable body 32A toward the origin position over a period of 6000 ms. Then, based on the detection of the on-board movable body 32A by the origin position sensor 132SG123, the drive of the drive motor 132SG122 is stopped.

In this way, if a movable object prediction is executed during gameplay after the initial operation control has ended, even if the operation of the on-board movable object 32A corresponding to the movable object prediction is not performed normally, the operation of the on-board movable object 32A as the initial operation control (confirmation operation) is not executed, making it possible to reduce the reduction in the presentation effect of an abnormally performed movable object prediction.

(Initial Operation Control Modification 7)
Furthermore, in the above-mentioned variant example 6, an example was given of a form in which the performance control CPU 120 determines that there is an operation error in the on-board movable body 32A if the on-board movable body 32A is not detected by the performance position sensor 132SG124 as part of the initial operation control, but the present invention is not limited to this, and if the performance control CPU 120 determines that there is an operation error in the on-board movable body 32A as part of the initial operation control, it may not operate the on-board movable body 32A during the movable body preview execution period during variable display, but may only display the effect on the image display device 5, light up the LEDs (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g), and output sound from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the movable body preview.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 75 for variant example 7, the performance control CPU 120 is capable of operating the on-board movable body 32A from the origin position toward the performance position over 1000 ms as initial operation control, and is also capable of operating the on-board movable body 32A from the performance position toward the origin position over 2000 ms.

Furthermore, if the on-board movable body 32A stops between the performance position and the origin position as part of the initial operation control, the performance control CPU 120 will initially determine that this is an operation error, and then be able to execute the initial operation control multiple times.

Here, if the performance control CPU 120 executes four initial motion controls and determines that all of them result in an error, it stores the on-board movable body 32A as a motion-restricted movable body as a result of the fourth initial motion control (dead end determination). Then, as a special initial motion control, the performance control CPU 120 moves the on-board movable body 32A from the origin position toward the performance position over 3000 ms, and then moves the on-board movable body 32A toward the origin position over 6000 ms.

After that, when a starting winning occurs and a variable display that executes a movable body prediction based on that starting winning is initiated, the performance control CPU 120, based on the fact that the on-board movable body 32A is stored as an operation-restricted movable body, does not operate the on-board movable body 32A during the movable body prediction execution period, and only displays effects on the image display device 5, lights up the LEDs (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g), and outputs sound corresponding to the movable body prediction from the speakers 8L, 8R.

As described above, by not operating the on-board movable object 32A that has been determined to be a dead end as a movable object preview, while displaying effects on the image display device 5, lighting up the LEDs (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable object LED 9d, below-board movable object LED 9e, on-frame movable object LED 9f, chance button LED 9g), and outputting sound corresponding to the movable object preview from the speakers 8L, 8R, it is possible to prevent malfunctions caused by operating the on-board movable object 32A as a movable object preview, while minimizing a decrease in the visual effect of the movable object preview.

The configurations described in Modifications 1 to 7 above may be added to the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment. Alternatively, part of the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment may be changed to at least one of the configurations of Modifications 1 to 7. In other words, Modifications 1 to 7 above can be added or changed to the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment in any one of multiple forms, or in a combination of multiple forms.

Form 2 (Initial Operation Control Modification 8)
Furthermore, in the characteristic part 132SG, as shown in FIG. 16, when variable display is not executed, the CPU 103 outputs a customer waiting demo designation command to the presentation control board 12, thereby executing a customer waiting demo presentation on the image display device 5, as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 8, as shown in FIGS. 76, 77, and 78, in any of the cases where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a cold start, where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start in a low probability low base state (normal state), or where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a high base state (time-shortened state), the presentation control CPU 120 receives a customer waiting demo designation command from the CPU 103 3000 ms after the start of the pachinko gaming machine 1, while the customer waiting demo presentation itself may be started after the control period of the initial operation has ended.

By doing this, it is possible to prevent the movable body (on-board movable body 32A) operating as the initial operation control from obstructing the image of the customer waiting demo performance (demo movie shown in Figures 76, 77, and 78) displayed on the image display device 5, which would reduce the visibility of the image of the customer waiting demo performance.

Note that Figures 76, 77, and 78 illustrate an example in which a customer waiting demo performance is executed after the initial operation of each movable body is completed, but the present invention is not limited to this. The period from the initial operation of each movable body to the execution of the customer waiting demo performance may be set to 30 seconds or more, which is the period required for the initial operation of each movable body, thereby providing a sufficient period between the initial operation of each movable body and the customer waiting demo performance, and preventing the visibility of the customer waiting demo performance from being obstructed.

Furthermore, the period from the completion of the initial operation of each movable body until the customer waiting demo effect is executed may be different depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start or a hot start. Regardless of whether the period from the completion of the initial operation of each movable body until the customer waiting demo effect is executed differs depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start or a hot start, the customer waiting demo effect may be executed after the completion of the initial operation of each movable body, thereby preventing the customer waiting demo effect from being interrupted by the movable body operating as an initial operation.

(Initial Operation Control Variation 9)
In the above-described modified example, as shown in FIG. 75, when the performance control CPU 120 determines that the on-board movable body 32A is at a dead end, the on-board movable body 32A is not operated as a movable body notice, but an effect is displayed on the image display device 5, LEDs (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) are turned on, and sounds corresponding to the movable body notice are output from the speakers 8L, 8R. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, as shown in Figure 79 as variant example 9, if the performance control CPU 120 determines that the on-board movable body 32A is at a dead end, when the customer waiting demo performance is executed after the special initial operation is completed, the on-board movable body 32A may not be operated, but effects corresponding to the customer waiting demo performance may be displayed on the image display device 5, and the LEDs (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) may be lit according to the customer waiting demo performance.

By doing this, it is possible to prevent malfunctions caused by forcing the on-board movable body 32A to operate excessively as part of the customer waiting demo performance when the on-board movable body 32A is not operating normally, while also reducing the performance effect of the customer waiting demo performance.

Form 3 (power cut just before the big hit fluctuation ends)
Next, the operation confirmation control when the power interruption occurs just before the end of the big win fluctuation will be described with reference to Fig. 80. Fig. 80 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when the power interruption occurs just before the end of the big win fluctuation.

As shown in Figure 80, after the variable display based on the jackpot variable pattern has begun, a combination of symbols that confirm a jackpot is statically displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and immediately before the variable display ends (for example, approximately 5,000 ms before the end of the variable display, such as when the variable display resumes and a re-lottery effect is executed after the combination of symbols that confirm a jackpot is temporarily statically displayed, or during the symbol confirmation display period, which is the minimum period from when decorative symbols are statically displayed in the variable display until the variable display of decorative symbols begins in the next variable display), if a power outage occurs and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is then started up in a hot start (hot start processing is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), the jackpot variable display will resume, but the variable display will immediately end and control of the jackpot gaming state will begin.

Therefore, while the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed on the image display device 5 from the startup timing, the power outage recovery command and pattern confirmation command sent based on the recovery of the CPU 103 are received, and then the fanfare effect is started based on the effect control CPU 120 receiving the jackpot start command.

In more detail, until a predetermined time (e.g., approximately 1000 ms) has elapsed since the power outage recovery command and the pattern confirmation command were received, the illumination of the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper board movable element LED 9d, the lower board movable element LED 9e, the upper frame movable element LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g, and the output of background music (BGM), are restricted. In other words, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper board movable element LED 9d, the lower board movable element LED 9e, the upper frame movable element LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are turned off, and background music (BGM) is not output.

After that, when a jackpot start command is received, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable element LED 9d, the below-board movable element LED 9e, the above-frame movable element LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g will light up in a manner corresponding to the fanfare effect (introduction part), and background music (BGM) corresponding to the fanfare effect (introduction part) will begin to be output. Furthermore, when a predetermined time (e.g., 2000 ms) has elapsed since the jackpot start command was received, the display of the startup preparation display 132SG500 will end, and the display of the effect image corresponding to the fanfare effect (introduction part) will begin. Note that the effect image corresponding to the fanfare effect (introduction part) will be displayed as a black screen until a predetermined time (e.g., 1500 ms) has elapsed since its start.

Next, when a predetermined time (e.g., 4000 ms) has elapsed since the power outage restoration command was received, operation confirmation control (initial operation) of each movable body is initiated. After that, once the initial operation of each movable body is complete, the fanfare performance (introduction part) ends, and the fanfare performance (right-hit notification part) begins.

As shown in Figures 52 (F7) and (F8), in the right-hit notification part of the fanfare presentation, right-hit prompt displays 132SG431 and 132SG432 are displayed to encourage the player to shoot the game ball into the right play area, and a right-hit operation prompt is performed. Therefore, if the initial operation of the movable body is being performed when the right-hit notification part starts, the movable body operating due to the initial operation will obstruct the visibility of the right-hit notification part of the fanfare presentation, such as right-hit prompt display 132SG431, and there is a risk that the player will not perform the right-hit operation and will suffer a disadvantage.

Furthermore, in the right-hit notification part of the fanfare effect, as shown in FIG. 52 (F7), when the right-hit prompt display 132SG431 is displayed, a movable body effect is executed in which the on-board movable body 32A descends from the origin position to the effect position. Therefore, if the initial operation of the movable body is being executed when the right-hit notification part starts, it becomes difficult to determine whether the movable body is operating as the initial operation or the right-hit operation prompt effect.

In this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately before the fanfare effect is executed and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, the movable body is controlled so that the initial operation ends before the fanfare effect (right-hit notification part) that involves the operation of the on-board movable body 32A begins. This prevents the movable body performing the initial operation from interfering with the visibility of the right-hit notification part in the fanfare effect, and prevents it from becoming difficult to distinguish whether the initial operation or the right-hit operation promotion effect is operating.

More specifically, in this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately before the fanfare effect is executed, the introductory part period and initial movement period of the fanfare effect are set so that the initial movement of the movable body is completed within the period from the start of the fanfare effect to the start of the right-hit promotion effect (see Figure 52 (F1) to (F6)).

In addition, during the introductory part of the fanfare effect, when announcing which of the multiple types of jackpots A to E has occurred, it is possible to display the jackpot type display 132SG421 corresponding to the jackpot type being controlled, and the pre-jackpot type display introduction display 132SG422 before the jackpot type display 132SG421 is displayed.In the operation confirmation control, the initial operation is completed before the display of the jackpot type display 132SG421 in Figure 52 (F6), so even if operation confirmation control is performed during the fanfare effect, it is possible to know which type of jackpot has been controlled.

In addition, when the fanfare effect is executed, the above-board movable body LED9d, below-board movable body LED9e, above-frame movable body LED9f, and chance button LED9g, which are performing their initial operation, will light up in an initial highlight mode (white light), while the above-board movable body LED9d, below-board movable body LED9e, above-frame movable body LED9f, and chance button LED9g, which are not operating under operation confirmation control, will light up in a light highlight mode corresponding to the fanfare effect (introduction part) (for example, blue-based colors for a 3R jackpot, red-based colors for a 10R jackpot, etc.), but the initial highlight mode (white light) is not used in the light highlight mode corresponding to the fanfare effect (introduction part). Therefore, it is possible to indicate that the movable body is under operation confirmation control even during the fanfare effect.

In addition, when the first movable body is moving due to the initial operation, the movable body LED of the first movable body emits light in an initial highlighting mode (white light), while the movable body LED of the second movable body emits light in an illumination mode corresponding to the fanfare performance (introduction part), making it possible to indicate that the movable body is performing its initial operation even during the fanfare performance.

In addition, when a fanfare effect is being performed, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b emit light at a first brightness in a lighting pattern corresponding to the fanfare effect, while during operation confirmation control, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, and the above-frame movable body LED 9f emit light at a second brightness (low brightness) lower than the first brightness (high brightness), thereby reducing power consumption when the power is turned on and reducing the load.

In addition, the duty ratio of all movable body LEDs may be reduced from the time the power is turned on until the initial operation of all movable bodies is completed (until the last movable body to be initialized is placed at the origin position), or the duty ratio may be reduced until a predetermined time has elapsed.

Furthermore, when the first movable body is operating due to the initial operation, the movable body LED of the second movable body does not emit light in the initial highlight mode, and the movable body LED of the first movable body emits light in the initial highlight mode, making it possible to draw attention to the movable body that is operating due to the operation confirmation control.

Furthermore, the movable body LED of a movable body during initial operation emits light in a common initial highlight mode (white light) when the movable body advances from the origin position to the performance position and when it retreats from the performance position to the origin position. Meanwhile, the movable body LED of a movable body operated by performance operation control can emit light in different modes when the movable body advances from the origin position to the performance position and when it retreats from the performance position to the origin position. Specifically, during an advance operation, the movable body LED emits light in a first mode (e.g., a wave mode in which frame LEDs 9a, 9b, attacca LED 9c, movable body LEDs 9d, 9e, etc., are illuminated in stages from one side to the other at a predetermined cycle), and during a retreat operation, the movable body LED emits light in a second mode (e.g., a flash mode in which the LEDs flash at a fast cycle (e.g., every 30 ms)). This makes it easy to distinguish whether operation confirmation control or performance operation control is being performed based on the initial highlight mode (white light) and the mode corresponding to the performance.

In addition, in the movable body performance executed in the right-hit notification part of the fanfare performance, the on-board movable body 32A operates in the same operating mode as the initial operation (descending from the origin position to the performance position), and in the initial operation, the movable body LED lights up in an initial highlighting mode (white lighting), and in the movable body performance, it lights up in a mode corresponding to the right-hit notification part that is different from the initial highlighting mode (white lighting), and when the movable body operates in the initial operation, sound output is limited, and in the movable body performance executed in the right-hit notification part, a sound corresponding to the right-hit notification part is output. In this way, it is easy to determine whether operation confirmation control or performance operation control is being performed, based on the initial highlighting mode and the mode corresponding to the right-hit notification part.

In this embodiment, an example has been given in which the operating mode of the on-board movable body 32A in the movable body performance executed in the right-hit notification part is the same as the operating mode of the on-board movable body 32A in the initial operation, but the present invention is not limited to this. The operating mode of the on-board movable body 32A in the movable body performance and the operating mode of the on-board movable body 32A in the initial operation may only have some of the same operating mode, or may have all of the same operating mode. Furthermore, the operating modes of the two may all be different.

In addition, when a moving object effect is executed in the right-hit notification part of the fanfare effect, the moving object can be operated by a special action and an effect display corresponding to the moving object effect can be displayed. If the action confirmation control cannot be completed normally over a specific period of time, it can be determined to be an action error and the action confirmation control can be performed again. If the action confirmation control has been performed over a specific period of time, the special action can be restricted when the moving object effect is executed, while an effect display can be displayed. In this way, the initial action cannot be interfered with by the special action, and the player can be informed by the effect display that the moving object effect has been executed.

Form 4 (power cut immediately after fanfare begins)
Next, the operation confirmation control in the case where a power interruption occurs immediately after the start of the fanfare effect will be described with reference to Fig. 81. Fig. 81 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control in the case where a power interruption occurs immediately after the start of the fanfare effect.

As shown in Figure 81, after the variable display based on the jackpot fluctuation pattern ends with the static display of a combination of jackpot confirmation symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the symbol confirmation display period ends and the jackpot start command is received by the effect control CPU 120, which starts the jackpot fanfare effect. After a power outage occurs immediately after the fanfare effect begins, the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts up in a hot start (hot start processing is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), and control of the jackpot gaming state resumes.

"Immediately after the fanfare effect begins" refers specifically to the timing immediately after CPU 103 begins controlling the jackpot, and immediately after the effect control CPU 120, upon receiving the jackpot start command transmitted based on CPU 103's recovery, begins the fanfare effect (introduction part). However, since only the power outage recovery command is transmitted upon CPU 103's recovery after hot start startup, the effect control CPU 120 cannot determine the current game state (e.g., whether or not it is in the fanfare period) until it receives the jackpot opening command. Therefore, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable element LED 9d, the below-board movable element LED 9e, the above-frame movable element LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g will be in a state corresponding to recovery (e.g., off), and the background music (BGM) will be in a state corresponding to recovery (e.g., silent). Furthermore, after the startup preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the startup timing disappears, a restoration display 132SG510 appears, displaying the words "Power being restored, please wait" against a black background, indicating that the power is being restored (see Figure 97), and the fact that the power is being restored is announced until the next command is received, that is, for the remaining period of the fanfare.

In addition, operation confirmation control is initiated during the remaining fanfare period announcing that the power outage is being restored, and ends before the fanfare period ends and the round of play begins. During operation confirmation control, the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g light up in an initial highlight mode (white light) during initial operation, but at a lower brightness than when they light up during performance operation control.

After that, when a command specifying that the large prize opening is open is received for the first time, the performance control CPU 120 can determine that the first time has started, and so the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable element LED 9d, the below-board movable element LED 9e, and the above-frame movable element LED 9f will light up in a manner corresponding to the jackpot music that will be output during the jackpot, and background music (BGM) corresponding to the jackpot music will begin to be output. The chance button LED 9g will light up in a manner that indicates that the jackpot music can be selected from multiple songs.

In this way, if a power outage occurs immediately after the fanfare effect begins and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is then started with a hot start, during the operation confirmation control that begins during the remaining period of the fanfare, the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g, which are the movable bodies that perform the initial operation, will light up in an initial highlight mode (white light), but at a lower brightness than when they light up during the effect operation control (movable body effect in the win/lose button effect).This reduces power consumption when the power is turned on, reducing the load on the pachinko gaming machine 1, and by making the movable body LEDs attached to the movable bodies lower brightness than when the effect operation control is executed, it is possible to prevent the movable body operation from being too bright and difficult to confirm due to glare.

Furthermore, upon receiving a command indicating that the large prize opening has opened, effects corresponding to round play (light emission and sound output corresponding to the music played during a jackpot) are initiated. Specifically, during the round play period, the large prize opening is open for an extended period, allowing a large number of game balls to enter. This period is more advantageous to the player than the fanfare period or ending period of a jackpot, and therefore a lively round play effect is provided using images, lights, and sounds. However, by ending the operation confirmation control before the round play effect corresponding to this round play begins, players can enjoy the round play effect without having to worry about the moving body performing its initial operation.

More specifically, in this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately after the fanfare effect begins and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, the fanfare effect period and initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body is completed within the period until the fanfare effect ends (see Figures 52 (F2) to (F6)).

The performance control CPU 120 also displays the recovery indicator 132SG510 on the image display device 5 in the following cases: when a power outage occurs during variable display and the power is then turned on; and when a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of a fanfare performance and the power is then turned on. It is also capable of performing recovery illumination control to cause the operating upper board movable body LED 9d, lower board movable body LED 9e, and upper frame movable body LED 9f to illuminate in a manner corresponding to the recovery indicator 132SG510 (for example, initial highlighting; white illumination). It is also possible to perform operation confirmation control in the following cases: when a power outage occurs during variable display and the power is then turned on; and when a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare performance and the power is then turned on. This prevents the processing at power-on from becoming too complicated.

In this embodiment, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board-mounted movable body LED 9d, the board-mounted movable body LED 9e, the frame-mounted movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are shown as being turned off during power outage recovery, except for the movable body that is performing initial operation. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body LEDs may be made to emit light at a lower brightness than the brightness of the light emitted by the movable body LEDs during performance operation control (movable body performance in the win/lose button performance).

Furthermore, the image display device 5 displays a common recovery indicator 132SG510 in both cases: if a power outage occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on; and if a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of a fanfare effect and then the power is turned on. However, for example, if a power outage occurs during variable display in a low base state and then the power is turned on, the right-hit prompt indicator 132SG430 will not be displayed when the recovery indicator 132SG510 is displayed. However, if a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of a fanfare effect and then the power is turned on, the right-hit prompt indicator 132SG430 will be displayed when the recovery indicator 132SG510 is displayed. Although there are differences, as long as the display mode of at least the recovery indicator 132SG510 is the same, the display modes of the other indicators do not need to be the same.

In addition, if a power outage occurs during variable display in a high base state or during a jackpot and the power is then turned on, the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 is displayed at the same time as the recovery display 132SG510. However, for example, regardless of the game state, only the recovery display 132SG510 may be displayed when the power is turned on after a power outage, and it may not be necessary to determine whether or not to display the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 depending on the game state. Furthermore, the display mode of the recovery display 132SG510 may be different depending on whether a power outage occurs during variable display in a low base state and the power is then turned on, and whether a power outage occurs during variable display in a high base state or during a jackpot and the power is then turned on. In this case, it is preferable that the display mode encourages a right-hit operation when a power outage occurs during variable display in a high base state or during a jackpot and the power is then turned on.

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs during a fanfare performance and the power is then turned on, the performance control CPU 120 can display the recovery in progress display 132SG510 on the image display device 5 and cause the movable bodies that are performing their initial operations, such as the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B, to light up in an initial highlight mode (white lit).If a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of a fanfare performance and the power is then turned on, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B, that are not performing their initial operations, can light up in a mode corresponding to the recovery in progress display (off in this embodiment) throughout the execution period of the fanfare performance, and the initial highlight mode (white lit) is not used in the mode corresponding to the recovery in progress display (off).In this way, it is possible to draw attention to the movable bodies that are operating through operation confirmation control, even during recovery.

In addition, when the effect control CPU 120 causes the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button 631B of the movable bodies performing initial operation to light up in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), it controls the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button 631B of the movable bodies to light up at a lower brightness than the mode corresponding to the music during a jackpot (see Figure 56 (B)), thereby reducing power consumption when the power is turned on and reducing the load.

In addition, the mode corresponding to the restoration display (light off) is not used in the lighting mode corresponding to the fanfare effect (music played during a jackpot), so even if the fanfare effect was playing before the power outage, it is possible to notify the player that restoration is underway when the power is turned on.

Furthermore, the operation mode of each movable body under operation confirmation control is the same as the operation mode of each movable body under performance operation control (for example, the operation mode of moving from the origin position to the performance position), and the movable bodies, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B, emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light) until the initial operation is completed under operation confirmation control, and emit light in a rainbow flash mode during the first period (for example, the advance operation period) and in a smooth rainbow mode different from the rainbow flash mode during the second period (for example, the retreat operation period). This makes it easy to distinguish whether operation confirmation control or performance operation control is being performed.

Form 5 (power cut just before the fanfare ends)
Next, the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs just before the end of a fanfare effect will be described with reference to Figs. 82 to 84. Fig. 82 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs just before the end of a fanfare effect. Fig. 83 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when the operation confirmation control is executed during a fanfare effect. Fig. 84 (A) is a diagram showing the relationship between the on-board movable body and various displays, and (B) is a diagram showing the relationship between the below-board movable body and various displays.

As shown in Figure 82, after a power outage occurs just before the jackpot fanfare effect that started upon receiving a jackpot start command ends, the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts up in a hot start mode (hot start processing is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), and control of the jackpot gaming state resumes.

"Immediately before the end of the fanfare effect" specifically refers to the timing immediately before the end of the fanfare effect (right-hit notification part) started by the effect control CPU 120 based on receiving a jackpot start command, in other words, the timing immediately before the end of the fanfare period during which the CPU 103 waits from the time it starts controlling the jackpot until it starts controlling the round of play (for example, the timing approximately 5000 ms before the end of the fanfare period).

In this case, after starting with a hot start, the presentation control CPU 120 receives the power outage recovery command sent when the CPU 103 recovers and the large prize opening open command corresponding to the first time. Based on this, throughout the round of play, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper board movable element LED 9d, the lower board movable element LED 9e, and the upper frame movable element LED 9f will light up in a manner corresponding to the music during a jackpot, the attacker LED 9c will light up in a manner corresponding to the opening, the chance button LED 9g will light up in a manner suggesting music selection, and background music (BGM) will be output in a manner corresponding to the music during a jackpot.

When started with a hot start, if there is remaining time in the fanfare period (for example, approximately 1000 ms), the CPU 103 will receive a power outage recovery command based on its recovery, and then after the remaining time of 1000 ms has elapsed, the first corresponding command to specify that the large prize slot is open will be received. During the remaining time in the fanfare period, the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g, and attacker LED 9c will be turned off, and background sound (BGM) will not be output. The movable body LEDs may also emit light in a manner corresponding to the recovery period.

Furthermore, after operation confirmation control of each movable body begins with the start of the first game, the operation confirmation control ends before the opening control of the large prize opening for that first game ends and the next round of play begins. During operation confirmation control, the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g, and attacker LED 9c emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light) during initial operation, but emit light at a lower brightness than when emitting light during performance operation control.

After that, after receiving a command specifying after the large prize opening has been opened in the first round, the performance control CPU 120 receives a command specifying while the large prize opening is open in the second round. The frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the above-board movable element LED 9d, the below-board movable element LED 9e, and the above-frame movable element LED 9f will then light up in an open mode to emphasize the opening for a predetermined period of time, and then light up in a mode corresponding to the jackpot music that is output during the jackpot, and background music (BGM) corresponding to the jackpot music will begin to be output. The chance button LED 9g will light up in a mode indicating that the jackpot music can be selected from multiple songs, and the attacker LED 9c will light up in a mode corresponding to the opening.

In this way, if a power outage occurs just before the end of the fanfare effect and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, during the operation confirmation control that begins during the round play period, the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g, which are the movable bodies that perform the initial operation, will light up in an initial highlight mode (white light), but they will light up at a lower brightness than when they light up during the performance operation control. This reduces power consumption when the power is turned on, reducing the load on the pachinko gaming machine 1, and by making the movable body LEDs attached to the movable bodies less bright than when the performance operation control is executed, it is possible to prevent the movable body operation from being too bright and difficult to confirm due to glare.

In addition, the operation confirmation control in the event that the power is cut off and then turned back on just before the fanfare performance ends can be completed before the opening control of the large prize opening for the first round of play ends, so even after the initial operation has ended, players can aim to win at the large prize opening without being obstructed by the moving body.

More specifically, in this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the fanfare effect and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, the special prize opening opening control period and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body is completed within the period until the special prize opening opening control for the first play ends (see Figure 52 (F8) to (F9)).

Also, as shown in Figure 83 (A), in round play where the large prize opening is controlled to be open for a specified period after the fanfare effect has ended, images for the round effect are displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, and a right-hit promotion display 132SG430 indicating the direction in which the game ball will be shot is displayed on the right side of the display screen, and round play-related displays related to the round game, such as the number of rounds display 132SG451, number of winning balls display 132SG452, number of balls dispensed display 132SG453, and number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, are displayed on the upper side of the display screen.

Also, as shown in Figure 83 (A), when the above-board movable body 32A moves between the origin position and the performance position, the performance part 32a can move up and down in the shaded area E1 surrounded by a two-dot chain line, and the support part 32b can move up and down in the shaded area E2 surrounded by a two-dot chain line. Also, when the below-board movable body 32B moves up and down between the origin position and the performance position, the performance part 32c and the support part 32d can move up and down in the shaded area E3 surrounded by a two-dot chain line.

In detail, the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 is displayed in a position where only the support section 32b can overlap, the number of rounds display 132SG451 and the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454 are displayed in a position where the presentation section 32a and part of the support section 32b can overlap, and the number of winning balls display 132SG452 and the number of balls dispensed display 132SG453 are displayed in a position where the presentation section 32a can overlap.

Next, the relationship between the various displays when the upper and lower movable units 32A and 32B perform their initial operations will be explained with reference to Figures 84(A) and (B).

As shown in Figure 84 (A), when the on-board movable body 32A is located at the origin position, it does not overlap with any of the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, number of rounds display 132SG451, number of winning balls display 132SG452, number of balls dispensed display 132SG453, or number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, so the player can see all of the displays (see Figure 83 (A)).

Next, when the on-board movable body 32A descends from the origin position and passes through the intermediate position, the presentation section 32a overlaps in front of the number of rounds display 132SG451, number of winning balls display 132SG452, number of balls dispensed display 132SG453, and number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see these displays. Furthermore, the support section 32b overlaps in front of the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 (see Figure 83 (B)).

Next, when the on-board movable body 32A passes through the intermediate position and descends to the presentation position, the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 becomes visible, but because part of the consecutive wins/total balls dispensed display 132SG454 overlaps with the presentation section 32a on the front side, it becomes difficult (or impossible) for the player to see the consecutive wins/total balls dispensed display 132SG454. However, because the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, number of rounds display 132SG451, number of winning balls display 132SG452, and number of balls dispensed display 132SG453 do not overlap with either the presentation section 32a or the support section 32b, the player can see these displays (see Figure 83 (C)).

When returning from the presentation position to the origin position, the situation in which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with each display is the same; however, the movement speed of the on-board movable body 32A when it moves from the presentation position to the origin position is slower than the movement speed of the on-board movable body 32A when it moves from the origin position to the presentation position. Therefore, as shown in Figure 84 (A), the overlap time is longer during the retraction operation than during the advancement operation, and the time during which it is difficult for the player to see is also longer.

As shown in Figure 84 (A), when an initial operation is performed during a round of play, the time during which the above-board movable body 32A or the below-board movable body 32B overlaps with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see, is shorter than the time during which the above-board movable body 32A overlaps with the jackpot information display (e.g., number of rounds display 132SG451, number of winning balls display 132SG452, number of balls dispensed display 132SG453, number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, etc.) related to the jackpot. Therefore, the visibility of the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, which has a significant impact on play, is less likely to be obstructed by the above-board movable body 32A or the below-board movable body 32B performing the initial operation.

In other words, during round play, when the big prize opening is opened and the player has an advantage, if the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 is covered by the initial operation of the on-board movable body 32A or the under-board movable body 32B, the player may miss the opportunity to make the game ball enter the prize by performing a right-hit operation while the big prize opening is open, which may cause the player to suffer a disadvantage. Therefore, it is preferable that the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 maintains high visibility compared to other big prize information displays.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 84 (B), when the under-board movable body 32B is located at the origin position, it does not overlap with any of the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, number of rounds display 132SG451, number of winning balls display 132SG452, number of balls dispensed display 132SG453, or number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, so the player can see all of the displays (see Figure 83 (A)).

Next, while the under-board movable body 32B rises from the origin position, passes through the intermediate position, and reaches the presentation position, and even after it reaches the presentation position, it does not overlap with any of the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, number of rounds display 132SG451, number of winning balls display 132SG452, number of balls dispensed display 132SG453, or number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, so the player can see all of the displays (see Figures 83 (D) and (E)). Furthermore, the situation in which the under-board movable body 32B overlaps with each display remains the same when returning from the presentation position to the origin position.

As shown in Figure 84 (A), when an initial operation is performed during a round of play, the time during which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see, is shorter than the time during which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the jackpot information display (e.g., number of rounds display 132SG451, number of winning balls display 132SG452, number of balls dispensed display 132SG453, number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, etc.) related to the jackpot. Therefore, the visibility of the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, which has a significant impact on play, is less likely to be obstructed by the on-board movable body 32A or below-board movable body 32B performing the initial operation.

Furthermore, while the initial operation is being performed, the under-board movable body 32B does not overlap with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 or the jackpot information display (for example, the number of rounds display 132SG451, the number of winning balls display 132SG452, the number of balls dispensed display 132SG453, the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, etc.), so it is visible to the player.

In other words, during round play, when the jackpot opening gives the player an advantage, if the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 is covered by the initially operating on-board movable element 32A or the initially operating below-board movable element 32B, the player may miss the opportunity to make the game ball enter the jackpot by operating the right hand while the jackpot opening is open, which could put the player at a disadvantage. However, in this embodiment, the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 is obscured for a shorter period of time by the initially operating on-board movable element 32A or the initially operating below-board movable element 32B compared to other jackpot information displays, preventing the player from suffering any disadvantages.

In addition, during operation confirmation control, the movable body LED of a movable body undergoing initial operation lights up in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), while the movable body LED of a movable body not undergoing initial operation lights up in a mode corresponding to the music played during a jackpot (round performance). However, the initial highlight mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode corresponding to the music played during a jackpot (round performance), making it possible to draw attention to movable bodies undergoing initial operation even during round play.

In addition, during operation confirmation control, the movable body LED of the first movable body that is performing its initial operation lights up in an initial highlight mode (white light), while the movable body LED of the second movable body that is not performing its initial operation lights up in a mode that corresponds to the music played during a jackpot (round performance).However, when the first movable body is moving due to operation confirmation control, the movable body LED of the first movable body lights up in an initial highlight mode (white light), while the movable body LED of the second movable body lights up in a mode that corresponds to the music played during a jackpot (round performance), making it possible to draw attention to the movable body performing its initial operation even during round play.

In addition, in this embodiment, the light emission brightness when the movable body LED of a movable body that has not performed the initial operation lights up in a manner corresponding to the music during a jackpot (round performance) during a round play when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start after a power outage occurs just before the fanfare performance ends is the same as the light emission brightness when the movable body LED of a movable body that has not performed the initial operation lights up in a manner corresponding to the music during a jackpot (round performance) during a round play when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not started with a hot start after a power outage occurs just before the fanfare performance ends. is not limited to this, and in a round of play when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start after a power outage occurs just before the fanfare effect ends, the light emission brightness when the movable body LED of a movable body that has not performed the initial operation lights up in a manner corresponding to the music played during a jackpot (round effect) may be lower than the light emission brightness when the movable body LED of a movable body that has not performed the initial operation lights up in a manner corresponding to the music played during a jackpot (round effect) in a round of play when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not started with a hot start after a power outage occurs just before the fanfare effect ends. By doing so, it is possible to reduce power consumption when the power is turned on and lighten the load.

Mode 6 (power outage immediately after the start of the first round of play)
Next, the operation confirmation control in the case where a power outage occurs immediately after the start of a round of play will be described with reference to Fig. 85. Fig. 85 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control in the case where a power outage occurs immediately after the start of a round of play.

As shown in Figure 85, after the jackpot fanfare has ended, a power outage occurs immediately after the round performance begins based on the reception of a command specifying that the jackpot opening is in progress, indicating that the first round of play (first round) has begun. Then, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts up in a hot start mode (hot start processing is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), control of the jackpot game state resumes.

"Immediately after the round effect has started" specifically includes the timing immediately after the effect control CPU 120 starts the round effect based on the receipt of a command specifying that the large prize opening is open, indicating that the first round of play has started, in other words, the timing immediately after the CPU 103 starts controlling the first round of play (for example, the timing immediately after the CPU 103 starts controlling the opening of the large prize opening in the round of play (for example, approximately 1000 ms later)).

In this case, after the hot start, only the power outage restoration command is sent upon recovery of the CPU 103. Therefore, the presentation control CPU 120 cannot determine the current game state (e.g., whether it is currently in a round of play) until it receives the command to restore the game after the first large prize opening. Therefore, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper board movable body LED 9d, the lower board movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are in a state corresponding to a restoration period (e.g., off), and the background music (BGM) is in a state corresponding to a restoration period (e.g., silent). Furthermore, after the start-up preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the time of startup disappears, a restoration in progress display 132SG510 is displayed (see FIG. 97 ), displaying the words "Power restoration in progress. Please wait" on a black background, indicating that the power outage is being restored. This notification continues until the next command, the command to restore the game after the first large prize opening, is received, i.e., until the first round of play ends.

Furthermore, operation confirmation control is initiated during the first round of play when it is announced that the power outage is being restored, and is completed before the end of the first round of play. During operation confirmation control, the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light) during initial operation, but emit light at a lower brightness than when emitting light during performance operation control.

After that, when a command specifying that the period during which the large prize opening changed from an open state to a closed state is received, followed by a command specifying that the period during which the large prize opening changed from a closed state to an open state is received, the performance control CPU 120 can determine that the first round of play has ended and the second round of play has begun. As a result, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable element LED 9d, the below-board movable element LED 9e, and the above-frame movable element LED 9f will light up in a manner corresponding to the jackpot music output during a jackpot, and background music (BGM) corresponding to the jackpot music will begin to be output. The chance button LED 9g will light up in a manner indicating that the jackpot music can be selected from multiple songs, and the attacker LED 9c will light up in a manner corresponding to the open state.

In this way, if a power outage occurs immediately after the start of a round performance and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is then started with a hot start, during the operation confirmation control that begins during that round of play, the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g, which are the movable bodies that perform the initial operation, will light up in an initial highlight mode (white light), but at a lower brightness than when they light up during the performance operation control (movable body performance in the win/lose button performance).This reduces power consumption when the power is turned on, reducing the load on the pachinko gaming machine 1, and by making the movable body LEDs attached to the movable bodies less bright than when performing the performance operation control, it is possible to prevent the movable body operation from being too bright and difficult to see due to glare.

In addition, if the power is cut off and then turned on immediately after the opening control of the large prize opening during the first round of play has begun, the operation confirmation control can be completed before the opening control of the large prize opening during that first round of play ends. This means that even after the initial operation has ended, players can aim to win at the large prize opening without being obstructed by the moving body.

More specifically, in this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately after the opening control of the special prize opening in the first round of play has begun and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is then started with a hot start, the opening control period of the special prize opening and the initial operation period for one round of play are set so that the initial operation of the movable body is completed within the period until the opening control of the special prize opening in that first round of play ends (see Figure 52 (F9)).

The performance control CPU 120 also displays the recovery in progress indicator 132SG510 on the image display device 5 in the following cases: when a power outage occurs during the variable display and the power is then turned on; and when a power outage occurs at the same time the large prize opening is controlled to an open state and the power is then turned on. It is also capable of performing recovery light emission control, which causes the operating upper board movable element LED9d, lower board movable element LED9e, and upper frame movable element LED9f to emit light in a manner corresponding to the recovery in progress indicator 132SG510 (for example, initial highlighting; white light). This allows for operation confirmation control in the following cases: when a power outage occurs during the variable display and the power is then turned on; and when a power outage occurs at the same time the large prize opening is controlled to an open state and the power is then turned on. This prevents the processing at power-on from becoming too complicated.

In this embodiment, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board-mounted movable body LED 9d, the board-mounted movable body LED 9e, the frame-mounted movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are shown as being turned off during power outage recovery, except for the movable body that is performing initial operation. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body LEDs may be made to emit light at a lower brightness than the brightness of the light emitted by the movable body LEDs during performance operation control (movable body performance in the win/lose button performance).

In addition, if a power outage occurs at the same time the large prize opening is controlled to the open state and the power is then turned on, the performance control CPU 120 can display the recovery in progress display 132SG510 on the image display device 5 and cause the movable bodies that are performing their initial operation, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B, to light up in an initial highlight mode (white lit).If a power outage occurs at the same time the large prize opening is controlled to the open state and the power is then turned on, the movable bodies that are not performing their initial operation, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B, can light up in a mode corresponding to the recovery in progress display (off in this embodiment) for the period during which the large prize opening is controlled to the open state, and the initial highlight mode (white lit) is not used in the mode corresponding to the recovery in progress display (off).In this way, it is possible to draw attention to the movable bodies that are operating through operation confirmation control, even during recovery.

In addition, the mode corresponding to the restoration display (light off) is not used in the lighting mode corresponding to the round performance (music played during a jackpot), so it is possible to notify the player that restoration is underway when the power is turned on, even if the round performance was in progress before the power outage.

In addition, in the above-mentioned form 6, if a power outage occurs immediately after the second or subsequent round of play (R2-R10) has started, the operation will be the same as if a power outage occurred immediately after the control of the first round of play (opening of the large prize opening) has started as described above, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

Mode 7 (power outage just before the end of the first round of play)
Next, the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of one round of play will be described with reference to Fig. 86. Fig. 86 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of one round of play.

As shown in Figure 86, after a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the round performance that began based on the reception of a command specifying that the big prize slot is open, indicating that the first round of play (first round) has begun, the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts up in a hot start mode (hot start processing is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), and control of the big prize game state resumes.

More specifically, "immediately before the round effect ends" refers to the timing immediately before the round effect started by the effect control CPU 120 based on receiving the large prize opening open command indicating that the first round of play has begun ends, in other words, the timing immediately before the CPU 103 ends control of the first round of play (for example, the timing immediately before the control of opening the large prize opening in one round of play ends (e.g., approximately 5000 ms before), the timing when the number of winning balls reaches one ball before the upper limit (e.g., 10 balls) that is the condition for closing the large prize opening, the round interval period in the first round of play, etc.).

In this case, after starting up with a hot start, when the CPU 103 recovers, it receives a power outage recovery command and a command to specify when the first large prize opening is complete. The presentation control CPU 120 determines that it is the first round interval, and the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, upper board movable element LED 9d, lower board movable element LED 9e, upper frame movable element LED 9f, chance button LED 9g, and attack LED 9c enter a state corresponding to recovery in progress (e.g., off), and the background sound (BGM) enters a state corresponding to recovery in progress (e.g., silent). Furthermore, after the startup preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 disappears, a recovery in progress display 132SG510 appears, displaying the words "Power being restored. Please wait" against a black background, indicating that power is being restored (see FIG. 97). This notification continues until the next command, the second large prize opening command, is received, i.e., until the first round interval ends.

After that, when a second command to specify that the jackpot opening is in progress is received, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper board movable element LED 9d, the lower board movable element LED 9e, and the upper frame movable element LED 9f will light up in an open emphasizing manner for the first predetermined time, and then light up in a manner corresponding to the music played during the jackpot (round performance), and the background sound (BGM) corresponding to the music played during the jackpot will begin to be output. Furthermore, the chance button LED 9g will light up in a manner indicating that the music played during the jackpot can be selected from multiple songs, and the attacker LED 9c will light up in a manner corresponding to the opening.

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the first round of play and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, operation confirmation control is initiated during the second round of play and ends before the end of the second round of play period. Note that operation confirmation control may also be initiated during the round interval period of the first round of play. Furthermore, during operation confirmation control, the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light) during initial operation, but emit light at a lower brightness than when emitting light during performance operation control.

In this way, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the first round of play and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, operation confirmation control will begin during the second round of play that follows that round, and the movable bodies that perform the initial operation, the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g, will light up in an initial highlight mode (white light), but at a lower brightness than when they light up during the performance operation control (movable body performance in the win/lose button performance).This reduces power consumption when the power is turned on, reducing the load on the pachinko gaming machine 1, and by making the movable body LEDs attached to the movable bodies lower brightness than when performing the performance operation control, it is possible to prevent the movable body operation from being too bright and difficult to see.

More specifically, in this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the first round of play and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, the opening control period for the special prize opening and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body is completed within the period until the opening control of the special prize opening in the second round of play is completed (see Figure 52 (F10)).

In addition, in the above-mentioned form 7, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the second or subsequent round of play (R2-R10), the operation will be the same as if a power outage occurred immediately after the control of the first round of play (opening of the large prize opening) began as described above, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

Form 8 (power interruption immediately after the start of a special interval)
Next, the operation confirmation control when a power interruption occurs immediately after the start of a special interval will be described with reference to Fig. 87. Fig. 87 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power interruption occurs immediately after the start of a special interval.

In this embodiment, if the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B, the round interval period after the opening control of the large prize entry port has ended in all rounds of play is 0.5 seconds, whereas if the jackpot type is jackpot C, jackpot D, or jackpot E, the special round interval period after the opening control of the large prize entry port has ended in the third round of play is 30 seconds (see Figure 8), and during this special round interval period, a promotion effect (see Figures 53 (F21) to (F29)) is performed as a special interval effect.

As shown in Figure 87, after a power outage occurs just before the third round of jackpots C to E ends, the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts up in a hot start mode (hot start processing is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), and control of the jackpot gaming state resumes.

"Immediately before the end of the third round of jackpots C to E" specifically refers to the timing immediately before the end of the round of jackpots initiated by the presentation control CPU 120 based on the receipt of the large prize opening opening command indicating that the third round of play has begun, in other words, the timing immediately before the CPU 103 ends control of the opening of the large prize opening in the third round of play (for example, the timing immediately before control of the opening of the large prize opening in the third round of play ends (for example, approximately 5000 ms before), or the timing when the number of winning balls reaches one ball before the upper limit (for example, 10 balls) that is the condition for closing the large prize opening).

In this case, after starting up with a hot start, when the CPU 103 recovers, it receives a power outage recovery command and a command to indicate when the third large prize opening is complete. The presentation control CPU 120 determines that the third special round interval is in progress, and the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, upper board movable element LED 9d, lower board movable element LED 9e, upper frame movable element LED 9f, chance button LED 9g, and attack LED 9c become active (e.g., off), and the background music (BGM) becomes active (e.g., silent). After the startup preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 disappears, a recovery display 132SG510 appears, displaying the words "Power being restored. Please wait" against a black background, indicating that power is being restored (see FIG. 97). This notification continues until the next command, the second large prize opening command, is received, i.e., until the third special round interval ends.

After that, when the fourth command to specify that the jackpot opening is in progress is received, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper board movable element LED 9d, the lower board movable element LED 9e, and the upper frame movable element LED 9f will light up in an open emphasizing manner for the first predetermined time, and then light up in a manner corresponding to the music played during the jackpot (round performance), and the background sound (BGM) corresponding to the music played during the jackpot will begin to be output. Furthermore, the chance button LED 9g will light up in a manner indicating that the music played during the jackpot can be selected from multiple songs, and the attacker LED 9c will light up in a manner corresponding to the opening.

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the control to open the large prize slot during the third round of play, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, operation confirmation control begins during the third special round interval period and ends before the end of the third special round interval period. Furthermore, during operation confirmation control, the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light) during initial operation, but emit light at a lower brightness than when emitting light during performance operation control.

In this way, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the control to open the large prize slot during the third round of play, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is then started with a hot start, operation confirmation control will begin during the third special round interval, and the initial operating movable bodies, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g, will light up in an initial highlight mode (white light), but at a lower brightness than when they light up during the performance operation control (movable body performance in the win/lose button performance).This reduces power consumption when the power is turned on, reducing the load on the pachinko gaming machine 1, and by making the movable body LEDs attached to the movable bodies less bright than when performing the performance operation control, it is possible to prevent the movable body operation from being too bright and difficult to see.

More specifically, in this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the opening control of the special prize opening during the third round of play and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, the opening control of the special prize opening, the round interval period, and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body is completed within the period until the end of the third special round interval period (see Figure 53 (F21) to (F29)).

In the above-mentioned form 8, an example was given in which a special round interval is set after the opening control of the large prize opening in the third round of play has ended, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a special round interval may also be set after the opening control of the large prize opening in a round of play other than the third has ended.

The performance control CPU 120 also displays the recovery in progress indicator 132SG510 on the image display device 5 in the following cases: when a power outage occurs during variable display and the power is then turned on; when a power outage occurs at the same time the large prize opening is controlled to a closed state and the power is then turned on; and when a power outage occurs at the same time the large prize opening is controlled to a closed state and the power is then turned on. It is also capable of performing recovery light emission control, which causes the operating upper board movable element LED9d, lower board movable element LED9e, and upper frame movable element LED9f to emit light in a manner corresponding to the recovery in progress indicator 132SG510 (for example, initial highlighting; white light). This allows for operation confirmation control in the following cases: when a power outage occurs during variable display and the power is then turned on; and when a power outage occurs at the same time the large prize opening is controlled to a closed state and the power is then turned on. This prevents the processing at power-on from becoming too complicated.

In addition, if a power outage occurs at the same time the large prize opening is controlled to the closed state and the power is then turned on, the performance control CPU 120 can display the recovery in progress display 132SG510 on the image display device 5 and cause the movable bodies that are performing their initial operation, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B, to light up in an initial highlight mode (white lit).If a power outage occurs at the same time the large prize opening is controlled to the closed state and the power is then turned on, the movable bodies that are not performing their initial operation, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B, can light up in a mode corresponding to the recovery in progress display (off in this embodiment) for the period during which the large prize opening is controlled to the closed state, and the initial highlight mode (white lit) is not used in the mode corresponding to the recovery in progress display (off).In this way, it is possible to draw attention to the movable bodies that are operating through operation confirmation control, even during recovery.

In addition, in this embodiment, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are shown as being turned off during power outage recovery, except for the movable body that is performing initial operation. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body LEDs may be made to emit light at a lower brightness than the brightness of the light emitted by the movable body LEDs in the performance operation control (the movable body performance in the win/lose button performance).

In addition, if a power outage occurs at the same time the large prize opening is controlled to a closed state and the power is then turned on, the effect control CPU 120 will display the recovery display 132SG510 on the image display device 5, and can execute an interval effect when the large prize opening is controlled to a closed state during one round of play.In the interval effect, the movable bodies, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, the chance button 631B, and the attacker LED 9c, can be made to light up in a manner corresponding to the music played during a jackpot (interval effect), and the movable bodies, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B, which are performing their initial operation, can be made to light up in an initial highlighting manner (white light). Then, if a power outage occurs at the same time the big prize opening is controlled to a closed state (special round interval) during the third round of play and the power is then turned on, the movable bodies that have not yet performed their initial operation (the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, the chance button 631B, and the attacker LED 9c) can be made to light up in a manner corresponding to the recovery display (turned off in this embodiment) throughout the execution period of the third special round interval control, and the initial highlighting mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode corresponding to the interval presentation (music during a big win). This makes it possible to notify that recovery is in progress when the power is turned on.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a power outage recovery command and a command to specify after the third large prize opening are received upon recovery of the CPU 103, during the third special round interval period, the image display device 5 displays the recovery indicator 132SG510, and the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the upper board movable body LED 9d, the lower board movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, the chance button LED 9g, and the attacker LED 9c are turned on (for example, turned off) in a state corresponding to the recovery state, and the background music (BGM) is turned on in a state corresponding to the recovery state. In the example shown, the recovery state continues until the fourth command specifying that the large prize slot is open is received (for example, silent), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the interval presentation is made up of an introduction part (see Figure 53 (F21) to (F23)) and a result notification part (see Figure 53 (F24) to (F29)) that is executed after the introduction part and notifies the result of the introduction part, it is preferable that the operation confirmation control be performed before the result notification part starts. This makes it possible to avoid the movable body performing the initial operation interfering with the visibility of the result notification part in the interval presentation.

In addition, the presentation control CPU 120 can execute a movable body presentation using the under-board movable body 32B as a promotion presentation in the result notification part (see Figure 53 (F24)), and when the movable body presentation is executed, it is possible to control the presentation operation in a manner that is common to the operation manner of the under-board movable body 32B that operates under operation confirmation control, and it is preferable that sound output is limited when the under-board movable body 32B operates under operation confirmation control, and that when the under-board movable body 32B operates in the movable body presentation, a sound corresponding to the movable body presentation is output. In this way, it is easy to distinguish whether operation confirmation control or presentation operation control is being performed.

Furthermore, in the movable body presentation in the result notification part, an effect display corresponding to the movable body presentation (see FIG. 53 (F24)) can be displayed. The operation mode of the under-board movable body 32B under the operation confirmation control is the same as the operation mode of the under-board movable body 32B under the promotion presentation (for example, the operation mode of moving from the origin position to the presentation position). If the operation confirmation control cannot be completed normally over a specific period of time, an operation error can be determined and the operation confirmation control can be performed again. If a power outage occurs just before the large prize opening is controlled to a closed state during a round of play in which an interval presentation is executed, and the operation confirmation control that begins when the power is then turned on does not complete normally, the timing at which the operation error is determined overlaps with the execution period of the promotion presentation. If a promotion presentation is executed during the specific period in which the operation confirmation control is being performed, the movable body presentation can be restricted while an effect display can be displayed. In this way, the promotion presentation can prevent the operation confirmation control from being interfered with, and the effect display can indicate to the player that the movable body presentation has been executed.

Furthermore, the operation mode of the under-board movable body 32B under operation confirmation control is the same as the operation mode of the under-board movable body 32B under the promotion effect (for example, the operation mode of moving from the origin position to the performance position), and the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button 631B of the movable body emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light) until the initial operation is completed under operation confirmation control, and in performance operation control (for example, in the case of a successful promotion in the promotion effect), emit light in a rainbow flash mode during the first period (for example, the advancement operation period), and emit light in a smooth rainbow mode different from the rainbow flash mode during the second period (for example, the retreat operation period). This makes it easy to distinguish whether operation confirmation control or performance operation control is being performed.

In this embodiment, the movable body effect executed during the special round interval period after the opening control of the large prize opening in the third round of play has ended is an example in which the under-board movable body 32B rises to perform an advancement effect that notifies the player that the jackpot is a 10-round jackpot, which is more advantageous to the player than a 3-round jackpot. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and various movable body effects can be applied in addition to the advancement effect described above.

For example, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine in which the game state after the jackpot ends in a probability variable state (a state in which the jackpot probability is higher than the normal state) based on the detection of the game ball passing through the second count switch 132SG024 during a specific round of play during a jackpot, as shown in Figure 88, the movable body effect executed during the special round interval period may be such that the under-board movable body 32B rises, thereby performing a V promotion effect to notify the player that the jackpot in question is a probability variable jackpot, which is more advantageous to the player than a non-probability variable jackpot (a jackpot in which the game state after the jackpot ends does not become a probability variable state).

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 88, if this V promotion effect is composed of an introductory part and a result notification part that is executed after the introductory part and notifies the result of the introductory part, if a power outage occurs at the same time as the large prize opening is controlled to a closed state, and then the power is turned on, it is preferable that the operation confirmation control ends before the result notification part of the V promotion effect starts.

Form 9 (power interruption immediately before the start of a round game in which a promotion effect is executed) <Modification>
Next, the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately before the start of a round game in which a promotion effect is executed will be described with reference to Fig. 89. Fig. 89 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately before the start of a round game in which a promotion effect is executed.

In this embodiment, an example has been given of a form in which a promotion effect (see Figure 53 (F21) to (F29)) is performed as a special interval effect during the special round interval period (30 seconds) after the opening control of the large prize opening has ended in the third round of play. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the promotion effect described above may also be executable during a specific round of play period (for example, the period during which the opening control and closing control of the large prize opening are being performed in the third round of play), as shown in Figure 89.

In this case, the promotion effect is composed of an introduction part (see Figures 53 (F21) to (F23)) and a result notification part (see Figures 53 (F24) to (F29)) that is executed after the introduction part and notifies the result of the introduction part. If the jackpot type is jackpot A (3R jackpot), the result notification part will notify the player that it is a jackpot A in a promotion-failed manner, and if the jackpot type is jackpot B (10R jackpot), which is more advantageous to the player than jackpot A (3R jackpot), the result notification part will notify the player that it is a jackpot B in a promotion-successful manner. In other words, it is preferable that the promotion effect be executable when the variable display result of the first special pattern is a jackpot (first hit).

Then, as shown in Figure 89, after a power outage occurs just before the start of the third round of jackpots A and B, which executes the promotion effects, the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts up with a hot start (hot start processing is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), and control of the jackpot gaming state resumes.

The timing immediately before the start of the third round effect in which the promotion effect is executed refers, in more detail, to the timing immediately before the end of the round effect started by the effect control CPU 120 based on the receipt of the command specifying that the large prize opening is open, indicating that the second round of play has started; in other words, the timing immediately before the CPU 103 ends control of the opening of the large prize opening in the second round of play (for example, the timing immediately before the end of control of the opening of the large prize opening in the second round of play (for example, approximately 5000 ms before), the timing when the number of winning balls is one ball before the upper limit (for example, 10 balls) that is the condition for closing the large prize opening, the second round interval period, etc.).

In this case, after starting up with a hot start, when the CPU 103 recovers, it receives a power outage recovery command and a command to specify when the second large prize opening is about to begin. The presentation control CPU 120 determines that the second round interval is about to begin, and the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, upper board movable element LED 9d, lower board movable element LED 9e, upper frame movable element LED 9f, chance button LED 9g, and attack LED 9c enter a state corresponding to the state of recovery (e.g., off), and the background sound (BGM) enters a state corresponding to the state of recovery (e.g., silent). Furthermore, after the startup preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the startup timing disappears, a recovery display 132SG510 appears, displaying the words "Power being restored. Please wait" against a black background, indicating that power is being restored (see FIG. 97). This notification continues until the next command, the third large prize opening command, is received, i.e., until the second round interval ends.

After that, when the third command to specify that the large prize opening is open is received, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable element LED 9d, the below-board movable element LED 9e, and the above-frame movable element LED 9f will light up in an open emphasizing manner for an initial predetermined period of time, and then light up in a manner corresponding to the promotion effect (introduction part), and the background sound (BGM) corresponding to the promotion effect (introduction part) will begin to be output. Furthermore, the chance button LED 9g will light up in a manner indicating that the background sound (BGM) corresponding to the promotion effect (introduction part) can be selected from multiple songs, and the attacker LED 9c will light up in a manner corresponding to the opening.

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the control to open the large prize opening during the second round of play, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, operation confirmation control is initiated during the second round interval period (during recovery) or the third round of play, and ends before the part announcing the results of the promotion effect executed during the third round of play begins. Furthermore, during operation confirmation control, the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light) during initial operation, but emit light at a lower brightness than when emitting light during the effect operation control (promotion effect).

In this way, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the control to open the large prize slot during the second round of play, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is then started with a hot start, operation confirmation control will begin during the second round interval period or the third round of play, and the initial operating movable bodies, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g, will light up in an initial highlight mode (white light), but at a lower brightness than when they light up during the performance operation control (promotion effect). This reduces power consumption when the power is turned on, reducing the load on the pachinko gaming machine 1, and by making the movable body LEDs attached to the movable bodies less bright than when performing the performance operation control, it is possible to prevent the movable body operation from being too bright and difficult to see due to glare.

More specifically, in this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the opening control of the special prize opening during the second round of play and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, the opening control of the special prize opening, the round interval period, and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body ends before the result notification part of the promotion effect executed during the third round of play begins.

In addition, while the above-mentioned form 9 illustrates an example in which the promotion effect is executed during the third round of play, the present invention is not limited to this, and the promotion effect may be executed during a round of play other than the third.

In addition, during operation confirmation control, the movable body LED of a movable body performing an initial operation lights up in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), while the movable body LED of a movable body not performing an initial operation lights up in a mode corresponding to the promotion performance (introduction part). However, the initial highlight mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode corresponding to the promotion performance (introduction part), making it possible to draw attention to the movable body performing an initial operation even during the promotion performance.

In addition, if a power outage occurs immediately before the start of the third round of play and the power is then turned on, when the movable body is moving due to operation confirmation control, the initially operating movable bodies, the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g, will light up in an initial highlight mode (white light) rather than in a mode corresponding to the promotion effect (introduction part), thereby reducing power consumption when the power is turned on and reducing the load.

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs immediately before the start of the third round of play and the power is then turned on, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, the initial operation of the movable body will end before the operation prompt part of the introductory part of the promotion effect executed in the third round of play, that is, the operation prompt effect that prompts the player to operate the chance button 631B, begins, so the visibility of the operation prompt effect in the introductory part will not be obstructed by the movable body operating under operation confirmation control.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 ensures that the operating mode (the mode in which the under-board movable body 32B moves from the origin position to the performance position) is the same when performing initial operation and when performing performance operation in a promotion performance; when performing initial operation, the under-board movable body LED 9e lights up in a mode corresponding to the recovery in progress display 132SG510 (for example, initial highlight mode; white light), but the output of background sound (BGM) is limited; and when performing performance operation in a promotion performance, the under-board movable body LED 9e lights up in a mode corresponding to the promotion performance (result notification part) (for example, rainbow mode), while sound effects in a mode corresponding to the promotion performance (result notification part) are output. This makes it easy to distinguish whether the initial operation or the promotion performance is being performed.

Furthermore, in the movable body presentation in the result notification part, an effect display corresponding to the movable body presentation (see FIG. 53 (F24)) can be displayed. The operation mode of the under-board movable body 32B under the operation confirmation control is the same as the operation mode of the under-board movable body 32B under the promotion presentation (for example, the operation mode of moving from the origin position to the presentation position). If the operation confirmation control cannot be completed normally over a specific period of time, an operation error can be determined and the operation confirmation control can be performed again. If a power outage occurs immediately after the start of the third round presentation in which the promotion presentation is executed, and the operation confirmation control that is started when the power is then turned on does not complete normally, the timing at which the operation error is determined overlaps with the execution period of the promotion presentation. If the promotion presentation is executed during the specific period in which the operation confirmation control is being performed, the movable body presentation can be restricted while an effect display can be displayed. In this way, the promotion presentation does not interfere with the operation confirmation control, and the effect display can indicate to the player that the movable body presentation has been executed.

Mode 10 (power outage just before the end of the final round of play)
Next, the operation confirmation control in the case where a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the final round of play will be described with reference to Fig. 90. Fig. 90 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control in the case where a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the final round of play.

As shown in Figure 90, after a power outage occurs just before the end of the round performance that began based on the reception of a command specifying that the 10th round of play (final round) for jackpots B, D, and E has begun, the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts up in a hot start (hot start processing is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), and control of the jackpot gaming state is resumed.

More specifically, "immediately before the end of the round effect" refers to the timing immediately before the end of the round effect initiated by the effect control CPU 120 based on the receipt of the command specifying that the large prize opening is open, indicating that the 10th round of play has begun, in other words, the timing immediately before the CPU 103 ends control of the 10th round of play (for example, the timing immediately before the end of control of the opening of the large prize opening in the final round of play (e.g., approximately 5000 ms before), the timing when the number of winning balls is one ball before the upper limit (e.g., 10 balls) that is the condition for closing the large prize opening, the round interval period in the 10th round of play, etc.).

In this case, after starting up with a hot start, when the CPU 103 recovers, it receives a power outage recovery command and a command to indicate when the 10th jackpot opening is complete. The presentation control CPU 120 determines that the 10th round interval is in progress, and the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, upper board movable element LED 9d, lower board movable element LED 9e, upper frame movable element LED 9f, chance button LED 9g, and attack LED 9c become active (e.g., off), and the background music (BGM) becomes active (e.g., silent). After the startup preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 disappears, the recovery display 132SG510 appears, displaying the words "Power being restored. Please wait" against a black background, indicating that power is being restored (see FIG. 97). This notification continues until the next command, the jackpot end command, is received, i.e., until the 10th round interval ends.

After that, when a jackpot end command is received, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable element LED 9d, the below-board movable element LED 9e, and the above-frame movable element LED 9f will light up in a manner corresponding to the ending performance (introduction part), and background music (BGM) corresponding to the ending performance (introduction part) will begin to be output. Furthermore, the chance button LED 9g and attacker LED 9c will light up in a manner corresponding to the default (for example, lit white or off).

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the 10th round of play and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, operation confirmation control is initiated during the ending period and ends before the end of the ending period. Note that operation confirmation control may also be initiated during the round interval period of the 10th round of play. Furthermore, during operation confirmation control, the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light) during initial operation, but emit light at a lower brightness than when emitting light during performance operation control (movable body performance in the win/lose button performance).

In this way, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the 10th and final round of play and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, operation confirmation control is initiated during the ending period, and the initial operating movable bodies, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g, emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light). However, since these emit light at a lower brightness than when emitting light during performance operation control (movable body performance in the win/lose button performance), power consumption is reduced when the power is turned on, reducing the load on the pachinko gaming machine 1, and by making the movable body LEDs attached to the movable bodies less bright than when performing performance operation control, it is possible to prevent the movable body operation from becoming too bright to be easily confirmed.

More specifically, in this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the tenth and final round of play and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, the ending period and initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body is completed before the start of the time-saving state notification part (see Figures 53 (F32) and (F34)) in which information regarding the time-saving state is notified during the ending period.

In addition, while the above-mentioned form 10 illustrates examples of operation for jackpots B, D, and E, in which the final round is 10 rounds, the present invention is not limited to this. In the case of jackpots A and C, in which the final round is 3 rounds, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the third and final round of play and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, the round play period and initial operation period may be designed so that the initial operation of the movable body ends before the start of the time-saving state notification part (Figure 52 (F13)) in which information regarding the time-saving state is notified during the ending period. Furthermore, the final round is not limited to the above-mentioned 3 or 10 rounds, and can be modified in various ways.

In addition, during operation confirmation control, the movable body LED of a movable body performing an initial operation lights up in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), while the movable body LED of a movable body not performing an initial operation lights up in a mode corresponding to the promotion performance (introduction part). However, the initial highlight mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode corresponding to the ending performance (introduction part), making it possible to draw attention to movable bodies performing an initial operation even during the ending performance.

In addition, if a power outage occurs just before the end of the final round and the power is then turned on, when the movable body is moving due to operation confirmation control, the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g of the movable body that is performing the initial operation will light up in an initial highlight mode (white light), while the movable body LEDs of the other movable bodies that are not operating will light up in a mode corresponding to the ending performance (introduction part), making it possible to indicate that the movable body is moving due to operation confirmation control even during the ending performance.

In addition, if a power outage occurs just before the end of the final round and the power is then turned on, when the movable body is moving due to operation confirmation control, the movable bodies that perform the initial operation, the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g, will emit light at a low brightness in an initial highlight mode (white light) rather than in a mode corresponding to the ending performance (introduction part), thereby reducing power consumption when the power is turned on and reducing the load.

In addition to the movable body LEDs, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b are also designed to emit light at a lower brightness during the operation confirmation control period than when emitting light in a manner corresponding to the ending performance (introduction part). This makes it possible to reduce power consumption and lighten the load when the power is turned on without reducing the decorative effect.

Form 11 (power outage immediately after the beginning of the ending performance)
Next, the operation confirmation control in the case where a power outage occurs immediately after the start of the ending performance will be described with reference to Fig. 91. Fig. 91 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control in the case where a power outage occurs immediately after the start of the ending performance.

As shown in Figure 91, after the round interval presentation ends in the 10th round (final round) of jackpots B, D, and E, a power outage occurs immediately after the ending presentation begins based on the receipt of a jackpot end command, and then the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts up in a hot start (hot start processing is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), and control of the jackpot gaming state resumes.

"Immediately after the ending presentation has begun" specifically includes the timing immediately after the presentation control CPU 120 has begun the introductory part of the ending presentation based on the receipt of the jackpot end command, that is, the timing immediately after the CPU 103 has begun control of the ending period (for example, immediately after the completion of control over the closure of the jackpot opening in the final round of play (for example, approximately 1000 ms later)).

In this case, after starting up with a hot start, only the power outage restoration command is received as the CPU 103 recovers. Therefore, the presentation control CPU 120 cannot determine the current game state (whether it is currently in the ending period, etc.) until it receives the next command (e.g., a customer waiting demo command). Therefore, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper board movable element LED 9d, the lower board movable element LED 9e, the upper frame movable element LED 9f, the chance button LED 9g, and the attacker LED 9c will be in a state corresponding to the restoration in progress (e.g., off), and the background sound (BGM) will be in a state corresponding to the restoration in progress (e.g., silent). Furthermore, after the start-up preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the time of startup disappears, the restoration in progress display 132SG510 will be displayed, displaying the words "Power being restored. Please wait" against a black background, indicating that the power outage is being restored (see FIG. 97), and the fact that the power outage is being restored will be notified until the next command is received.

After that, when a customer waiting demo designation command is received, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable element LED 9d, the below-board movable element LED 9e, and the above-frame movable element LED 9f will light up in a manner corresponding to the high-base music (time-saving performance), and background music (BGM) corresponding to the high-base music (time-saving performance) will begin to be output. Furthermore, the chance button LED 9g will light up in a manner corresponding to the default (for example, lit white or off), and the attacker LED 9c will be turned off.

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs immediately after the start of the ending presentation and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, operation confirmation control is initiated during the ending period and ends before the ending period ends. Furthermore, during operation confirmation control, the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light) during initial operation, but emit light at a lower brightness than when emitting light during presentation operation control (movable body presentation in the win/lose button presentation).

In this way, if a power outage occurs immediately after the start of the ending performance and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, operation confirmation control is initiated during the ending period, and the initial operating movable bodies, the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g, emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light), but at a lower brightness than when emitting light during performance operation control (movable body performance in the win/lose button performance). This reduces power consumption when the power is turned on, reducing the load on the pachinko gaming machine 1, while also preventing the movable body LEDs attached to the movable bodies from being too bright and making it difficult to confirm their operation.

More specifically, in this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately after the start of the ending presentation and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, the ending period and initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body is completed before the start of the time-saving state notification part (see Figures 53 (F32) and (F34)) in which information regarding the time-saving state is notified during the ending period.

In the above-mentioned form 10, examples of operation were given for jackpots B, D, and E, in which the final round is 10 rounds, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the case of jackpots A and C, in which the final round is 3 rounds, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the third and final round of play and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, the round play period and initial operation period may be designed so that the initial operation of the movable body is completed during the ending period before the start of the time-saving state notification part (Figure 52 (F13)), in which information regarding the time-saving state is notified.

Also, while the ending periods for jackpots B, D, and E (10-round jackpots) were explained above as an example, the same operation applies to the ending periods for jackpots A and C (3-round jackpots), so detailed explanations will be omitted.

The performance control CPU 120 also displays the recovery indicator 132SG510 on the image display device 5 in the following cases: when a power outage occurs during variable display and the power is then turned on; and when a power outage occurs immediately after the start of an ending performance and the power is then turned on. It is also capable of performing recovery illumination control to cause the operating upper-board movable body LED 9d, lower-board movable body LED 9e, and upper-frame movable body LED 9f to illuminate in a manner corresponding to the recovery indicator 132SG510 (for example, initial highlighting; white illumination). This allows for operation confirmation control in the following cases: when a power outage occurs during variable display and the power is then turned on; and when a power outage occurs immediately after the start of an ending performance and the power is then turned on. This prevents the processing at power-on from becoming too complicated.

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs immediately after the start of the ending performance and the power is then turned on, the performance control CPU 120 can display the recovery in progress display 132SG510 on the image display device 5 and cause the movable bodies that are performing their initial operations, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B, to light up in an initial highlight mode (white lit).If a power outage occurs immediately after the start of the ending performance and the power is then turned on, the movable bodies that are not performing their initial operations, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B, can light up in a mode corresponding to the recovery in progress display (off in this embodiment) throughout the ending period, and the initial highlight mode (white lit) is not used in the mode corresponding to the recovery in progress display (off).In this way, it is possible to draw attention to the movable bodies that are operating through operation confirmation control, even during recovery.

In addition, in this embodiment, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are shown as being turned off during power outage recovery, except for the movable body that is performing initial operation. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body LEDs may be made to emit light at a lower brightness than the brightness of the light emitted by the movable body LEDs in the performance operation control (the movable body performance in the win/lose button performance).

In addition, in this embodiment, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board-mounted movable body LED 9d, the board-mounted movable body LED 9e, the frame-mounted movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are shown as being turned off during power outage recovery, except for the movable bodies performing initial operations. However, this light-emitting mode (turning off) is not used to control the performance operation (movable body performance in the win/lose button performance). By doing this, it is possible to notify that recovery is underway when the power is turned on, even if the ending performance was in progress before the power outage.

Forms 12 and 20 (relationship between initial operation and various displays during time reduction)
Next, the relationship between the initial operation and various displays during time reduction will be explained based on Figures 92 and 93. Figure 92 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the movable body when a power outage occurs during time reduction and operation confirmation control is started based on the subsequent power-on. Figure 93 (A) is a diagram showing the relationship between the above-board movable body and various displays, and (B) is a diagram showing the relationship between the below-board movable body and various displays.

As shown in Figure 92 (A), when the time-saving state is B, C1, or C2, a "BATTLE RUSH effect" is executed as a time-saving effect. In the BATTLE RUSH effect, the display screen of the image display device 5 displays a second background display 132SG320 depicting a night cityscape corresponding to the time-saving state, and an image of an ally character and an enemy character facing off against each other. In addition, a presentation mode display 132SG221 consisting of the words "BATTLE RUSH" is displayed at the top of the screen. Additionally, in the lower left corner of the screen of the image display device 5, a remaining time reduction indicator 132SG201 (in this example, the text "XX times remaining", where XX = 0 to 685) is displayed in accordance with the remaining variable display number controlled to the low probability/high base state, and in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, a right-hit prompt indicator 132SG430 consisting of the text "right hit" and a right-pointing arrow is displayed, and in the lower part of the screen of the image display device 5, a consecutive win count/total ball count indicator 132SG454 is displayed, which indicates the number of consecutive jackpot wins and the total number of balls dispensed during the consecutive wins.

In addition, the display area 5SL at the top left of the screen displays small symbols corresponding to the first and second pending memory counts and decorative symbols, and on the left side of the screen, an active display area 132SG013 and a second pending display area 132SG012 corresponding to the second pending memory are arranged vertically; for example, active display 132SG003 is displayed in active display area 132SG013, and four second pending displays 132SG002 are displayed vertically in the second pending display area 132SG012, corresponding to the second pending memory count being 4.

As shown in Figure 92 (A), when the above-board movable body 32A moves between the origin position and the performance position, the performance part 32a can move up and down in the shaded area E1 surrounded by a two-dot chain line, and the support part 32b can move up and down in the shaded area E2 surrounded by a two-dot chain line. Furthermore, when the below-board movable body 32B moves up and down between the origin position and the performance position, the performance part 32c and the support part 32d can move up and down in the shaded area E3 surrounded by a two-dot chain line.

In more detail, the second hold display area 132SG012, which displays the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 and the second hold display 132SG002, is displayed in a position where only the support part 32b of the above-board movable body 32A can overlap, the display area 5SL, which displays the second hold memory count display, is displayed in a position where the effect part 32a and support part 32b can overlap, and the effect mode display 132SG221 is displayed in a position where the effect part 32a can overlap. On the other hand, the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454 and the remaining time-reduction display 132SG201 are displayed in a position where they can overlap with the effect part 32c and part of the support part 32d of the below-board movable body 32B.

Next, the relationship between the various displays when the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B perform their initial operations will be explained based on Figures 93(A) and (B). Note that in Figures 93(A) and (B), the performance mode display 132SG221 and the remaining time reduction display 132SG201 are omitted.

As shown in Figure 93 (A), when the on-board movable body 32A is located at the origin position, it does not overlap with any of the following: right-hit prompt display 132SG430, second reserved memory count (display area 5SL), second reserved display 132SG002 (second reserved display area 132SG012), consecutive win count/total ball count display 132SG454, remaining time reduction display 132SG201, and presentation mode display 132SG221, so the player can see all of the displays (see Figure 93 (A)).

Next, as the on-board movable body 32A descends from the origin position, first, the effect portion 32a overlaps the front side of the second pending memory count display (display area 5SL), making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see the display (see Figure 92 (B)). After that, when the on-board movable body 32A moves to the intermediate position and the second pending memory count display becomes visible, the support portion 32b overlaps the front side of the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 (see Figure 92 (C)).

Next, when the on-board movable body 32A passes the intermediate position and descends to the presentation position, the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 becomes visible; however, because the presentation unit 32a overlaps the front side of part of the second hold display 132SG002 (second hold display area 132SG012), it becomes difficult (or impossible) for the player to see the second hold display 132SG002. However, because the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, second hold memory count display, consecutive win count/total ball count display 132SG454, remaining time-reduction display 132SG201, and presentation mode display 132SG221 do not overlap with either the presentation unit 32a or the support unit 32b, the player can see these displays (see Figure 92 (D)).

When returning from the presentation position to the origin position, the situation in which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with each display is the same; however, the movement speed of the on-board movable body 32A when it moves from the presentation position to the origin position is slower than the movement speed of the on-board movable body 32A when it moves from the origin position to the presentation position. Therefore, as shown in Figure 93 (A), the overlap time is longer during the retraction operation than during the advancement operation, and the time during which it is difficult for the player to see is also longer.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 93 (B), when the under-board movable body 32B is located in the origin position, it does not overlap with any of the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, second reserved memory count (display area 5SL), second reserved display 132SG002 (second reserved display area 132SG012), consecutive win count/total ball count display 132SG454, or remaining time-reduction display 132SG201, so the player can see all of the displays (see Figure 92 (D)).

Next, while the under-board movable body 32B rises from the origin position, passes through the intermediate position, and reaches the presentation position, and even after it reaches the presentation position, it does not overlap with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, second reserved memory count (display area 5SL), second reserved display 132SG002 (second reserved display area 132SG012), or presentation mode display 132SG221, so the player can see these displays. However, because the presentation part 32c and support part 32d overlap with part of the front side of the consecutive win count/total ball count display 132SG454 and the remaining time-reduction display 132SG201, it becomes difficult (or impossible) for the player to see these displays (see Figures 92 (D) and (E)). The same situation occurs when the under-board movable body 32B overlaps with each display when returning from the presentation position to the origin position.

In this way, if an initial operation is performed when power is restored after a power outage occurs during time-saving mode and the machine is started up with a hot start, each movable body is set to perform its initial operation so that the time during which the above-board movable body 32A overlaps with the second hold memory number (display area 5SL) or second hold display 132SG002 (second hold display area 132SG012) and is difficult (or impossible) for the player to see is shorter than the time during which the below-board movable body 32B overlaps with the jackpot information display (for example, number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454).As a result, the visibility of the second hold memory number (display area 5SL) and second hold display 132SG002 (second hold display area 132SG012), which have a significant impact on gameplay, is less likely to be obstructed by the above-board movable body 32A or below-board movable body 32B performing the initial operation.

In other words, in a time-saving mode where the player can benefit from the variable display of the second special symbol by hitting the right button, if the second pending memory count (display area 5SL) or second pending display 132SG002 (second pending display area 132SG012) is covered by the on-board movable body 32A performing its initial operation, the player may miss the opportunity to generate the second start winning by hitting the right button during the period in which it is possible to generate the second start winning, which may be to the player's detriment. Therefore, it is preferable that the second pending memory count (display area 5SL) and second pending display 132SG002 (second pending display area 132SG012) maintain visibility compared to other jackpot information displays.

Furthermore, while the consecutive win count/total ball output display 132SG454 does not change during the time-saving mode, the display mode of the second reserved memory count (display area 5SL) and second reserved display 132SG002 can change even during the time-saving mode due to changes in the number of winnings or advance notices. Therefore, the initial operation of the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B can prevent the visibility of the second reserved memory, which may change, from being obstructed compared to the unchanged consecutive win count/total ball output display 132SG454.

In addition, it is preferable that the range in which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the number of consecutive games/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454 due to the initial operation be larger than the range in which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the second pending memory number (display area 5SL) or the second pending display 132SG002 (second pending display area 132SG012) due to the initial operation.By doing this, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the second pending memory, which may change, from being obstructed more than the visibility of the number of consecutive games/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, which does not change, due to the on-board movable body 32A or the on-board movable body 32B performing the initial operation.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 93 (A) and (B), if an initial operation is performed when power is restored after a power outage occurs during time-saving mode and the machine is started up with a hot start, each movable body is set to perform its initial operation so that the time during which the above-board movable body 32A overlaps with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 and is difficult (or impossible) for the player to see is shorter than the time during which the below-board movable body 32B overlaps with the jackpot information display (for example, the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls played display 132SG454) related to the jackpot. Therefore, the visibility of the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, which has a significant impact on gameplay, is less likely to be obstructed by the above-board movable body 32A or below-board movable body 32B performing the initial operation.

In other words, in a time-saving state where the player can benefit from the variable display of the second special symbol by hitting the right button, if the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 is covered by the initial operation of the on-board movable body 32A or the below-board movable body 32B, the player may miss the opportunity to generate the second start winning by hitting the right button during the period in which it is possible to generate the second start winning, which may be to the player's detriment. Therefore, it is preferable that the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 maintains high visibility compared to other jackpot information displays.

Furthermore, if the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B operate in a manner common to the predetermined performance operation control in the operation confirmation control (for example, moving from the origin position to the performance position), if a power outage occurs during time reduction, and then the machine is started up with a hot start and restored, and an initial operation is performed, the above-board movable body 32A overlaps with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see, while the below-board movable body 32B is displaying jackpot information regarding the jackpot. If the time during which the movable body 32A overlaps with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 is approximately the same as or longer than the time during which the movable body 32A overlaps with the jackpot information display (for example, the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454), the movable body 32A above the board and the movable body 32B below the board may be operated in such a way that the time during which the movable body 32A above the board overlaps with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 and is difficult (or impossible) for the player to see is shorter than the time during which the movable body 32B below the board overlaps with the jackpot information display (for example, the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454).

For example, the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B can be configured to move from the origin position during initial operation to a position that overlaps with the second pending memory count, second pending display 132SG002, and right-hit prompt display 132SG430, but can be configured to move to an intermediate position and then return to the origin position. This prevents the movable body operating during initial operation from interfering with the visibility of the second pending memory count, second pending display 132SG002, and right-hit prompt display 132SG430.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 93 (A) and (B), if an initial operation is performed when a power outage occurs during time-saving and the machine is started up with a hot start and then restored, the initial operation of each movable body is set so that the time during which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 and is difficult (or impossible) for the player to see is shorter than the time during which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the second hold memory number (display area 5SL) or the second hold display 132SG002 (second hold display area 132SG012) and is difficult (or impossible) for the player to see. This makes it less likely that the visibility of the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, which has a greater impact on play than the second hold memory number or the second hold display 132SG002, will be obstructed.

Furthermore, in embodiments 12 and 20, the overlap between the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B and the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, the second hold memory count (display area 5SL), the second hold display 132SG002 (second hold display area 132SG012), and the jackpot information display (for example, the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454) was explained. In this embodiment, the operation confirmation control compares the total overlap time with the various displays actually displayed when the movable body performs its initial operation. However, regardless of whether the various displays are displayed or not, it is sufficient that the overlap time with the display area in which the various displays are displayed when the movable body performs its initial operation satisfies the above relationship.

Form 13 (power interruption immediately before the end of the change before the button notice is executed)
Next, the operation confirmation control in the case where a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of the fluctuation preceding the fluctuation for which the button notice is executed will be described with reference to Fig. 94. Fig. 94 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control in the case where a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of the fluctuation preceding the fluctuation for which the button notice is executed.

As shown in Figure 94, after a variable display based on a predetermined losing variable pattern has begun, if a power outage occurs just before the variable display ends when a losing symbol combination is displayed statically in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, during the period when the losing symbol combination is temporarily displayed statically, or during the symbol confirmation display period, which is the minimum period from when decorative symbols are displayed statically in the variable display until the variable display of decorative symbols begins in the next variable display), and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is then started with a hot start (hot start processing is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), if there is a pending memory, the variable display will resume, but the variable display will immediately end and the next variable display will begin.

Therefore, while the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed on the image display device 5 from the startup timing, after the power outage recovery command and the symbol determination command transmitted based on the CPU 103's recovery are received, and until the next command, the variable display start command, is received, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper board movable element LED 9d, the lower board movable element LED 9e, the upper frame movable element LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are in a state corresponding to recovery in progress (e.g., off), and the background sound (BGM) is in a state corresponding to recovery in progress (e.g., silent). Furthermore, after the startup preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the startup timing disappears, the recovery in progress display 132SG510 is displayed, displaying the words "Power being restored. Please wait" against a black background, indicating that power is being restored (see FIG. 97), and the fact that power is being restored is notified until the next command is received, i.e., during the symbol determination display period.

Then, based on the reception of the variable display start command and the variation pattern command, the variable display preview effect determination process (step S132SG610) determines whether to execute a reach preview, which suggests whether a reach state will occur, and a button preview, which prompts the player to press a button to determine whether a reach state will occur. The variable display begins in a manner corresponding to the variation pattern and the determined preview effect, and the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, upper board movable body LED 9d, lower board movable body LED 9e, upper frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g light up in a manner corresponding to the variation (background), and background sound (BGM) corresponding to the variation (background) begins to be output. Furthermore, when a predetermined time (e.g., 2000 ms) has elapsed since the power outage recovery command was received, the display of the startup preparation display 132SG500 ends, and the display of an effect image corresponding to the variation (background) begins.

Next, when a predetermined time (e.g., 4000 ms) has elapsed since the power outage restoration command was received, operation confirmation control (initial operation) of each movable body is initiated. After that, once the initial operation of each movable body is completed, the result notification part begins, in which the results of the button preview are notified.

As shown in Figures 50 (D6) and (D7), the button preview (result notification part) notifies the player of whether or not a reach state has been reached as a result of the player operating the chance button 631B. Therefore, if the initial movement of the movable body is being performed when the result notification part starts, the visibility of the result notification part, such as the reach state being reached, will be hindered by the movable body moving due to the initial movement, and the player may misinterpret the result.

In this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a variation prior to the variation that results in the button preview, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is then started with a hot start, the movable body is controlled so that the initial operation ends before the button preview (result notification part) begins, thereby preventing the visibility of the button preview (result notification part) from being obstructed by the movable body performing the initial operation.

More specifically, in this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a variation preceding the variation in which the button notification is executed, the period from the start of the variation to the start of the button notification (result notification part) and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body is completed within the period until the button notification (result notification part) starts (see Figures 50 (D1) to (D5)).

In this embodiment, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of a specified variable display, the number of reserved memories is 1 or more. Thereafter, when the power is turned on and the reserved memories are consumed to start the next variable display, it is determined that a button preview will be executed in that variable display. If it is determined that a button preview will be executed at the start of the variable display, the time from when the variable display starts to when the result notification part of the button preview is executed is set to be at least longer than the operation confirmation control period (e.g., approximately 20 seconds). Therefore, if a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of a variation prior to the variation in which the button preview is executed, the initial operation of the movable body is completed before the button preview (result notification part) begins. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When a start winning occurs and the CPU 103 determines that a specific variation pattern in which a button preview is executed is a specific variation pattern, a specific presentation control command specifying specific information related to the specific variation pattern (e.g., a winning presentation designation command specifying the execution of a button preview) is transmitted. Based on the specific presentation control command, the presentation control CPU 120 may be able to change the execution period of the initial operation so that the initial operation is completed before the result notification part of the button preview begins.

For example, if a start winning occurs during a specified variable display and it is decided that a specific variable pattern in which a button preview is executed will be used, a winning performance designation command (specific information) specifying that this is a specific variable pattern (with button preview) will be sent.

Then, after a power outage occurs just before the end of the specified variable display, when the power is turned back on, a power outage recovery designation command, a pattern confirmation command (information on whether the special pattern was a hit or miss), a first reserved memory number notification command, and a second reserved memory number notification command are sent, and the initial operation begins. Next, the pattern is displayed statically based on the transmission of the performance pattern confirmation designation command, and after the pattern confirmation display period has elapsed, when the next variable display begins, the first reserved memory number notification command, the second reserved memory number notification command, the game status background designation command, the first (or second) variable display start designation command, the pattern confirmation command, and the variation pattern designation command are sent.

Here, if a fluctuation pattern designation command specifying a specific fluctuation pattern (with button warning) is received within a specified time (e.g., 4000 ms) after receiving a power outage recovery designation command, the initial operation currently being performed (approximately 20 seconds) may be interrupted and switched to a shortened initial operation with a shorter operating period (e.g., 5 seconds) than the initial operation currently being performed.

In more detail, the initial operation involves sequentially performing the maximum extension and retraction movements of each moving body (moving back and forth between the origin position and the performance position), while the shortened initial operation involves simultaneously performing the minimum extension and retraction movements of each moving body (e.g., returning to the origin immediately after passing through the origin position). Furthermore, when switching from the initial operation to the shortened initial operation, for example, if one moving body is in the middle of a maximum extension movement, that movement is interrupted and a retraction movement is performed, and once it returns to the origin position, the minimum extension and retraction movements of each moving body, including the one moving body, are simultaneously performed. Furthermore, if the timing of switching from the initial operation to the shortened initial operation occurs immediately before the end of the initial operation (e.g., 5 seconds before the end), the operation should not switch to the shortened initial operation even if a specific movement pattern designation command is received.

For example, a light gathering effect (light gathering at the center of the screen to form the button image) can be executed immediately before the button image is displayed in the action promotion effect. Because the light gathering effect uses a large portion of the screen (an image that starts from the edge of the screen), it can overlap with the execution period of the initial action, providing an appropriate indication that the button image will be displayed.

For example, when a button image is displayed in the action promotion effect, the button's LED can be illuminated (red ⇔ off in 150 ms cycles), and the illumination pattern in this illumination pattern is not included in the illumination pattern that highlights the moving body performing the initial operation.

In addition, for example, it is possible to vibrate the chance button 631B when the initial operation starts (to check the vibration motor 635E and notify that the initial operation has started), and it is also possible to vibrate the chance button 631B together with the display of a button image in the operation promotion effect (to indicate the expected degree of change), and at least one of the vibration duration, cycle, and light emission pattern of the button LED during vibration differs between the button vibration during the initial operation and the button vibration when the button image is displayed.

Form 14 (power outage immediately before the end of the fluctuation before the fluctuation for which the start notice is executed)
Next, the operation confirmation control in the case where a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of a fluctuation preceding a fluctuation for which a start-time notice is executed will be described with reference to Fig. 95. Fig. 95 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control in the case where a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of a fluctuation preceding a fluctuation for which a start-time notice is executed.

As shown in Figure 95, after the variable display based on a predetermined losing variable pattern has begun, if a power outage occurs just before the variable display ends when a losing symbol combination is displayed statically in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, approximately 5,000 ms before the end of the variable display, such as during the period when the losing symbol combination is temporarily displayed statically, or during the symbol confirmation display period, which is the minimum period from when decorative symbols are displayed statically in the variable display until the variable display of decorative symbols begins in the next variable display), and then the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up with a hot start (hot start processing is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), if there is a pending memory, the variable display will resume, but the variable display will immediately end and the next variable display will begin.

Therefore, while the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed on the image display device 5 from the startup timing, after the power outage recovery command and the symbol determination command transmitted based on the CPU 103's recovery are received, and until the next command, the variable display start command, is received, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper board movable element LED 9d, the lower board movable element LED 9e, the upper frame movable element LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are in a state corresponding to recovery in progress (e.g., off), and the background sound (BGM) is in a state corresponding to recovery in progress (e.g., silent). Furthermore, after the startup preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the startup timing disappears, the recovery in progress display 132SG510 is displayed, displaying the words "Power being restored. Please wait" against a black background, indicating that power is being restored (see FIG. 97), and the fact that power is being restored is notified until the next command is received, i.e., during the symbol determination display period.

Then, based on the reception of the variable display start command and the variation pattern command, the variable display preview effect determination process (step S132SG610) determines whether to execute the start preview, and the variable display begins in a manner corresponding to the variation pattern and the determined preview effect. The frame LEDs 9a, 9b, upper board movable element LED 9d, lower board movable element LED 9e, upper frame movable element LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g illuminate in a manner corresponding to the specified display change in the start preview, and background sound (BGM) corresponding to the start preview begins to be output. Furthermore, when a predetermined time (e.g., 2000 ms) has elapsed since the power outage recovery command was received, the display of the startup preparation display 132SG500 ends, and the display of an effect image corresponding to the start preview (introduction part) begins.

Next, when a predetermined time (e.g., 4000 ms) has elapsed since the power outage restoration command was received, operation confirmation control (initial operation) of each movable body is initiated. After the initial operation of each movable body is completed, the result notification part begins, in which the results of the start-up warning are reported.

As shown in Figures 48 (B3a) to (B6a), the start notice (result notification part) notifies the player of results such as whether the pending display has changed and what color it has changed to. Therefore, if the initial movement of the movable body is being performed when the result notification part starts, the movable body, which moves due to the initial movement, will interfere with the visibility of the result notification part, such as whether the pending display has changed, and there is a risk that the player will misinterpret the result.

In this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a variation prior to the variation in which the start notice is executed, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, the movable body is controlled so that the initial operation ends before the start notice (result notification part) begins, thereby preventing the movable body performing the initial operation from interfering with the visibility of the start notice (result notification part).

More specifically, in this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a variation preceding the variation for which the start notice is executed, the period from the start of the variation to the start of the start notice (result notification part) and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body is completed within the period until the start of the start notice (result notification part) (see Figures 48 (B2) to (B6)).

In this embodiment, when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a predetermined variable display, the number of reserved memories is 1 or more, and then, when the power is turned on and the reserved memories are consumed and the next variable display begins, a decision is made to execute a start notice for that variable display. If a decision is made to execute a start notice at the start of a variable display, the time from when the variable display begins to when the result notification part of the start notice is executed is set to be at least longer than the operation confirmation control period (e.g., approximately 20 seconds). Therefore, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a variation preceding the variation in which the start notice (result notification part) is executed, the start notice (result notification part) is executed. Although an example has been given in which the initial operation of the movable body is completed before the notification part begins, the present invention is not limited to this. When a start winning occurs and the CPU 103 determines that a specific variation pattern in which a start warning is executed is present, a specific presentation control command specifying specific information regarding the specific variation pattern (for example, a winning presentation specification command specifying the execution of a start warning) may be transmitted, and the presentation control CPU 120 may be configured to be able to change the execution period of the initial operation based on the specific presentation control command so that the initial operation is completed before the notification part begins as a result of the start warning.

For example, if a start winning occurs during a specified variable display and it is decided that a specific variable pattern in which a start warning is executed will be used, a winning effect designation command (specific information) specifying that it is a specific variable pattern (with start warning) will be sent.

Then, after a power outage occurs just before the end of the specified variable display, when the power is turned back on, a power outage recovery designation command, a pattern confirmation command (information on whether the special pattern was a hit or miss), a first reserved memory number notification command, and a second reserved memory number notification command are sent, and the initial operation begins. Next, the pattern is displayed statically based on the transmission of the performance pattern confirmation designation command, and after the pattern confirmation display period has elapsed, when the next variable display begins, the first reserved memory number notification command, the second reserved memory number notification command, the game status background designation command, the first (or second) variable display start designation command, the pattern confirmation command, and the variation pattern designation command are sent.

Here, if a fluctuation pattern designation command specifying a specific fluctuation pattern (with warning at start) is received within a specified time (e.g., 4000 ms) after receiving a power outage recovery designation command, the initial operation currently being performed (approximately 20 seconds) may be interrupted and switched to a shortened initial operation with an operating period shorter than the initial operation currently being performed (e.g., 5 seconds).

In more detail, the initial operation involves sequentially performing the maximum extension and retraction movements of each moving body (moving back and forth between the origin position and the performance position), while the shortened initial operation involves simultaneously performing the minimum extension and retraction movements of each moving body (e.g., returning to the origin immediately after passing through the origin position). Furthermore, when switching from the initial operation to the shortened initial operation, for example, if one moving body is in the middle of a maximum extension movement, that movement is interrupted and a retraction movement is performed, and once it returns to the origin position, the minimum extension and retraction movements of each moving body, including the one moving body, are simultaneously performed. Furthermore, if the timing of switching from the initial operation to the shortened initial operation occurs immediately before the end of the initial operation (e.g., 5 seconds before the end), the operation should not switch to the shortened initial operation even if a specific movement pattern designation command is received.

For example, it is possible to vibrate the chance button 631B when the initial operation begins, and also to vibrate the chance button 631B when the active hold turns red in Figure 48 (B6) (for entertainment purposes), and at least one of the vibration period, cycle, and light emission pattern of the button LED during vibration is different between the button vibration during the initial operation and the button vibration when the color changes to red. If the button vibration when the color changes to red is performed during the initial operation, the button vibration when the color changes to red is limited, and the limited button vibration is performed after the initial operation is completed.

For example, it is possible to vibrate the chance button 631B when the initial operation starts, and it is also possible to make a button vibration warning (indicating a different level of expectation than the warning at the start) as shown in Figure 48 (B1), with the button vibration during the initial operation and the button vibration warning differing in at least one of the vibration period, cycle, and the illumination pattern of the button LED during vibration. If a button vibration warning is made during the initial operation, the button vibration warning is limited, and limited button vibration is made after the initial operation has finished.

Form 15 (power interruption just before the end of the fluctuation before the fluctuation in which the pseudo-continuous notice is executed)
Next, the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs just before the end of the fluctuation before the fluctuation in which the pseudo-sequential announcement is executed will be described with reference to Fig. 96. Fig. 96 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs just before the end of the fluctuation before the fluctuation in which the pseudo-sequential announcement is executed.

As shown in Figure 96, after the variable display based on a predetermined losing variable pattern has begun, if a power outage occurs just before the variable display ends when a losing symbol combination is displayed statically in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, approximately 5,000 ms before the end of the variable display, such as during the period when the losing symbol combination is temporarily displayed statically, or during the symbol confirmation display period, which is the minimum period from when decorative symbols are displayed statically in the variable display until the variable display of decorative symbols begins in the next variable display), and then the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up with a hot start (hot start processing is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), if there is a pending memory, the variable display will resume, but the variable display will immediately end and the next variable display will begin.

Therefore, while the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed on the image display device 5 from the startup timing, after the power outage recovery command and the symbol determination command transmitted based on the CPU 103's recovery are received, and until the next command, the variable display start command, is received, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper board movable element LED 9d, the lower board movable element LED 9e, the upper frame movable element LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are in a state corresponding to recovery in progress (e.g., off), and the background sound (BGM) is in a state corresponding to recovery in progress (e.g., silent). Furthermore, after the startup preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the startup timing disappears, the recovery in progress display 132SG510 is displayed, displaying the words "Power being restored. Please wait" against a black background, indicating that power is being restored (see FIG. 97), and the fact that power is being restored is notified until the next command is received, i.e., during the symbol determination display period.

After that, based on receiving the variable display start command and the variation pattern command, the variable display will begin in a manner corresponding to the variation pattern (pseudo-consecutive) in which the pseudo-consecutive preview indicating whether the variable display will resume will be executed and the determined preview effect (movable object preview), and the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, upper board movable object LED 9d, lower board movable object LED 9e, upper frame movable object LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g will light up in a manner corresponding to the background (variation), and the output of background sound (BGM) corresponding to the background (variation) will begin. Furthermore, when a predetermined time (e.g., 2000 ms) has elapsed since receiving the power outage recovery command, the display of the startup preparation display 132SG500 will end, and the display of an effect image corresponding to the background (variation) will begin.

Next, when a predetermined time (e.g., 4000 ms) has elapsed since the power outage restoration command was received, operation confirmation control (initial operation) of each moving body is initiated. After that, once the initial operation of each moving body is completed, the result notification part begins, in which the results of the pseudo-continuous preview are announced.

As shown in Figures 49 (C6), (C10), and (C9), the pseudo consecutive prediction (result notification part) notifies the player of results such as whether the variable display has resumed. Therefore, if the initial movement of the movable body is being performed when the result notification part starts, the visibility of the result notification part, such as whether the variable display has resumed, will be hindered by the movable body moving due to the initial movement, and there is a risk that the player will misinterpret the result.

In this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the variation prior to the variation in which the pseudo consecutive prediction is executed, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is then started with a hot start, the movable body is controlled so that the initial operation ends before the pseudo consecutive prediction (result notification part) begins, thereby preventing the movable body performing the initial operation from interfering with the visibility of the pseudo consecutive prediction (result notification part).

More specifically, in this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a variation prior to the variation in which the pseudo-continuous prediction is executed, the initial operation period and the period from the start of the variation to the start of the pseudo-continuous prediction (result notification part) are set so that the initial operation of the movable body is completed within the period until the pseudo-continuous prediction (result notification part) starts (see Figures 48 (B2) to (B6)).

In this embodiment, the execution of the movable object prediction is determined together with the execution of the pseudo consecutive prediction, so the movable object prediction is executed when a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display began. However, since operation confirmation control is being executed, as explained in the first embodiment, the performance operations of the on-board movable object 32A and chance button 631B at the timing of the execution of the movable object prediction may be restricted, and only the effect display and sound effect corresponding to the movable object prediction may be output (see Figure 66). Also, in the first embodiment, the performance operations of the on-board movable object 32A and chance button 631B are executed after the initial operation is completed, but since the pseudo consecutive prediction (introduction part) has begun, the performance operations of the movable object prediction are restricted, but the performance operations of the movable object prediction may be executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a predetermined variable display, the number of reserved memories is 1 or more, and then, when the power is turned on and the reserved memories are consumed and the next variable display begins, it is decided that a pseudo-consecutive preview will be executed in that variable display.If it is decided to execute a pseudo-consecutive preview at the start of the variable display, the time from the start of the variable display to the execution of the result notification part of the pseudo-consecutive preview is set to be at least longer than the operation confirmation control period (for example, approximately 20 seconds).Therefore, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the variation before which the pseudo-consecutive preview (result notification part) is executed, the pseudo-consecutive preview (result notification part) will be executed. Although an example has been given in which the initial operation of the movable body is completed before the notification part of the pseudo consecutive announcement is started, the present invention is not limited to this. When a start winning occurs and the CPU 103 determines that a specific variation pattern in which a pseudo consecutive announcement is executed is present, a specific presentation control command specifying specific information regarding the specific variation pattern (for example, a winning presentation specification command specifying the execution of a pseudo consecutive announcement) is sent, and based on the specific presentation control command, the presentation control CPU 120 may be able to change the execution period of the initial operation so that the initial operation is completed before the notification part of the result of the pseudo consecutive announcement is started.

For example, if a start winning occurs during a specified variable display and it is decided that a specific variable pattern in which a pseudo consecutive announcement is executed will be used, a winning effect designation command (specific information) specifying that this is the specific variable pattern (with pseudo consecutive announcement) will be sent.

Then, after a power outage occurs just before the end of the specified variable display, when the power is turned back on, a power outage recovery designation command, a pattern confirmation command (information on whether the special pattern was a hit or miss), a first reserved memory number notification command, and a second reserved memory number notification command are sent, and the initial operation begins. Next, the pattern is displayed statically based on the transmission of the performance pattern confirmation designation command, and after the pattern confirmation display period has elapsed, when the next variable display begins, the first reserved memory number notification command, the second reserved memory number notification command, the game status background designation command, the first (or second) variable display start designation command, the pattern confirmation command, and the variation pattern designation command are sent.

Here, if a fluctuation pattern designation command specifying a specific fluctuation pattern (with pseudo-consecutive warning) is received within a specified time (e.g., 4000 ms) after receiving a power outage recovery designation command, the initial operation currently being performed (approximately 20 seconds) may be interrupted and switched to a shortened initial operation with a shorter operating period (e.g., 5 seconds) than the initial operation currently being performed.

In more detail, the initial operation involves sequentially performing the maximum extension and retraction movements of each moving body (moving back and forth between the origin position and the performance position), while the shortened initial operation involves simultaneously performing the minimum extension and retraction movements of each moving body (e.g., returning to the origin immediately after passing through the origin position). Furthermore, when switching from the initial operation to the shortened initial operation, for example, if one moving body is in the middle of a maximum extension movement, that movement is interrupted and a retraction movement is performed, and once it returns to the origin position, the minimum extension and retraction movements of each moving body, including the one moving body, are simultaneously performed. Furthermore, if the timing of switching from the initial operation to the shortened initial operation occurs immediately before the end of the initial operation (e.g., 5 seconds before the end), the operation should not switch to the shortened initial operation even if a specific movement pattern designation command is received.

Also, for example, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a variation prior to the one in which a moving object announcement or pseudo consecutive announcement is executed, and then the power is turned on, the performance action in the moving object announcement that was executed or limited during the initial operation will be performed during the introductory part of the pseudo consecutive performance (a short initial operation is performed in Figure 49 (C4), and the performance action in the limited moving object announcement is performed in Figure 49 (C5)).

Form 16 (relationship between initial operation and various displays when recovering from normal fluctuations)
Next, the relationship between the initial operation and various displays during recovery from normal fluctuation will be explained with reference to Figures 97 and 98. Figure 97 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the movable body when a power outage occurs during normal fluctuation and operation confirmation control is started based on the subsequent power-on. Figure 98 (A) is a diagram showing the relationship between the above-board movable body and various displays, and (B) is a diagram showing the relationship between the below-board movable body and various displays.

As shown in Figure 97 (A), if a power outage occurs during the variable display of the normal game state and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up with a hot start, the start preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the time of start-up disappears, and then the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed, displaying the words "Power being restored, please wait" on a black background, indicating that the power outage is being restored, and it is notified that the power outage is being restored until the next command is received.

If, while the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed, the game ball is detected by a detection switch such as the gate switch 21 located in the game area (second path) on the right side of the image display device 5, and it is detected that the player is playing with a right-handed shot, the presentation control CPU 120 displays a left-handed shot promotion display 132SG530 in the upper right corner of the display screen, consisting of the words "Please return to left-handed shot" and a left-pointing arrow, encouraging the player to shoot the game ball into the game area (first path) on the left side of the image display device 5.

As shown in Figure 97 (A), when the on-board movable body 32A moves between the origin position and the performance position, the performance part 32a can move up and down in the shaded area E1 surrounded by a two-dot chain line, and the support part 32b can move up and down in the shaded area E2 surrounded by a two-dot chain line. Furthermore, when the below-board movable body 32B moves up and down between the origin position and the performance position, the performance part 32c and the support part 32d can move up and down in the shaded area E3 surrounded by a two-dot chain line.

In more detail, the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed in a position where the performance part 32a of the above-board movable body 32A and the performance part 32c of the below-board movable body 32B may overlap, and the left-hit promotion display 132SG530 is displayed in a position where part of the performance part 32a of the above-board movable body 32A and the support part 32b may overlap.

Next, the relationship between the various displays when the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B perform their initial operations will be explained based on Figures 98(A) and (B). Figures 98(A) and (B) show the relationship between the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B and the left-hit prompt display 132SG530, and also allow comparison with the relationship with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 (see Figures 84 and 93), which is not actually displayed.

As shown in Figure 98 (A), when the on-board movable body 32A is located at the origin position, it does not overlap either the recovery display 132SG510 or the left-hit prompt display 132SG530, so the player can see all of the displays (see Figure 97 (A)).

Next, as the on-board movable body 32A descends from the origin position, first, part of the effect portion 32a and the support portion 32b overlap in front of the left hit prompt display 132SG530, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see the left hit prompt display 132SG530 (see Figure 97(B)). After that, the on-board movable body 32A passes by and the left hit prompt display 132SG530 becomes visible, but when it descends to the effect position, part of the effect portion 32a overlaps in front of part of the recovery in progress display 132SG510, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see part of the recovery in progress display 132SG510 (see Figure 97(C)).

When returning from the presentation position to the origin position, the situation in which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with each display is the same; however, the movement speed of the on-board movable body 32A when it moves from the presentation position to the origin position is slower than the movement speed of the on-board movable body 32A when it moves from the origin position to the presentation position. Therefore, as shown in Figure 98 (A), the overlap time is longer during the retraction operation than during the advancement operation, and the time during which it is difficult for the player to see is also longer.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 98 (A), when the under-board movable body 32B is located at the origin position, it does not overlap with any of the left-hit prompt display 132SG530, recovery in progress display 132SG510, and right-hit prompt display 132SG430, so the player can see all of these displays (see Figure 97 (A)).

Next, while the under-board movable body 32B rises from the origin position, passes through the intermediate position, and reaches the presentation position, and after it has reached the presentation position, the presentation part 32a overlaps the front side of the recovery in progress display 132SG510, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see part of the recovery in progress display 132SG510. However, since it does not overlap with the left hit prompt display 132SG530, the player can see the left hit prompt display 132SG530 (see Figures 97 (D) and (E)). The same situation occurs when the under-board movable body 32B overlaps each display when returning from the presentation position to the origin position.

In this way, if a power outage occurs during normal variable display, and then the initial operation is performed when the machine is started up with a hot start and restored, the time during which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the left-hit prompt display 132SG530 and is difficult (or impossible) for the player to see is shortened. Specifically, the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the left-hit prompt display 132SG530 only when the on-board movable body 32A passes through the intermediate position, and does not overlap for the period during which the on-board movable body 32A is stopped at the presentation position or origin position, so the visibility of the left-hit prompt display 132SG530 is less likely to be obstructed by the on-board movable body 32A or the below-board movable body 32B performing the initial operation of the left-hit prompt display 132SG530.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 98 (A), the period during which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the left-hit prompt display 132SG530 is longer than the period during which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430. However, the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 is displayed during time-saving states and jackpot game states that are advantageous to the player. If the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 is covered by the on-board movable body 32A performing its initial operation, the player may miss the opportunity to generate a win by performing a right-hit operation and suffer a disadvantage. Therefore, it is preferable that the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 maintains better visibility than the left-hit prompt display 132SG530.

Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 can display the left-hit prompt display 132SG530 and output a left-hit prompt sound as a left-hit operation prompt notification. When operation confirmation control is performed based on a cold start after a power outage, the left-hit prompt display 132SG530 is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen, while the left-hit operation prompt sound is restricted. When operation confirmation control is performed based on a hot start after a power outage, the left-hit prompt display 132SG530 is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen, while the left-hit operation prompt sound is output. In this way, it is possible to provide an appropriate left-hit operation prompt notification that takes into account the situation at power-on.

In addition, in normal operation, a left-hit operation promotion notification can be issued when a gaming ball enters the gate switch 21, etc., located on the right gaming area side. In normal operation, a special left-hit operation promotion notification can be issued, which has a higher priority than a left-hit operation promotion notification, based on a specific number of gaming balls (e.g., five) entering the gate switch 21. The special left-hit operation promotion notification can be issued for a longer period than the period (e.g., 20 seconds) during which the movable body operates due to operation confirmation control. This prevents the special left-hit operation promotion notification from being obstructed by a movable body that operates due to operation confirmation control.

Forms 17 and 18 (relationship between initial operation and various displays during recovery during a jackpot)
Next, the relationship between the initial operation and various displays during recovery during a jackpot will be explained with reference to Figures 99 and 100. Figure 99 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the movable body when a power outage occurs during a jackpot and operation confirmation control is started based on the subsequent power-on. Figure 100 (A) is a diagram showing the relationship between the movable body on the board and various displays, and (B) is a diagram showing the relationship between the movable body below the board and various displays.

As shown in Figure 99 (A), if a power outage occurs during a round of play in the jackpot game state and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up with a hot start, the start preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the time of start-up disappears, and then the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed, displaying the words "Power being restored, please wait" on a black background, indicating that the power outage is being restored, and it is notified that the power outage is being restored until the next command is received.

In addition, if a control command indicating a jackpot game state, such as an open command or an after-open command, is received along with a power outage recovery command, a right-hit prompt display 132SG430 will be displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen while the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed, encouraging the player to shoot the game ball into the game area (second path) on the right side of the image display device 5.

As shown in Figure 97 (A), when the on-board movable body 32A moves between the origin position and the performance position, the performance part 32a can move up and down in the shaded area E1 surrounded by a two-dot chain line, and the support part 32b can move up and down in the shaded area E2 surrounded by a two-dot chain line. Furthermore, when the below-board movable body 32B moves up and down between the origin position and the performance position, the performance part 32c and the support part 32d can move up and down in the shaded area E3 surrounded by a two-dot chain line.

In detail, the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed in a position where the performance part 32a of the above-board movable body 32A and the performance part 32c of the below-board movable body 32B may overlap, and the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 is displayed in a position where part of the performance part 32a of the above-board movable body 32A and the support part 32b may overlap.

Next, the relationship between the various displays when the upper and lower movable bodies 32A and 32B perform their initial operations will be explained with reference to Figures 100(A) and (B).

As shown in Figure 100 (A), when the on-board movable body 32A is located at the origin position, it does not overlap with either the recovery display 132SG510 or the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, so the player can see all of the displays (see Figure 99 (A)).

Next, as the on-board movable body 32A descends from the origin position, first, the support part 32b overlaps the front side of the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see the left-hit prompt display 132SG530 (not shown). After that, the on-board movable body 32A passes by and the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 becomes visible, but when it descends to the presentation position, the presentation part 32a overlaps the front side of part of the recovery in progress display 132SG510, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see part of the recovery in progress display 132SG510 (see Figure 99 (B)).

When returning from the presentation position to the origin position, the situation in which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with each display is the same; however, the movement speed of the on-board movable body 32A when it moves from the presentation position to the origin position is slower than the movement speed of the on-board movable body 32A when it moves from the origin position to the presentation position. Therefore, as shown in Figure 100 (A), the overlap time is longer during the retraction operation than during the advancement operation, and the time during which it is difficult for the player to see is also longer.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 100 (A), when the under-board movable body 32B is located at the origin position, it does not overlap either the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 or the recovery in progress display 132SG510, so the player can see all of the displays (see Figure 99 (A)).

Next, while the under-board movable body 32B rises from the origin position, passes through the intermediate position, and reaches the presentation position, and after it reaches the presentation position, the presentation part 32a overlaps the front side of the recovery in progress display 132SG510, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see part of the recovery in progress display 132SG510. However, since it does not overlap with the right hit prompt display 132SG430, the player can see the right hit prompt display 132SG430 (see Figure 99 (C)). Note that the situation in which the under-board movable body 32B overlaps each display remains the same when returning from the presentation position to the origin position.

In this way, if a power outage occurs during round play in a jackpot game state, and then the initial operation is performed when the device is started up with a hot start and restored, the on-board movable body 32A operates so as not to overlap in front of the right-hit promotion display 132SG430 displayed in the operation confirmation control, rather than being superimposed in front of the specified area (see Figure 83 (A)) where information corresponding to the round play (e.g., number of rounds display 132SG451, number of winning balls display 132SG452, number of balls dispensed display 132SG453, number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, etc.) is displayed, thereby making it less likely that the visibility of the right-hit promotion display 132SG430 will be obstructed. In other words, it is preferable that the period during which information corresponding to round play (for example, round number display 132SG451, winning ball number display 132SG452, ball count display 132SG453, number of consecutive wins/total ball count display 132SG454, etc.) overlaps in front of the specified area (see Figure 83 (A)) where it is displayed is shorter than the period during which it overlaps in front of the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 displayed during operation confirmation control.

Furthermore, after a power outage occurs during variable display in the normal state, the initial operation when the power is turned on is performed in an operating mode that includes a movable object preview performance (reciprocating movement between the origin position and the intermediate position) in which the support part 32b overlaps with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, whereas, after a power outage occurs during variable display during a jackpot or in the time-saving state, it is preferable that the initial operation when the power is turned on is performed in an operating mode that does not include a movable object preview performance (reciprocating movement between the origin position and the intermediate position) that overlaps with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430.

In addition, if a round-play movable body effect is performed at the start of a round-play game, it is preferable that the initial operation when the power is turned on be performed in an operating mode that does not include the effect operation of the round-play movable body effect (reciprocating movement between the origin position and the intermediate position).

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs during round play in a jackpot game state, and then the initial operation is performed when the machine is started up with a hot start and restored, the on-board movable body 32A operates so that it does not overlap in front of the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 displayed in the operation confirmation control, rather than being superimposed in front of the recovery in progress display 132SG510, making it less likely that the visibility of the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 will be obstructed. In other words, it is preferable that the period during which it overlaps in front of the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 displayed in the operation confirmation control is shorter than the period during which it is superimposed in front of the recovery in progress display 132SG510.

Furthermore, after a power outage occurs during variable display in the normal state, the initial operation when the power is turned on is performed in an operating mode that includes a movable object preview performance (reciprocating movement between the origin position and the intermediate position) in which the support part 32b overlaps with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, whereas, after a power outage occurs during variable display during a jackpot or in the time-saving state, it is preferable that the initial operation when the power is turned on is performed in an operating mode that does not include a movable object preview performance (reciprocating movement between the origin position and the intermediate position) that overlaps with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430.

In addition, if a round-play movable body effect is performed at the start of a round-play game, it is preferable that the initial operation when the power is turned on be performed in an operating mode that does not include the effect operation of the round-play movable body effect (reciprocating movement between the origin position and the intermediate position).

In addition, the time that the under-board movable body 32B spends in the presentation position overlapping the recovery display 132SG510 during initial operation may be shorter than the presentation operation of the movable body presentation. For example, when a power outage occurs while the variable display is not being executed and then the power is turned on, the time T1 that the movable body spends in the presentation position during initial operation and the time T2 that the movable body spends in the presentation position during the movable body presentation are preferably longer than the time T3 that the movable body spends in the presentation position during initial operation when the power is turned on after a power outage occurs while the variable display is being executed (T1 = T2 > T3). In this way, a movable body that operates due to the operation confirmation control that is performed when the power is turned on after a power outage occurs during an advantageous state is not superimposed on the recovery display 132SG510 for a long period of time, thereby providing a gaming machine that does not interfere with determining whether or not the machine is undergoing recovery.

Form 19 (relationship between initial operation and various displays during recovery during time reduction)
Next, the relationship between the initial operation and various displays during recovery during time reduction will be explained with reference to Fig. 101. Fig. 101 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the movable body when a power outage occurs during time reduction and the operation confirmation control is started based on the power being turned on afterwards.

As shown in Figure 101 (A), if a power outage occurs during variable display in the time-saving mode and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up with a hot start, the start-up preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the time of start-up disappears, and then the restoration display 132SG510 is displayed, displaying the words "Power being restored, please wait" on a black background, indicating that the power outage is being restored, and notifying the user that the power outage is being restored until the next command is received.

As shown in Figure 101 (A), when the above-board movable body 32A moves between the origin position and the performance position, the performance part 32a can move up and down in the shaded area E1 surrounded by a two-dot chain line, and the support part 32b can move up and down in the shaded area E2 surrounded by a two-dot chain line. Furthermore, when the below-board movable body 32B moves up and down between the origin position and the performance position, the performance part 32c and the support part 32d can move up and down in the shaded area E3 surrounded by a two-dot chain line.

In detail, the recovery in progress display 132SG510 is displayed in a position where the performance part 32a of the above-board movable body 32A and the performance part 32c of the below-board movable body 32B may overlap, and the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 is displayed in a position where part of the performance part 32a of the above-board movable body 32A and the support part 32b may overlap (see Figure 101 (C)).

As shown in Figure 101 (A), when the on-board movable body 32A is located at the origin position, it does not overlap with either the recovery display 132SG510 or the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, so the player can see all of the displays.

Next, when the initial operation of the on-board movable body 32A begins, the variable display is stopped based on the transmission of a symbol confirmation command, the display of the recovery in progress display 132SG510 ends, and the second background display 132SG320 is displayed. As the on-board movable body 32A descends from the origin position, the support portion 32b first overlaps the front side of the right hit prompt display 132SG430, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see the left hit prompt display 132SG530 (not shown). After that, the on-board movable body 32A passes through and the area where the right hit prompt display 132SG430 is displayed becomes visible, but when it descends to the presentation position, the presentation portion 32a overlaps the front side of part of the recovery in progress display 132SG510, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see part of the recovery in progress display 132SG510 (see Figure 101 (B)).

When returning from the presentation position to the origin position, the situation in which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with each display is the same; however, the movement speed of the on-board movable body 32A when moving from the presentation position to the origin position is slower than the movement speed of the on-board movable body 32A when moving from the origin position to the presentation position. Therefore, the overlap time is longer during the retraction operation than during the advancement operation, and the time during which it is difficult for the player to see is also longer.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 101 (A), when the under-board movable body 32B is located at the origin position, it does not overlap with either the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 or the recovery in progress display 132SG510, so the player can see all of the displays.

Next, while the under-board movable body 32B rises from the origin position, passes through the intermediate position, and reaches the presentation position, and after it has reached the presentation position, the presentation part 32a overlaps the recovery in progress display 132SG510 on the front side, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see part of the recovery in progress display 132SG510. However, since it does not overlap with the right hit prompt display 132SG430, the player can see the right hit prompt display 132SG430 (see Figure 101 (C)). Note that the situation in which the under-board movable body 32B overlaps each display remains the same when returning from the presentation position to the origin position.

In this way, if a power outage occurs during the variable display in the time-saving state, and then the initial operation is performed when the machine is started up with a hot start and restored, the on-board movable body 32A operates so as not to overlap in front of the specific area (see Figure 101 (A)) in which the right-hit promotion display 132SG430 displayed during operation confirmation control, rather than being superimposed in front of the specified area (see Figure 101 (B) (C)) in which information corresponding to the time-saving state (e.g., presentation mode display 132SG221, remaining time-saving display 132SG201, number of consecutive wins/total number of balls issued display 132SG454, etc.) is displayed.As a result, when the display of the recovery in progress display 132SG510 ends and the normal state is restored, the visibility of the right-hit promotion display 132SG430 is less likely to be obstructed. In other words, it is preferable that the period during which information corresponding to the time-saving state (for example, the presentation mode display 132SG221, the remaining time-saving display 132SG201, the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, etc.) overlaps in front of the specified area (see Figures 101 (B) (C)) where it is displayed is shorter than the period during which it overlaps in front of the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 displayed during operation confirmation control.

Furthermore, after a power outage occurs during variable display in the normal state, the initial operation when the power is turned on is performed in an operating mode that includes a movable object preview performance (reciprocating movement between the origin position and the intermediate position) in which the support part 32b overlaps with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, whereas, after a power outage occurs during variable display during a jackpot or in the time-saving state, it is preferable that the initial operation when the power is turned on is performed in an operating mode that does not include a movable object preview performance (reciprocating movement between the origin position and the intermediate position) that overlaps with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430.

In addition, if a round-play movable body effect is performed at the start of a round-play game, it is preferable that the initial operation when the power is turned on be performed in an operating mode that does not include the effect operation of the round-play movable body effect (reciprocating movement between the origin position and the intermediate position).

Furthermore, in embodiments 17 to 19, the overlap between the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B and the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, the recovery in progress display 132SG510, and information corresponding to the time-saving state (for example, the performance mode display 132SG221, the remaining time-saving display 132SG201, the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, etc.) was described. In this embodiment, the operation confirmation control compares the total overlap time with the various displays actually displayed when the movable body performs its initial operation. However, regardless of whether the various displays are displayed, it is sufficient that the overlap time with the display area in which the various displays are displayed when the movable body performs its initial operation satisfies the above relationship.

Forms 21 to 24 (Start-up order when initial operation control is executed)
In the characteristic part 132SG, as shown in Figures 61 and 62, when power is applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start or hot start), an example is given in which the special symbol lamps that constitute the special symbol display devices 4A, 4B and each LED (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) are simultaneously lit, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the timing at which the special symbol lamps are lit when power is applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the timing at which each LED (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) are lit may be different.

For example, as shown in Figures 102 (A) to (G), when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, the start-up preparation display 132SG500 first begins to be displayed on the image display device 5. After a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds, as in Figures 61 and 62) has elapsed since the start-up preparation display 132SG500 began to be displayed, the special symbol lamps that make up the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B begin to light up (see Figures 102 (A) and (B)).

At this timing, the solenoids 81 and 82 are energized again, causing the variable prize ball device 6B and the special variable prize ball device 7 to return to their power-off states. That is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a normal or time-saving mode and no normal wins have occurred and then power is cut off before starting a hot start, or when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a jackpot gaming mode and then power is cut off during the interval period and then power is cut off before starting a hot start, the variable prize ball device 6B and the special variable prize ball device 7 are again in their closed states. Also, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a normal or time-saving mode and then powers off while a normal win has occurred and then powers off before starting a hot start, the variable prize ball device 6B is in its open state. Also, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a jackpot gaming mode and then powers off before starting a hot start while the special variable prize ball device 7 (large prize opening) is open, the special variable prize ball device 7 is in its open state.

After these special chart lamps light up and the variable winning ball device 6B and special variable winning ball device 7 are in their power-off state, the LEDs (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) begin to light up.

After this, as an initialization notification, the image display device 5 displays an initialization notification image, the LEDs (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, upper panel movable body LED 9d, lower panel movable body LED 9e, upper frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) light up in an initialization notification manner, and the speakers 8L, 8R start to output an initialization notification sound. After that, as initial operation control, confirmation operations are performed for the upper panel movable body 32A, lower panel movable body 32B, upper frame movable body 132SG101, and chance button 631B (Figures 102 (D) to (G)).

In particular, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered down and starts up by a cold start while in normal mode or time-saving mode and no variable display is being executed, as shown in Figure 103 (A), after power is cut off, a power-on command is first sent from the CPU 103 to the performance control CPU 120 (the performance control CPU 120 receives the power-on command) three seconds after the start of display of the startup preparation display 132SG500 on the image display device 5. At this time, the special symbol display devices 4A, 4B are energized, causing the special symbol lamps that make up these special symbol display devices 4A, 4B to begin lighting up, and the solenoids 81, 82 are energized, causing the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7 to return to their initial state (closed state).

At this time, the special symbol lamps that make up the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B initially light up in the manner in which the variable display result is a miss, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special symbol lamps that make up the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B may light up in the manner in which the variable display result is a miss or in the manner in which the variable display result is different from any other variable display result.

In addition, after these special chart lamps are lit and the variable winning ball device 6B and special variable winning ball device 7 are reset to their initial states, the LEDs (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) begin to light up.

Then, when two seconds have passed since the performance control CPU 120 received the power-on command (five seconds have passed since the startup preparation display 132SG500 was displayed), the image display device 5 begins displaying the initialization notification display 132SG600, replacing the startup preparation display 132SG500. After the initialization notification display 132SG600 begins displaying, the LEDs (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, upper board movable body LED 9d, lower board movable body LED 9e, upper frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) begin emitting light in an initialization notification mode, and confirmation operations are performed for the upper board movable body 32A, lower board movable body 32B, upper frame movable body 132SG101, and chance button 631B as initial operations.

By doing this, the startup preparation display 132SG500 makes it easier for players and staff at the amusement parlor where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed to recognize that power has been turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, and it also enables players and staff at the amusement parlor where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed to confirm that the special symbol lamp is lit, which has a significant impact on gameplay, without being distracted by the operation of checking each moving part.

Furthermore, in the case where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered down in a normal state or a time-saving state with a variable display being executed and is then started up with a hot start, as shown in Figure 103 (B), after the power is cut off, first, three seconds after the start preparation display 132SG500 begins to be displayed on the image display device 5, the CPU 103 sends a power outage recovery designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (the performance control CPU 120 receives the power outage recovery designation command). At that time, the special symbol display devices 4A, 4B are energized, which starts the lighting of the special symbol lamps that make up these special symbol display devices 4A, 4B (and the variable display of special symbols by the flashing of the special symbol lamps), and the solenoids 81, 82 are energized, which returns the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7 to the state they were in before the power was cut off. Furthermore, when two seconds have passed since the performance control CPU 120 received the power outage recovery command (five seconds have passed since the start-up preparation display 132SG500 was displayed), the image display device 5 begins to display the recovery in progress display 132SG510, replacing the start-up preparation display 132SG500. After that, the various LEDs (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, upper board movable body LED 9d, lower board movable body LED 9e, upper frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) light up, and the upper board movable body 32A, lower board movable body 32B, upper frame movable body 132SG101, and chance button 631B are checked as initial operations.

In addition, if the variable display that was running before the power outage stops while the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed, and a new variable display is started, the display of the recovery display 132SG510 will end when the new variable display stops, as shown in Figure 103 (B).

In other words, if the variable display of the special symbol is resumed when the launch preparation display 132SG500 is displayed on the image display device 5 with a state in which the number of pending memories is 0, and the resumed variable display stops while the launch preparation display 132SG500 is displayed, when a new variable display begins due to a new launch winning, the launch preparation display 132SG500 will switch to displaying the recovery display 132SG510 during the new variable display. Furthermore, the display of the recovery display 132SG510 will end when the new variable display stops.

In the example shown in Figure 103 (B), while the recovery display 132SG510 is being displayed and the variable display is in progress, confirmation operations for the on-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the frame-top movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B are started as an initial operation.

As in Figure 103 (B), even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered down and hot started while the variable display is running in the normal or time-saving mode, if the variable display that was running before the power was cut off does not stop while the start-up preparation display 132SG500 is displayed on the image display device 5, then as shown in Figure 104 (A), the image display device 5 will start displaying the recovery display 132SG510 in place of the start-up preparation display 132SG500, and then the variable display will stop (at the same time, the display of the recovery display 132SG510 will end).

Also, as in Figure 103 (B), even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered down and hot started while the variable display is running in normal or time-saving mode, and the variable display that was running before the power was cut off stops while the image display device 5 is displaying the start-up preparation display 132SG500, if there is pending memory when the variable display stops, as shown in Figure 104 (B), a new variable display will start based on the pending memory while the start-up preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed and after the variable display stops. In this case, the display of the recovery in progress display 132SG510 will end when the new variable display stops.

As described above, in the examples shown in Figures 103(A), (B) and 104(A), (B), the confirmation operation of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the above-frame movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B will not be initiated when a background image or effect image corresponding to the variable display is displayed on the image display device 5, so it is possible to prevent the confirmation operation from being hindered by the background image or effect image corresponding to the variable display on the image display device 5.

In addition, in the example shown in Figure 104 (A), when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the normal state or the time-saving state and the variable display is being executed, and the power is cut off and the machine is started with a hot start, if the variable display does not stop while the start preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed, the lighting of each LED (frame LED 9a, 9b, upper board movable body LED 9d, lower board movable body LED 9e, upper frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) and the confirmation operation of the upper board movable body 32A, lower board movable body 32B, upper frame movable body 132SG101, and chance button 631B as an initial operation are simultaneously started. The explanation is not limited to this, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off and hot started while the variable display is running in normal or time-saving mode, if the variable display does not stop while the start preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed, the lighting of each LED (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, upper board movable body LED 9d, lower board movable body LED 9e, upper frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) and the confirmation operation of the upper board movable body 32A, lower board movable body 32B, upper frame movable body 132SG101, and chance button 631B as an initial operation may start at different times.

For example, as shown in FIG. 105(A), when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in normal or time-saving mode and the variable display is running, if the power is cut off and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up by a hot start, if the variable display does not stop while the start-up preparation display 132SG500 is displayed, the LEDs (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, upper board movable body LED 9d, lower board movable body LED 9e, upper frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) can be made to light up in a manner corresponding to the restoration being carried out while the start-up preparation display 132SG500 is displayed (more precisely, for two seconds after the performance control CPU 120 receives the power outage restoration command from the CPU 103), and the initial confirmation operation of the upper board movable body 32A, lower board movable body 32B, upper frame movable body 132SG101, and chance button 631B can be started while the restoration display 132SG510 is displayed.

In addition, the lighting of each LED (frame LED 9a, 9b, upper panel movable body LED 9d, lower panel movable body LED 9e, upper frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) in a manner corresponding to the restoration in progress may continue even after the display of the startup preparation display 132SG500 has ended, and may be ended, for example, when the confirmation operation for each movable body has ended.

In the example shown in Figure 105(A), when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off and hot started while the variable display is running in the normal state or time-saving state, if the variable display stops while the start-up preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed and a new variable display does not start, as shown in Figure 105(B), the image display device 5 will begin displaying a background image corresponding to the variable display being stopped from the time the display of the start-up preparation display 132SG500 ends, and each LED (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) will be lit in a manner corresponding to the background image.

In addition, the examples shown in Figures 103 to 105 describe a case where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start mode after a power outage occurs when the gaming state is normal or time-saving, that is, when variable display can be executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and power outages can also occur in the pachinko gaming machine 1 when it is in a jackpot gaming state in which variable display is not executed.

When a pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered down during a jackpot game and starts up in a hot start mode, if the power outage occurs while the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening) is open due to a round of play, as shown in Figure 106 (A), after the power outage, the CPU 103 first sends a power outage recovery command to the presentation control CPU 120 (the presentation control CPU 120 receives the power outage recovery command) three seconds after the start of the display of the start preparation display 132SG500 on the image display device 5. At that time, the special symbol display devices 4A, 4B are powered up, which causes the special symbol lamps that make up these special symbol display devices 4A, 4B to light up (and the special symbol lamps to flash to display the special symbols variably), and the solenoids 81, 82 are powered up, causing the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7 to return to the state they were in before the power outage. In other words, the variable winning ball device 6B is closed, and the special variable winning ball device 7 is open.

Furthermore, when two seconds have passed since the performance control CPU 120 received the power outage restoration command (five seconds have passed since the start-up preparation display 132SG500 was displayed), the image display device 5 will begin displaying the restoration in progress display 132SG510 in place of the start-up preparation display 132SG500, and each LED (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, upper board movable body LED 9d, lower board movable body LED 9e, upper frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) will begin lighting up in a manner corresponding to the restoration being carried out.

While the recovery display 132SG510 is still displayed, confirmation operations for the on-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the frame-top movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B are executed as initial operations.

After the initial operation is complete and the round of play ends, the special variable winning ball device 7 changes from an open state to a closed state in response to the end of the round of play. Then, in response to the start of the next round of play, the special variable winning ball device 7 changes from a closed state to an open state, the image display device 5 begins to display an image corresponding to the round of play, and each LED (frame LED 9a, 9b, above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) begins to light up in a manner corresponding to the round of play.

In the example of Figure 106 (A), a power outage occurs during a round of play, and when the pachinko gaming machine is started up in a hot start, the round of play before the power outage ends after the start preparation display 132SG500 has finished displaying. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in Figure 106 (B), when a power outage occurs during a round of play, and when the pachinko gaming machine is started up in a hot start, the round of play before the power outage ends while the start preparation display 132SG500 is displayed, and the next round of play begins (special variable winning ball equipment In the case where the device 7 changes from an open state to a closed state and then to an open state again, even after the display of the startup preparation display 132SG500 on the image display device 5 has finished, the LEDs (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, upper board movable body LED 9d, lower board movable body LED 9e, upper frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) can be lit in a manner corresponding to the recovery in progress until the confirmation operations of the upper board movable body 32A, lower board movable body 32B, upper frame movable body 132SG101, and chance button 631B as the initial operation are completed.

106(A) and (B), if a power outage occurs when the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the open state (during a round of play) during a jackpot game, the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start, and when each LED (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, upper board movable body LED 9d, lower board movable body LED 9e, upper frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) is lit in a manner corresponding to the round of play, the upper board movable body 32A, lower board movable body 32B, upper frame movable body 132 Since the confirmation operations for SG101 and chance button 631B are not executed, it is possible to prevent the LEDs (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) from lighting up in a manner appropriate to the round of play, which would interfere with the work of checking whether the confirmation operations for above-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, above-frame movable body 132SG101, and chance button 631B are being executed correctly.

In addition, in the examples shown in Figures 103 to 105, we have described a case where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start after a power outage occurs when the gaming state is normal or time-saving. However, as shown in Figure 107 (A), if the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state before the power outage occurs, and the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state while the start-up preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed (in the example of Figure 107 (A), during the 2 seconds from when the performance control CPU 120 receives the power outage recovery command until the display of the start-up preparation display 132SG500 ends), If a game ball enters ball device 6B, that is, if a second start-up win occurs while the start-up preparation display 132SG500 is displayed, after the start-up preparation display 132SG500 has finished displaying, the image display device 5 will display the recovery display 132SG510 until the timing at which the variable display corresponding to the second start-up win is stopped, and while the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed, confirmation operations for the above-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, above-frame movable body 132SG101, and chance button 631B will be started as initial operation control.

In addition, in the example shown in Figure 107 (A), the variable winning ball device 6B was in an open state before the power outage occurred, and a gaming ball entered the variable winning ball device 6B in the open state while the start-up preparation display 132SG500 was being displayed (in the example of Figure 107 (A), during the 2 seconds from when the performance control CPU 120 received the power outage recovery command until the display of the start-up preparation display 132SG500 ended). However, the present invention is not limited to this. In the case where the variable display of normal symbols was being executed before the power outage occurred, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 was started with a hot start, and a normal symbol win occurred on the image display device 5 while the start-up preparation display 132SG500 was being displayed, as shown in Figure 107 (B), the initial operation control can be performed by controlling the variable winning ball device 6B to be in an open state from the timing before the confirmation operations of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the above-frame movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B begin.

As described above, by executing the control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as shown in Figures 107(A) and 107(B), it is possible to preferably execute the confirmation operations of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the above-frame movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B as initial operation control.

In the example of Figure 107 (A), after a gaming ball enters the variable winning ball device 6B in the open state, the display of the start-up preparation display 132SG500 is switched to the display of the recovery in progress display 132SG510, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display of the start-up preparation display 132SG500 may also be switched to the display of the recovery in progress display 132SG510 at the time when a gaming ball enters the variable winning ball device 6B in the open state.

Furthermore, Figures 106 (A) and (B) illustrate a case where the power is interrupted when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a jackpot gaming state and starts up in a hot start, with the power interruption occurring when the special variable prize ball device 7 (large prize opening) is in an open state due to round play. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in Figure 108, in a case where the power is interrupted when the special variable prize ball device 7 (large prize opening) is in an open state due to round play, the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts up in a hot start. As a result, while the start-up preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed on the image display device 5 (in the example shown in FIG. 108, during the 2 seconds from when the performance control CPU 120 receives the power outage recovery command until the start-up preparation display 132SG500 finishes displaying), if the special variable winning ball device 7 changes from the closed state to the open state again for the next round of play, the display of the recovery in progress display 132SG510 should begin after the start-up preparation display 132SG500 finishes displaying.

As described above, by executing the control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as shown in Figure 108, it is possible to preferably execute the confirmation operations of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the above-frame movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B as initial operation control.

In addition, in form 3, a portion of the fanfare effect that starts while the launch preparation display 132SG500 is displayed is invisible to the player, and when the launch preparation display 132SG500 is no longer displayed, the fanfare effect can be seen from the continuation of the portion that was not visible. In contrast, in forms 21 to 24, the effect display corresponding to the variable display that started while the launch preparation display 132SG500 was displayed is made invisible because a restoration indicator is displayed. In other words, the variable display is intentionally made invisible because important information related to whether or not a jackpot will be hit must not be inaccurate. However, the fanfare effect is intentionally made visible because it includes an operation direction notification part that encourages right-hand hits, which are necessary for subsequent jackpot play.

Form 25 (Relationship between initialization notification image and initial operation) <Modification>
Next, the relationship between initialization notification display 132SG600 and operation confirmation control will be described with reference to Figures 110 and 111. Figure 110 is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between initialization notification display 132SG600 and operation confirmation control. Figure 111 is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between initialization notification display 132SG600 and operation confirmation control.

In the above embodiment, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up using the cold start process after a power outage, a power-on command, a game status background command (normal background), and a customer waiting demo command are transmitted based on the CPU 103 being restored after a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds) has elapsed since the start-up timing and the start-up preparation display 132SG500 was displayed on the image display device 5. Then, based on receiving these effect control commands, the presentation control CPU 120 determines that power-on with initialization has occurred (started up using the cold start process), and causes the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, upper board movable body LED 9d, lower board movable body LED 9e, upper frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g to illuminate in a predetermined initialization notification manner, and begins outputting an initialization notification sound from the speakers 8L, 8R (see Figures 61 and 62).

In addition, when a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start-up preparation display 132SG500 was displayed on the image display device 5, the start-up preparation display 132SG500 is hidden and the first background display 132SG310 is displayed based on the game status background designation command (normal background). However, in this modified example, when power is turned on with initialization, the initialization notification display 132SG600 as described in Figure 102 is displayed when the initialization notification begins.

In this case, after the display of the initialization notification display 132SG600 begins, the initial operation is initiated by the operation confirmation control, and after the initial operation is completed, the display of the initialization notification display 132SG600 ends. This allows the user to quickly confirm that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been initialized without being distracted by the moving body operating under the operation confirmation control, and prevents the moving body operating under the operation confirmation control from interfering with the confirmation of whether the visual initialization notification has ended.

In addition, the period from power-on with initialization (startup with cold start processing) until operation check control is performed is longer than the period from power-on without initialization (startup with hot start processing) until operation check control is performed. This prevents the initialization notification display 132SG600 from becoming invisible due to operation check control being performed immediately after power-on with initialization.

Furthermore, the initialization notification display 132SG600 is displayed for a predetermined execution period (e.g., 30 seconds) and is hidden after the predetermined execution period has ended. Even if a start-up win occurs while the initialization notification display 132SG600 is displayed, it is preferable that the initialization notification display 132SG600 is hidden and the variable display is not initiated. This allows for optimal operation confirmation control.

Furthermore, if the execution period of the variable display that begins upon the occurrence of a start winning is longer than the display period of the initialization notification display 132SG600, the initialization display may be configured to continue to be displayed until the end of the execution period of the variable display. This allows for optimal operation confirmation control.

Furthermore, if a start-up win occurs while the initialization notification display 132SG600 is displayed, the initialization notification display 132SG600 may be immediately hidden and an effect image corresponding to the variable display may be displayed.

Furthermore, after power-on without initialization (startup using hot start processing), the initialization notification display 132SG600 may not be displayed, and the background may be displayed based on the game status background designation command. This allows for optimal operation confirmation control.

Furthermore, in this modified example, when power is turned on with initialization (startup with cold start processing), the display of the initialization notification display 132SG600 begins, followed by initial operation via operation confirmation control, and after the initial operation is completed, the display of the initialization notification display 132SG600 ends. In this case, as shown in FIG. 109, if a start-up win occurs after the initialization notification display 132SG600 has ended and it is decided that a movable object preview will be executed, while as shown in FIG. 110, if a start-up win occurs during the display period of the initialization notification display 132SG600 and it is decided that a movable object preview will be executed, as described in embodiment 1, not only the performance operation due to the movable object preview but also the output of effect displays and sound effects are restricted during the display period of the initialization notification display 132SG600, and the performance operation due to the movable object preview is carried out after the display of the initialization notification display 132SG600 has ended.

Mode 26 (Operation Confirmation Control) <Modification>
Next, an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control executed by the presentation control CPU 120 will be described with reference to Figures 111 to 14. Figure 111 (A) to (D) are diagrams showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control during cold start processing as a modified example. Figure 112 (A) to (D) are diagrams showing an example of the presentation operation of the win/lose button presentation as a modified example.

In the above-described embodiment, as shown in Figures 57(A) to (J), when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 begins (when the power is turned on), the operation confirmation control executed by the performance control CPU 120 based on the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started up through cold start processing (or hot start processing) first causes the chance button 631B to move upward from the origin position to the performance position and stop there (see Figure 57(B)), after which the on-board movable body 32A moves downward from the origin position to the performance position and stops there (see Figure 57(C)). Next, after the chance button 631B moves downward from the performance position and stops at the origin position (see Figure 57(D)), the on-board movable body 32A moves upward from the performance position and stops at the origin position (see Figure 57(E)). Next, the under-board movable body 32B moves upward from the origin position to the performance position and stops (see FIG. 57(F)), after which the above-frame movable body 132SG101 moves upward from the origin position to the performance position and stops (see FIG. 57(G)). Next, the above-frame movable body 132SG101 moves downward from the performance position and stops at the origin position (see FIG. 57(H)), after which the under-board movable body 32B moves downward from the performance position and stops at the origin position, and the operation confirmation control ends (see FIG. 57(I)). After that, when a predetermined time (e.g., approximately 10 seconds) has elapsed, the initialization notification ends and the operation confirmation control (initialization operation control) ends, but the operation mode of each movable body can be changed in various ways.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 111(A), when the on-board movable body 32A as the board-side movable body is located at the origin position and the chance button 631B as the frame-side movable body is located at the origin position, the distance L1 between the on-board movable body 32A and the chance button 631B is shorter than the distance L2 between the on-board movable body 32A as the board-side movable body and the chance button 631B as the frame-side movable body when the on-board movable body 32A as the board-side movable body is located at the performance position and the chance button 631B as the frame-side movable body is located at the performance position, as shown in Figure 111(B).

In this modified example, the on-board movable body 32A and chance button 631B, which have the above-mentioned relationship, may be configured such that during operation confirmation control, the chance button 631B and on-board movable body 32A simultaneously begin moving from the origin position to the performance position so that their respective initial operation periods overlap (see Figure 111 (B)). Thereafter, the chance button 631B moves downward from the performance position and stops at the origin position (see Figure 111 (C)), and then the on-board movable body 32A moves upward from the performance position and stops at the origin position (see Figure 111 (D)), so that their respective initial operation periods do not overlap.

By doing this, it is possible to simultaneously confirm that the first movable body (e.g., chance button 631B) can operate normally in the presentation position, and that the second movable body (e.g., on-board movable body 32A) can operate normally in the presentation position, thereby simplifying the confirmation process, and at the same time making it possible to individually confirm the movement of the first movable body (e.g., chance button 631B) from the presentation position to the origin position, and the movement of the second movable body (e.g., on-board movable body 32A) from the presentation position to the origin position, which are difficult to confirm.

In this modified example, the chance button 631B and the on-board movable body 32A simultaneously start moving from the origin position to the performance position, but the present invention is not limited to this. As long as their initial operation periods overlap, for example, during the period from when one of the chance button 631B and the on-board movable body 32A starts moving from the origin position to when it stops at the performance position, the other starts moving from the origin position to the performance position. In other words, it is sufficient that at least a portion of the advancement operation periods of the chance button 631B and the on-board movable body 32A overlap.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was given of the form in which the movable body below the board 32B rises from the origin position to the performance position during the win/lose button performance, but it is also possible to use a first movable body (e.g., the movable body above the board 32A) and a second movable body (e.g., the movable body below the board 32B). In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 112(A), in the win/lose button effect, when the operation prompt effect is being executed during the valid operation period or when the valid operation period has elapsed, the above-board movable body 32A descends from the origin position to the effect position (see FIG. 112(B)), and the below-board movable body 32B rises from the origin position to the effect position to lift the above-board movable body 32A, so that the effect operation periods of the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B do not overlap (see FIG. 112(C)). After that, the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B may simultaneously move from the effect position to the origin position so that the effect operation periods of the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B overlap (see FIG. 112(D)).

For the on-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B that perform a performance in which the first movable body and the second movable body come into contact (or overlap) in this manner, it is preferable that the initial operation be performed in the operation confirmation control in an operation mode that does not include the performance operations described in Figures 112 (B) to (D) (for example, a mode in which the on-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B perform an advance operation separately). This makes it possible to perform the operation confirmation control in an optimal manner.

In addition, a performance position sensor 132SG134 (see Figure 2) is provided that can detect when a second movable body (e.g., below-board movable body 32B) is positioned at the performance position, and the movement of a first movable body (e.g., above-board movable body 32A) positioned at the performance position during operation confirmation control toward the origin position is performed on the condition that the second movable body (e.g., below-board movable body 32B) has been detected by the performance position sensor 132SG134, thereby enabling operation confirmation control to be performed optimally.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the power is turned on, if the movable bodies including the first movable body and the second movable body are not positioned at the origin position before the long initial operation control is started in the operation confirmation control, return control is performed to move the movable bodies to their initial positions (for example, short initial operation control of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the above-frame movable body 132SG101), thereby enabling the operation confirmation control to be performed optimally.

Mode 27 (operation confirmation control)
Also, as shown in Figure 57, the under-board movable body 32B provided on the game board 2 and the above-frame movable body 132SG101 provided on the opening and closing door frame 3a are capable of performing initial operations, and when the under-board movable body 32B moves from the origin position to the performance position and stops at the performance position (see Figure 57 (F)), the above-frame movable body 132SG101 moves from the origin position to the performance position, and then moves from the performance position to the origin position (see Figures 57 (G) to (I)).

By doing this, the first movable body (e.g., under-board movable body 32B) placed at the performance position during the operation confirmation control indicates that the operation confirmation control has not ended, and by starting the operation of the second movable body (e.g., above-frame movable body 132SG101) when the first movable body (e.g., below-board movable body 32B) is placed at the performance position, it is possible to prevent the operation confirmation control of the second movable body (e.g., above-frame movable body 132SG101) from being overlooked.

Specifically, frame-side movable bodies such as the frame-top movable body 132SG101 and chance button 631B are easily tampered with because they can be touched by players. Therefore, if they fail to operate normally, just like board-side movable bodies such as the board-top movable body 32A and the board-bottom movable body 32B, and the board-side movable body is forced to start over from its initial operation, the board-side movable body can be intentionally put into a dead-end state (see Figure 113 (A)).

Therefore, for example, as shown in Figure 113 (B), if the frame-side movable body is unable to operate normally, the board-side movable body is retracted, and an error image regarding the malfunction of the frame-side movable body (for example, a caption such as "Please check the frame-side movable body", which is erased once the frame-side movable body is able to operate normally) is displayed on the background image on the display screen of the image display device 5, and if the frame-side movable body is unable to operate normally even after performing the initial operation (frame-side movable body only; operating mode is the same as when the power is turned on) upon error determination up to five times (more times than for the board-side movable body, and the conditions leading up to the dead end are stricter in consideration of the ease of tampering), only the frame-side movable body can be transitioned to a dead end state.

In addition, a performance position sensor 132SG104 (see Figure 2) is provided that can detect when a second movable body (e.g., above-frame movable body 132SG101) is positioned at a performance position, and the movement of a first movable body (e.g., below-board movable body 32B) positioned at a performance position during operation confirmation control toward the origin position is performed on the condition that the second movable body (e.g., below-board movable body 32B) has been detected by the performance position sensor 132SG104, thereby enabling operation confirmation control to be performed optimally.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these examples, and modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention are also included in the present invention.

In addition, while the above embodiment uses a pachinko gaming machine 1 as an example of a gaming machine, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the present invention can also be applied to so-called enclosed gaming machines in which a predetermined number of gaming balls are enclosed and circulatable inside the gaming machine, and the number of loaned balls loaned in response to a loan request from a player and the number of prize balls awarded in response to winning are added, while the number of gaming balls used in play is subtracted and stored. In these enclosed gaming machines, players are awarded scores or points rather than gaming balls, and these awarded scores or points correspond to the gaming value.

In addition, in the above embodiment, spherical gaming balls (pachinko balls) were used as an example of gaming media, but this is not limited to spherical gaming media and may also be non-spherical gaming media such as medals.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine was used as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to slot machines in which, for example, a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using gaming value, one game ends when the variable display result is output to a variable display device that can variably display multiple types of individually identifiable symbols, and a prize can be awarded depending on the variable display result output to the variable display device.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to enclosed gaming machines that enclose gaming media and award points based on winning, as well as slot machines. Furthermore, a gaming machine capable of playing games is one that at least allows games to be played, and is not limited to pachinko gaming machines or slot machines, and can also be a general gaming machine.

The following further describes the implementation of the gaming machine according to the present invention.

[Form 1] (No. 1)
The gaming machine of form 1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The size of the reduced identification information is smaller than that of the decorative identification information, and it is possible to variably display reduced identification information corresponding to each of the plurality of types of decorative identification information (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 executes variably display of small patterns corresponding to decorative patterns),
The variable display of the ornament identification information includes a moving display (e.g., a scrolling display, see FIG. 134 ) that moves the ornament identification information,
The variable display of the reduced identification information is a switching display (e.g., switching display; see FIG. 135(E)) in which the reduced identification information is switched to another reduced identification information without moving the reduced identification information,
In the variable display of the reduced identification information, one piece of decorative identification information is displayed in the variable display of the decorative identification information, and during the period until the display of the one piece of decorative identification information is completed, the reduced identification information can be switched multiple times (for example, during the period Ta2 from when one decorative pattern is displayed until the display of the decorative pattern is completed, the small patterns are switched to small patterns of losing combinations five times, and each small pattern is displayed for a period Ta1 (period Ta1<period Ta2). See FIG. 135(E)).
The display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information is configured by a combination of the decorative identification information (for example, a combination of decorative patterns such as "111" and "326");
The display result of the variable display of the reduced symbol information is configured by a combination of the reduced symbol information (for example, a combination of small symbols such as "111" and "326");
When a non-specific combination, which is a combination of the decorative identification information corresponding to a non-specific display result other than the specific display result, is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information, the reduced identification information is switched so that the combination of the reduced identification information corresponding to the non-specific combination does not become the combination of the reduced identification information corresponding to the non-specific combination before the display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information is derived (for example, when the performance control CPU 120 decides to statically display a confirmed decorative pattern of a losing combination (e.g., "326"), this part switches the display so that the small pattern of the losing combination, which is the same as the decorative pattern "326", is not displayed after starting the variable display of the decorative pattern and before statically displaying the confirmed decorative pattern of the losing combination (e.g., "326"); see FIG. 135(E)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a non-specific combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative identification information, the reduced identification information is switched before the display result of the variable display of decorative identification information is derived so that the combination of reduced identification information in the variable display of reduced identification information does not correspond to the non-specific combination.Therefore, it is not known in advance that a non-specific combination will be derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative identification information from the combination of reduced identification information in the variable display of reduced identification information, and a decrease in interest can be prevented.

[Form 2] (No. 2)
The gaming machine of form 2 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
Light-emitting means (for example, a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, and a movable body lamp 9d),
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information is constituted by a combination of the decorative identification information that has stopped in the valid display area among the plurality of decorative identification information displayed in the display area (for example, a portion that results in a jackpot or a loss depending on a combination of decorative patterns such as "111" and "326" that have stopped and displayed at the stop positions of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R),
When a non-specific combination, which is a combination of the decorative identification information corresponding to a non-specific display result other than the specific display result, is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information, when the decorative identification information is stopped in the effective display area, the decorative identification information can be enlarged from its normal size and then displayed in a manner that returns to the normal size (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 can execute a variable stop action when it temporarily stops and displays a decorative pattern in a variable display based on a miss variable pattern. See Figures 149 to 151, 155, and 156).
When the decoration identification information to be stopped in the effective display area is enlarged and displayed, the decoration identification information that is not located in the effective display area is not enlarged and displayed (see Modification 3 of FIG. 170 ).
During the execution of the variable display of the decorative identification information, predetermined light emission control is repeatedly performed to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode for a predetermined light emission period, and the predetermined light emission control is also continuously performed when the decorative identification information to be stopped in the effective display area is enlarged and displayed (for example, even when the performance control CPU 120 is executing a variable stop action when temporarily stopping a decorative pattern, loop light emission control of the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and movable body lamp 9d is performed. See Figures 155 and 156).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a non-specific combination of decoration identification information corresponding to a non-specific display result is derived as a display result of the variable display of decoration identification information, the decoration identification information stopped in the valid display area is temporarily enlarged to draw the player's attention to the decoration identification information stopped in the valid display area, and even when a non-specific combination that is meaningless to the player is derived, the player's gaze can be kept on the area where the decoration identification information is displayed. Furthermore, when the decoration identification information stopped in the valid display area is enlarged, decoration identification information that is not located in the valid display area is not enlarged, so the player's gaze can be focused on the decoration identification information stopped in the valid display area and the load on display control can be reduced. Furthermore, since the predetermined light-emission control continues even when the decoration identification information stopped in the valid display area is enlarged, the control of the light-emitting means can be simplified.

[Form 3-1] (No. 4-1)
The gaming machine of form 3-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The variable display of the ornament identification information includes a front-moving display (e.g., a scrolling display) in which the ornament identification information is moved from the back side to the front side while increasing transparency, and then disappeared (see FIGS. 141 to 143).
The ornament identification information includes a character image (e.g., a character display unit 002SG052) and a number image (e.g., a number display unit 002SG051),
During the forward movement display of the decoration identification information, other decoration identification information located on the back side of one decoration identification information becomes visible through the one decoration identification information, and the character images of the other decoration identification information are displayed while the number images are not displayed. After the one decoration identification information is erased, the number images of the other decoration identification information are displayed (for example, as shown in Figures 143(A) and 143(B) , between being displayed in a frame-in state in the decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R and being displayed out of the frame, (For example, a decorative pattern (for example, decorative pattern "3") located at the back so as to overlap partially with the decorative pattern "2") may become visible through the decorative pattern "2". In this case, the character in the character display portion 002SG052 of the decorative pattern "3" is displayed, while the number ("3") in the number display portion 002SG051 becomes difficult to see (or is not displayed), and as shown in Figure 143 (C), the decorative pattern "2" is erased and then the number ("3") in the number display portion 002SG051 of the decorative pattern "3" is displayed.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a front-moving display is performed in which decorative identification information is moved from the back side toward the front side while increasing its transparency and then erased, other decorative identification information located behind one decorative identification information can be seen through the first decorative identification information, but in this case, the character image of the other decorative identification information located behind is displayed while the number image is not displayed, and the first decorative identification information is erased before the number image of the other decorative identification information is displayed, so the number image of one decorative identification information and the number image of the other decorative identification information are not displayed overlapping each other, preventing the number image of the first decorative identification information located in the front side from becoming difficult to see.

[Form 3-2] (No. 4-2)
The gaming machine of form 3-2 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The variable display of the ornament identification information includes a front-moving display (e.g., a scrolling display) in which the ornament identification information is moved from the front side to the back side while increasing in transparency, and then disappeared (see FIGS. 144 and 145 ).
The ornament identification information includes a character image (e.g., a character display unit 002SG052) and a number image (e.g., a number display unit 002SG051),
During the forward movement display of the decorative identification information, other decorative identification information located behind one decorative identification information becomes visible through the one decorative identification information, and the character image of the one decorative identification information is displayed while the number image is not displayed. After the other decorative identification information is erased, the number image of the one decorative identification information is displayed. (For example, as shown in Figures 144(G) and 144(H), in the scroll display, the decorative pattern moves in a curved manner from the front side to the back side. Therefore, between the time when the other decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern "2") is displayed in the frame-in display in decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R and the time when the other decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern "3") is displayed out of the frame, the other decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern "2") located behind the one decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern "3") so as to partially overlap the one decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern "3") may become visible through the decorative pattern "3". At this time, the character in character display portion 002SG052 of the decorative pattern "2" is displayed, while the number ("2") in number display portion 002SG051 becomes difficult to see (or is not displayed). Variation 1)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a front-moving display is performed in which decorative identification information is moved from the front side toward the back side while increasing its transparency and then erased, other decorative identification information located behind one decorative identification information can be seen through the one decorative identification information, but in this case, the one decorative identification information located in the front side has its character image displayed while its number image is not displayed, and the other decorative identification information is erased before the number image of the one decorative identification information is displayed, so the number image of the other decorative identification information and the number image of the one decorative identification information do not overlap and this prevents the number image of the other decorative identification information located behind from becoming difficult to see.

[Form 4] (No. 5)
The gaming machine of form 5 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
Light-emitting means (for example, a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, and a movable body lamp 9d),
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The variable display of the ornament identification information includes a rotation display in which the ornament identification information is rotated to repeatedly display the front and back sides of the ornament identification information (see FIGS. 146 and 147 ).
During the rotation display, the decoration identification information is semi-transparent, and when the rotation display stops, the decoration identification information is non-transparent (see FIGS. 146 and 147).
The decoration identification information includes a number image (e.g., number display unit 002SG051),
During the rotation display, the number image on the front side of the decorative identification information, which is in a semi-transparent state, is displayed, while the number image on the back side is not displayed (see FIG. 147 ).
During the execution of the variable display of the decorative identification information, a predetermined light emission control is repeatedly performed to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode for a predetermined light emission period, and the predetermined light emission control is continuously performed even during the rotation display (for example, even when the variable display of the decorative pattern is being executed in a high base state, a light emission pattern of white, blue, and yellow may be repeatedly executed in this order based on a loop light emission control (see FIG. 137(B)) corresponding to the background pattern. Modified example. See FIG. 157).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when the decorative identification information is rotated to repeatedly display the front and back sides of the decorative identification information, the decorative identification information becomes semi-transparent, so that not only the front side but also the back side of the decorative identification information can be seen through the display. In this case, the number images on the front side of the decorative identification information are displayed, but the number images on the back side are not displayed, so the number images on the front side and the number images on the back side of the decorative identification information do not overlap, preventing the number images on the front side from becoming difficult to see. In addition, since the predetermined light emission control is continued even during the rotation display, the control of the light emitting means can be simplified.

[Form 5] (No. 6)
The gaming machine of form 5 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The area in which the decorative identification information is displayed includes a first area (e.g., a left decorative pattern display area 5L), a second area (e.g., a right decorative pattern display area 5R), and a third area (e.g., a middle decorative pattern display area 5C) located between the first area and the second area,
When the specific display result is derived, after a ready-to-win state is reached in which the decoration identification information of the same type is temporarily stopped in the first area and the second area, a specific combination (for example, a predetermined jackpot combination) is reached in which the decoration identification information of the same type as the decoration identification information forming the ready-to-win state is stopped in the third area,
When the reach state is reached, a reach line suggestion effect can be executed in which a reach line suggestion image (e.g., reach line effect display 002SG250) is displayed so as to be superimposed on the decorative identification information temporarily stopped in the first area and the second area and the decorative identification information being variably displayed in the third area, and then erased (e.g., a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 can execute the reach line suggestion effect),
After the reach state is reached, the decorative identification information being variably displayed in the third area is made to be transparent at a first transparency (e.g., first transparency F1) until the reach line suggestion performance is executed, and after the reach line suggestion performance is executed, the decorative identification information being variably displayed in the third area is made to be transparent at a second transparency (e.g., second transparency F2) that is lower than the first transparency (see FIG. 165 ).
After the reach line suggestion performance is executed, the timing at which the decorative identification information being variably displayed in the third area is set to the second transparency is the timing at which the reach line suggestion image is erased from the third area (for example, after the reach line effect display 002SG250 is executed, the timing at which the transmittance (transparency) of the decorative pattern being variably displayed in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C is set to the second transmittance F2 which is lower than the first transmittance F1 before the reach line effect display 002SG250 is executed is the timing after the reach line effect display 002SG250 is erased from the middle decorative pattern display area 5C. See FIGS. 163 to 165).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a reach state is reached, a reach line suggestion image is displayed so as to be superimposed on the decorative identification information stopped in the first area and the second area and the decorative identification information being variably displayed in the third area, and at the timing when the reach line suggestion image is erased from the third area, the decorative identification information being variably displayed in the third area becomes a second transparency lower than the first transparency, so that the decorative identification information being variably displayed in the third area does not interfere with the reach line suggestion image.

[Form 6] (No. 7)
The gaming machine of form 6 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
a light emitting means,
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The area in which the decorative identification information is displayed includes a first area (e.g., a left decorative pattern display area 5L), a second area (e.g., a right decorative pattern display area 5R), and a third area (e.g., a middle decorative pattern display area 5C) located between the first area and the second area,
When the specific display result is derived, after a ready-to-win state is reached in which the decoration identification information of the same type is temporarily stopped in the first area and the second area, a specific combination (for example, a predetermined jackpot combination) is reached in which the decoration identification information of the same type as the decoration identification information forming the ready-to-win state is stopped in the third area,
When the reach state is reached, a reach line suggestion effect can be executed in which a reach line suggestion image (e.g., reach line effect display 002SG250) is displayed so as to be superimposed on the decorative identification information temporarily stopped in the first area and the second area and the decorative identification information being variably displayed in the third area, and then erased (e.g., a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 can execute the reach line suggestion effect),
When the reach line suggestion performance is executed, it is possible to execute an enlarged display for enlarging the decorative identification information temporarily stopped in the first area and the second area, and a separated display for separating the decorative identification information after the enlarged display is executed (see FIGS. 163 to 165 ).
The second period from the start to the end of the distant display is longer than the first period from the start to the end of the enlarged display (for example, the second period te1 from the start to the end of the distant display is longer than the first period td1 from the start to the end of the enlarged display (td1<te1; see FIG. 165 ).
The light emitting means includes a specific light emitting means (e.g., a movable lamp 9d) disposed around the display means,
It is possible to execute a light-off control for turning off the specific light-emitting means while the reach line suggestion performance is being executed (for example, a part for turning off the movable body lamps 9d of the movable bodies 32A, 32B arranged on the periphery (nearby) of the display screen of the image display device 5 when the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250 is being changed. See Figures 163 (F) to (H)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a reach state is reached, a reach line suggestion image is displayed so as to be superimposed on the decorative identification information stopped in the first and second regions and the decorative identification information being variably displayed in the third region, and the decorative identification information stopped in the first and second regions is enlarged and displayed for a first period and then spaced apart for a second period longer than the first period, thereby allowing the player to recognize the decorative identification information that forms the reach state. Also, by turning off the specific light-emitting means around the display means, the reach line suggestion image can be made to stand out more.

[Form 7] (No. 8)
The gaming machine of form 7 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
a light emitting means,
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The area in which the decorative identification information is displayed includes a first area (e.g., a left decorative pattern display area 5L), a second area (e.g., a right decorative pattern display area 5R), and a third area (e.g., a middle decorative pattern display area 5C) located between the first area and the second area,
When the specific display result is derived, after a ready-to-win state is reached in which the decoration identification information of the same type is temporarily stopped in the first area and the second area, a specific combination (for example, a predetermined jackpot combination) is reached in which the decoration identification information of the same type as the decoration identification information forming the ready-to-win state is stopped in the third area,
When the reach state is reached, a reach line suggestion effect can be executed in which a reach line suggestion image (e.g., reach line effect display 002SG250) is displayed so as to be superimposed on the decorative identification information temporarily stopped in the first area and the second area and the decorative identification information being variably displayed in the third area, and then erased (e.g., a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 can execute the reach line suggestion effect),
The light emitting means includes a specific light emitting means (e.g., a movable lamp 9d) disposed around the display means,
It is possible to execute a light-off control for turning off the specific light-emitting means while the reach line suggestion performance is being executed (for example, a part for turning off the movable body lamps 9d of the movable bodies 32A, 32B arranged on the periphery (nearby) of the display screen of the image display device 5 when the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250 is being changed. See Figures 163 (F) to (H)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a reach state is reached, a reach line suggestion image is displayed so as to be superimposed on the decorative identification information stopped in the first and second areas and the decorative identification information being variably displayed in the third area, and by turning off specific light-emitting means around the display means, the reach line suggestion image can be made to stand out more.

[Form 8] (No. 9)
The gaming machine of form 8 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
Light-emitting means (e.g., main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b),
The game control means
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
It is possible to control it into a normal state (for example, a low-probability, low-base state) and a special state (for example, a low-probability, high-base state or a high-probability, high-base state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state and the average variable display period is shorter,
The performance control means
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
When the variable display of the decorative identification information is temporarily stopped in the normal state, a predetermined operation display control is repeatedly performed to operate the decorative identification information in a predetermined operation mode over a first period (for example, when the performance control CPU 120 temporarily stops and displays the decorative symbols at the stop positions of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the low base state, the loop action of the decorative symbols is repeatedly performed until the variable display of the special symbols is completed. See Figures 136(C), 155, and 156).
When the variable display of the decorative identification information is temporarily stopped in the normal state, predetermined light emission control is repeatedly performed to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode over a second period (for example, when the performance control CPU 120 temporarily stops and displays the decorative pattern at the stop position of the decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R in the low base state, the part that repeatedly executes loop light emission control of the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and movable body lamp 9d. See Figures 137(B), 155, and 156).
When the variable display of the decorative identification information is stopped in the special state, the predetermined operation display control is not performed (for example, when the performance control CPU 120 temporarily stops and displays the decorative symbols at the stop positions of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the high base state, the loop action of the decorative symbols is not executed. See FIG. 157).
The second period is longer than the first period (for example, loop action period Tb3<loop light emission period Tb4. See FIG. 137(A)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the normal state, the predetermined action display control is repeatedly performed to prompt the player to change the display of the decorative identification information, while in the special state in which the variable display is likely to be performed, the variable display is not excessively prompted and the player feels annoyed. Furthermore, since the predetermined action display control is repeatedly performed at a shorter cycle than the predetermined light emission control, the decorative identification information can be suitably highlighted.

[Form 9] (No. 10)
The gaming machine of form 9 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
It is possible to control it into a normal state (for example, a low-probability, low-base state) and a special state (for example, a low-probability, high-base state or a high-probability, high-base state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state and the average variable display period is shorter,
Information relating to the variable display of special identification information that has not yet started can be stored as reserved memory information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 stores reserved information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updates the number of reserved memories in the start winning determination process of step S101).
The performance control means
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information is constituted by a combination of the decorative identification information stopped in the valid display area (for example, a portion that results in a jackpot or a loss depending on a combination of decorative patterns such as "111" and "326" stopped and displayed at the stop positions of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R),
In the normal state, when a non-specific combination, which is a combination of the decorative identification information corresponding to a non-specific display result other than the specific display result, is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information, when the decorative identification information is stopped in the effective display area, the decorative identification information can be enlarged from the normal size and then returned to the normal size according to the number of reserved memories stored as the reserved memory information (for example, a part where a variable stop action can be executed when the performance control CPU 120 temporarily stops and displays a decorative pattern. See Figures 149 to 152).
In the special state, when the non-specific combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information, when the decorative identification information is stopped in the effective display area, the decorative identification information is maintained at a normal size regardless of the number of reserved memories stored as the reserved memory information (for example, in a high base state in which the average variable display period is short and the decorative pattern is difficult to see, if a variable display based on a shortened variable pattern is executed regardless of the number of reserved memories, a variable stop action is not executed and the size is maintained and the decorative identification information is displayed as a temporary stop. See Figures 152 and 157).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the normal state, interest is enhanced by providing variations in the movement of the decorative identification information when it stops according to the number of reserved memories, while in the special state in which the average variable display period is short and the decorative identification information is difficult to see, the size is maintained while the decorative identification information is stopped so that its visibility is not impaired.

[Form 10] (No. 11)
The gaming machine of form 10 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
In one presentation mode, a plurality of types of background images including a first background image and a second background image can be switched and displayed (for example, in the first presentation mode, a first background image 002SG081 (see FIG. 153(A1)) showing a daytime cityscape seen from afar and a first predetermined background image 002SG081A (see FIG. 153(A2)) showing a daytime cityscape can be switched and displayed as background images),
When the background image is switched from the first background image to the second background image, a background fade-out display can be executed in which the transparency of the first background image is gradually increased and then the image is erased, and a background fade-in display can be executed in which the transparency of the second background image is gradually decreased while the background fade-out display of the first background image is being executed (for example, a portion in which a cross-fade display is executed in which a fade-out display period A1 of the first background image 002SG081 and a fade-in display period B1 of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A are synchronized; see FIG. 153 ).
When variable display of the decorative identification information is started, an identification information fade-out display can be executed in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually increased and the decorative identification information is erased (for example, a decorative pattern is gradually accelerated after the start of scrolling display to be displayed at high speed, and the transmittance (transparency) increases in proportion to the increase in speed, causing the decorative pattern to be faded out).
When the variable display of the decorative identification information is terminated, an identification information fade-in display can be executed in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually reduced (for example, when the timing for stopping the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the center decorative pattern display area 5C are gradually decelerated and displayed at a slow speed in that order, and the transmittance (transparency) also decreases in proportion to the reduction in speed, resulting in a fade-in display).
The period during which the background fade-out display is performed is longer than the period during which the identification information fade-out display is performed (for example, the fade-out display period A1 during which the first background image 002SG081 is faded out is longer than the fade-out display period A21 from when the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R start to be scrolled until they are displayed at high speed (fade-out display period A1>fade-out display period A21). See FIGS. 155 and 156).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the shorter the fade-out display is performed, the more suddenly the impression is given that the display has disappeared. Therefore, if there is a possibility that the variable display of decorative identification information and the background change are performed at the same time, the fade-out display of identification information is performed in a shorter period of time than the fade-out display of the background, thereby drawing attention to the start of the variable display of decorative identification information.

[Form 11] (No. 12)
The gaming machine of form 11 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
In one presentation mode, a plurality of types of background images including a first background image and a second background image can be switched and displayed (for example, in the first presentation mode, a first background image 002SG081 (see FIG. 153(A1)) showing a daytime cityscape seen from afar and a first predetermined background image 002SG081A (see FIG. 153(A2)) showing a daytime cityscape can be switched and displayed as background images),
When the background image is switched from the first background image to the second background image, a background fade-out display can be executed in which the transparency of the first background image is gradually increased and then the image is erased, and a background fade-in display can be executed in which the transparency of the second background image is gradually decreased while the background fade-out display of the first background image is being executed (for example, a portion in which a cross-fade display is executed in which a fade-out display period A1 of the first background image 002SG081 and a fade-in display period B1 of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A are synchronized; see FIG. 153 ).
When variable display of the decorative identification information is started, an identification information fade-out display can be executed in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually increased and the decorative identification information is erased (for example, a decorative pattern is gradually accelerated after the start of scrolling display to be displayed at high speed, and the transmittance (transparency) increases in proportion to the increase in speed, causing the decorative pattern to be faded out).
When the variable display of the decorative identification information is terminated, an identification information fade-in display can be executed in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually reduced (for example, when the timing for stopping the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the center decorative pattern display area 5C are gradually decelerated and displayed at a slow speed in that order, and the transmittance (transparency) also decreases in proportion to the reduction in speed, resulting in a fade-in display).
The execution period of the identification information fade-out display and the execution period of the background fade-out display are different (for example, a portion where the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-out display period A22 are not executed at the same time. See FIGS. 155 and 156).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by synchronizing the fade-out display of the identification information and the fade-out display of the background, it is possible to prevent the start of variable display of the decoration identification information from becoming difficult to notice.

[Form 12] (No. 13)
A gaming machine of form 12 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
In one presentation mode, a plurality of types of background images including a first background image and a second background image can be switched and displayed (for example, in the first presentation mode, a first background image 002SG081 (see FIG. 153(A1)) showing a daytime cityscape seen from afar and a first predetermined background image 002SG081A (see FIG. 153(A2)) showing a daytime cityscape can be switched and displayed as background images),
When the background image is switched from the first background image to the second background image, a background fade-out display can be executed in which the transparency of the first background image is gradually increased and then the image is erased, and a background fade-in display can be executed in which the transparency of the second background image is gradually decreased while the background fade-out display of the first background image is being executed (for example, a portion in which a cross-fade display is executed in which a fade-out display period A1 of the first background image 002SG081 and a fade-in display period B1 of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A are synchronized; see FIG. 153 ).
When variable display of the decorative identification information is started, an identification information fade-out display can be executed in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually increased and the decorative identification information is erased (for example, a decorative pattern is gradually accelerated after the start of scrolling display to be displayed at high speed, and the transmittance (transparency) increases in proportion to the increase in speed, causing the decorative pattern to be faded out).
When the variable display of the decorative identification information is terminated, an identification information fade-in display can be executed in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually reduced (for example, when the timing for stopping the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the center decorative pattern display area 5C are gradually decelerated and displayed at a slow speed in that order, and the transmittance (transparency) also decreases in proportion to the reduction in speed, resulting in a fade-in display).
The execution period of the background fade-in display is longer than the execution period of the identification information fade-in display (for example, the fade-in display period B1 during which the fade-in display of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A is performed is longer than the fade-in display period B21 from when the display speed of the scrolling display of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R starts to slow down until the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R are temporarily stopped (fade-in display period B1>fade-in display period B21). See FIGS. 155 and 156).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the fade-in display basically gives the impression of appearing suddenly the shorter the period in which it is performed, so if there is a possibility that the variable display of decorative identification information and the background change are performed at the same time, the fade-in display of identification information is performed in a shorter period of time than the fade-in display of the background, thereby drawing attention to the end of the variable display of decorative identification information.

[Form 13] (No. 14)
The gaming machine of form 13 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
In one presentation mode, a plurality of types of background images including a first background image and a second background image can be switched and displayed (for example, in the first presentation mode, a first background image 002SG081 (see FIG. 153(A1)) showing a daytime cityscape seen from afar and a first predetermined background image 002SG081A (see FIG. 153(A2)) showing a daytime cityscape can be switched and displayed as background images),
When the background image is switched from the first background image to the second background image, a background fade-out display can be executed in which the transparency of the first background image is gradually increased and then the image is erased, and a background fade-in display can be executed in which the transparency of the second background image is gradually decreased while the background fade-out display of the first background image is being executed (for example, a portion in which a cross-fade display is executed in which a fade-out display period A1 of the first background image 002SG081 and a fade-in display period B1 of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A are synchronized; see FIG. 153 ).
When variable display of the decorative identification information is started, an identification information fade-out display can be executed in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually increased and the decorative identification information is erased (for example, a decorative pattern is gradually accelerated after the start of scrolling display to be displayed at high speed, and the transmittance (transparency) increases in proportion to the increase in speed, causing the decorative pattern to be faded out).
When the variable display of the decorative identification information is terminated, an identification information fade-in display can be executed in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually reduced (for example, when the timing for stopping the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the center decorative pattern display area 5C are gradually decelerated and displayed at a slow speed in that order, and the transmittance (transparency) also decreases in proportion to the reduction in speed, resulting in a fade-in display).
The execution period of the identification information fade-in display and the execution period of the background fade-in display are different (for example, a portion where the fade-in display period B1 and the fade-in display period B21 are not executed at the same time. See FIGS. 155 and 156).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by synchronizing the fade-in display of the identification information and the fade-in display of the background, it is possible to prevent the user from being confused about the end of the variable display of the decoration identification information.

[Form 14] (No. 15)
A gaming machine of form 14 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
A specific effect can be executed in which the variable display is temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the decorative identification information until the display result is derived and displayed, and then the variable display is resumed (for example, a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 can execute a "pseudo consecutive announcement" that determines whether or not the variable display will be resumed after the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern until the display result is derived and displayed, in other words, whether or not one variable display will be made to look like multiple variable displays in a pseudo manner).
The decorative identification information has decorative identification information of multiple colors (e.g., blue, red) including a number image,
When the variable display is resumed in the specific performance, a number image (e.g., pseudo consecutive number display 002SG212) that can identify the number of times the variable display has resumed can be displayed in multiple colors (e.g., blue, red) (see FIGS. 161 and 162).
In the specific performance, there are cases where the number image of the decorative identification pattern temporarily displayed and the number display of the number image when the variable display is resumed are the same type, resulting in a first combination where the decorative identification pattern temporarily displayed and the number image are different in color, and there are cases where the number image of the decorative identification pattern temporarily displayed and the number image are different in color, resulting in a second combination where the number image of the decorative identification pattern temporarily displayed and the number display of the number image when the variable display is resumed, and both the decorative identification pattern temporarily displayed and the number image are the same type,
In the specific presentation, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the variable display is resumed in the second combination than when the variable display is resumed in the first combination (for example, in the pseudo consecutive prediction, there is a case where the display colors of the decorative symbols temporarily displayed and the pseudo consecutive number of times are not the same, and a case where the display colors of the decorative symbols temporarily displayed and the pseudo consecutive number of times are the same, and there is a case where the display colors of the decorative symbols temporarily displayed and the pseudo consecutive number of times are the same, and there is a higher probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state when the variable display is resumed in the second combination than when the variable display is resumed in the first combination in the pseudo consecutive prediction).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, interest in the game is increased because it is possible to draw attention not only to whether or not a specific effect is executed, but also to the combination of the number image of the decorative identification information temporarily displayed and the number and color of the count image if the specific effect is executed.

[Form 15] (No. 16)
A gaming machine of form 15 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The size of the reduced identification information is smaller than that of the decorative identification information, and it is possible to variably display reduced identification information corresponding to each of the plurality of types of decorative identification information (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 executes variably display of small patterns corresponding to decorative patterns),
When the variable display is not being executed, a waiting effect can be executed to display a predetermined image (for example, a portion that can execute a "waiting-for-customer demo effect" when a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) has passed since the effect control CPU 120 received a customer waiting demo designation command output from the main board 11 without receiving a control command such as a variable display start designation command. See FIG. 159 ).
When the standby effect is being performed, the decorative identification information is not displayed, while the reduced identification information continues to be displayed (see FIG. 159 ).
If the start condition for the variable display is met while the waiting effect is being executed, the variable display of the reduced identification information is started before the predetermined image is hidden, and then, after the predetermined image is hidden, the decorative identification information is displayed and the variable display is started (for example, if a start winning occurs while the customer waiting demo effect is being executed, the variable display of the small symbols is started before the customer waiting demo effect image 002SG400 is hidden, then the customer waiting demo effect image 002SG400 is hidden and switched to the background image corresponding to the effect mode at that time (here, the first background image 002SG081 corresponding to the first effect mode), and then the decorative symbols are displayed and the scrolling display is started. See FIG. 160).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the variable display of the decorative identification information begins after the specified image is hidden, allowing the player to recognize that the variable display has begun when the conditions for starting the variable display are met, but since the variable display of the reduced identification information begins before the specified image is hidden, it is possible to ensure a display that corresponds to the variable display of the specific identification information.

[Form 16] (No. 17)
A gaming machine of form 16 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means
Execute variable display of the specific identification information based on a plurality of types of variable display patterns (see FIG. 120) (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
It is possible to control it into a normal state (for example, a low-probability, low-base state) and a special state (for example, a low-probability, high-base state or a high-probability, high-base state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state and the average variable display period is shorter,
The performance control means
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information (e.g., decorative patterns) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (e.g., a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
It is possible to display a hold display corresponding to the variable display of special identification information that has not yet started (for example, the part where the performance control CPU 120 performs the process of displaying the first hold display 002SG101 or the second hold display 002SG102 in the special chart hold memory display area 5U in the hold display update process of step S161).
It is possible to display a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information being executed in the corresponding display area (for example, the part where the performance control CPU 120 performs processing to display the active display 002SG103 in the active display area 5F in the pending display update processing of step S161).
When the variable display of the specific identification information starts, it is possible to perform a switching display in which the reserved display corresponding to the variable display is switched to the corresponding display (for example, the CPU 120 for performance control performs a shift display in which the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special chart reserved memory display area 5U is moved to the active display area 5F and switched to the active display 002SG103. See FIG. 138).
As the variable display of the decorative identification information, it is possible to perform a moving display (e.g., a scrolling display, see FIG. 134) that moves the decorative identification information, and a pre-action display (e.g., a change start action, see FIG. 136(A)) that operates the decorative identification information in a manner different from the moving display before starting the moving display,
In the normal state, when the switching display is being performed, the pre-operation display is performed (for example, the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special reserved memory display area 5U is moved to the active display area 5F and displayed, and the scroll display (variable display) of the decorative pattern does not start until the reserved shift display period until it is switched and displayed as the active display 002SG103 ends, the above-mentioned variable start action is executed, and the scroll display (variable display) of the decorative pattern starts after the reserved shift display period ends. See Figures 139 (C) to (F)).
The variable display of the decorative identification information is executed based on variable display pattern information corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display patterns transmitted from the game control means (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of the decorative pattern based on a variable pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 in the performance control process processing of step S76),
It is possible to perform the common switching display when the variable display is executed based on the first type of variable display pattern information and when the variable display is executed based on the second type of variable display pattern information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes the first pending display 002SG101 or the shift display that switches the first pending display 002SG101 to the active display 002SG103 in a common manner when the variable display is executed based on the first type of variable pattern designation command (for example, a non-reach variable pattern designation command) and when the variable display is executed based on the second type of variable pattern designation command (for example, a reach variable pattern designation command). See FIG. 138).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when the variable display of the specific identification information begins, a switching display is performed to switch the reserved display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display, and while the switching display is being performed, a pre-operation display is performed to operate the decorative identification information in a manner different from the moving display, thereby making effective use of the time required for the switching display. Furthermore, since the pre-operation display is performed when the switching display is being performed in the normal state, the average variable display period is longer than in the special state, and the normal state tends to be monotonous, making it more interesting when the variable display of the decorative identification information begins. Furthermore, since a common switching display is performed even when variable displays based on different types of variable display patterns are executed, the number of switching display patterns can be reduced.

[Form 17] (No. 18)
The gaming machine of form 17 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means
Execute variable display of the specific identification information based on a plurality of types of variable display patterns (see FIG. 120) (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
It is possible to control it into a normal state (for example, a low-probability, low-base state) and a special state (for example, a low-probability, high-base state or a high-probability, high-base state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state and the average variable display period is shorter,
The performance control means
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information (e.g., decorative patterns) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (e.g., a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
It is possible to display a hold display corresponding to the variable display of special identification information that has not yet started (for example, the part where the performance control CPU 120 performs the process of displaying the first hold display 002SG101 or the second hold display 002SG102 in the special chart hold memory display area 5U in the hold display update process of step S161).
It is possible to display a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information being executed in the corresponding display area (for example, the part where the performance control CPU 120 performs processing to display the active display 002SG103 in the active display area 5F in the pending display update processing of step S161).
When the variable display of the specific identification information starts, it is possible to perform a switching display in which the reserved display corresponding to the variable display is switched to the corresponding display (for example, the CPU 120 for performance control performs a shift display in which the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special chart reserved memory display area 5U is moved to the active display area 5F and switched to the active display 002SG103. See FIG. 138).
As the variable display of the decorative identification information, it is possible to perform a moving display (e.g., a scrolling display, see FIG. 134) that moves the decorative identification information, and a pre-action display (e.g., a change start action, see FIG. 136(A)) that operates the decorative identification information in a manner different from the moving display before starting the moving display,
In the normal state, when the switching display is being performed, the pre-operation display is performed, and the scrolling display is not started until the switching display is completed (for example, the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special reserved memory display area 5U is moved to the active display area 5F, and the scrolling display (variable display) of the decorative pattern is not started until the reserved shift display period until it is switched and displayed as the active display 002SG103 is completed, the above-mentioned variable start action is executed, and the scrolling display (variable display) of the decorative pattern is started after the reserved shift display period has completed. See Figures 139 (C) to (F)).
The variable display of the decorative identification information is executed based on variable display pattern information corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display patterns transmitted from the game control means (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of the decorative pattern based on a variable pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 in the performance control process processing of step S76),
It is possible to perform the common switching display when the variable display is executed based on the first type of variable display pattern information and when the variable display is executed based on the second type of variable display pattern information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes the first pending display 002SG101 or the shift display that switches the first pending display 002SG101 to the active display 002SG103 in a common manner when the variable display is executed based on the first type of variable pattern designation command (for example, a non-reach variable pattern designation command) and when the variable display is executed based on the second type of variable pattern designation command (for example, a reach variable pattern designation command). See FIG. 138).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, upon the start of variable display of specific identification information, a switching display is performed to switch the reserved display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display. Furthermore, during the switching display, a pre-operation display is performed to operate the decorative identification information in a manner different from the moving display before starting the moving display of the decorative identification information. This allows for effective use of the time required for the switching display. Furthermore, since the moving display of the decorative identification information does not start until the switching display ends and the corresponding display is displayed in the corresponding display area, the sense of incongruity caused by the moving display of the decorative identification information starting before the corresponding display is displayed can be eliminated. Furthermore, since the pre-operation display is performed when the switching display is performed in the normal state, the average variable display period is longer than in the special state, which can easily become monotonous, and the start of the variable display of the decorative identification information can be more interesting. Furthermore, since a common switching display is performed even when variable displays based on different types of variable display patterns are executed, the number of switching display patterns can be reduced.

[Form 18] (No. 19)
The gaming machine of form 18 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means
Execute variable display of the specific identification information based on a plurality of types of variable display patterns (see FIG. 120) (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
It is possible to control it into a normal state (for example, a low-probability, low-base state) and a special state (for example, a low-probability, high-base state or a high-probability, high-base state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state and the average variable display period is shorter,
The performance control means
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information (e.g., decorative patterns) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (e.g., a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
It is possible to display a hold display corresponding to the variable display of special identification information that has not yet started (for example, the part where the performance control CPU 120 performs the process of displaying the first hold display 002SG101 or the second hold display 002SG102 in the special chart hold memory display area 5U in the hold display update process of step S161).
It is possible to display a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information being executed in the corresponding display area (for example, the part where the performance control CPU 120 performs processing to display the active display 002SG103 in the active display area 5F in the pending display update processing of step S161).
When the variable display of the specific identification information starts, it is possible to perform a switching display in which the reserved display corresponding to the variable display is switched to the corresponding display (for example, the CPU 120 for performance control performs a shift display in which the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special chart reserved memory display area 5U is moved to the active display area 5F and switched to the active display 002SG103. See FIG. 138).
As the variable display of the decorative identification information, it is possible to perform a moving display (e.g., a scrolling display, see FIG. 134) that moves the decorative identification information, and a pre-action display (e.g., a change start action, see FIG. 136(A)) that operates the decorative identification information in a manner different from the moving display before starting the moving display,
In the special state, when the switching display is being performed, the pre-operation display is performed (for example, the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special reserved memory display area 5U is moved to the active display area 5F and displayed, and the scrolling display (variable display) of the decorative pattern does not start until the reserved shift display period until it is switched and displayed as the active display 002SG103 ends, the above-mentioned variable start action is executed, and the scrolling display (variable display) of the decorative pattern starts after the reserved shift display period ends. Variant example).
The display of the decorative identification information is performed based on variable display pattern information corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display patterns transmitted from the game control means (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of the decorative pattern based on a variable pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 in the performance control process processing of step S76).

It is possible to perform the common switching display when the variable display is executed based on the first type of variable display pattern information and when the variable display is executed based on the second type of variable display pattern information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes the first pending display 002SG101 or the shift display that switches the first pending display 002SG101 to the active display 002SG103 in a common manner when the variable display is executed based on the first type of variable pattern designation command (for example, a non-reach variable pattern designation command) and when the variable display is executed based on the second type of variable pattern designation command (for example, a reach variable pattern designation command). See FIG. 138).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when the variable display of the specific identification information starts, a switching display is performed to switch the reserved display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display, and while the switching display is being performed, a pre-action display is performed to operate the decorative identification information in a manner different from the moving display, thereby making effective use of the time required to perform the switching display. Furthermore, since the pre-action display is performed when the switching display is being performed in a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state, the start of the variable display of the decorative identification information in the special state can be made more exciting. Furthermore, since a common switching display is performed even when variable displays based on different types of variable display patterns are executed, the number of switching display patterns can be reduced.

[Form 19] (No. 20)
The gaming machine of form 19 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means
Execute variable display of the specific identification information based on a plurality of types of variable display patterns (see FIG. 120) (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
It is possible to control it into a normal state (for example, a low-probability, low-base state) and a special state (for example, a low-probability, high-base state or a high-probability, high-base state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state and the average variable display period is shorter,
The performance control means
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information (e.g., decorative patterns) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (e.g., a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
It is possible to display a hold display corresponding to the variable display of special identification information that has not yet started (for example, the part where the performance control CPU 120 performs the process of displaying the first hold display 002SG101 or the second hold display 002SG102 in the special chart hold memory display area 5U in the hold display update process of step S161).
It is possible to display a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information being executed in the corresponding display area (for example, the part where the performance control CPU 120 performs processing to display the active display 002SG103 in the active display area 5F in the pending display update processing of step S161).
When the variable display of the specific identification information starts, it is possible to perform a switching display in which the reserved display corresponding to the variable display is switched to the corresponding display (for example, the CPU 120 for performance control performs a shift display in which the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special chart reserved memory display area 5U is moved to the active display area 5F and switched to the active display 002SG103. See FIG. 138).
As the variable display of the decorative identification information, it is possible to perform a moving display (e.g., a scrolling display, see FIG. 134) that moves the decorative identification information, and a pre-action display (e.g., a change start action, see FIG. 136(A)) that operates the decorative identification information in a manner different from the moving display before starting the moving display,
In the special state, when the switching display is being performed, the pre-operation display is performed, and the moving display is not started until the switching display is completed (for example, the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special reserved memory display area 5U is moved to the active display area 5F, and the scrolling display (variable display) of the decorative pattern is not started until the reserved shift display period until it is switched and displayed as the active display 002SG103 is completed, and the above-mentioned variable start action is executed, and the scrolling display (variable display) of the decorative pattern is started after the reserved shift display period has completed. Variant example).
The display of the decorative identification information is performed based on variable display pattern information corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display patterns transmitted from the game control means (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of the decorative pattern based on a variable pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 in the performance control process processing of step S76).

It is possible to perform the same switching display when the variable display is executed based on the first type of variable display pattern information and when the variable display is executed based on the second type of variable display pattern information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes a shift display that switches the first pending display 002SG101 or the first pending display 002SG101 to the active display 002SG103 in a common manner when the variable display is executed based on the first type of variable pattern designation command (for example, a non-reach variable pattern designation command) and when the variable display is executed based on the second type of variable pattern designation command (for example, a reach variable pattern designation command). See FIG. 138).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when the variable display of a specific identification information begins, a switching display is performed to switch the reserved display corresponding to the variable display to a corresponding display. Furthermore, during the switching display, a pre-action display is performed to operate the decorative identification information in a manner different from the moving display before starting the moving display of the decorative identification information. This allows the time required for the switching display to be effectively utilized. Furthermore, since the moving display of the decorative identification information does not begin until the switching display ends and the corresponding display is displayed in the corresponding display area, the sense of incongruity caused by the moving display of the decorative identification information beginning before the corresponding display is displayed can be eliminated. Furthermore, since the pre-action display is performed when the switching display is performed in a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state, the start of the variable display of the decorative identification information in the special state can be made more exciting. Furthermore, since a common switching display is performed even when variable displays based on different types of variable display patterns are executed, the number of switching display patterns can be reduced.

[Form 20] (No. 21)
The gaming machine of form 20 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
It is possible to control to one of a plurality of presentation modes (for example, the first presentation mode to the fourth presentation mode) including the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode,
When variable display of the decorative identification information is started, a fade-out display can be executed in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually increased and the decorative identification information is erased (for example, a portion in which the decorative pattern is gradually accelerated after the start of scrolling display to be displayed at high speed, and the transmittance (transparency) also increases in proportion to the increase in speed, and the decorative pattern is faded out).
In the first presentation mode, a moving display is executed to move the decoration identification information as a variable display of the decoration identification information (see FIGS. 133(A1) and (A2)).
In the second presentation mode, a special variable display different in form from the moving display is executed as the variable display of the decoration identification information (see FIGS. 133(B1) and (B2)).
The execution period of the fade-out display when the special variable display is executed in the second presentation mode is longer than the execution period of the fade-out display when the moving display is executed in the first presentation mode (for example, the fade-out display period A22 when the scrolling display is executed in the second presentation mode is longer than the fade-out display period A21 when the scrolling display is executed in the first presentation mode (fade-out display period A21<fade-out display period A22. See FIGS. 158(A) and 158(B))).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second presentation mode, not only is the manner of variable display of the decorative identification information different from that in the first presentation mode, but the fade-out display period from the start of variable display to the erasure of the decorative identification information is longer, so that the decorative identification information can be focused on for a longer period of time.

[Form 21] (No. 22)
The gaming machine of form 21 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
It is possible to control to one of a plurality of presentation modes (for example, the first presentation mode to the fourth presentation mode) including the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode,
When variable display of the decorative identification information is started, a fade-out display can be executed in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually increased and the decorative identification information is erased (for example, a portion in which the decorative pattern is gradually accelerated after the start of scrolling display to be displayed at high speed, and the transmittance (transparency) also increases in proportion to the increase in speed, and the decorative pattern is faded out).
The variable display pattern of the decoration identification information can be determined to be any one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns,
The execution period of the fade-out display differs between a case where a predetermined variable display pattern is determined in the first presentation mode and a case where the predetermined variable display pattern is determined in the second presentation mode (for example, the fade-out display periods A21 and A22 differ between a case where a non-reach miss variable pattern PA1-1 is determined in the first presentation mode and a case where a non-reach miss variable pattern PA1-1 is determined in the second presentation mode. See FIGS. 158(A) and 158(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a predetermined variable display pattern is determined, the fade-out execution period differs between when the display is controlled in the first presentation mode and when the display is controlled in the second presentation mode, making it difficult for the player to predict that the predetermined variable display pattern is determined, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 22] (No. 23)
The gaming machine of form 22 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The ornament identification information includes a character image (e.g., a character display section 002SG052) and a related information image (e.g., an information display section 002SG053) that is information related to the character of the character image,
The variable display period includes a pre-variable display period from when the variable display start condition is met until the decorative identification information starts to be variable displayed, and a post-variable display period after the decorative identification information starts to be variable displayed (for example, the variable display period of a special pattern includes a pre-variable display period from when the variable display of the special pattern and small pattern starts until the scrolling display of the decorative pattern starts, and a post-variable display period after the scrolling display of the decorative pattern starts).
the character image is displayed in the pre-variable display period and the post-variable display period,
The related information image is erased after being displayed in the pre-variable display period and before the post-variable display period begins (for example, the name of the character (character related information) displayed in the information display unit 002SG053 is erased after being displayed in the pre-variable display period, that is, when the variable start action is being executed, and before the post-variable display period begins, that is, before the scrolling display of the decorative pattern begins. See FIGS. 136(A) and 139).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by drawing attention to the related information image before the variable display of the decorative identification information starts, i.e., while it is statically displayed, the player can deepen his/her understanding of the character. Also, by erasing the related information image before the variable display starts, the player can focus attention on the variable display, preview effects, etc. rather than the related information image.

[Form 23] (No. 24)
The gaming machine of form 23 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
It is possible to control it into a normal state (for example, a low-probability, low-base state) and a special state (for example, a low-probability, high-base state or a high-probability, high-base state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state and the average variable display period is shorter,
The performance control means
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
In the normal state, it is possible to control to one of a plurality of presentation modes including a first presentation mode (e.g., first presentation mode) and a second presentation mode (e.g., second presentation mode) (e.g., first presentation mode to fourth presentation mode. See FIG. 133 ),
In the special state, it is possible to control to a presentation mode including a third presentation mode (for example, a third presentation mode or a fourth presentation mode),
The ornament identification information includes a character image (e.g., a character display section 002SG052) and a related information image (e.g., an information display section 002SG053) that is information related to the character of the character image,
In the first presentation mode, the decoration identification information is displayed in a manner including the character image and the related information image (see FIG. 139 ).
In the second and third presentation modes, the decoration identification information is displayed without including the related information image (see FIGS. 141, 142, and 146).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the first presentation mode, the related information image is displayed to draw the player's attention to the related information image, thereby allowing the player to deepen their understanding of the character, while in the second and third presentation modes, the related information image is erased, allowing the player to focus more on the variable display and preview presentation rather than the related information image.

[Form 24] (No. 25)
The gaming machine of form 24 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
It is possible to control it into a normal state (for example, a low-probability, low-base state) and a special state (for example, a low-probability, high-base state or a high-probability, high-base state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state and the average variable display period is shorter,
The performance control means
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The decoration identification information includes a number image (e.g., number display unit 002SG061),
When the normal background image is displayed, it is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state will be achieved (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 can execute an SP reach effect that notifies whether or not a jackpot will be achieved),
In the notification performance, a specific background image (for example, a fifth background image 002SG085) different from the normal background image is displayed,
When the notification effect is executed in a variable display in which the specific display result is derived as a result of the variable display, a combination of decorative identification information corresponding to the specific display result is displayed when the specific background image is displayed in the notification effect (for example, in an SP reach effect, when the fifth background image 002SG085 corresponding to the SP reach effect is displayed as the background image, a combination of symbols that determine a jackpot (for example, "222") is temporarily stopped and displayed (see FIG. 166(F)),
As the notification effect ends, the specific background image is erased and the normal background image is displayed, and while the normal background image is displayed, a combination of decorative identification information corresponding to the specific display result is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 166(G), as the SP reach effect ends, the fifth background image 002SG085 is hidden and the first background image 002SG081 is displayed, and while the first background image 002SG081 is displayed, a combination of symbols that determine a jackpot (for example, "222") is temporarily displayed in a stopped state).
a specific image (e.g., specific image 002SG075) is displayed in an operational state adjacent to the number image of the combination of decorative identification information corresponding to the specific display result displayed when the normal background image is displayed;
In the special state, the specific image is not displayed (for example, in the low base state, the specific image 002SG075 showing a flame is displayed in the number display section 002SG051 of the combination of jackpot confirmation decorative symbols displayed after the end of the SP reach effect (see Figures 166 (H) and (I)), while in the high base state, the specific image 002SG075 showing a flame is not displayed in the number display section 002SG051 of the combination of jackpot confirmation decorative symbols displayed after the end of the SP reach effect (see Figures 167 (P) and (S))).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the normal state, the effect of the presentation is enhanced and made more exciting by displaying a specific image in motion relative to the number image of the decorative identification information displayed after the end of the notification presentation, but in the special state in which the average variable display period is short, the specific image is not displayed in motion relative to the number image of the decorative identification information displayed after the end of the notification presentation, thereby giving a sense of speed to the variable display.

[Form 25] (No. 18-2)
A gaming machine of aspect 25 is the gaming machine according to aspect 17 or aspect 18,
The performance control means
When the corresponding display (e.g., active display 002SG103) corresponding to the variable display displayed in the corresponding display area (e.g., active display area 5F) is erased based on the completion of the variable display of the specific identification information, an erasure effect display (e.g., erasure effect 002SG110) can be displayed to emphasize that the corresponding display has been erased,
If the hold display is displayed when the erase effect display is displayed, the erase effect display continues to be displayed until the variable display corresponding to the hold display starts (for example, the erase effect 002SG110 continues to be displayed even after the active display 002SG103 is erased, and is erased when the next variable display corresponding to the first hold display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left starts, as shown below. See FIG. 138 (B3)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by not creating a blank period in the presentation between the end of a variable display and the start of the next variable display, it is possible to prevent the interest in the presentation from declining. Also, the erasure effect display allows the player to recognize that the corresponding display corresponding to the ended variable display has been erased, and the display of a new corresponding display allows the player to recognize that a new variable display has started.

[Form 26] (No. 18-3)
A gaming machine of aspect 26 is the gaming machine according to aspect 17 or aspect 18,
The area in which the decorative identification information is displayed includes a first area (e.g., a left decorative pattern display area 5L), a second area (e.g., a right decorative pattern display area 5R), and a third area (e.g., a middle decorative pattern display area 5C) located between the first area and the second area,
In the normal state, the decoration identification information is displayed in a smaller size in the third area than in the first area and the second area (see, for example, FIG. 132 );
In the special state, the decorative identification information in the first area, the second area, and the third area is displayed in the same size (see, for example, FIG. 132 );
The third area in the special state is disposed closer to the center of the display area of the display means than the third area in the normal state (see, for example, FIG. 132).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the normal state, the decorative identification information in the first and second areas is made to look larger, and the decorative identification information in the third area is shifted to create a sense of depth and enhance interest, while in the special state in which the average variable display period is short, the decorative identification information is positioned near the center of the display area, thereby increasing the degree of recognition of the decorative identification information.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which also applies to the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

Next, an embodiment of a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. In the following, the front side of Figure 114 will be referred to as the front (front face) side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the back side will be referred to as the rear (rear face) side, and the description will be based on the up, down, left, and right directions when viewing the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the front side. Note that the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment is the surface facing the player playing on the pachinko gaming machine 1. Furthermore, in describing each step in the flowchart, for example, "Step S1" may be abbreviated as "S1" or "002SGS1," and "Normal Reach" may be abbreviated as "N Reach" and "Super Reach" as "SP Reach."

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
Figure 114 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is broadly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. A gaming area is formed on the gaming board 2, and gaming balls as gaming media are shot into this gaming area by being launched from a predetermined ball launching device.

Note that "variable display" of special symbols refers to, for example, the variable display of multiple types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described below). Variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. When special symbols or the normal symbols described below vary, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. When decorative symbols described below vary, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that variation also includes the display of a certain symbol flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as the display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described below). Note that variable display is sometimes referred to as variable display or variation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as the "first special symbol," and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as the "second special symbol." A special symbol game using the first special symbol is also referred to as the "first special symbol game," and a special symbol game using the second special symbol is also referred to as the "second special symbol game." There may be only one type of special symbol display device that variably displays special symbols.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or organic EL (electroluminescence) display, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, a variable display of multiple types of decorative symbols (such as symbols showing numbers, etc.) as decorative identification information different from the special symbols is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Note that the special symbol games and variable display of decorative symbols that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

In addition, a display area 5S is provided in the upper left corner of the display screen of the image display device 5 for displaying the first reserved memory number (for example, the number "0"), the second reserved memory number (for example, the number "4"), and small symbols corresponding to the decorative symbols, and the small symbols are displayed variably in response to the variable display of the decorative symbols.

In addition, the first reserved memory count, second reserved memory count, reserved display, small symbols, error display (not shown) indicating an error state that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1, right-hit notification image 002SG201 (see Figure 133) that prompts the player to perform a right-hit operation, and remaining time-saving display 002SG202 (see Figure 133) that indicates the number of remaining time-saving plays may be displayed in front of (higher layer than) the effect images such as characters, thereby preventing overlapping of the effect images and reducing the visibility of the first reserved memory count, second reserved memory count, small symbols, and error display, while decorative symbols may be displayed behind (lower layer than) the effect images to prevent overlapping of the decorative symbols and reducing the visibility of the effect images.

The small symbol is also referred to as the fourth symbol. The fourth symbol is a symbol indicating that a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is being variably displayed, and is variably displayed by a certain operation in a manner that is always visible on a display device such as the image display device 5. The variably displayed fourth symbol makes it possible to determine whether or not a variably displayed symbol is currently being displayed, even if the decorative symbol is difficult to recognize, such as when the effect content, including the variably displayed decorative symbol, momentarily disappears from the screen, or when movable bodies 32A and 32B obscure all or part of the screen of the image display device 5. Based on receiving the first variable display start command, the effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 to variably display the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol. Based on receiving the second variable display start command, the effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 to variably display the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol.

In addition, the pattern displayed on a fourth pattern display device provided in a location other than the image display device 5 (such as the special variable winning ball device 7, which is a predetermined location on the game board 2), such as the first special symbol LED or second special symbol LED, is also referred to as the fourth symbol.

Display areas (special symbol pending memory display area 5U, active display area 5F) are provided at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying pending displays corresponding to variable displays whose execution is pending and active displays corresponding to variable displays that are currently being executed. The pending displays and active displays are collectively referred to as variable display-compatible displays corresponding to variable displays. Note that in this embodiment, a special symbol pending memory display area 5U is provided that is common to the first and second special symbols; however, a first special symbol pending memory display area that displays a first pending display representing a variable display whose execution of the first special symbol is pending, and a second special symbol pending memory display area that displays a second pending display representing a variable display whose execution of the second special symbol is pending may also be provided separately.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, each consisting of multiple LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold indicator 25A displays the number of first hold memories by the number of lit LEDs. The second hold indicator 25B displays the number of second hold memories by the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided to the right of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept open to allow game balls to enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning opening, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable prize ball device 6B (a standard electric device) forms a second start prize opening that changes between a closed and an open state due to the solenoid 81 (see FIG. 115). The variable prize ball device 6B, for example, comprises an electric device with a movable piece that can be opened and closed. When the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable piece is in an upright position, thereby creating a closed state in which game balls cannot enter the second start prize opening (also referred to as the second start prize opening being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable piece of the variable prize ball device 6B is in a tilted position, thereby creating an open state in which game balls can enter the second start prize opening (also referred to as the second start prize opening being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start prize opening, a predetermined number of prize balls (e.g., three) are paid out and the second special game can be initiated. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to the above, as long as it can change between a closed state and an open state.

General winning openings 10 are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in Figure 114, three locations at the bottom left of the game area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), and are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 with a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 115), and the large winning opening door forms the large winning opening as a specific area that can be switched between an open state and a closed state.

As an example, in the special variable prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize door (for the special electric device) is in the off state, the large prize door closes the large prize door, preventing game balls from entering (passing through) the large prize door. On the other hand, in the special variable prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize door is in the on state, the large prize door opens the large prize door, making it easier for game balls to enter the large prize door.

When a gaming ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of gaming balls (for example, 14) are paid out as prize balls. When a gaming ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a gaming ball enters, for example, the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10.

When a game ball enters any of the prize slots, including the general prize slot 10, it is also referred to as a "win." In particular, a win at a start slot (first start slot, second start slot) is also referred to as a start slot.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in Figure 114, at the bottom left of the play area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like, and displays a variety of normal symbols as normal identification information that differs from special symbols. Normal symbols are represented by numbers from "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". Normal symbols may also include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This type of variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

To the right of the image display device 5, there is a passing gate 41 through which the game ball can pass. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a regular game is executed.

A regular symbol pending indicator 25C is provided below the regular symbol display 20. The regular symbol pending indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the regular symbol pending memory count, which is the number of regular symbol games pending execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is equipped with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls as they flow down, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L and 8R are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3 for playing and outputting sound effects, etc. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 on the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right of the main lamp 9a to surround the gaming area. Furthermore, an attacca lamp 9c is provided near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the gaming board 2.

Moveable bodies 32A and 32B that operate in accordance with the effects are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2 (above and below the image display device 5 in Figure 114). Furthermore, movable body lamps 9d are provided on movable bodies 32A and 32B. These movable body lamps 9d, together with the aforementioned main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and attacca lamp 9c, are sometimes collectively referred to as the game effect lamps 9. Furthermore, these main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d are constructed to include LEDs.

A ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided at the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3. The ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is operated by the player or the like to launch gaming balls toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

A ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided at a predetermined position in the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or gaming balls loaned from a predetermined ball loaning machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may also be provided with a payout section (ball supply tray) separate from the upper tray, from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the play area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by a player. Operation of the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see Figure 115).

Push buttons 31B are provided at predetermined positions on the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, allowing players to issue specific commands by pressing them. Operations on the push buttons 31B are detected by push sensors 35B (see Figure 115).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

(Outline of game progress)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player rotating the ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 while the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on that passage cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on that passage is put on hold up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed, the normal symbol display result will be "normal winning." On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as the confirmed normal symbol, the normal symbol display result will be "normal losing." When a "normal winning" occurs, opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B.

Furthermore, if a game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when a special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to the jackpot game state described below (when a start winning occurs but the special game based on that start winning cannot be played immediately), the execution of the special game based on that entry will be suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In special game games, if a specific special symbol (a jackpot symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol will vary depending on the type of jackpot, as described below) is displayed as the confirmed special symbol, it is a "jackpot," and if a special symbol other than the jackpot symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as the confirmed special symbol, it is a "miss."

Once the display result in the special game shows "jackpot," the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state, which is advantageous for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or until the number of game balls entering the large prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9), whichever comes first. This predetermined period is the maximum period during which the large prize opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter referred to as the maximum opening period. This cycle in which the large prize opening is opened is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can win prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is advantageous to the player. The more rounds played in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the maximum opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A "jackpot" has a set type of jackpot. For example, there are multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot slot (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after a jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, probability variable state, etc.), and the jackpot type is set accordingly. There may be jackpot types that offer many prize balls, jackpot types that offer few prize balls, or jackpot types that offer almost no prize balls.

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may enter a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (the period during which the special symbol fluctuates) compared to the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning slot by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (the period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) compared to the normal state and by increasing the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in a regular symbol game compared to the normal state. The time-saving state is advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of fluctuation of special symbols (especially the second special symbol).

In the probability variable state (probability variable state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is implemented, which increases the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for players, as it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuations, but also makes it easier to win a "jackpot."

The time-saving state or the probability variation state will continue until one of the following conditions is met: a predetermined number of special games have been played, or the next jackpot game state has begun. A state in which the condition for the special game to end is played a predetermined number of times is also called a count-cut state (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability variation state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a gaming state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot gaming state that are advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability variable state. It is a state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability that the displayed result in a normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the displayed result in a special game will be a "jackpot," is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified recovery process is not executed after power is turned on).

A state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and a state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and a state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. A high probability state and a low base state are also called a high probability low base state.

The game state may also change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (e.g., a specific area within the jackpot opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game state may be controlled to a special state after the jackpot game state.

(Progression of the production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (such as notifying the player of the game progress or enhancing the excitement of the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. These effects are described below. The effects are executed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, the effects may be executed by audio output from the speakers 8L, 8R, turning on or off the game effect lamp 9, operating the movable bodies 32A, 32B, or by using any effect device including some or all of these.

As an effect that is executed in accordance with the progress of the game, the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 begin to display variable decorative symbols in response to the start of the first or second special symbol game. At the timing when the display result (also called the confirmed special symbol) in the first or second special symbol game is statically displayed, the confirmed decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols is also statically displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols begins to when it ends, the variable display of the decorative symbols may assume a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, as described below.

In addition, when the above-mentioned reach mode is reached during the variable display of decorative symbols, a reach effect is executed. Pachinko gaming machine 1 executes multiple types of reach effects, with different rates (also called jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation) of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" depending on the effect mode. Reach effects include, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot," a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative pattern (for example, "7") is displayed stopped and aligned on a predetermined effective line in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probability jackpot" where the game state is controlled to a probability jackpot after the jackpot gaming state ends, odd-numbered decorative symbols (e.g., "7") are displayed in a line-up, and in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (regular jackpot)" where the game state is not controlled to a probability jackpot after the jackpot gaming state ends, even-numbered decorative symbols (e.g., "6") may be displayed in a line-up. In this case, odd-numbered decorative symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols, and even-numbered decorative symbols are also called non-probability jackpot symbols (regular symbols). After a reach state is reached with non-probability jackpot symbols, a promotion effect may be executed that ultimately results in a "probability jackpot."

When the display result of the special game is a "miss," the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may display a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may display a fixed decorative symbol of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. Other effects, such as preview effects that predict the jackpot reliability, are executed during the variable display of decorative symbols. Preview effects include preview effects that predict the jackpot reliability in the currently executing variable display, and pre-read preview effects that predict the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is reserved). Pre-read preview effects may be executed that change the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode that is different from normal.

In addition, the image display device 5 may temporarily stop the decorative symbols while they are being displayed in a variable manner, and then resume the variable display, thereby executing a pseudo-consecutive effect that makes a single variable display appear as multiple variable displays.

Even during a jackpot gaming state, a jackpot effect is executed to notify the player of the jackpot gaming state. The jackpot effect may include an effect to notify the number of rounds or an upgrade effect to indicate that the value of the jackpot gaming state is increasing.

Also, for example, when a special game or the like is not being played, a demo image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like, as shown in Fig. 115. In addition, various boards, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a firing control board, are arranged on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also equipped. The various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also include electronic circuit mounting boards on which electrical components are mounted to realize specific electrical functions.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17, and by operating the power switch 91 (turning it on), power from an AC power source, such as an external power source like a commercial power supply, such as 100V AC, can be supplied from the power supply board 17 to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 is equipped with, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), and a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (for example, 12V DC or 5V DC).

The main board 11 is the main control board and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of special games (including reserved game management), execution of regular games (including reserved game management), jackpot game status, game status, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a single-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock 106.

The CPU 103 executes the program stored in ROM 101 to control the progress of the game (processing that realizes the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in ROM 101 (such as data on variation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) is used, and RAM 102 is used as the main memory. RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM, where the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if part or all of the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. Note that all or part of the program stored in ROM 101 may be deployed to RAM 102 and executed on RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (gaming random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The gaming random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specified computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals that control (drive) the first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first hold display device 25A, second hold display device 25B, normal symbol hold display device 25C, etc., and solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (such as detection signals indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switches (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), and count switch 23), and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The switch circuit 110 receives a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal that stops control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal turns off when the specified power supply voltage used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 exceeds a specified value, and turns on when the specified power supply voltage remains below the specified value for a period of time that exceeds the power-off reference time. The clear signal turns on, for example, in response to pressing the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The output circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81 or solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

As part of its control of the game's progress, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the game's progress, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 in accordance with the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. These presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various decisions made by the main board 11 (e.g., the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable patterns used when executing the special game (details will be described later)), the game status (e.g., the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot slot, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable bodies 32A and 32B, error notifications, and notifications of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, ROM 121, RAM 122, display control unit 123, random number circuit 124, and I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes programs stored in ROM 121, and performs processing to execute performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing to realize the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). During this processing, various data (such as data from various tables) stored in ROM 121 is used, and RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute an effect based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the operation content).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes presentations based on instructions to execute presentations from the presentation control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays a performance image on the image display device 5 by supplying the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. It also performs display processing to output image data from the display image creation area of the VRAM area specified by the display register as a video signal. In this embodiment, the display image creation area and drawing area switch for each V blank. Therefore, drawing is performed in the area assigned as the drawing area in one V blank, and then switched to the display image creation area in the next V blank, so that the image data drawn in the previous V blank is displayed and output, while drawing continues in the other area during that time.

In addition, since the display control unit 123 generates images to be displayed on the image display device 5 by superimposing (compositing) multiple layers, the VRAM area is provided with a layer image drawing area for drawing and arranging the images of each layer, and a display image creation area for generating images to be displayed on the image display device 5 by further superimposing (compositing) the images drawn and arranged in each layer image drawing area. In addition, each layer is classified into upper, middle, and lower levels, with images in higher layers being set with a higher display priority on the image display device 5, and images in lower layers being set with a lower display priority on the image display device 5.

The VRAM area contains a Layer 1 image drawing area for drawing and arranging Layer 1 images, a Layer 2 image drawing area for drawing and arranging Layer 2 images, and a Layer 3 image drawing area for drawing and arranging Layer 3 images. The VRAM area also contains a displacement image creation area for creating displacement images, and a display image creation area.

The displacement image creation area is an area where an image drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area and an image drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed (combined) to create a displacement target image, and where a displacement image is created by applying a displacement image to the displacement target image.

The display image creation area is an area where an image is created as a display image to be displayed on the image display device 5, which is an image obtained by superimposing (combining) an image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area, an image drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area, and an image drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area, or an image obtained by superimposing (combining) an image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area with a displacement image created in the displacement image creation area.

The image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area is set as the image with the highest display priority (display priority: high) on the image display device 5, the image drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area is set as the image with a lower display priority (display priority: medium) than the image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area on the image display device 5, and the image drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area is set as the image with the lowest display priority (display priority: low) on the image display device 5. In other words, layer 1 is the upper layer with the highest image display priority, layer 2 is a middle layer with a lower image display priority than layer 1, and layer 3 is the lower layer with the lowest image display priority.

The layer 1 image drawing area is a drawing area in which these images are drawn to display a first interface image at the bottom of the display area of the image display device 5, which includes a special pattern reserved memory display area 5U that identifiably displays the first and second special pattern reserved memory counts, and a second interface image at the top left of the display area of the image display device 5, which includes a small pattern with a smaller display area than the decorative pattern and a reserved memory count display.

The layer 2 image drawing area is a drawing area in the center of the display area of the image display device 5 where the left, center, and right decorative patterns are drawn to perform variable display of the decorative patterns.

The layer 3 image drawing area is a drawing area in which the background image is drawn to display the background image across the entire display area of the image display device 5.

In this embodiment, an image to be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 can be generated by superimposing the image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area (layer 1 image), the image drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area (layer 2 image), and the image drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area (layer 3 image). In particular, as described above, the images drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area (first interface image and second interface image) are set to have the highest display priority and are therefore displayed as the top-level images on the image display device 5; the images drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area (decorative design) are set to have a lower display priority than the images drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area and are therefore displayed as the middle-level images on the image display device 5; and the images drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area (background image) are set to have the lowest display priority and are therefore displayed as the bottom-level images on the image display device 5.

In this embodiment, the transmittance (transparency) of the images drawn and placed in each image drawing area is set to 0% so that when superimposed, the upper image makes the overlapping area of the lower image invisible to the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the situation, the transmittance (transparency) of the images drawn and placed in each image drawing area may be set higher than 0%, and images may be displayed transparently in the display area of the image display device 5 or temporarily hidden.

The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal that designates the lamp on/off state) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies signals that operate the movable bodies 32A, 32B to the movable bodies 32A, 32B or to the drive circuits that drive the movable bodies 32A, 32B.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the on/off of the lamp.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 may be configured to perform control of audio output, lamp on/off (such as supplying sound designation signals and lamp signals), and control of movable bodies 32A and 32B (such as supplying signals to operate movable bodies 32A and 32B).

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (performance random numbers) used to execute various performances. The performance random numbers may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for receiving performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, sound control board 13, and lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

Figure 116(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a performance control command used in this embodiment. A performance control command is, for example, two bytes long, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). The first bit of the MODE data (bit 7) is always set to "0", and the first bit of the EXT data is always set to "0". Note that the command format shown in Figure 116(A) is just one example, and other command formats may also be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals making up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in Figure 116 (A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B. Command 81XXH is a variation pattern specification command that specifies the variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) of decorative symbols (also called performance symbols) that are variably displayed in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game. Here, XXH represents an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is set according to the instructions given by the performance control command. Note that the variation pattern specification command sets different EXT data depending on the specified variation pattern, etc.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result specification command, and is a presentation control command that specifies variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. With the variable display result specification command, as shown in FIG. 116 (B), for example, different EXT data is set depending on the determination result (pre-determined result) of whether the variable display result (also called the variable display result) is a "miss" or a "jackpot," and the determination result of which of several types of jackpot type will be used if the variable display result is a "jackpot" (jackpot type determination result).

For example, as shown in FIG. 116 (B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined result that the variable display result will be a "miss." Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command notifying the predetermined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be a "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be a "variable jackpot A." Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command notifying the predetermined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be a "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be a "variable jackpot B." Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command notifying the predetermined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be a "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be a "variable jackpot C." Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command that notifies the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "non-variable jackpot."

Command 8F00H is a symbol determination command that specifies the stopping (determination) of the decorative symbol variation in each of the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5. Command 95XXH is a game state designation command that specifies the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which neither time-saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low-probability, low-base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed but probability variable control is not performed (low-probability, high-base state, time-saving state). Furthermore, command 9502H is a third game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which both time-saving control and probability variable control are performed (high-probability, high-base state, time-saving, probability variable state). Furthermore, the time-saving probability variable state may be simply referred to as the "probability variable state."

Command A0XXH is a start-of-jackpot command (also known as a "fanfare command") that specifies the display of a presentation image indicating the start of a jackpot game. Command A1XXH is a large prize opening notification command that notifies players that the large prize opening is in an open state during a jackpot game. Command A2XXH is a large prize opening post-opening notification command that notifies players that the large prize opening has changed from an open state to a closed state during a jackpot game. Command A3XXH is a end-of-jackpot command that specifies the display of a presentation image at the end of a jackpot game.

In the hit start designation command and hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set depending on the pre-determined result or the jackpot type determination result, for example by setting the same EXT data as in the variable display result designation command. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result designation command. In the large prize opening notification command and the large prize opening after opening notification command, for example, different EXT data is set depending on the number of rounds executed in the jackpot state (e.g., "0" to "10"), as described below.

Command B100H is a first start port entry designation command that notifies that the first start condition for executing a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A has been met, based on the occurrence of a start prize (first start prize) when a gaming ball that has passed through (entered) the first start port formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first start port switch 22A. Command B200H is a second start port entry designation command that notifies that the second start condition for executing a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B has been met, based on the occurrence of a start prize (second start prize) when a gaming ball that has passed through (entered) the second start port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second start port switch 22B.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command that notifies the first special symbol reserved memory number so that the number of reserved special symbols can be specified. Command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command that notifies the second special symbol reserved memory number so that the number of reserved special symbols can be specified. The first reserved memory number notification command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when a first start port entry designation command is sent, for example, based on the first start condition being met when a gaming ball passes (enters) the first start port. The second reserved memory number notification command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when a second start port entry designation command is sent, for example, based on the second start condition being met when a gaming ball passes (enters) the second start port. Additionally, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command may be sent in response to the start of execution of the special game when either the first or second start condition is met (when the pending memory number decreases).

Instead of the first pending memory count notification command or the second pending memory count notification command, a total pending memory count notification command may be sent to notify the total number of pending memories. In other words, the total pending memory count notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total number of pending memories.

Note that the commands shown in Figure 116 (A) are just examples, and some of these commands may not be included, or different commands may be used instead of these commands, or different commands may be added. For example, it may be possible to provide a prize ball number notification command that enables the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game ball entering each winning slot, a gate passage notification command that notifies the game ball that it has passed through the passage gate 41, or a notification command that notifies the remaining number of variable display times for which the probability variable control or time-saving control will be executed.

Figure 117 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of random number values counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in Figure 117, on the main board 11 side, numerical data indicating each of the following is controlled so as to be countable: random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and random number value MR4 for determining the normal symbol display result. Note that random number values other than these may also be used to enhance the gaming effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called gaming random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may be configured to count numerical data representing some or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 may also count numerical data representing some of the random number values MR1 to MR4 by updating various numerical data using software using a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting unit (not shown).

The random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to treat the variable display result of a special symbol or other game in a special symbol game as a "jackpot" and control the game to a jackpot gaming state, and takes a value in the range of "0" to "65536", for example. The random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is a random number value used to determine the jackpot type when the variable display result is a "jackpot" as either "Probable jackpot A", "Probable jackpot B", "Probable jackpot C", or "Non-probable jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "0" to "100", for example.

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special and decorative patterns, and is one of several pre-prepared types. For example, it takes a value in the range of "0" to "997".

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display device 20 is a "normal symbol hit" or a "normal symbol miss," and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13," for example.

Figure 118 shows an example of the configuration of a display result determination table stored in ROM 101. In this embodiment, a common display result determination table is used for the first special chart and the second special chart, but the present invention is not limited to this, and separate display result determination tables may be used for the first special chart and the second special chart.

The display result determination table is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to treat the variable display result as a "jackpot" and control the game to a jackpot game state before the determined special pattern that will be the variable display result is derived and displayed in a special pattern game using the first special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A or a special pattern game using the second special pattern by the second special pattern display device 4B, based on the random number value MR1 used to determine the special pattern display result.

In the display result determination table, a numerical value (determination value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 used to determine the special symbol display result is assigned to the special symbol display result of "jackpot" or "miss" depending on whether the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is normal state, time-saving state (low probability state), or special symbol state (high probability state).

In the display result determination table, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is determination data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to treat the special symbol display result as a "jackpot" and control it to a jackpot gaming state. In the display result determination table, when the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more determination values are assigned to the "jackpot" special symbol display result than when the gaming state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, in a probability variable state (high probability state) where probability variable control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the probability of determining that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and control it to a jackpot gaming state is higher (approximately 1/30 in this embodiment) than the probability of determining that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and control it to a jackpot gaming state when the gaming state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state) (approximately 1/300 in this embodiment). In other words, in the display result determination table, determination data is assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state so that when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a probability variable state (high probability state), the probability of determining that it will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state is higher than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state.

Figure 119 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a jackpot type determination table stored in ROM 101. In this embodiment, the jackpot type determination table is a table that is referenced to determine one of several types of jackpot types based on the jackpot type determination random number value MR2 when it is determined that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and that the jackpot game state is to be controlled. In the jackpot type determination table, the number (determination value) compared with the jackpot type determination random number value MR2 is assigned to several types of jackpot types, such as "non-variable jackpot," "variable jackpot A," "variable jackpot B," and "variable jackpot C," depending on whether the special symbol variably displayed (variably displayed) in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game using the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (special symbol game using the second special symbol display device 4B).

Here, the types of jackpots in this embodiment will be explained using Figure 119 (B). In this embodiment, the jackpot types are "Probable jackpot A," "Probable jackpot B," and "Probable jackpot C," in which probability variable control and time-saving control are executed after the jackpot gaming state ends, resulting in a transition to a high-probability, high-base state, and "Non-probable jackpot," in which only time-saving control is executed after the jackpot gaming state ends, resulting in a transition to a low-probability, high-base state.

The jackpot gaming state resulting from a "probable jackpot A" is a normal opening jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed ten times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. On the other hand, the jackpot gaming state resulting from a "probable jackpot B" is a normal opening jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. The jackpot gaming state resulting from a "probable jackpot C" is a normal opening jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed two times (so-called 2 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. Furthermore, the jackpot gaming state resulting from a "non-probable jackpot" is a normal opening jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, "Probable jackpot A" may be referred to as a 10-round (10R) probable jackpot, "Probable jackpot B" may be referred to as a 5-round (5R) probable jackpot, and "Probable jackpot C" may be referred to as a 2-round (2R) probable jackpot.

The probability variable control and time-saving control that begin after the jackpot gaming state of probability variable jackpot A through probability variable jackpot C ends are terminated on the condition that control is entered into the jackpot gaming state. Furthermore, the time-saving control that begins after the jackpot gaming state of a non-probability variable jackpot ends is terminated on the condition that 100 variable displays are completed or that control is entered into the jackpot gaming state before the 100 variable displays are completed. Therefore, if a recurring jackpot is one of probability variable jackpot A through probability variable jackpot C, probability variable control and time-saving control are executed again after the jackpot gaming state ends, resulting in a so-called consecutive jackpot state, in which the jackpot gaming state occurs continuously without an intermediate normal state. In other words, the probability variable state in this embodiment is a gaming state that continues until the variable display result is a jackpot, regardless of the number of variable displays, while the time-saving state in this embodiment is a gaming state that is controlled to the normal state by executing 100 variable displays if the variable display result is not a jackpot. For this reason, the time-saving state is also the game state that is controlled when a winning streak may end.

In the example setting of the jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 119 (A), the allocation of determination values to the jackpot types "Probable jackpot A," "Probable jackpot B," "Probable jackpot C," and "Non-probable jackpot" differs depending on whether the variably displayed special symbol is the first special symbol or the second special symbol. In other words, when the variably displayed special symbol is the first special symbol, a predetermined range of determination values (values in the range of "81" to "100") is assigned to the jackpot types "Probable jackpot B" and "Probable jackpot C," which have fewer rounds, whereas when the variably displayed special symbol is the second special symbol, no determination value is assigned to the jackpot types "Probable jackpot B" and "Probable jackpot C." This setting allows for different rates of determining the jackpot type as a "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C," which have fewer rounds, depending on whether the jackpot type is determined based on the first start condition being met to start a special game using the first special symbol displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second start condition being met to start a special game using the second special symbol displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B. In particular, in special games using the second special symbol, the jackpot type is never determined to be a "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C," which results in fewer rounds. Therefore, for example, in game states where game balls are likely to enter the second start entry slot formed by the variable prize ball device 6B due to high-opening control associated with time-saving control, frequent jackpot states with fewer prize balls can be avoided, preventing a decline in game interest.

In addition, in the example setting of the jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 119 (A), the allocation of determination values for the "non-probability variable" jackpot type is the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, so the probability of a non-probability variable jackpot and the probability of a probability variable jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart.

As mentioned above, just as the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot B" and "Probable Variable Jackpot C" differs depending on whether the game is the first special chart or the second special chart, the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether the game is the first special chart or the second special chart, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A," which has a larger number of rounds, it is set up so that it is easier to determine in the second special chart game than in the first special chart game.

In addition, even in the case of a special game with a second special symbol, a predetermined range of judgment values different from that in the case of a special game with a first special symbol may be assigned to the jackpot types "Probable jackpot B" and "Probable jackpot C." For example, in the case of a special game with a second special symbol, fewer judgment values may be assigned to the jackpot types "Probable jackpot B" and "Probable jackpot C" compared to a special game with a first special symbol. Alternatively, regardless of whether it is a special game with a first special symbol or a second special symbol, the jackpot type may be determined by referencing common table data.

Figure 120 shows the variation patterns in this embodiment. In this embodiment, multiple variation patterns are prepared in advance to correspond to the cases where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" and "reach," respectively, and to correspond to the case where the variable display result is a "jackpot." Note that the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also called a "non-reach miss variation pattern"), and the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also called a "reach miss variation pattern"). Furthermore, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the miss variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss." The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "jackpot" is called a jackpot variation pattern.

There are two types of jackpot fluctuation patterns and reach fluctuation patterns: a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach effect is executed. Note that in this embodiment, one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more types of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Also, in this embodiment, three types of super reach fluctuation patterns are provided: super reach (no pseudo-consecutive hits), super reach (one pseudo-consecutive hit), and super reach (two pseudo-consecutive hits), but the present invention is not limited to this, and four or more types or two or less types of super reach fluctuation patterns may be provided.

In this embodiment, the super reach variation patterns include a variation pattern (PB1-2) in which the variable display result is a jackpot as a super reach (no pseudo-consecutive hit) and a variation pattern (PA2-2) in which the variable display result is a miss; a variation pattern (PB1-3) in which the variable display result is a jackpot as a super reach (one pseudo-consecutive hit) and a variation pattern (PA2-3) in which the variable display result is a miss; and a variation pattern (PB1-4) in which the variable display result is a jackpot as a super reach (two pseudo-consecutive hits) and a variation pattern (PA2-4) in which the variable display result is a miss.

As shown in Figure 120, the special chart fluctuation time for the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach performance of a normal reach is executed in this embodiment is set shorter than that for the super reach fluctuation pattern.

In this embodiment, the variable display result is set to have a higher chance of becoming a "jackpot" in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach, so in the normal reach variation pattern and super reach variation pattern, the longer the special chart variation time, the higher the chance of a jackpot.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are determined using only the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern type may be provided, and the type of fluctuation pattern may be determined first from these random number values for determining the fluctuation pattern type, and then the fluctuation pattern belonging to that determined type may be determined.

Figure 121 is an explanatory diagram of the method for determining the variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the variation pattern determination table selected varies depending on the display result of the variable display being executed, the number of reserved memories, the game status, etc.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 121, if the variable display result is a non-probable jackpot, jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and using that jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, the fluctuation pattern is determined from PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (super reach (no pseudo consecutive effects) jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-3 (super reach (one pseudo consecutive effects) jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-4 (super reach (two pseudo consecutive effects) jackpot fluctuation pattern). More specifically, in jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, PB1-1 is determined 5% of the time, PB1-2 is determined 20% of the time, PB1-3 is determined 35% of the time, and PB1-4 is determined 40% of the time.

Also, if the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot A to C, jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, and using that jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B, the fluctuation pattern is determined from PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (super reach (no pseudo consecutive effects) jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-3 (super reach (one pseudo consecutive effects) jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-4 (super reach (two pseudo consecutive effects) jackpot fluctuation pattern). More specifically, in jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B, PB1-2 is determined 10% of the time, PB1-3 is determined 20% of the time, and PB1-4 is determined 70% of the time.

Furthermore, when the game state is a low base state (normal state), the variable display result is a miss, and the number of reserved memories for the special variable chart is one or less, the miss variation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variation pattern is determined using this miss variation pattern determination table A from PA1-1 (non-reach miss variation pattern without shortening), PA2-1 (normal reach miss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo consecutive performance) miss variation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach (one pseudo consecutive performance) miss variation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach (two pseudo consecutive performances) miss variation pattern). More specifically, in the miss variation pattern determination table A, PA1-1 is determined 50% of the time, PA2-1 is determined 40% of the time, PA2-2 is determined 5% of the time, PA2-3 is determined 3% of the time, and PA2-4 is determined 2% of the time.

Furthermore, when the game state is a low base state (normal state), the variable display result is a miss, and the number of reserved memories for the special variable chart is two, the miss variation pattern determination table B is selected, and the variation pattern is determined using this miss variation pattern determination table B from PA1-2 (shortened non-reach miss variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach miss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo consecutive performance) miss variation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach (one pseudo consecutive performance) miss variation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach (two pseudo consecutive performances) miss variation pattern). More specifically, in the miss variation pattern determination table B, PA1-2 is determined 60% of the time, PA2-1 is determined 30% of the time, PA2-2 is determined 5% of the time, PA2-3 is determined 3% of the time, and PA2-4 is determined 2% of the time.

Furthermore, when the game state is a low base state (normal state), the variable display result is a miss, and the number of reserved memories for the special variable chart is three, the miss variation pattern determination table C is selected, and the variation pattern is determined using this miss variation pattern determination table C from PA1-3 (shortened non-reach miss variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach miss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo consecutive performance) miss variation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach (one pseudo consecutive performance) miss variation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach (two pseudo consecutive performances) miss variation pattern). More specifically, in the miss variation pattern determination table C, PA1-3 is determined 70% of the time, PA2-1 is determined 20% of the time, PA2-2 is determined 5% of the time, PA2-3 is determined 3% of the time, and PA2-4 is determined 2% of the time.

Furthermore, when the game state is a high base state (time-saving state or probability variable state), miss fluctuation pattern determination table D is selected, and using this miss fluctuation pattern determination table D, the fluctuation pattern is determined from PA1-3 (shortened non-reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach miss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo consecutive performance) miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach (one pseudo consecutive performance) miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach (two pseudo consecutive performances) miss fluctuation pattern). More specifically, miss fluctuation pattern determination table C determines PA1-3 80% of the time, PA2-1 10% of the time, PA2-2 5% of the time, PA2-3 3% of the time, and PA2-4 2% of the time.

In this embodiment, an example is shown in which when the variable display result is a jackpot, the variation pattern is determined according to the type of jackpot. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The selection rate of one of the multiple jackpot variation patterns (PB1-1 to PB1-4) may be varied, for example, according to the game status, regardless of the jackpot type. In this way, the variable display is performed with a variation pattern appropriate for the game status, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 115 may be a backup RAM, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power supply created on a specified power supply board. In other words, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 will be preserved for a specified period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power supply discharges and the backup power supply is no longer able to supply power). In particular, at least data corresponding to the game status, i.e., the control status of the game control means (such as a special chart process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid balls should be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control status of the game control means is data necessary to restore the control status to before the power outage, etc., based on that data, when power is restored after a power outage, etc. Furthermore, the data corresponding to the control status and the data indicating the number of unpaid balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

This RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 002SG150, as shown in FIG. 122, as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of games on the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control data holding area 002SG150 shown in FIG. 122 includes a first special symbol reserve memory unit 002SG151A, a second special symbol reserve memory unit 002SG151B, a regular symbol reserve memory unit 002SG151C, a game control flag setting unit 002SG152, a game control timer setting unit 002SG153, a game control counter setting unit 002SG154, and a game control buffer setting unit 002SG155.

The first special symbol reserve memory unit 002SG151A stores reserved data for special symbol games (special symbol games using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) in order of winning, in which a game ball has passed (entered) the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A, resulting in a start winning (first start winning), but which have not yet started.

The second special symbol reserve memory unit 002SG151B stores reserved data for special symbol games (special symbol games using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) that have not yet started but in which a game ball has passed (entered) the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a start winning (second start winning) has occurred, in order of winning.

As an example, the first special chart reserve memory unit 002SG151A associates the reserve number with the order of entry into the first start entry port (the order in which the game balls are detected), and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the variable display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of win, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., based on the establishment of the first start condition when the game ball passes (enters), as reserve data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). In addition, the second special chart reserve memory unit 002SG151B associates the reserved number with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game balls) at the second start winning port, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the variable display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of win, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104 etc. based on the establishment of the first start condition when the game ball passes (enters), as reserved data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

In this way, the reserved data stored in the first special symbol reserved memory unit 002SG151A and the second special symbol reserved memory unit 002SG151B indicates that the execution of a special symbol game using the first special symbol or a special symbol game using the second special symbol is reserved, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will occur based on the variable display results (special symbol display results) in these special symbol games.

In this embodiment, when hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition when the gaming ball passes through (enters) the first start entry port, and hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start entry when the gaming ball passes through (enters) the second start entry port are stored in separate hold memory units in association with hold numbers, the variable display based on the second hold memory information is executed in priority over the variable display based on the first hold information.

The normal symbol reserve memory unit 002SG151C stores reserve information for normal symbol games in which a game ball has been detected by the gate switch 21 but which have not yet been started by the normal symbol display device 20. For example, the normal symbol reserve memory unit 002SG151C associates game balls with reserve numbers in the order in which they are detected by the gate switch 21, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the normal symbol display result extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., based on the passage of the game ball, as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 002SG152 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated depending on the progress of play on the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 002SG152 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 002SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of games on the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 002SG153 stores data indicating the timer values of multiple types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 002SG154 is provided with multiple types of counters for calculating count values used to control the progress of play in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 002SG154 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 002SG154 may be provided with a random counter that counts some or all of the game random numbers in a manner that allows the CPU 103 to update them using software.

The random counter of the game control counter setting unit 002SG154 stores random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, such as numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR4, as random count values, and the numerical data indicating each random number value is updated periodically or irregularly in accordance with the execution of software by the CPU 103. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be software that updates the random count value separately from the update operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or software that updates the random count value by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 104.

The game control buffer setting unit 002SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of games on the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 002SG155 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of several types of buffers.

The ROM 121 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in Figure 115 stores not only performance control programs but also various data tables used to control performance operations. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data constituting multiple judgment tables prepared so that the performance control CPU 120 can make various judgments, decisions, and settings, as well as pattern data constituting various performance control patterns.

As an example, the ROM 121 stores a presentation control pattern table that contains multiple presentation control patterns that the presentation control CPU 120 uses to control presentation operations by various presentation devices (e.g., the image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9, decorative LEDs, presentation models, etc.). The presentation control patterns correspond to various presentation operations executed according to the progress of play on the pachinko gaming machine 1 and are composed of data indicating the control content of those operations. The presentation control pattern table may store, for example, presentation control patterns for when special charts are variable displayed, preview presentation control patterns, and various other presentation control patterns.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in Figure 115 has an area for storing various data used to control performance operations, such as a performance control data storage area 002SG190 as shown in Figure 123(A). The performance control data storage area 002SG190 shown in Figure 123(A) includes a performance control flag setting unit 002SG191, a performance control timer setting unit 002SG192, a performance control counter setting unit 002SG193, and a performance control buffer setting unit 002SG194.

The performance control flag setting unit 002SG191 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated in response to performance operation states, such as the display state of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5, and performance control commands sent from the main board 11. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 002SG191 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 002SG192 is provided with multiple types of timers used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as the display operation of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the performance control timer setting unit 002SG192 stores data indicating the timer values of each of the multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting unit 002SG193 is provided with multiple types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control counter setting unit 002SG193 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit 002SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting unit 002SG194 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of several types of buffers.

In this embodiment, the data constituting the start winning time receiving command buffer 002SG194A shown in FIG. 123(B) is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting unit 002SG194. The start winning time receiving command buffer 002SG194A has a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum total number of reserved memories for the first special symbol reserved memory (e.g., "4"), and a storage area (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") corresponding to the first special symbol being variably displayed. The start winning time receiving command buffer 002SG194A also has a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum total number of reserved memories for the second special symbol reserved memory (e.g., "4"), and a storage area (area corresponding to buffer number "2-0") corresponding to the second special symbol being variably displayed. When a start win occurs at the first start win slot or the second start win slot, a set of two commands, a start win slot designation command (first start win slot designation command or second start win slot designation command) and a reserved memory count notification command (first reserved memory count notification command or second reserved memory count notification command), is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The storage areas corresponding to the first special symbol reserved memory and the second special symbol reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 002SG194A have storage areas (entries) reserved for associating these start win slot designation commands and reserved memory count notification commands and storing them separately as the first special symbol reserved memory and the second special symbol reserved memory.

When the start conditions are met and the variable display of the top-level reserved memory (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") begins, the contents of these storage areas (entries) are shifted up one by one, as described below. Furthermore, the contents of buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0," which stores the contents of the reserved memory for which the start conditions are met, are cleared during the special drawing hit waiting process, which is executed when the variable display ends.

When a start win occurs in the first start win slot, the performance control CPU 120 stores the command starting from the first empty entry (the entry with the lowest buffer number) corresponding to the first special symbol reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 002SG194A. When a start win occurs in the second start win slot, the CPU 120 stores the command starting from the first empty entry (the entry with the lowest buffer number) corresponding to the second special symbol reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 002SG194A. When a start win occurs, commands from the start win slot designation command to the reserved memory number notification command are sent sequentially. Therefore, when commands are received, the start win slot designation command and the reserved memory number notification command are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the last digits "0" to "4" of the buffer numbers corresponding to the first or second special symbol reserved memory, in that order.

Whenever the variable display of a decorative symbol begins, the commands stored in the start winning time receive command buffer 002SG194A shown in Figure 123(B) are deleted from the entry corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that just ended (the entry with buffer number "1-0" or "2-0"), and the contents of the entries corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that is about to begin (the entry corresponding to buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") and the contents of the entries after the reserved memory of the variable display that just began are shifted. For example, when the variable display of the decorative symbol in the first special symbol reserved memory ends in the storage state shown in Figure 123(B), the commands stored in buffer number "0" are deleted, the commands stored in buffer number "0" are shifted to buffer number "0," the commands stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" are shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "0," and the commands stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3." Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes the area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending memory that is currently being variably displayed.

(operation)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main board 11)
First, we will explain the main operations on the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts, the game control microcomputer 100 starts up and game control main processing is executed by the CPU 103. Figure 124 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main processing shown in FIG. 124, the CPU 103 first disables interrupts (step S1). Next, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). These initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and making the RAM 102 accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery conditions are met (step S3). The recovery conditions can be met when the clear signal is off, backup data is available, and the backup RAM is normal. When power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, if a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17, for example, is pressed, an on-state clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it is determined in step S3 that the recovery conditions are not met. The backup data only needs to be able to be saved in RAM 102, which serves as backup RAM for game control. In step S3, it is determined whether the recovery conditions can be met by checking or inspecting the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors.

If the recovery condition is met (Step S3; Yes), recovery processing (Step S4) is executed, followed by random number circuit setting processing (Step S8). The recovery processing of Step S4 sets a working area based on the contents stored in RAM 102. By setting the working area using the backup data stored in RAM 102, the game state when the power supply was stopped is restored; for example, if a special symbol was changing, it is sufficient if the special symbol change can be resumed from the state before the power supply was stopped.

Also, if the recovery condition is not met (Step S3: No), an initialization process (Step S6) is performed, followed by a random number circuit setting process (Step S8). The initialization process of Step S6 includes a clearing process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102, and initial values are set in the working area by executing the clearing process.

After executing the random number circuit setting process (step S8), the CPU 103 sets the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time interval (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S9), and enables the interrupt (step S10). Then, a loop process is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 2 ms), allowing the CPU 103 to periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

After executing this game control main processing, the CPU 103 receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, and then executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. 125. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 125 begins, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch processing to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches, such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23, via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, the CPU 103 executes a predetermined main error processing to diagnose abnormalities in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and, if necessary, issue a warning based on the diagnosis results (step S22). After this, the CPU 103 executes a predetermined information output processing to output data, such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots), start information (information indicating the number of start wins), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the game has entered a probability variable state) to be supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output process, a gaming random number update process is executed to update at least a portion of the gaming random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 is able to manage the execution and reservation of special symbol games, control the jackpot gaming state, control the gaming state, and so on.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). By the CPU 103 executing the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, it is possible to execute the normal symbol game and manage reserves based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), as well as control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol win." The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting the normal symbol reserve display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed. Then, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set a presentation control command to be sent during each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, the presentation control command that has been set to be sent is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the presentation control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

(Special pattern processing)
Fig. 126 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S25 shown in Fig. 125. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

The start winning determination process detects the occurrence of a start winning, stores pending information in a specified area of RAM 102, and updates the number of pending memories. When a start winning occurs, a random number value is extracted to determine the display result (including the type of jackpot) and variation pattern, and this is stored as pending information. A process may also be executed to predict the display result and variation pattern based on the extracted random number value. After the pending information and number of pending memories are stored, transmission settings are made to send a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the determination results, such as the occurrence of a start winning, the number of pending memories, and the predictive determination. The performance control command for the start winning that has been transmitted and set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special symbol process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 125.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S117 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag stored in RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S117), transmission settings are made to transmit the effect control commands corresponding to each step to the effect control board 12.

The normal special symbol processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). This normal special symbol processing determines whether to start the first or second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. Furthermore, the normal special symbol processing determines (predetermines) whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "jackpot" and, if so, the type of jackpot, before the display result is derived and displayed, based on a random number value for determining the display result. Furthermore, the normal special symbol processing determines a fixed special symbol (either a jackpot symbol or a losing symbol) to be displayed in the special symbol game in accordance with the determined display result. The value of the special symbol process flag is then updated to "1," and the normal special symbol processing ends. In this embodiment, the special symbol game using the second special symbol is executed with priority over the special symbol game using the first special symbol (also known as special symbol 2 priority consumption). Additionally, the order in which game balls enter the first and second starting winning slots may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also known as winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which the decision value compared with the random number value is assigned to the decision result) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern to determine one of several types of fluctuation pattern, based on the results of a pre-determined decision on whether or not the display result will be a "jackpot". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when a fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2", and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special symbol change process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol change process includes processes for making settings to change the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and for measuring the elapsed time since the special symbol began to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special symbol change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special symbol began to change reaches the special symbol change time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol change process ends.

The special symbol stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3." This special symbol stop process includes a setting process to stop the variation of special symbols on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and to stop displaying (derive) the confirmed special symbol that will result in the display of the special symbol. If the display result is a "jackpot," the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4." If the display result is a "miss," the game state is also updated if the game is in a time-saving state or a special probability state and the end of the number-cutting period is confirmed. Once the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop process ends.

The pre-jackpot opening process in step S114 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "4." This pre-jackpot opening process includes processing to start the execution of a round in the jackpot game state and set the large prize opening to an open state, based on factors such as the display result being "jackpot." When the large prize opening is set to an open state, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door. At this time, the maximum open period for the large prize opening to be set and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set, depending on, for example, the type of jackpot. Once these settings are complete, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "5," and the pre-jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "5." This jackpot opening process includes processes such as measuring the time elapsed since the large prize opening was opened, and determining whether it is time to return the large prize opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the large prize opening is to be returned to a closed state, processes such as stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door are executed, and then the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "6," and the jackpot opening process ends.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "6." This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of times the round that opens the large prize opening has been executed has reached the set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. If the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "5." However, if the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "7." Once the value of the special symbol process flag has been updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7." This jackpot end process includes processes such as waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation, which serves as a presentation operation to notify players of the end of the jackpot game state, has elapsed, and making various settings to initiate variable rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When these settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0," and the jackpot end process ends.

(Starting winning judgment process)
FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the start winning determination process (S101) shown in FIG. 126. In the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 first determines whether the first starting gate switch 22A, which corresponds to the first starting gate formed by the winning ball device 6A, is on (002SGS101) based on a detection signal from the first starting gate switch 22A. If the first starting gate switch 22A is on (002SGS101; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the first special symbol reserved memory count, which is the number of reserved memories for the special symbol game using the first special symbol, has reached a predetermined upper limit (e.g., "4") (002SGS102). The CPU 103 can determine the number of reserved first symbol memories by, for example, reading the first reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the first reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 002SG154. When the number of reserved memories for the first special chart in 002SGS102 is not the upper limit value (002SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 002SG155 is set to "0" (002SGS103).

When the first start opening switch 22A in 002SGS101 is off (002SGS101; N), or when the number of reserved first special symbols in 002SGS102 has reached the upper limit (002SGS102; Y), a determination is made as to whether the second start opening switch 22B, which is provided corresponding to the second start opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, is on (002SGS104) based on a detection signal from the second start opening switch 22B. If the second start opening switch 22B is on (002SGS104; Y), a determination is made as to whether the second special symbol reserved number, which is the number of reserved symbols for the special symbol game using the second special symbol, has reached a predetermined upper limit (e.g., the upper limit of "4") (002SGS105). The CPU 103 can determine the number of reserved second special symbols by, for example, reading the second reserved symbol count value, which is the value stored in the second reserved symbol count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 002SG154. When the second reserved symbol count in 002SGS105 is not the upper limit (002SGS105; N), for example, the value stored in the start buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 002SG155 is set to "2" (002SGS106).

After executing either of the processes 002SGS103 or 002SGS106, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the value stored in the start port buffer, is updated by adding 1 (002SGS107). For example, when the start port buffer value is "0," the first reserved symbol count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2," the second reserved symbol count value is added by 1. Thus, the first reserved symbol count value is updated to increase by 1 when the gaming ball passes (enters) the first start port and the first start condition corresponding to the special symbol game using the first special symbol is met. Furthermore, the second reserved symbol count value is updated to increase by 1 when the gaming ball passes (enters) the second start port and the second start condition corresponding to the special symbol game using the second special symbol is met. At this time, the total reserved symbol count is also updated to increase by 1 (002SGS108). For example, the total reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 002SG154, can be updated to add 1.

After executing the processing of 002SGS108, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 002SG154 (002SGS109). The numerical data indicating each extracted random number value and the start port buffer value are stored by being set as reserve information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special symbol reserve memory unit (002SGS110).

The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot are used to determine whether the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "jackpot," and further to determine the type of jackpot if the variable display result is a "jackpot." The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern, including the variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol. By executing the processing of 002SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used to determine the variable display mode, including the variable display result and variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol.

Following the processing of 002SGS110, a setting for sending a start port winning designation command according to the start port buffer value is made (002SGS111). For example, when the start port buffer value is "0," the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, thereby making a setting for sending a first start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2," the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, thereby making a setting for sending a second start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. The start port winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special symbol process processing is completed, by executing the command control processing of S27 shown in FIG. 125.

Following the processing of 002SGS111, the CPU 103 performs settings for sending the pending memory count notification command to the performance control board 12, for example by storing the storage address of the pending memory count notification command table in ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer (002SGS113). The pending memory count notification command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example by executing the command control processing of S27 shown in FIG. 125 after the special symbol process processing has ended.

After executing the processing of 002SGS113, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is "0" (002SGS114). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "0" (Y in 002SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (002SGS115), and then processing of 2390SGS104 proceeds. On the other hand, if the start port buffer value is "2" (N in 002SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (002SGS116), and then the start winning processing ends. This ensures that processing based on the detection of both valid start winnings can be completed reliably, even if both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect valid game ball start winnings.

(Normal processing of special patterns)
128 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in S110 of FIG. 126 as the normal special symbol processing. In the normal special symbol processing shown in FIG. 128, the CPU 103 first determines whether the second special symbol reserved memory count is "0" or not (step 002SGS141). The second special symbol reserved memory count is the reserved memory count of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the processing of step 002SGS141, the second reserved memory count value stored in the game control counter setting unit may be read, and it may be determined whether the read value is "0".

When the number of second special symbol reserved memories is other than "0" in step 002SGS141 (step 002SGS141; N), the following reserved data stored in the second special symbol reserved memory unit corresponding to reserved number "0" are read out (step 002SGS142): random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern. The numerical data read out at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a fluctuation random number buffer.

Following the processing of step 002SGS142, the second special symbol reserved memory count value and the total reserved memory count value are updated by subtracting 1 from each other, and the second special symbol reserved memory count and the total reserved memory count are updated, and the data in the second special symbol reserved memory unit is updated. Specifically, the reserved data indicating random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than reserved number "0" in the second special symbol reserved memory unit (for example, entries corresponding to reserved numbers "2" to "4") is shifted up by one entry (step 002SGS143).

Then, the variable special chart designation buffer value, which is the value stored in the variable special chart designation buffer, is updated to "2" (step 002SGS144), and then the process proceeds to step 002SGS149.

On the other hand, if the number of reserved second special symbols is "0" in step 002SGS141 (step 002SGS141; Y), it is determined whether the number of reserved first special symbols is "0" (step 002SGS145). The number of reserved first special symbols is the number of reserved special symbol games using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the processing of step 002SGS145, the game control counter setting unit reads the first reserved symbol count value stored in the first reserved symbol count counter and determines whether the read value is "0." In this way, the processing of step 002SGS145 is executed when the number of reserved second special symbols is determined to be "0" in step 002SGS141, and determines whether the number of reserved first special symbols is "0." As a result, the special symbol game using the second special symbol is started before the special symbol game using the first special symbol.

Note that the special symbol game using the second special symbol is not limited to being executed with priority over the special symbol game using the first special symbol; for example, the special symbol game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) the first or second start winning port and a start winning occurs. In this case, a table may be provided that stores data that can identify the order in which the start winnings occurred, and it may be possible to determine from the stored data whether to start the special symbol game using the first or second special symbol.

When the number of reserved first special symbols stored in step 002SGS145 is other than "0" (step 002SGS145; N), the reserved data stored in the first special symbol reserve memory unit corresponding to reserve number "0" is read out as numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 002SGS146). The numerical data read out at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a fluctuation random number buffer.

Following the processing of step 002SGS146, the first special symbol reserved memory count value and the total reserved memory count value are updated by subtracting 1 from each other, and the first special symbol reserved memory count and the total reserved memory count are updated, and the data in the first special symbol reserved memory unit is updated. Specifically, the reserved data indicating random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than reserved number "0" in the first special symbol reserved memory unit (for example, entries corresponding to reserved numbers "2" to "4") are shifted up by one entry (step 002SGS147).

Then, the variable special chart designation buffer value, which is the value stored in the variable special chart designation buffer, is updated to "0" (step 002SGS148), and the process proceeds to step 002SGS149.

In step 002SGS149, the display result determination table shown in FIG. 118 is selected and set as the table to be used for determining whether the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, is a "jackpot" or a "miss." Next, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result stored in the variable random number buffer is compared with the determination value assigned to each special symbol display result of "jackpot" or "miss," to determine whether the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" or a "miss" (step 002SGS150). Furthermore, in this step 002SGS150, if the game state at that time is a high probability state (high probability state) in which the high probability flag is on, a "jackpot" is determined if the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result falls within the range of 10,000 to 12,180, which corresponds to the high probability state (high probability state), and a "miss" is determined if it does not fall within that range. Additionally, if the probability flag is off and the game is in a low probability state (low probability, low base state in this feature), if the random number value MR1 used to determine the special chart display result falls within the range of 1 to 219, it is determined to be a "jackpot," and if it does not fall within the range, it is determined to be a "miss."

In this way, in the display result determination table selected in step 002SGS149, different determination values are assigned to a "jackpot" depending on the game state (high probability, low probability) at that time. Therefore, in the processing of step 002SGS150, whether or not the special chart display result is a "jackpot" is determined using different determination data (determination values) depending on whether or not the game state when the variable display of a special chart game or the like is started is a high probability state. When the game state is a high probability state, a "jackpot" is determined (determined) with a higher probability than when the game state is a low probability state.

If step 002SGS150 determines that a jackpot has occurred (step 002SGS150; Y), the jackpot flag is set to ON (step 002SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 119(A) is selected and set as the table to be used to determine one of several jackpot types (step 002SGS153). By referencing the jackpot type determination table thus set, the jackpot type is determined to be one of several types depending on whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer matches one of the determination values assigned to each jackpot type in the jackpot type determination table: "non-variable jackpot," "variable jackpot A," "variable jackpot B," or "variable jackpot C" (step 002SGS154).

By determining the jackpot type in step 002SGS154, the game state to be controlled after the jackpot game state ends—either a time-saving state (low probability, high base state) or a probability variable state (high probability, high base state), which is more advantageous to the player than the time-saving state—is determined before the fixed special symbol is derived as a variable display result. Corresponding to the jackpot type thus determined, the determined jackpot type is stored by, for example, setting a jackpot type buffer value, which is the stored value of a jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (step 002SGS155). For example, if the jackpot type is a "non-probability variable jackpot" corresponding to a non-probability variable jackpot, the jackpot type buffer value can be set to "0," if it is a "probability variable A" corresponding to a probability variable jackpot A, "0" if it is a "probability variable B" corresponding to a probability variable jackpot B, "2," and if it is a "probability variable C" corresponding to a probability variable jackpot C, "3." After processing step 002SGS155, proceed to step 002SGS156.

Also, if step 002SGS150 determines that the result is a "miss" (step 002SGS150; N), step 002SGS156 is executed without executing steps 002SGS152 to 002SGS155.

In step 002SGS156, the CPU 103 sets a fixed special symbol in accordance with the pre-determined result of whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state (whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on), and the determined result of the jackpot type when the jackpot gaming state is set. As an example, in accordance with the pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is a "miss," a special symbol showing the "-" symbol, which is a miss symbol, is set as the fixed special symbol. Also, if the special symbol display result is determined to be a "jackpot" in step 002SGS150a, and the jackpot type in step 002SGS154 is "Probable Jackpot A," a special symbol showing the number "7" is set as the fixed special symbol. Also, if the jackpot type is "Probable Jackpot B," a special symbol showing the number "5" is set as the fixed special symbol. Additionally, if the jackpot type is a "non-variable jackpot," the special symbol showing the number "3" is set as the confirmed special symbol. Additionally, if the jackpot type is a "variable jackpot C," the special symbol showing the number "0" is set as the confirmed special symbol. Note that these confirmed special symbols are only examples, and other confirmed special symbols may be set, or multiple types of symbols may be set as confirmed special symbols.

After the confirmed special symbol is set in step 002SGS156, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", which corresponds to the variable pattern setting process (step 002SGS157), and then the normal special symbol processing is terminated.

If the number of reserved memories for the special symbol game using the first special symbol is "0" in step 002SGS145 (step 002SGS145; Y), a predetermined demo display setting is performed (step 002SGS158), and then the normal special symbol processing is terminated. In this demo display setting, it is determined whether or not a performance control command (customer waiting demo designation command) that specifies a demonstration display (demo screen display) by, for example, displaying a predetermined performance image on the image display device 5 has been transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. If the customer waiting demo designation command has already been transmitted, the demo display setting is terminated. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, settings are performed to transmit the customer waiting demo designation command, and then the demo display setting is terminated.

(Major operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, we will explain the main operations of the performance control board 12. When the performance control board 12 receives a supply of power voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of Fig. 129. When the performance control main process shown in Fig. 129 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clearing RAM 122, setting various initial values, and setting registers for the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example, based on the register settings of the CTC. If the timer interrupt flag is off at this time (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed, an interrupt occurs to receive performance control commands from the main board 11. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 turns on. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal turning on, the performance control CPU 120 automatically disables the interrupt. However, if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt disable command (DI command). In response to the interrupt due to the performance control INT signal turning on, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a specified command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, the performance control command is captured from a specified input port included in the I/O 125 that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The captured performance control command is stored in a performance control command reception buffer, for example, provided in RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then enables interrupts and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 on the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read effect control commands are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a specified area of RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in RAM 122 may be turned on, so that the effect control process process can confirm which effect control command was received and the content specified by the effect control command. Furthermore, if the effect control command specifies the game status, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game status.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). The performance control process controls the operation of various performance devices, such as the display of performance images in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting of decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, and the driving of the movable bodies 32A and 32B. Furthermore, the control content of performance operations using the various performance devices is judged, determined, and set in accordance with the performance control commands sent from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process of step S76, an effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 is updated by software. Furthermore, after the effect random number value update process (step S77), a demo effect control process (step S78) is executed to execute a demo effect on the pachinko gaming machine 1, a background display update process (step S79) is executed to update the background image displayed on the image display device 5 to another background image, and a menu display process (step S80) is executed to display a menu screen on the image display device 5 in the game standby state. Then, processing returns to step S73. Other processing may be executed before returning to step S73.

In the background display update process of this embodiment, one of the following is selected and displayed: a first background image corresponding to the first presentation mode, a second background image corresponding to the second presentation mode, a third background image corresponding to the third presentation mode, and a fourth background image corresponding to the fourth presentation mode. The first and second background images can be displayed when the game state is normal, the third background image can be displayed when the game state is in a low-probability, high-base state, and the fourth background image can be displayed when the game state is in a high-probability, high-base state. Furthermore, the first and second background images are switched when a switching display condition is met, such as when a variable display of SP Reach Hare is executed or when one background image is displayed continuously for a predetermined period of time.

The menu display process not only displays a menu screen on the image display device 5 in the game standby state, but also includes adjusting the volume output from the speakers 8L, 8R and adjusting the light intensity (brightness) of the game effect lamp 9 in response to the player's operation of the push button 31B while the menu screen is displayed.

In the demo performance control process, the performance control CPU 120 may, for example, set a timer, such as a customer waiting demo performance start waiting timer, until the customer waiting demo performance begins based on receiving a customer waiting demo designation command, and may start the customer waiting demo performance when the timer expires without the variable display starting. If the variable display starts while the customer waiting demo performance start waiting timer is operating or while the customer waiting demo performance is being executed, the customer waiting demo performance start waiting timer may be cleared, the customer waiting demo performance may be interrupted, and the display on the image display device 5 may be switched to a variable display of decorative patterns.

(Performance control process)
130 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 129 as the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 130, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a hold display update process (step S161) to update the hold memory display (first hold display 002SG101 or second hold display 002SG102) in the special symbol hold memory display area 5U of the image display device 5 to a display corresponding to the contents stored in the start winning time reception command buffer 002SG194A, such as a shift display (described later). After the hold display update process is executed, one of the following steps S170 to S175 is selected and executed, for example, depending on the value of the effect process flag stored in RAM 122.

In addition, in step S161, a pre-reading preview setting process may be executed together with the above-mentioned hold display update process, in which judgments, decisions, and settings are made to execute a pre-reading preview performance (such as a performance that changes the display color of the hold display) based on the performance control command sent from the main board 11 at the time of the initial winning.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (confirmed decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various effects such as reach effects and various preview effects will be executed, their mode, and the start timing of execution are determined based on the display result and variation pattern specified by the effect control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute an effect) that reflects the determined results is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display effect processing of step S172 is executed when the effect process flag value is "2." During this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, drive the movable bodies 32A and 32B, output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R in response to an instruction (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13, and turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs in response to an instruction (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14. After performing these effect controls, the CPU 120 displays the fixed decorative pattern, which is the result of the display of the decorative pattern, in a static state, for example, in response to reading an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the effect control pattern or receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying the static display of the fixed decorative pattern. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a static state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3" and the variable display effect processing ends.

The special symbol win wait process of step S173 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "3". In this special symbol win wait process, the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether a presentation control command specifying the start of a jackpot game state has been received from the main board 11. When a presentation control command specifying the start of a jackpot game state is received, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "4". Furthermore, if a command specifying the start of a jackpot game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving said command has elapsed, the display result in the special symbol game is determined to be a "miss", and the value of the presentation process flag is updated to its initial value of "0". Once the value of the presentation process flag has been updated, the special symbol win wait process ends.

The jackpot presentation processing of step S174 is executed when the presentation process flag value is "4." In this jackpot presentation processing, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern, etc., corresponding to the presentation content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. Furthermore, in the jackpot presentation processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying the end of the jackpot gaming state, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "5," which corresponds to the ending presentation processing, and the jackpot presentation processing ends.

The ending presentation process of step S175 is executed when the presentation process flag value is "5." In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the settings. The presentation process flag value is then updated to its initial value of "0," and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Variable display start setting process)
Next, the operation of the performance control CPU 120 will be described. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the performance control process shown in FIG. 130. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the first variable display start command reception flag is on (step 002SGS271). If the first variable display start command reception flag is on (step 002SGS271; Y), for example, the various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special symbol reserved memory in the start winning reception command buffer are shifted up by one buffer number at a time (step 002SGS272). Note that the contents of buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so they are erased.

Furthermore, if the first variable display start command reception flag is OFF in step 002SGS271 (step 002SGS271; N), it is determined whether the second variable display start command reception flag is ON (step 002SGS273). If the second variable display start command reception flag is OFF (step 002SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated. If the second variable display start command reception flag is ON (step 002SGS273; Y), for example, the various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special symbol reserve memory in the start winning time reception command buffer are shifted up by one buffer number (step 002SGS274). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so it is erased.

After executing step 002SGS272 or step 002SGS274, the performance control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 002SGS275).

Next, the display result (stopping pattern) of the decorative pattern is determined based on the data stored in the display result specification command storage area (i.e., the received display result specification command) and the variation pattern (step 002SGS276). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern according to the display result specified by the display result specification command, and stores data indicating the determined stopping pattern of the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area.

In this embodiment, if the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to a probability variable jackpot A, the presentation control CPU 120 determines, for example, a decorative pattern combination (jackpot pattern) in which three symbols form a "7" as the stopping symbol. Also, if the received variable display result designation command is one of the third to fourth variable display result designation commands corresponding to probability variable jackpot B to probability variable jackpot C, the stopping symbol is determined from multiple combinations of odd-numbered symbols other than "7" (for example, decorative pattern combinations such as "111," "333," "555," and "999"). Also, if the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to a non-probability variable jackpot, the presentation control CPU 120 determines, for example, a decorative pattern combination in which three symbols form an even number as the stopping symbol.

Furthermore, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command, which corresponds to a non-variable jackpot, the stopping symbol may be determined from multiple combinations of odd-numbered symbols other than "7" (e.g., combinations of decorative symbols such as "111," "333," "555," and "999"), just as when the received variable display result designation command is one of the third to fourth variable display result designation commands, which correspond to variable jackpots B to C. In this case, by further sharing the effects during jackpot play and variable display in the variable jackpot state, the player can be drawn to whether the game state is in the variable jackpot state or the time-saving state until the variable display is executed 100 times, and further, whether the time-saving state will end after 100 variable displays or continue until 10,000 variable displays, thereby increasing the player's interest.

Furthermore, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to a miss and the variable display variation pattern is a non-reach variation pattern, a decorative pattern combination in which three patterns are not aligned (a miss pattern) is determined as the stopping pattern.Furthermore, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to a miss and the variable display variation pattern is a reach variation pattern, a reach-miss combination in which the left and right patterns are the same but the center pattern is different (a miss pattern) is determined as the stopping pattern.

To determine these stopping symbols, the performance control CPU 120 may, for example, extract a random number to determine the stopping symbols, and determine the stopping symbols of the decorative symbols using a stopping symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols are associated with numerical values. In other words, the stopping symbols may be determined by selecting data indicating the combination of decorative symbols that corresponds to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the fluctuation pattern designation command read in step 002SGS275 is a fluctuation pattern designation command for a super reach with pseudo-consecutive wins (fluctuation patterns PA2-3, PA2-4, PB1-3, PB1-4) (step 002SGS277). If the fluctuation pattern designation command read in step 002SGS275 is not a fluctuation pattern designation command for a super reach, that is, if it is a fluctuation pattern designation command for a normal reach (step 002SGS278; N), proceed to step 002SGS383.

If the variation pattern designation command read in step 002SGS275 is a variation pattern designation command for a super reach, the display colors of the stopped patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L and right decorative pattern display area 5C that form the reach state are identified from the data indicating the stopped decorative patterns determined in step 002SGS276 and stored in the decorative pattern display result storage area. Then, using the pseudo consecutive number of times display determination table shown in Figure 162 (C), the display color of the pseudo consecutive number of times display to be displayed when the first re-variable display begins, that is, the pseudo consecutive number of times display (e.g., "x2") indicating that two variable displays, including the first variable display, will begin in the variable display, is determined and stored (step 002SGS278).

Next, it is determined whether the variation pattern designation command read in step 002SGS275 is a super reach variation pattern with two pseudo consecutive wins (step 002SGS279). If it is determined that it is a super reach variation pattern with two pseudo consecutive wins (step 002SGS279; Y), the pseudo consecutive win count display determination table shown in Figure 162 (C) is used to determine and store the display color of the pseudo consecutive win count display to be displayed when the second re-variable display begins, that is, the pseudo consecutive win count display (e.g., "x3") indicating that three variable displays, including the first variable display, will begin in the variable display (step 002SGS280).

If step 002SGS279 determines that the variation pattern is not two pseudo consecutive wins, or if step 002SGS280 is executed, a start wait timer is set to start displaying the number of pseudo consecutive wins (step 002SGS281), and the process proceeds to step 002SGS282.

Next, in step 002SGS282, a process table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is selected (step 002SGS282), and the process timer is started (step 002SGS283).

In addition, the process table includes display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, sound control execution data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, all of which are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbered 1 to N).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance devices (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, speakers 8L and 8R as performance components, and the operation unit (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.)) in accordance with the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1) (step 002SGS284). For example, to display an image corresponding to a fluctuation pattern on the image display device 5, it outputs a command to the display control unit 123. It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 to control the on/off of various lamps. It also outputs a control signal (sound number data) to the sound control board 13 to output sound from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Then, the variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command (step 002SGS285). A predetermined time is also set to the variable display control timer (step 002SGS286). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms. Each time the predetermined time elapses, the performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display status of the left, center, and right decorative and small symbols to VRAM. The display control unit 123 outputs a signal corresponding to the image data written to VRAM to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing the variable display (variation) of the decorative and small symbols. Next, the value of the performance control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variable display performance processing (step S172) (step 002SGS287), and the variable display start setting processing ends.

(Decorative designs and small designs)
Next, the decorative symbols and small symbols will be explained based on Figures 132 to 135. Figure 132 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbols and small symbols. Figure 133 shows (A1) and (A2) the first presentation mode, (B1) and (B2) the second presentation mode, (C1) and (C2) the third presentation mode, and (D1) and (D2) the fourth presentation mode. Figure 134 shows the relationship between the variable display area and the decorative symbols in (A1) and (A2) the first presentation mode, and (B1) and (B2) the second presentation mode. Figure 135 shows the relationship between the variable display area and the decorative symbols in (C1) and (C2) the third presentation mode, and (D1) and (D2) the fourth presentation mode, and (E) is a diagram for explaining the variable display of the decorative symbols and small symbols.

In addition, in Figure 132, the sizes of the decorative patterns (for low base state), decorative patterns (for high base state), and small patterns are displayed at the ratio when displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R and display area 5S.

As shown in FIG. 132, the decorative symbols (for low base state) displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R when the game state is in the low base state are composed of a number display unit 002SG051 consisting of a circular number base portion when viewed from the front and the numbers "0" to "9" displayed on the front of the number base portion; a character display unit 002SG052 displaying 10 types of characters (not all characters are shown) corresponding to the numbers "0" to "9" in the number display unit 002SG051; an information display unit 002SG053 consisting of a rectangular information base portion when viewed from the front and information about the character displayed on the front of the information base portion (for example, in this embodiment, the character's name); and a roughly rectangular base display unit 002SG054 displayed surrounding the number display unit 002SG051, character display unit 002SG052, and information display unit 002SG053.

In this embodiment, the information display unit 002SG053 displays the name of the character displayed in the character display unit 002SG052, but the present invention is not limited to this. Various information other than the name (for example, the character's nickname, personality, battle level, items owned by the character, etc.) may be displayed as long as it is information about the character displayed in the character display unit 002SG052.

In addition, the decorative symbols (for high base state) displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R when the game state is in the high base state are composed of a number display section 002SG061 consisting of the numbers "0" to "9" and a roughly rectangular base display section 002SG064 that is displayed surrounding the number display section 002SG061. The decorative symbols for the high base state do not have character display sections or information display sections like the decorative symbols for the low base state.

In addition, the display area 5S located in the upper left of the image display device 5 displays the first and second reserved memory counts and the small symbol (fourth symbol) corresponding to the decorative symbol. The small symbol consists of the numbers "0" to "9" displayed in each of the small symbol display areas 5SL, 5SC, and 5SR, and each number corresponds to a decorative symbol. Note that in this embodiment, the numbers on the decorative symbol and the numbers on the small symbol correspond, but not all of the numbers on both symbols necessarily correspond. For example, the numbers on the small symbol may be numbers "1" to "5," which are fewer than the numbers "0" to "9" on the decorative symbol, or they may be symbols or figures that are different from the numbers on the decorative symbol.

Next, we will explain the decorative patterns (for low base state), decorative patterns (for high base state), and small patterns.

<Display time of each symbol> The decorative symbols (for low base state) and decorative symbols (for high base state) are almost always displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R while the image display device 5 is powered on, but they may be erased (not displayed), for example, when an SP reach effect (super reach effect) is executed during variable display, or when a customer waiting demo effect is executed. On the other hand, the small symbols are always displayed in front of the decorative symbols (higher layer) while the image display device 5 is powered on, and continue to be displayed even when the decorative symbols are erased as described above. However, they may be erased when information with a higher display priority than the small symbols (for example, an error message) is displayed.

<Variable display mode of each symbol> In the first presentation mode described below, decorative symbols (for low base state) are variably displayed by a scrolling display that moves linearly from top to bottom across the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In the second presentation mode, decorative symbols are variably displayed by a scrolling display that moves curvedly from the back to the front across the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the third presentation mode described below, decorative symbols (for the high base state) are displayed variably in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R by rotating around an axis of rotation facing up and down, and in the fourth presentation mode, decorative symbols are displayed variably by scrolling in a linear fashion from top to bottom in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Regardless of the game state or presentation mode, the small symbols are displayed variably in each small symbol display area 5SL, 5SC, and 5SR, switching between symbols "0" to "9" (updating symbols).

In a broad sense, the above-mentioned "scrolling display" and "switching display" are both included in "switching display," in which images are switched between displays. However, as described below, a "scrolling display" may refer to an image that is framed in or faded in to the display area, and then framed out or faded out from the display area, thereby updating and displaying multiple images. A distinction may also be made between a "switching display" and an image that is updated and displayed by repeatedly displaying and hiding (erasing), or by rotating, at a predetermined position in the display area, without moving, fading in, or fading out.

<Numeric display section> The decorative design (for low base state) and decorative design (for high base state) have not only numeric display sections 002SG051 and 002SG061, but also character display section 002SG052, information display section 002SG053, and base display section 002SG054, whereas the small design is composed only of a numeric display section.

In addition, the decorative patterns (for low base state) are displayed in the same size in the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and in the center decorative pattern display area 5C they are displayed in a size slightly smaller than the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R, creating a sense of depth. On the other hand, the decorative patterns (for high base state) are displayed in the same size in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R, and are arranged in a straight line in the left-right direction. The small patterns are displayed in the same size in each small pattern display area 5SL, 5SC, and 5SR.

In addition, in the low base state, the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R are arranged approximately horizontally in the approximate vertical center of the image display device 5, but the middle decorative pattern display area 5C is arranged slightly higher than the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and is therefore arranged slightly higher than the approximate vertical center of the image display device 5. On the other hand, in the high base state, the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged approximately horizontally in the approximate vertical center of the image display device 5. Therefore, the decorative pattern displayed and stopped at the stop position of the middle decorative pattern display area 5C in the high base state is arranged closer to the center of the display screen of the image display device 5 than the decorative pattern displayed and stopped at the stop position of the middle decorative pattern display area 5C in the low base state (see Figure 133).

Furthermore, when the size of the number display section 002SG051 of the decorative pattern (for low base state) is used as the standard, the size of the number display section 002SG061 of the decorative pattern (for high base state) is large, and the size of the number display section of the small pattern is small. In other words, the size of the number display section increases in the order of decorative pattern (for high base state), decorative pattern (for low base state), and small pattern (size of number display section: decorative pattern (for high base state) > decorative pattern (for low base state) > small pattern). Furthermore, the overall size of each pattern is also in the same relationship as the number display section.

In this way, in the low base state, the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R are made to appear larger, and the decorative pattern in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C is shifted to create a sense of depth and increase interest, while in the high base state, where the average variable display period is short, the decorative patterns are positioned closer to the center of the display screen of the image display device 5, thereby increasing the degree to which the decorative patterns can be recognized (see Figure 133).

The decorative pattern (for low base state), decorative pattern (for high base state), and numerical display portion of the small pattern are each formed as a stereoscopic image (3D image, three-dimensional image). A stereoscopic image is, for example, an image created using 3DCG (a virtual solid is constructed (modeled) using points placed on a three-dimensional coordinate system as vertices, information reproducing the material, etc. is assigned to each surface, and the object is reproduced by illuminating it from an arbitrary light intensity, light source position, etc.). However, it may also be an image that can be viewed in three dimensions when displayed on a three-dimensional display device (for example, an image liquid crystal panel capable of displaying a stereoscopic image (video) consisting of an image for the right eye (R image) and an image for the left eye (L image), a backlight that irradiates planar light from behind the image liquid crystal panel toward the front, and a parallax barrier liquid crystal panel located in front of the image liquid crystal panel at a predetermined distance from the image liquid crystal panel).

Furthermore, among the decorative symbols from "0" to "9," the odd numbers "1, 3, 5, 7, and 9" are probability symbols corresponding to a "probability variable jackpot" that is controlled to a high probability, high base state after the jackpot ends, while the even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, and 8" are normal symbols (non-probability variable symbols) corresponding to a "non-probability variable jackpot" that is controlled to a low probability, high base state after the jackpot ends. Note that even in the case of a probability variable jackpot, the normal symbols may result in a predetermined jackpot combination.

<Character Display> The character display section 002SG052 of the decorative symbol (for low base state) is formed as a non-stereoscopic image (2D image, two-dimensional image). Note that the character display section 002SG052 may also be formed as a stereoscopic image (3D image, three-dimensional image). Furthermore, the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052 performs a predetermined action (movement) when the variable display starts or stops, as described below. On the other hand, the decorative symbol (for high base state) and the small symbol do not have a character display section.

<Information Display Unit> The information display unit 002SG053 of the decorative pattern (for low base state) is formed as a non-stereoscopic image (2D image, two-dimensional image). Note that the information display unit 002SG053 may also be formed as a stereoscopic image (3D image, three-dimensional image). The information display unit 002SG053 also displays the "name," which is information about the character displayed in the character display unit 002SG052, and as described below, the "name" is erased when the variable display begins. On the other hand, the decorative pattern (for high base state) and the small pattern do not have an information display unit.

<Base display section> The base display section 002SG054 of the decorative pattern (for low base state) has a decorative section that decorates the character displayed on the front, and is formed as a non-stereoscopic image (2D image, two-dimensional image). Furthermore, the base display section 002SG064 of the decorative pattern (for high base state) is formed as a stereoscopic image (3D image, three-dimensional image). Note that both the base display section 002SG054 and the base display section 002SG064 may be formed as stereoscopic images (3D image, three-dimensional image). Furthermore, when the size of the base display section 002SG054 of the decorative pattern (for low base state) is used as a standard, the size of the base display section 002SG064 of the decorative pattern (for high base state) is larger. On the other hand, no base display section is provided for the small pattern.

<Main Color> The color of the numbers displayed on the number display units 002SG051 and 002SG061 of the decorative symbols (for low base state) and decorative symbols (for high base state) is "blue" for regular symbols consisting of even numbers, and "red" for special symbols consisting of odd numbers. Furthermore, the number base units other than numbers, and base display units 002SG054 and 002SG064, etc., may be the same color as the numbers, or may be displayed in a different color than the numbers.

The characters displayed in the character display section 002SG052 may be configured with their own original colors without being influenced by the main color. Furthermore, the character corresponding to the probability variation pattern is preferably an ally character, for example, when there are separate ally and enemy characters. Alternatively, it is preferable that the ally character be a central character in the story, such as the protagonist of the story or someone closely related to the protagonist.

As mentioned above, when the narrative concept of allies and enemies is applied, preview effects and SP reach effects are generally presented from the perspective of the allies, and if the SP reach effect is structured around allies fighting each other, the player will be notified that a favorable outcome for the allies (such as a jackpot) will occur if the outcome is favorable for the allies, such as the allies defeating the enemies.

Also, the main color with the highest occupancy rate across the entire area of each decorative symbol (for low base state) and decorative symbol (for high base state) may be the same color as the number. Also, while the color used for normal symbols consisting of even numbers is "blue" and the color used for special symbols consisting of odd numbers is "red," they may be different colors.

In addition, in high base states, as described below, the scrolling display is performed at high speed, so the decorative symbols (for low base states) need to be more visible and appealing than the decorative symbols (for low base states). Stop symbol announcements and announcements of when the variation will begin are often performed by incorporating effect displays into the decorative symbols. As a result, decorative symbols (for high base states) are primarily composed of the number display section 002SG061, and are characterized by a larger size ratio than decorative symbols (for low base states) which are composed of a character display section and a number display section.

Although not shown in the present embodiment, the numbers in the decorative design (for the high base state) may be made more flashy in appearance, such as by having more complex movements or a more sophisticated design, than the numbers in the decorative design (for the low base state), in order to enhance the high base state.

On the other hand, the color of the numbers in the small symbols is "yellow" for regular symbols consisting of even numbers and "yellow-green" for special symbols consisting of odd numbers. In this embodiment, the colors are "yellow" for regular symbols consisting of even numbers and "yellow-green" for special symbols consisting of odd numbers, but they may be other colors. Also, numbers that are the same as decorative symbols may be the same color as the decorative symbols.

The design of the small symbols may be a reduced version of the material of the numbers in the decorative symbols in the low base state and high base state, but rather than enhancing the presentation effect through design, it is preferable that the design be simpler than the numbers in the decorative symbols (for example, flat rather than three-dimensional, and with a simple color that is not glossy, etc.) in order to improve visibility for players.

As shown in FIG. 133, the presentation control CPU 120 is capable of executing one of the following presentation modes: the first presentation mode (see FIG. 133 (A1) (A2)), the second presentation mode (see FIG. 133 (B1) (B2)), the third presentation mode (see FIG. 133 (C1) (C2)), and the fourth presentation mode (see FIG. 133 (D1) (D2)). The first and second presentation modes are presentation modes that can be executed when the game state is controlled to a low-probability, low-base state. The third presentation mode is a presentation mode that can be executed when the game state is controlled to a low-probability, high-base state, and the fourth presentation mode is a presentation mode that can be executed when the game state is controlled to a high-probability, high-base state.

As shown in Figure 133 (A1), in the first presentation mode, decorative symbols for a low base state are displayed in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and a first background image 002SG081 depicting a daytime cityscape is displayed as the background image for the decorative symbols. Also, as shown in Figure 133 (A2), the variable display of the decorative symbols is implemented by a scrolling display (first scrolling display) that moves linearly from top to bottom across the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

More specifically, as shown in Figures 134 (A1) and (A2), each decorative symbol is displayed frame-in downward from the top edge of decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R, then moves downward in a straight line, and is displayed frame-out downward from the bottom edge of decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R. Furthermore, when the preceding decorative symbol displayed frame-in (e.g., decorative symbol "3") passes the decorative symbol stopping position set in the vertical center of decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R, the succeeding decorative symbol (e.g., decorative symbol "4") is displayed frame-in and moves downward. That is, as shown in FIG. 134 (A2), while the leading "3" decorative symbol passes its stopping position, the leading "2" decorative symbol and the trailing "4" decorative symbol are not visible, but after the leading "3" decorative symbol passes its stopping position, the leading "3" decorative symbol and the trailing "4" decorative symbol become visible. In this way, the decorative symbols increase in number in the order of "0," "1," "2," "3," etc., returning to "0" after "9," and repeatedly updating the display from "0" to "9." In other words, the decorative symbols are displayed in a loop of "0" to "9" in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, resulting in a scrolling display of the decorative symbols.

In addition, the display area 5S located in the upper left of the screen of the image display device 5 displays the first pending memory count, second pending memory count, and small symbols, while the special symbol pending memory display area 5U and active display area 5F located in the lower part of the screen of the image display device 5 display the first pending display 002SG101 and second pending display 002SG102 corresponding to variable displays whose execution is pending, and the active display 002SG103 corresponding to variable displays that are currently being executed. Note that the first pending memory count, second pending memory count, small symbols, special symbol pending memory display area 5U, and active display area 5F are displayed in common in all presentation modes, and therefore will not be described below.

As shown in Figure 133 (B1), in the second presentation mode, decorative symbols for a low base state are displayed in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and a second background image 002SG082 depicting a daytime wilderness landscape is displayed as the background image for the decorative symbols. Also, as shown in Figure 133 (B2), the variable display of the decorative symbols is implemented using a scrolling display (second scrolling display) that moves in a curved pattern from the back to the front of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In more detail, as shown in Figures 134 (B1) and (B2), the left and right decorative patterns are displayed frame-in from the upper left side of the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the upper right side of the right decorative pattern display area 5R, moving toward the center of the screen, then moving downward and away from the left and right sides of the screen, and are displayed frame-out from the lower left side of the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the lower right side of the right decorative pattern display area 5R toward the side. The middle decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed from the back of the screen in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, moving toward the front, and then displayed frame-out.

Furthermore, when the leading decorative symbol (e.g., a "2" decorative symbol) displayed in frame passes the stop position of the decorative symbol set in the vertical center of the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, the following decorative symbol (e.g., a "3" decorative symbol) is displayed in frame and moves toward the center of the screen. That is, as shown in Figure 134 (B2), while the leading "2" decorative symbol passes near the stop position, the leading "2" decorative symbol and the following "3" decorative symbol are visible, but after the leading "2" decorative symbol passes the stop position, the following "3" decorative symbol and the following "4" decorative symbol become visible. In this way, the decorative symbols increase in number from "0," "1," "2," "3," etc., returning to "0" after "9," and the display is updated repeatedly from "0" to "9." In other words, the decorative symbols "0" to "9" are displayed in a loop in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, resulting in a scrolling display of the decorative symbols.

As shown in Figure 133 (C1), in the third presentation mode, decorative symbols for the high base state are displayed in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and a third background image 002SG083 depicting an evening cityscape is displayed as the background image for the decorative symbols. Also, as shown in Figure 133 (C2), the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R by rotating around an axis of rotation pointing in the vertical direction.

In more detail, as shown in Figures 135 (C1) and (C2), the decorative symbols in the third presentation mode have a first surface 5a and a second surface 5b, which is the opposite surface of the first surface 5a, and the preceding decorative symbol (for example, the decorative symbol "3") is displayed on the first surface 5a. On the other hand, when the first surface 5a faces forward, it is not possible to determine whether the succeeding decorative symbol (for example, the decorative symbol "4") is displayed on the second surface 5b. In other words, because the base display unit 002SG064 has low transmittance (is opaque), the decorative symbol displayed on the second surface 5b cannot be seen through from the front side (visible from the front side through the decorative symbol).

The decorative symbols are rotatable in one direction (for example, clockwise or counterclockwise when viewed from above), and as they rotate from first surface 5a to second surface 5b, then first surface 5a to second surface 5b, etc., the numbers increase in the order "0", "1", "2", "3", etc., returning to "0" after "9", and then repeatedly updating and displaying numbers from "0" to "9". In other words, the decorative symbols are displayed in a loop of "0" to "9" in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, thereby rotating the decorative symbols.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 135 (C2), when the first surface 5a is rotated by approximately 90 degrees or more from a state facing the front and the second surface 5b is displayed, the second surface 5b displays a decorative pattern (e.g., a decorative pattern "4") subsequent to the decorative pattern (e.g., a decorative pattern "3") displayed on the first surface 5a. Next, although not specifically shown, when the second surface 5b is rotated by approximately 90 degrees or more from a state facing the front and the first surface 5a is displayed, the first surface 5a displays a decorative pattern (e.g., a decorative pattern "5") subsequent to the decorative pattern (e.g., a decorative pattern "4") displayed on the second surface 5b.

In addition, a right-hit notification image 002SG201 consisting of a right arrow and the words "right hit" is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 to encourage the player to perform a right-hit operation, and a time-saving remaining display 002SG202 (in this example, the words "XX times remaining", where XX = 0 to 100) indicating the remaining number of times the time-saving control will be executed is displayed in the lower left corner of the screen of the image display device 5.

As shown in Figure 133 (D1), in the fourth presentation mode, decorative symbols for the high base state are displayed in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and a fourth background image 002SG084 depicting a nighttime cityscape is displayed as the background image for the decorative symbols. Also, as shown in Figure 133 (C2), the decorative symbols are displayed in a scrolling display (third scrolling display) that moves linearly from top to bottom in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In more detail, as shown in Figures 135 (D1) and (D2), each decorative symbol is displayed frame-in downward from the top edge of decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R, then moves downward in a straight line, and is displayed frame-out downward from the bottom edge of decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R. Also, when the preceding decorative symbol displayed frame-in (for example, the decorative symbol "3") passes the decorative symbol stopping position set in the vertical center of decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R, the succeeding decorative symbol (for example, the decorative symbol "4") is displayed frame-in and moves downward. That is, as shown in FIG. 135 (D1), while the leading "3" decorative symbol passes its stopping position, the leading "2" decorative symbol and the trailing "4" decorative symbol are not visible. However, as shown in FIG. 135 (D2), after the leading "3" decorative symbol passes its stopping position, the leading "3" decorative symbol and the trailing "4" decorative symbol become visible. In this way, the decorative symbols increase in number in the order of "0," "1," "2," "3," etc., returning to "0" after "9," and repeating the increase from "0" to "9." In other words, the decorative symbols are displayed in a loop of "0" to "9" in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, thereby scrolling the decorative symbols.

In addition, a right-hit notification image 002SG201 consisting of a right arrow and the words "right hit" is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 to encourage the player to perform a right-hit operation.

In addition, in the second presentation mode, the name in the information display section 002SG053 of the decorative symbol is always hidden, even when the decorative symbol is stopped. In the third and fourth presentation modes, the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner without including the information display section 002SG053. In this way, in the first presentation mode, displaying the information display section 002SG053 draws attention to the character's name, allowing the player to deepen their understanding of the character. Meanwhile, in the second and third presentation modes, keeping the information display section 002SG053 hidden allows players to focus more on the variable display and preview presentations rather than the character. Note that not only the name displayed in the information display section 002SG053, but also the information display section 002SG053 itself may be hidden.

As shown in Figure 135 (E), the decorative symbols and small symbols have different variable display modes. For example, during a period in which decorative symbols are scrolled at high speed, one decorative symbol is displayed frame-in from the top edge of the decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R, and takes a passing period Ta2 before it is displayed frame-out from the bottom edge. In other words, it takes a period Ta2 from when one decorative symbol is displayed until the decorative symbol display is finished. On the other hand, during the period Ta2, the small symbols of a losing combination are switched (updated) and displayed multiple times (for example, five times).

In more detail, if the frame rate (screen display speed) is set to 30 FPS (30 frames of images displayed per second), 10 frames of images will be displayed from the start of displaying one decorative pattern to the end of that display, and this period Ta2 will be approximately 0.3 seconds.

Meanwhile, the small symbols of different losing combinations (for example, "635," "175," "461," "532," "913," etc.) are displayed every two frames (period Ta1). In other words, during the period Ta2 from when one decorative symbol is displayed until the decorative symbol display ends, the small symbols of losing combinations are switched five times, each displayed for period Ta1 (period Ta1 < period Ta2). Note that although the small symbols of each losing combination are displayed for period Ta1, this is only for a moment (approximately 0.06 seconds), making it difficult to see visually.

Furthermore, if the performance control CPU 120 decides to stop displaying the confirmed decorative pattern of the losing combination (e.g., "326") based on the determination that the display result of the variable display will be a losing display result, after starting the variable display of the decorative pattern, and before stopping and displaying the confirmed decorative pattern of the losing combination (e.g., "326"), it switches the display so that the small pattern of the losing combination, "326", which is the same as the decorative pattern, is not displayed. This prevents the small pattern of the losing combination from revealing in advance that the decorative pattern of the losing combination will be stopped and displayed.

In addition, when the decorative symbols are scrolled in the first, second, and fourth presentation modes, or rotated in the third presentation mode, the variable display speed changes from low to high when the variable display starts, and changes from high to low when the variable display stops. In other words, the variable display speed is variable, while the small symbols are displayed variably at a constant speed from the start to the end of the variable display.

(Various decorative actions)
Next, various action displays of decorative symbols will be explained based on Fig. 136. Fig. 136 is a diagram showing (A) a decorative symbol variation start action, (B) a variation stop action, and (C) a loop action.

As shown in Figures 136(A) to 136(C), the decorative symbols for the low base state move within the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and rotate within the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, to provide a variable display. However, apart from this variable display movement, various actions (operations) can be performed to change the number display portion 002SG051 and character display portion 002SG052 of the decorative symbol.

(Change start action)
As shown in FIG. 136(A), when variable display is initiated in the first and second presentation modes, a "variation start action" is executed in the decorative pattern, in which the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052 flips its body orientation from left to right. Specifically, in the variation start action A1, the character is in a normal position facing diagonally forward to the right with both hands on their hips; in the variation start action A2, the character is in a position facing forward with both hands raised and spread; and in the variation start action A3, the character is in a position facing diagonally forward to the left with both hands on their hips. For the sake of convenience, only the states of three frames of the variation start actions A1, A2, and A3 are shown here; however, in reality, the character is displayed over several dozen frames within the variation start action period (A1-A3), resulting in a variation start action (movement) in which the character's body orientation changes in the order of diagonally forward to the right (A1), forward (A2), and diagonally forward to the left (A3).

Next, after the character's body faces diagonally forward and left, the decorative symbol moves (rises) a predetermined distance from its stopped position in the opposite direction to the scrolling direction (A4), and then begins to move downward, thereby starting the scrolling display. These change start actions A1 to A4 are executed over a change start action period Tb1 (see Figure 137), from the start of the variable display of the special symbol until the start of the scrolling display of the decorative symbol (the downward movement of the decorative symbol).

For ease of explanation, only four frames of the change start actions A1, A2, A3, and A4 are shown here, but in reality, the change start action (movement) is performed by displaying the character's movements over several dozen frames during the change start action period Tb1, which is until the character's body orientation is reversed.

In this embodiment, the variation start action is exemplified as one in which the character's body orientation is reversed left and right, but the present invention is not limited to this. The variation start action can be changed to other actions, such as changing the character's hair or facial expression, or moving their body. Furthermore, it is sufficient that at least one of the number display unit 002SG051, character display unit 002SG052, information display unit 002SG053, and base display unit 002SG054 that form the decorative pattern takes action. In other words, the variation start action is an action that is executed before the decorative pattern begins to scroll or rotate, and is an action that transitions during scrolling, i.e., a separate action that operates in a manner different from scrolling.

In addition, in the first presentation mode, during the variation start action period Tb1, the character name (character-related information) displayed in the information display section 002SG053 is erased (hidden). In this way, the character name is easy to see when it is displayed statically, but once the scrolling display begins, the character name is hidden, drawing attention to the scrolling display.

Specifically, the variable display period of the special symbols includes a pre-variable display period from when the variable display of the special symbols and small symbols begins until the scrolling display of the decorative symbols begins, and a post-variable display period after the scrolling display of the decorative symbols begins. The character's name (character-related information) displayed on the information display unit 002SG053 is erased after it is displayed during the pre-variable display period, i.e., when the variable start action is being executed, and before the post-variable display period begins, i.e., before the scrolling display of the decorative symbols begins. In this way, by erasing the name during the variable start action period Tb1, i.e., before the scrolling display begins, attention can be drawn to the variable display and preview effects rather than the name.

In addition, in this embodiment, the pre-variable display period is the period from when the variable display of special symbols and small symbols begins until the scrolling display of decorative symbols begins, but the present invention is not limited to this. The pre-variable display period may be the period from when the conditions for starting the variable display are met until the variable display of decorative symbols begins, that is, the period from when a starting winning occurs or when variable display based on reserved memory begins until the scrolling display of decorative symbols begins.

(Fluctuation stop action)
As shown in Figure 136 (B), when the variable display ends in the first and second presentation modes (when the decorative pattern is displayed in a temporary stop), a "variable stop action" is executed in the decorative pattern, in which the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052 is enlarged.

Specifically, when the scrolling decorative pattern is temporarily stopped at the stop position, the character changes from its normal state, with hands on hips and facing diagonally forward to the right (variation stop action B1), to an enlarged state that extends farther above the base display unit 002SG054 than the normal state (variation stop action B2), and then is reduced in size and restored to its normal state (variation stop action B3).

For ease of explanation, only three frames of the fluctuation stop action B1, B2, and B3 are shown here, but in reality, the fluctuation stop action (movement) is performed by displaying the character in motion over several dozen frames during the fluctuation stop action period Tb2, from when the character is enlarged until it is restored.

In this embodiment, an example of a variation stop action is shown in which a character is enlarged, but the present invention is not limited to this. The variation stop action can be changed to other modes, such as changing the character's hair or facial expression, or moving its body. Furthermore, at least one of the number display unit 002SG051, character display unit 002SG052, information display unit 002SG053, and base display unit 002SG054 that form the decorative pattern may also take action. In other words, a variation stop action is an action that is executed when the scrolling display of the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, and is a separate action from actions that change, such as scrolling or rotating displays.

(Loop action)
As shown in Figure 136 (C), when the variable display ends in the first and second presentation modes (from the time the decorative pattern is temporarily displayed until it is displayed in a stopped state (pattern confirmed)), the character displayed in the character display unit 002SG052 in the decorative pattern repeatedly shrinks and restores, and a "loop action" is executed in which the number display unit 002SG051 repeatedly rotates horizontally around a rotation axis facing up and down.

Specifically, in loop action C1, the character places both hands on their hips and faces diagonally forward to the right, with the numeric display unit 002SG051 facing forward in its normal state; in loop action C2, the character is reduced to fit within the pedestal display unit 002SG054, with the numeric display unit 002SG051 rotated approximately 45 degrees to the right; in loop action C3, the reduced character is enlarged and restored, with the numeric display unit 002SG051 facing forward in its normal state; and in loop action C4, the character is reduced to fit within the pedestal display unit 002SG054, with the numeric display unit 002SG051 rotated approximately 45 degrees to the left. In this loop action, loop actions C1, C2, C3, and C4 are executed in order over the loop action period Tb3, and after the loop action period Tb3 ends, the loop action returns to C1, and loop actions C1 to C4 are executed again over the loop action period Tb3. In other words, in the loop action, loop actions C1 to C4 are executed cyclically.

For ease of explanation, only four frames of loop action C1 to C4 are shown here, but in reality, the character is displayed in a reduced size and then restored, and the numeric display unit 002SG051 rotates and restores during loop action period Tb3, during which the character and numeric display unit 002SG051 are displayed over several dozen frames, resulting in a loop action (movement).

In this embodiment, the loop action is exemplified by a form in which the character is displayed in a reduced size and the number display unit 002SG051 rotates, but the present invention is not limited to this. The loop action can be changed to other forms, such as a change in the character's hair or facial expression, or body movement. Furthermore, it is sufficient that at least one of the number display unit 002SG051, character display unit 002SG052, information display unit 002SG053, and base display unit 002SG054, which form the decorative pattern, undergoes an action. In other words, a loop action is an action that is executed from the time the decorative pattern is temporarily displayed in a stopped position until it is displayed as a stopped pattern (pattern confirmation), and is a separate action from the action that changes during scrolling.

(Comparison of various action periods and light emission periods)
Next, various actions of decorative symbols and lamp light emission control will be explained based on Fig. 137. Fig. 137 (A) is a diagram comparing various actions of decorative symbols and periods of lamp light emission control, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of loop light emission control of lamps.

As shown in Figure 137(A), the decorative pattern fluctuation start actions A1 to A4 (see Figure 136(A)) have an execution period, or fluctuation start action period Tb1, of approximately 1.5 seconds (fluctuation start action period Tb1 = approximately 1.5 seconds), and consist of approximately 45 frames of images. Furthermore, the decorative pattern fluctuation stop actions B1 to B3 (see Figure 136(B)) have an execution period, or fluctuation stop action period Tb2, of approximately 0.8 seconds (fluctuation stop action period Tb2 = approximately 0.8 seconds), and consist of approximately 28 frames of images. Furthermore, the decorative pattern loop actions C1 to C4 (see Figure 136(C)) have a loop action period Tb3, which is one cycle, of approximately 1.8 seconds (loop action period Tb3 = approximately 1.8 seconds), and consist of approximately 55 frames of images.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 137(B), the movable body lamps 9d provided on the movable body 32A provided on the upper part of the image display device 5 and the movable body 32B provided on the lower part of the image display device 5, as well as the main lamp 9a and frame lamp 9b provided on the gaming machine frame 3, emit light based on the loop light emission control performed by the performance control CPU 120 when the gaming state is in the low base state.

This loop light emission control, for example, emits light in the order of "white," "blue," and "yellow" over one cycle of loop light emission period Tb4, then returns to "white" after the loop light emission period Tb4 ends, and then emits light in the order of "white," "blue," and "yellow" again during loop light emission period Tb4, and this is repeated cyclically. In other words, with loop light emission control, light emissions of "white," "blue," and "yellow" are executed cyclically.

The loop light emission period Tb4 is longer than the loop action period Tb3 (loop action period Tb3 < loop light emission period Tb4). By doing this, in a low base state, the loop action is repeated to encourage the player to use the variable display of decorative symbols, while in a high base state, where variable display is more easily performed than in a low base state, excessive encouragement of variable display, which could be annoying, is prevented. Furthermore, because the loop action is repeated at a shorter cycle than the loop light emission control, the decorative symbols can be made to stand out in an appropriate way.

In this embodiment, the loop light emission control is exemplified as a form in which "white," "blue," and "yellow" are emitted cyclically, but the present invention is not limited to this. The light emission color and light emission pattern of the lamp in one cycle can be changed in various ways. For example, a light emission pattern in which "white," "blue," and "yellow" are emitted in this order, followed by "yellow," "white," and "blue" in this order may be cyclically emitted, or a light emission pattern in which four or more colors are emitted in sequence may be cyclically emitted.

The various actions of the decorative symbols shown in Figure 137(A) are executed when the game state is controlled to a low base state and the presentation mode is the first presentation mode or the second presentation mode, but are not executed when the game state is controlled to a high base state and the presentation mode is the third presentation mode or the fourth presentation mode. Furthermore, the loop lighting control of the movable body lamp 9d, main lamp 9a, and frame lamp 9b shown in Figure 137(B) is executed when the game state is controlled to a low base state and the presentation mode is the first presentation mode or the second presentation mode, but is not executed when the game state is controlled to a high base state and the presentation mode is the third presentation mode or the fourth presentation mode.

(Pending display)
Next, the hold display will be explained based on Fig. 138. In Fig. 138, (A1) to (A4) and (B1) to (B4) are diagrams for explaining an example of the operation of the hold display.

As shown in Figure 138 (A1), when waiting to play (number of reserved memories "0"), no reserved display is displayed in the special reserved memory display area 5U and active display area 5F located at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5. The special reserved memory display area 5U consists of four display areas, with the first display area from the left corresponding to buffer number "1-1" in the start winning time reception command buffer 002SG194A, the second display area from the left corresponding to buffer number "1-2", the third display area from the left corresponding to buffer number "1-3", and the fourth display area from the left corresponding to buffer number "1-4".

As shown in Figure 138 (A2), when a start win (e.g., the first start win) occurs while waiting to play, the first hold display 002SG101 is displayed in the first display area from the left in the special chart hold memory display area 5U. Next, the first hold display 002SG101 begins to move diagonally upward to the left (see Figure 138 (A3)), then moves diagonally downward to the left in a parabolic arc toward the active display area 5F, and when it reaches the active display area 5F, it is enlarged and displayed as active display 002SG103 (see Figure 138 (A4)).

In other words, as shown in Figure 138 (A2), when a start winning occurs, the first pending display 002SG101 is displayed in the special symbol pending memory display area 5U and is not displayed in the active display area 5F, but when the first pending display 002SG101 is displayed in the special symbol pending memory display area 5U based on the occurrence of the first start winning, the variable display of the small symbol begins in accordance with the variable display of the special symbol.

However, although the variable display has begun, as shown in Figure 138 (A4), the first reserved display 002SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left in the special reserved memory display area 5U, has not moved to the active display area 5F and switched to active display 002SG103. In other words, the shift display has not ended. Therefore, if the scrolling display of the decorative pattern begins before the shift display has ended, it will be difficult to tell which first reserved display 002SG101 the scrolling display corresponding to has begun, which could cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

As a result, the first reserved display 002SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left in the special reserved memory display area 5U, is moved to the active display area 5F and displayed, and the scrolling display (variable display) of the decorative pattern does not begin until the reserved shift display period ends, during which it is switched to and displayed as active display 002SG103.Then, the aforementioned variable start action is executed, and the scrolling display (variable display) of the decorative pattern begins after the reserved shift display period ends.

Next, as shown in Figure 138 (B1), when the decorative pattern is being displayed variably and the number of reserved memories is "1" or more (for example, the number of reserved memories is "2"), the special pattern reserved memory display area 5U located at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5 displays the first reserved display 002SG101 in the first and second display areas from the left, and the active display 002SG103 in the active display area 5F.

As shown in FIG. 138 (B2), when the variable display corresponding to the active display 002SG103 displayed in the active display area 5F ends, the active display 002SG103 that was displayed in the active display area 5F is erased, and an erase effect 002SG110 is displayed to highlight that the active display 002SG103 has been erased.

The erase effect 002SG110 continues to be displayed even after the active display 002SG103 has been erased, and is erased after the next variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left has begun, as shown below. In this way, by not creating a blank period in the presentation between the end of one variable display and the start of the next, it is possible to prevent a decline in the interest of the presentation. Furthermore, the erase effect 002SG110 allows the player to recognize that the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the completed variable display has been erased, and the display of a new active display 002SG103 allows the player to recognize that a new variable display has begun.

Next, when the variable display corresponding to the first hold display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left begins, the first hold display 002SG101 begins to move diagonally upward to the left (see Figure 138 (B3)), then moves diagonally downward to the left in a parabolic curve toward the active display area 5F, and by moving from the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F, it is switched and displayed as active display 002SG103 (see Figure 138 (B4)).

In addition, the first hold display 002SG101 displayed in the second display area from the left begins to move horizontally to the left (see Figure 138 (B3)) in conjunction with the movement of the first hold display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left, and moves from the second display area from the left to the first display area (see Figure 138 (B4)).

In other words, as shown in Figure 138 (B2), after the active display 002SG103 is erased upon completion of the variable display, the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left has not yet moved to the active display area 5F, as shown in Figure 138 (B3). However, at the point when the moving display of the first pending display 002SG101 begins, the variable display of the small symbol begins in accordance with the variable display of the special symbol.

However, although the variable display has begun, as shown in Figure 138 (B4), the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special reserved memory display area 5U has not yet finished moving (shifting display) to the active display area 5F. Therefore, if the scrolling display of the decorative pattern begins in this state, it will be difficult to tell which first reserved display 002SG101 the scrolling display corresponding to has begun, which could cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

Therefore, until the end of the hold shift display period in which the first hold display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special hold memory display area 5U moves to the active display area 5F and is switched to and displayed as active display 002SG103, the aforementioned change start action is executed before the scrolling display (variable display) of the decorative pattern begins, and the scrolling display (variable display) of the decorative pattern begins after the hold shift display period ends.

In addition, in this embodiment, the special symbol reserved memory display area 5U and the active display area 5F are configured in a common manner across the first to fourth presentation modes, so the shift display shown in FIG. 138 is executed in a common manner across the first to fourth presentation modes. However, for example, if a special symbol reserved memory display area 5U and an active display area 5F corresponding to each presentation mode are provided, it may be possible to execute a shift display in a manner corresponding to each presentation mode.

Also, as shown in FIG. 138, the presentation control CPU 120 executes a shift display that switches the first hold display 002SG101 or the second hold display 002SG102 to the active display 002SG103 in an operating mode (for example, a mode in which the hold display moves in a curved trajectory from the special chart hold memory display area 5U to the active display area 5F) that is common to multiple types of fluctuation patterns (for example, non-reach fluctuation patterns and reach fluctuation patterns, etc.), but it may also be possible to execute shift displays of multiple types of operating modes corresponding to each fluctuation pattern and each presentation mode. It may also be possible to execute shift displays that operate in different modes depending on whether the game state is in a low base state or a high base state.

Furthermore, operating modes common to multiple types of variation patterns in shift display include those in which at least one of multiple elements, such as the display mode, display speed, and shift display period until the pending display is switched to the active display, is common.

In this embodiment, when a start winning occurs, the first hold display 002SG101 (or second hold display 002SG102) is displayed in the first display area from the left of the special symbol hold memory display area 5U, and then the first hold display 002SG101 (or second hold display 002SG102) is moved (shifted) from the special symbol hold memory display area 5U to the active display area 5F. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the number of hold memories is "0", when a start winning occurs, the first hold display 002SG101 (or second hold display 002SG102) is not displayed in the special symbol hold memory display area 5U, and the active display 002SG103 may be displayed directly in the active display area 5F.

In addition, in this embodiment, as the variable display of the special symbol begins, a switching display (shift display) that switches the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the active display is exemplified, in which the first pending display 002SG101 moves non-linearly (e.g., in a mountain-like manner) from the first display area from the left in the special symbol pending memory display area 5U to the active display area 5F. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and, for example, the display may move linearly to the left. Furthermore, the switching display (shift display) is not limited to sliding the pending display, but may also temporarily erase the active display 002SG103 displayed in the active display area 5F and the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special symbol pending memory display area 5U, and begin displaying the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the new variable display in the active display area 5F.

(Example of operation of each part when variable display starts)
Next, an example of the operation of each part at the start of variable display will be described with reference to Figs. 139 to 148. Fig. 139 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols in the first presentation mode. Fig. 140 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols following Fig. 139. Fig. 141 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols in the second presentation mode. Fig. 142 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols following Fig. 141. Fig. 143 is a diagram showing details of the flow of variable display of decorative symbols in Fig. 141. Fig. 144 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols as Modification 1. Fig. 145 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols following Fig. 144. Fig. 146 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols in the third presentation mode. Fig. 147 is a diagram for explaining how decorative symbols appear. Fig. 148 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols in the fourth presentation mode.

Note that in the following diagrams showing the display screen of the image display device 5, diagrams using lines other than solid lines (for example, dashed lines or dotted lines) and arrows without symbols do not represent images displayed on the display screen, but are used to explain the movement of images, etc.

(Example of variable display operation in first presentation mode)
First, an example of the operation of each part when variable display of decorative patterns begins in the first presentation mode will be explained based on Figures 139 and 140.

Figure 139 (A) shows the state in which, in the first presentation mode, the decorative symbols that were scrolling in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped at the stop position. Here, the variable display of the special symbols has not yet ended, and the decorative symbols are in a temporarily stopped display state, so the small symbols displayed in display area 5S are being variably displayed. In addition, the active display area 5F displays the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display, and the special symbol reserved memory display area 5U displays two first reserved displays 002SG101 (first reserved memory count "2").

Next, as shown in Figure 139 (B), when the variable display of the first special symbol ends and the small symbols are displayed in a non-winning combination, the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display that has ended is erased from the active display area 5F, and an erase effect 002SG110 is displayed to emphasize that the active display 002SG103 has been erased.

As shown in Figure 139 (C), when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left begins, the variable display of the small symbols begins, while the decorative symbol change start action (see Figure 136 (A)) begins in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, right decorative symbol display area 5R, and middle decorative symbol display area, in that order. In addition, a shift display begins in which the two first pending displays 002SG101 move toward the active display area 5F.

Specifically, the first hold display 002SG101 begins moving diagonally upward to the left, then moves diagonally downward to the left in a parabolic arc, moving from the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F, where it is displayed as active display 002SG103 (see Figure 139(D)). Furthermore, the first hold display 002SG101 displayed in the second display area from the left begins to move horizontally (shift display) to the left in conjunction with the first hold display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left (see Figure 139(C)), and moves (shift display) from the second display area from the left to the first display area (see Figure 139(D)).

Note that the erase effect 002SG110 displayed in Figure 139 (B) will continue to be displayed for a while even after the next variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left has begun.

As shown in Figure 139 (E), when the shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends, the decorative pattern actions A1 to A3 displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L end and the upward action A4 begins, and when the upward movement (action A4) ends, downward movement begins and the scrolling display begins, as shown in Figure 139 (F).

Next, as shown in Figure 139 (F), actions A1 to A3 of the decorative pattern displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R end, and upward action A4 begins. When the upward movement (action A4) ends, downward movement begins, and scrolling display begins, as shown in Figure 139 (G).

Next, as shown in Figure 139 (G), actions A1 to A3 of the decorative pattern displayed in the center decorative pattern display area 5C end, and upward action A4 begins. When the upward movement (action A4) ends, downward movement begins, and scrolling display begins, as shown in Figure 139 (H).

In this way, as the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left begins and the variable display of the small pattern begins, the variable display of the decorative patterns that are displayed in a static state in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, right decorative pattern display area 5R and middle decorative pattern display area begins, but the scrolling display of the decorative patterns displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R does not begin until the shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends.

In other words, once the first pending display 002SG101 has completed moving to the active display area 5F (shift display has ended) and is displayed as active display 002SG103, scrolling display begins, allowing the player to seamlessly recognize that a variable display based on that pending display has begun. Furthermore, from the time the shift display begins with the start of the variable display until the shift display ends, the decorative symbols do not scroll, but a change start action is performed, allowing the player to recognize that a variable display has begun.

In addition, when the scrolling display of the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R begins, the scrolling display speed (movement speed) gradually increases from slow to medium to high speed, and the transmittance (transparency) of the image gradually increases in proportion to the increase in display speed, until at high speeds a fade-out display is executed with the transmittance reaching nearly 100%. For example, as shown in Figures 139(F) and (G), the decorative pattern in left decorative pattern display area 5L is displayed at low speed immediately after the start of the variable display, then at medium speed as shown in Figure 139(H), and then at high speed as shown in Figures 140(I), (J), and (K). As the speed increases, the transmittance also increases, making it extremely difficult to visually recognize each decorative pattern at high speeds. Additionally, as shown in Figures 139(G) to 140(K), the decorative patterns in the right decorative pattern display area 5R and the center decorative pattern display area 5R are also displayed at a low speed immediately after variable display begins, then at a medium speed, and then at a high speed, and a fade-out display is executed in which the transparency also increases as the speed increases.

(Example of variable display operation in the second presentation mode)
Next, an example of the operation of each part when variable display of decorative patterns begins in the second presentation mode will be described with reference to Figures 141 and 142.

Figure 141 (A) shows the state in which, in the second presentation mode, the decorative symbols that were scrolling in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped at their rest positions. Here, the variable display of the special symbols has not yet ended, and the decorative symbols are in a temporarily stopped display state, so the small symbols displayed in display area 5S are being variably displayed. In addition, the active display area 5F displays the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display, and the special symbol reserved memory display area 5U displays two first reserved displays 002SG101 (first reserved memory count "2"). In addition, in the second presentation mode, the name in the decorative symbol information display section 002SG053 is always hidden, even when the decorative symbols are stopped.

Next, as shown in Figure 141 (B), when the variable display of the first special symbol ends and the small symbols are displayed in a non-winning combination, the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display that has ended is erased from the active display area 5F, and an erase effect 002SG110 is displayed to emphasize that the active display 002SG103 has been erased.

As shown in Figure 141 (C), when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left begins, the variable display of the small symbols begins, while the decorative symbol change start action (see Figure 136 (A)) begins in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, right decorative symbol display area 5R, and middle decorative symbol display area, in that order. In addition, a shift display begins in which the two first pending displays 002SG101 move toward the active display area 5F.

Specifically, the first hold display 002SG101 begins moving diagonally upward to the left, then moves diagonally downward to the left in a parabolic arc, moving from the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F, where it is displayed as active display 002SG103 (see FIG. 141(D)). Furthermore, the first hold display 002SG101 that was displayed in the second display area from the left begins to move horizontally (shift display) to the left in conjunction with the first hold display 002SG101 that was displayed in the first display area from the left (see FIG. 141(C)), and moves (shift display) from the second display area from the left to the first display area (see FIG. 141(D)).

Note that the erase effect 002SG110 displayed in Figure 141 (B) will continue to be displayed for a while even after the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left has begun.

As shown in Figure 141 (E), when the shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends, the decorative pattern actions A1 to A3 displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L end and the retreating action A4 begins, and when the retreating movement (action A4) to the back of the display screen ends, forward movement begins and the scrolling display begins, as shown in Figure 141 (F).

Next, as shown in Figure 141 (F), actions A1 to A3 of the decorative pattern displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R end, and backward action A4 begins. When the backward movement (action A4) ends, forward movement begins and scrolling display begins, as shown in Figure 141 (G).

Next, as shown in Figure 141 (G), actions A1 to A3 of the decorative symbols displayed in the center decorative symbol display area 5C end, and backward action A4 begins. When the backward movement (action A4) ends, forward movement begins and scrolling display begins, as shown in Figure 141 (H).

In this way, as the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left begins and the variable display of the small pattern begins, the variable display of the decorative patterns that are displayed in a static state in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, right decorative pattern display area 5R and middle decorative pattern display area begins, but the scrolling display of the decorative patterns displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R does not begin until the shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends.

In other words, once the first pending display 002SG101 has completed moving to the active display area 5F (shift display has ended) and is displayed as active display 002SG103, scrolling display begins, allowing the player to seamlessly recognize that a variable display based on that pending display has begun. Furthermore, from the time the shift display begins with the start of the variable display until the shift display ends, the decorative symbols do not scroll, but a change start action is performed, allowing the player to recognize that a variable display has begun.

Furthermore, when the scrolling display of the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R begins, the scrolling display speed (movement speed) gradually increases from slow to medium to high speed, and the transmittance (transparency) of the image gradually increases in proportion to the increase in display speed. At high speeds, a fade-out display is executed, with the transmittance reaching nearly 100%. For example, as shown in Figures 141(F) and (G), the decorative pattern in left decorative pattern display area 5L is displayed at low speed immediately after the start of variable display, then at medium speed as shown in Figure 141(H), and then at high speed as shown in Figures 142(I), (J), and (K). As the speed increases, the transmittance also increases, making it extremely difficult to visually recognize each decorative pattern at high speeds. Additionally, as shown in Figures 141(G) to 142(K), the decorative patterns in the right decorative pattern display area 5R and the decorative patterns in the center decorative pattern display area 5R are also displayed at a low speed immediately after variable display begins, then at a medium speed, and then at a high speed, and a fade-out display is executed in which the transparency also increases as the speed increases.

In this way, the scrolling display in the second presentation mode is configured to move and disappear while increasing its transmittance (transparency) from the back of the screen toward the front. Specifically, as shown in Figures 143(A) and (B), the scrolling display is configured to cause the decorative symbols to move in a curved manner from the back toward the front. Therefore, between the time a decorative symbol is displayed in frame-in mode in decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, or 5R and the time it is displayed out of frame, another decorative symbol (e.g., decorative symbol "3") that is positioned so that it partially overlaps with one decorative symbol (e.g., decorative symbol "2") toward the back may be visible through decorative symbol "2." At this time, the character in character display section 002SG052 for decorative pattern "3" is displayed, while the number ("3") in number display section 002SG051 becomes difficult to see (or is not displayed), and as shown in Figure 143 (C), the decorative pattern "2" is erased, and then the number ("3") in number display section 002SG051 for decorative pattern "3" is displayed.

In addition, the other decorative pattern "3" located behind the first decorative pattern "2" can be seen through the first decorative pattern "2". In this case, the character in the character display unit 002SG052 of the other decorative pattern "3" located behind is displayed, while the number in the number display unit 002SG051 is not displayed. The decorative pattern "2" is erased before the number for the decorative pattern "3" is displayed. This means that the number "2" of the first decorative pattern and the other decorative pattern "3" do not overlap, preventing the decorative pattern "2" located in the foreground from becoming difficult to see.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in Figure 143(A), from the time the decorative symbols are displayed in frame-in mode in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R until they are displayed in frame-out mode as shown in Figure 143(C), they move and disappear while increasing their transmittance (transparency). However, at the start of variable display, as mentioned above, the decorative symbols are faded out in proportion to the increase in display speed, so while they are faded out in accordance with the display speed, they move from the back of the screen to the front while increasing their transmittance (transparency). Therefore, from the time the scrolling display starts until the high-speed display begins, they appear as shown in Figures 143(A) to 143(C), but after the fade-out display period ends and the high-speed display begins, it becomes extremely difficult to see the decorative symbols even at the back of the screen.

(Example of operation of variable display as modified example 1)
Next, an example of the operation of each part when variable display of decorative symbols is started as Modification 1 will be described with reference to Figures 144 and 145. In Modification 1, the decorative symbols are displayed scrolling in a curved manner as in the second presentation mode, but they move in the opposite direction to the second mode, that is, from the front side of the screen to the back side.

The flow in Figures 144(A) to 144(D) is similar to that in Figures 141(A) to 141(D), so a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

As shown in Figure 144 (E), when the shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends, the decorative pattern actions A1 to A3 displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L end and backward action A4 begins, and when the forward movement (action A4) toward the front of the display screen ends, backward movement begins and the scrolling display begins, as shown in Figure 144 (F).

Next, as shown in Figure 144 (F), actions A1 to A3 of the decorative pattern displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R end, and forward action A4 begins. When the forward movement (action A4) ends, backward movement begins and the scrolling display begins, as shown in Figure 144 (G).

Next, as shown in Figure 144 (G), actions A1 to A3 of the decorative pattern displayed in the center decorative pattern display area 5C end, and forward action A4 begins. When the forward movement (action A4) ends, backward movement begins and the scrolling display begins, as shown in Figure 144 (H).

In this way, as the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left begins and the variable display of the small pattern begins, the variable display of the decorative patterns that are displayed in a static state in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, right decorative pattern display area 5R and middle decorative pattern display area begins, but the scrolling display of the decorative patterns displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R does not begin until the shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends.

In other words, once the first pending display 002SG101 has completed moving to the active display area 5F (shift display has ended) and is displayed as active display 002SG103, scrolling display begins, allowing the player to seamlessly recognize that a variable display based on that pending display has begun. Furthermore, from the time the shift display begins with the start of the variable display until the shift display ends, the decorative symbols do not scroll, but a change start action is performed, allowing the player to recognize that a variable display has begun.

Furthermore, when the scrolling display of the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R begins, the scrolling display speed (movement speed) gradually increases from slow to medium to high speed, and the transmittance (transparency) of the image gradually increases in proportion to the increase in display speed. At high speeds, a fade-out display is executed, with the transmittance reaching nearly 100%. For example, as shown in Figures 144(F) and (G), the decorative pattern in left decorative pattern display area 5L is displayed at low speed immediately after the start of variable display, then at medium speed as shown in Figure 144(H), and then at high speed as shown in Figures 145(I), (J), and (K). As the speed increases, the transmittance also increases, making it extremely difficult to visually recognize each decorative pattern at high speeds. Additionally, as shown in Figures 144(G) to 145(K), the decorative patterns in the right decorative pattern display area 5R and the decorative patterns in the center decorative pattern display area 5R are also displayed at a slow speed immediately after variable display begins, then at a medium speed, and then at a high speed, with a fade-out display in which the transparency also increases as the speed increases.

In this way, the scrolling display of variant 1 is designed to move and disappear while increasing its transmittance (transparency) from the front to the back of the screen. Specifically, as shown in Figures 144 (G) and (H), the scrolling display is designed to cause the decorative patterns to move in a curved manner from the front to the back. Therefore, between the time when a decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern "3") is framed in and the time when it is framed out of the decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, or 5R, another decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern "2") that is positioned so that it partially overlaps the decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern "3") may become visible through the decorative pattern "3." In this case, the character in character display portion 002SG052 of decorative pattern "2" is displayed, while the number ("2") in number display portion 002SG051 is difficult to see (or is not displayed).

In addition, the other decorative pattern "2" located behind the first decorative pattern "3" can be seen through the first decorative pattern "3". In this case, the character in the character display unit 002SG052 of the other decorative pattern "2" located behind is displayed, while the number in the number display unit 002SG051 is not displayed. The decorative pattern "2" is erased before the number for the decorative pattern "3" is displayed. This means that the number "3" of the first decorative pattern and the other decorative pattern "2" do not overlap and are prevented from making the decorative pattern "3" located in the foreground difficult to see.

In addition, in this variant 1, the decorative patterns are displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in a frame-in manner, and then disappear as they move while increasing their transmittance (transparency). However, at the start of the variable display, as mentioned above, the decorative patterns are faded out in proportion to the increase in display speed, so while they are faded out in accordance with the display speed, they move from the back of the screen to the front while increasing their transmittance (transparency). Therefore, from the start of the scrolling display until the high-speed display begins, the display will appear as shown in Figures 144(F) to 144(H). However, after the fade-out display period ends and the display becomes high-speed, it becomes extremely difficult to see the decorative patterns even at the back of the screen.

(Example of variable display operation in the third presentation mode)
Next, an example of the operation of each part when variable display of decorative patterns begins in the third presentation mode will be explained based on Figures 146 and 147.

Figure 146 (A) shows the state in which, in the third presentation mode, the decorative symbols that were rotating in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped at their rest positions. Here, the variable display of the special symbols has not yet ended, and the decorative symbols are in a temporarily stopped display state, so the small symbols displayed in display area 5S are being variably displayed. Additionally, the active display area 5F displays the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display, and the special symbol reserved memory display area 5U displays two first reserved displays 002SG101 (first reserved memory count "2"). Additionally, the small symbols and right-hit notification image 002SG201 are displayed superimposed on the front side (upper layer) of the decorative symbols.

Next, as shown in Figure 146 (B), when the variable display of the first special symbol ends and the small symbols are displayed in a non-winning combination, the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display that has ended is erased from the active display area 5F, and an erase effect 002SG110 is displayed to emphasize that the active display 002SG103 has been erased.

As shown in Figure 146 (C), when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left starts, the variable display of the small symbols starts, but because it is in a high base state, the decorative symbol change start action (see Figure 136 (A)) does not take place. In addition, a shift display starts in which the two first pending displays 002SG101 move toward the active display area 5F.

Specifically, the first hold display 002SG101 begins moving diagonally upward to the left, then moves diagonally downward to the left in a parabolic arc, moving from the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F, where it is displayed as active display 002SG103 (see FIG. 146(D)). Furthermore, the first hold display 002SG101 displayed in the second display area from the left begins to move horizontally (shift display) to the left in conjunction with the first hold display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left (see FIG. 146(C)), and moves (shift display) from the second display area from the left to the first display area (see FIG. 146(D)).

Note that the erase effect 002SG110 displayed in Figure 146 (B) will continue to be displayed for a while even after the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left has begun.

As shown in Figure 146 (F), when the shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends, the decorative symbols displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R begin to rotate. In the high base state, the decorative symbols displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R begin to rotate all at once.

In this way, when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left begins, the rotating display of the decorative patterns displayed in a static state in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R begins all at once, but the rotating display of the decorative patterns displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R does not begin until the shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends.

In other words, once the first pending display 002SG101 has completed moving to the active display area 5F (shift display has ended) and is displayed as active display 002SG103, the rotating display begins, allowing the player to seamlessly recognize that a variable display based on that pending display has begun.

In addition, when the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R begin to rotate, the rotation display speed (movement speed) gradually increases from slow to medium to fast, and the transmittance (transparency) of the image gradually increases in proportion to the increase in display speed, until at high speeds a fade-out display is executed with the transmittance reaching nearly 100%. For example, as shown in Figures 146(E) and (F), the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed at slow speed immediately after the start of variable display, then at medium speed as shown in Figure 146(G), before reaching high speed as shown in Figure 146(H). As the transmittance increases as the speed increases, it becomes extremely difficult to visually recognize each decorative pattern at high speeds.

As shown in Figure 147, the rotating display in the third presentation mode rotates the decorative symbols to repeatedly display them on the first surface 5a and the second surface 5b. The decorative symbols are semi-transparent during the rotating display and become opaque when the rotating display stops. During the rotating display, the number display section 002SG051 on the first surface 5a of the decorative symbols, which are semi-transparent, is displayed, while the number display section 002SG051 on the second surface 5b is not displayed.

For example, as shown in Figure 147 (A), when the decorative pattern is displayed rotating at a slow speed and in a semi-transparent state where the transparency is the first transparency, the decorative pattern displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is such that the number "326" displayed on the first surface 5a can be seen, but the number "437" (to be displayed) displayed on the reverse side, the second surface 5b, is difficult to see.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 147 (B), when the decorative pattern is displayed rotating at a medium speed and in a semi-transparent state where the transmittance is a second transmittance higher than the first transmittance, the decorative pattern displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is such that the number "437" displayed on the second surface 5b is visible, but the number "548" (to be displayed) displayed on the reverse surface, the first surface 5a, is difficult to see.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 147 (C), when the decorative patterns are displayed in a semi-transparent state where they are rotated at high speed and have a third transmittance higher than the second transmittance, the decorative patterns displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are such that the number "763" displayed on the first surface 5a is difficult to see, while the number "874" (to be displayed) displayed on the reverse, second surface 5b is difficult to see. Note that both the first surface 5a and the second surface 5b are difficult to see during the high-speed rotation display.

In this way, when the decorative pattern is rotated to repeatedly display the front and back sides of the decorative pattern, the decorative pattern becomes semi-transparent, making it possible to see not only the front side (e.g., first surface 5a) but also the back side (e.g., second surface 5b). However, since the numbers on the front side (e.g., first surface 5a) are displayed while the numbers on the back side (e.g., second surface 5b) are not, the numbers on the front and back sides of the decorative pattern do not overlap, preventing the numbers on the front side from becoming difficult to read. Furthermore, even when the decorative pattern is being displayed in a variable display mode in the high base state, a loop illumination control (see Figure 137(B)) corresponding to the background pattern may be used to repeatedly illuminate the white, blue, and yellow light patterns. This simplifies the control of the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and movable body lamp 9d.

(Example of variable display operation in the fourth presentation mode)
Next, an example of the operation of each part when variable display of decorative patterns begins in the fourth presentation mode will be explained based on Figure 148.

Figure 148 (A) shows the state in which, in the fourth presentation mode, the decorative symbols that were scrolling in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped at their respective stop positions. Here, the variable display of the special symbols has not yet ended, and the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, so the small symbols displayed in the display area 5S are still being displayed. Additionally, the active display area 5F displays the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display, and the special symbol reserved memory display area 5U displays two first reserved displays 002SG101 (first reserved memory count "2"). Additionally, the small symbols and right-hit notification image 002SG201 are displayed superimposed on the front side (upper layer) of the decorative symbols. (See Figure 136 (A))

Next, as shown in Figure 148 (B), when the variable display of the first special symbol ends and the small symbols are displayed in a non-winning combination, the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display that has ended is erased from the active display area 5F, and an erase effect 002SG110 is displayed to emphasize that the active display 002SG103 has been erased.

As shown in Figure 148 (C), when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left starts, the variable display of the small symbols starts, but because it is in a high base state, the decorative symbol change start action (see Figure 136 (A)) does not take place. In addition, a shift display starts in which the two first pending displays 002SG101 move toward the active display area 5F.

Specifically, the first hold display 002SG101 begins moving diagonally upward to the left, then moves diagonally downward to the left in a parabolic arc, moving from the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F, where it is displayed as active display 002SG103 (see FIG. 148(D)). Furthermore, the first hold display 002SG101 displayed in the second display area from the left begins to move horizontally (shift display) to the left in conjunction with the first hold display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left (see FIG. 148(C)), and moves (shift display) from the second display area from the left to the first display area (see FIG. 148(D)).

Note that the erase effect 002SG110 displayed in Figure 148 (B) will continue to be displayed for a while even after the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left has begun.

As shown in Figure 148 (F), when the shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends, the scrolling display of the decorative patterns displayed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R begins. In the high base state, the scrolling display of the decorative patterns displayed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R begins all at once.

In this way, when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left begins, the scrolling display of the decorative patterns displayed in a static state in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R begins all at once, but the scrolling display of the decorative patterns displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R does not begin until the shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends.

In other words, once the first pending display 002SG101 has completed moving to the active display area 5F (shift display has ended) and is displayed as active display 002SG103, scrolling display begins, allowing the player to seamlessly recognize that a variable display based on that pending display has begun.

In addition, when scrolling display of the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R begins, the scrolling display speed (movement speed) gradually increases from slow to medium to high speed, and the transmittance (transparency) of the image gradually increases in proportion to the increase in display speed, until at high speeds a fade-out display is executed where the transmittance reaches nearly 100%. For example, as shown in Figures 148(E) and (F), the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed at low speed immediately after variable display begins, then at medium speed as shown in Figure 148(G), and then at high speed as shown in Figure 148(H). As the transmittance increases as the speed increases, it becomes extremely difficult to visually recognize each decorative pattern at high speeds.

As explained above, in the low base state, when the effect control CPU 120 is performing a pending shift display in conjunction with the start of variable display, it performs an action to start changing the decorative pattern, and does not start scrolling the decorative pattern until the shift display that switches the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special pending memory display area 5U to active display 002SG103 in the active display area 5F is completed.

By doing this, when the variable display of the special symbol begins, a shift display is performed to switch the pending display corresponding to that variable display to an active display, and by performing a variable start action to operate the decorative symbol in a manner different from the moving display while the shift display is in progress, the period required for the shift display can be used effectively. Furthermore, because the variable start action is performed when the shift display is in a high base state, which is more advantageous than a low base state, the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol in the high base state can be made more exciting.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 can execute variable display of decorative patterns based on a variable pattern designation command sent from the main board 11 during the performance control process in step S76, and can perform a common shift display when variable display is executed based on a first type of variable pattern designation command (e.g., a non-reach variable pattern designation command) and when variable display is executed based on a second type of variable pattern designation command (e.g., a reach variable pattern designation command).As a common shift display is performed even when variable display based on different types of variable display patterns is executed, the number of shift display patterns can be reduced.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the low base state, the performance control CPU 120 performs an action to start changing the decorative pattern when a pending shift display is being displayed in response to the start of variable display, and does not start scrolling the decorative pattern until the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special chart pending memory display area 5U is switched and displayed as active display 002SG103 in the active display area 5F. On the other hand, in the high base state, an example has been given in which the performance control CPU 120 does not perform an action to start changing the decorative pattern when a pending shift display is being displayed in response to the start of variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the high base state, the performance control CPU 120 performs an action to start changing the decorative pattern when a pending shift display is being displayed in response to the start of variable display, and does not start scrolling the decorative pattern until the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special chart pending memory display area 5U is switched and displayed as active display 002SG103 in the active display area 5F.

By doing this, when the variable display of the special symbol begins, a shift display is performed to switch the pending display corresponding to that variable display to an active display, and by performing a variable start action to operate the decorative symbol in a manner different from the moving display while the shift display is in progress, the period required for the shift display can be used effectively. Furthermore, because the variable start action is performed when the shift display is in a high base state, which is more advantageous than a low base state, the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol in the high base state can be made more exciting.

Furthermore, even in the high base state, the performance control CPU 120 can execute variable display of decorative symbols based on the variable pattern designation command sent from the main board 11 in the performance control process processing of step S76, and a common shift display can be executed when variable display is executed based on a first type of variable pattern designation command (e.g., a non-reach variable pattern designation command) and when variable display is executed based on a second type of variable pattern designation command (e.g., a reach variable pattern designation command).Since a common shift display is executed even when variable display based on different types of variable display patterns is executed, the number of shift display patterns can be reduced.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in Figures 155 and 156, an example has been given in which, upon the start of the variable display of a special symbol, a shift display that switches the pending display corresponding to the variable display to an active display ends, and then scrolling of the decorative symbols displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the order of left, right, and center begins. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as long as the scrolling of the decorative symbols displayed in any one of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R among the left, right, and center begins upon the start of the variable display of a special symbol, a shift display that switches the pending display corresponding to the variable display to an active display ends, then scrolling of the decorative symbols displayed in any one of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may begin while the shift display is being performed.

(Example of operation of each part when a symbol stops displaying)
Next, an example of the operation of each part when a pattern stops will be explained based on Fig. 149 to Fig. 153. Fig. 149 is a diagram showing the flow of the stopped display of decorative patterns in the first presentation mode (second presentation mode). Fig. 150 is a diagram showing the flow of the stopped display of decorative patterns following Fig. 149. Fig. 151 (A) to (G) are diagrams showing the flow of the stopped display of decorative patterns when the number of reserved memories is three in the first presentation mode (second presentation mode). Fig. 152 (A) and (B) are diagrams showing the flow of the stopped display of decorative patterns in the fourth presentation mode (third presentation mode).

(Example of the operation of the symbol stop display in the first performance mode [number of reserved memories "2 or less"])
First, an example of the operation of each part when a decorative symbol is displayed in a stopped state in a variable display based on a losing variable pattern when the number of reserved memories is two or less in the first presentation mode will be explained with reference to Figures 149 and 150. Note that the second presentation mode is almost the same as the first presentation mode except for the background image, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

As shown in Figure 149 (A), when decorative patterns are being scrolled at high speed in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, as the timing for the stopped display of each decorative pattern approaches, the display speed of the decorative patterns in left decorative pattern display area 5L, which had been displayed at high speed, first slows down, and a fade-in display is executed in which the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases, improving the visibility of the decorative patterns (see Figure 149 (B)).

Next, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the left decorative pattern display area 5L (see Figure 149 (C)), the transparency of the decorative pattern becomes nearly 0% (opaque), the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052 enlarges (see Figure 149 (D)), and then a variable stop action (see Figure 136 (B)) is executed to restore it to its original size (see Figure 149 (E)). Then, while the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, a loop action (see Figure 136 (C)) is initiated and is executed repeatedly until the variable display of the special pattern ends.

When the decorative pattern in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily stopped, as shown in Figure 149 (F), the display speed of the decorative pattern in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, which had been displayed at high speed, slows down, and a fade-in display is executed in which the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases, improving the visibility of the decorative pattern (see Figure 149 (F)).

Next, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the right decorative pattern display area 5R (see Figure 149 (G)), the transparency of the decorative pattern becomes nearly 0% (opaque), and the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052 enlarges (see Figure 149 (H)), after which a variable stop action (see Figure 136 (B)) is executed to restore it to its original size (see Figure 150 (I)). Then, while the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, a loop action (see Figure 136 (C)) is initiated and is executed repeatedly until the variable display of the special pattern ends.

When the decorative pattern in the right decorative pattern display area 5R is temporarily stopped, as shown in Figure 150 (J), the display speed of the decorative pattern in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, which had been displayed at high speed, slows down, and a fade-in display is executed in which the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases, improving the visibility of the decorative pattern (see Figure 150 (K)).

Next, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the right decorative pattern display area 5R (see Figure 150 (K)), the transparency of the decorative pattern becomes nearly 0% (opaque), the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052 enlarges (see Figure 150 (L)), and then a variable stop action (see Figure 136 (B)) is executed to restore it to its original size (see Figure 150 (M)). Then, while the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, a loop action (see Figure 136 (C)) is initiated and is executed repeatedly until the variable display of the special pattern ends.

After that, when the variable display of the special symbol ends, the small symbol is displayed as a static symbol, the loop action of the decorative symbol that was temporarily displayed as a static symbol in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R ends, and the active display 002SG103 is erased (see Figure 150 (M)).

(Example of the operation of the symbol stop display in the first performance mode [number of reserved memories "3"])
Next, an example of the operation of each part when the decorative symbols are displayed in a static state in the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 3 in the first presentation mode will be explained based on Figures 151(A) to 151(G). Note that the second presentation mode is almost the same as the first presentation mode except for the background image, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

As shown in Figure 151 (A), when decorative patterns are being scrolled at high speed in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, as the timing for each decorative pattern to stop approaches, the display speed of the decorative patterns in left decorative pattern display area 5L, which had been displayed at high speed, first slows down, and a fade-in display is executed in which the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases, improving the visibility of the decorative patterns (see Figure 151 (B)).

Next, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the left decorative pattern display area 5L (see Figure 151 (C)), the transparency of the decorative pattern becomes almost 0% (opaque), but the variable stop action of the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052 (see Figure 136 (B)) is not executed. In addition, the character's loop action (see Figure 136 (C)) is executed after the temporary stop display.

When the decorative pattern in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily stopped, the display speed of the decorative pattern in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, which had been displayed at high speed, slows down, and a fade-in display is executed in which the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases, improving the visibility of the decorative pattern (see Figure 151 (D)).

Next, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the right decorative pattern display area 5R (see Figure 149 (E)), the transparency of the decorative pattern becomes almost 0% (opaque), but the variable stop action of the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052 (see Figure 136 (B)) is not executed. In addition, the character's loop action (see Figure 136 (C)) is executed after the temporary stop display.

When the decorative pattern in the right decorative pattern display area 5R is temporarily stopped, the display speed of the decorative pattern in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, which had been displayed at high speed, slows down, and a fade-in display is executed in which the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases, improving the visibility of the decorative pattern (see Figure 151 (F)).

Next, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the right decorative pattern display area 5R (see Figure 151 (G)), the transparency of the decorative pattern becomes nearly 0% (opaque), but the variable stop action of the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052 (see Figure 136 (B)) is not executed. In addition, after the temporary stop display, the character's loop action (see Figure 136 (C)) is executed.

After that, when the variable display of the special symbol ends, the small symbol is displayed as a static symbol, the loop action of the decorative symbol that was temporarily displayed as a static symbol in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R ends and the active display 002SG103 is erased (see Figure 151 (G)).

(Example of the stop display of symbols in the fourth performance mode)
Next, an example of the operation of each part when the decorative symbols are displayed in a static state in the variable display in the fourth presentation mode will be explained based on Figures 152(A) and 152(B). Note that the third presentation mode is almost the same as the fourth presentation mode except for the background image, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

As shown in Figure 152 (A), when decorative patterns are being scrolled at high speed in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, as the timing for each decorative pattern to stop is approaching, the display speed of the decorative patterns in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R that were being displayed at high speed all slows down, and a fade-in display is executed in which the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases, improving the visibility of each decorative pattern (see Figure 152 (B)).

The left, center, and right decorative symbols are then simultaneously displayed in a temporary stop at the stop positions of decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Here, the transparency of the decorative symbols becomes nearly 0% (opaque), but the variable stop action of the character displayed in character display section 002SG052 (see Figure 136 (B)) is not executed. Furthermore, the character's loop action (see Figure 136 (C)) after the temporary stop display is not executed either.

After that, when the variable display of the special symbol ends, the small symbol is displayed as a static symbol, the decorative symbols that were temporarily displayed as static symbols in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed as static symbols, and the active display 002SG103 is erased (see Figure 152 (C)).

In this way, in a low base state, depending on the number of reserved memories (for example, when the number of reserved memories is two or less and a variable display based on an abbreviated variable pattern is executed), the variable stop action adds variety to the movement of the decorative pattern when it is temporarily stopped, enhancing interest. On the other hand, when the number of reserved memories is three in a low base state, or when a high base state where the average variable display period is short and the decorative pattern is difficult to see, and a variable display based on abbreviated variable patterns is executed regardless of the number of reserved memories, the variable stop action is not executed, and the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped while maintaining its size, allowing it to be stopped without impairing its visibility.

In this embodiment, the animation (moving images) data of the various movements of the decorative patterns can be created by combining materials for each period, such as: 1. From the start of the variable display to just before the high-speed variable display, 2. High-speed variable display, 3. Slow-speed variable display to stop of the variable display, 4. Stopped pattern. However, with regard to 2. High-speed variable display, as shown in Figures 133 (A2), (B2), (C2), and (D2), the transmittance of the decorative patterns is high and they are almost transparent, and while it is possible to see how they are being displayed in a variable manner at high speed, it is extremely difficult to visually determine which decorative patterns have passed by (indicated by arrows in Figures 133 (A2), (B2), (C2), and (D2)). Therefore, even if there is high-speed variable display animation data for each type of decorative pattern (a type that corresponds to which decorative pattern the high-speed variable display starts from), it would not be very meaningful and would only take up space in ROM 121, so it is preferable that common data be used for the high-speed variable display animation data regardless of which decorative pattern the high-speed variable display starts from.

(Background change example)
Next, an example of background change operation will be described with reference to Figures 153 and 154. In Figure 153, (A1) shows the first background image, (A2) shows the first predetermined background image, and (B) explains background changes. Figure 154 shows the flow of background changes in the first presentation mode.

As shown in Figure 153, in the first presentation mode, the background image can be switched between a first background image 002SG081 (see Figure 153 (A1)), which shows a daytime cityscape seen from afar, and a first predetermined background image 002SG081A (see Figure 153 (A2)), which shows a daytime cityscape. The background image is switched when a predetermined switching condition is met (for example, when an SP reach miss occurs). In this embodiment, the background image is switched at a predetermined timing in the variable display following an SP reach miss (for example, when the variable display starts).

In this embodiment, an example has been given in which the first presentation mode switches between the first background image 002SG081 and the first predetermined background image 002SG081A, but the present invention is not limited to this. Although not specifically shown, it may be possible to selectively switch between three or more types of background images, including the first background image 002SG081 and the first predetermined background image 002SG081A. Furthermore, the fulfillment of the switching conditions is not limited to the above, and may also be fulfilled when a specific presentation other than SP Reach is executed, when a single background image is displayed continuously for a predetermined period of time, or when a selection is made by the player's operation.

In addition, in this embodiment, the start timing of the switching display is the start timing of the variable display of the decorative symbols, but the present invention is not limited to this and may be any timing during the variable display period, such as before the decorative symbols reach a reach state.

As shown in FIG. 153(B), when switching from first background image 002SG081 to first predetermined background image 002SG081A (or when switching from first predetermined background image 002SG081A to first background image 002SG081), a fade-out display is executed in which the transmittance (transparency) of first background image 002SG081, which is displayed at 100% opacity, is gradually increased until it disappears, while a fade-in display is executed in which the transmittance (transparency) of first predetermined background image 002SG081A, which is hidden at 0% opacity, is gradually decreased. In other words, a cross-fade display is executed in which the fade-out display period A1 of first background image 002SG081 and the fade-in display period B1 of first predetermined background image 002SG081A are synchronized (fade-out display period A1 = fade-in display period B1). The fade-out display period A1 and fade-in display period B1 are, for example, approximately 6 seconds, during which approximately 210 frames of image are displayed.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 154(A), when the first background image 002SG081 is displayed, its transmittance (transparency) increases over time, making it more difficult to see (see Figure 154(B)), while the transmittance (transparency) of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A, which is displayed on a layer below the first background image 002SG081, decreases, gradually becoming more visible (see Figure 154(C)).

Next, the visibility of the first background image 002SG081 decreases further, while the visibility of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A increases (see Figures 154 (D) and (E)). Finally, the transmittance of the first background image 002SG081 reaches 100% and is erased, while the transmittance of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A reaches 0%, making it easily visible (see Figure 154 (F)).

In the present embodiment, the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-in display period B1 are synchronized, that is, the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-in display period B1 are the same duration. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only a portion of the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-in display period B1 may overlap, or the fade-in display period B1 may start after the fade-out display period A1 ends.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, an example has been given in which the transmittance always increases at a constant rate when the background image or decorative pattern is faded out, and the transmittance always decreases at a constant rate when the background image or decorative pattern is faded in, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the transmittance when the background image is faded out or faded in is not necessarily limited to increasing or decreasing at a constant rate. For example, the transmittance may increase or decrease slowly in a first period, and then increase or decrease rapidly in a second period.

Furthermore, while this embodiment exemplifies a form in which the background image is switched and displayed in one presentation mode (for example, the first presentation mode or the second presentation mode), the present invention is not limited to this and can also be applied to a form in which the background image is switched from a first background image corresponding to the first presentation mode to a second background image corresponding to the second presentation mode, and to a form in which the fade-out display period of the first background image and the fade-in display period of the second background image are synchronized.

(Example of operation of each part in variable display)
Next, examples of the operation of each part in the variable display in each presentation mode will be explained with reference to Figs. 155 to 158. Fig. 155 is a timing chart showing the flow of each part in the variable display in the first presentation mode. Fig. 156 is a timing chart showing the flow of each part in the variable display in the second presentation mode. Fig. 157 is a timing chart showing the flow of each part in the variable display in the third and fourth presentation modes. Fig. 158 is a timing chart showing the state of each part at the start of variable display in (A) the first presentation mode, (B) the second presentation mode, and (C) the third and fourth presentation modes.

(First presentation mode)
As shown in Figure 155, in the first performance mode, when the number of reserved memories is "2" or less and a variable display based on the non-reach miss variable pattern PA1-1 is executed, as the variable display of the special symbol begins, the small symbol is displayed variably at high speed, and the decorative symbol in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, the decorative symbol in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, and the decorative symbol in the center decorative symbol display area 5C are displayed in this order, and then a scrolling display is started. In addition, a shift display of the reserved display is performed, and after the shift display ends, the scrolling display of the decorative symbols in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R begins (see Figure 158 (A)).

In addition, the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R gradually accelerate after scrolling begins, becoming faster, and as the speed increases, the transmittance (transparency) also increases in proportion to the increase in speed, causing the decorative patterns to fade out. This fade-out display period A21 is common to all decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Furthermore, if the switching conditions for switching the background image from first background image 002SG081 to first predetermined background image 002SG081A are met at the start of variable display, a fade-out display will begin in which the transmittance (transparency) of first background image 002SG081 gradually increases, while a fade-in display will begin in which the transmittance (transparency) of first predetermined background image 002SG081A gradually decreases until it becomes opaque.

As the stopping timing of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the center decorative pattern display area 5C gradually slow down and are displayed at a slower speed, and the transmittance (transparency) decreases in proportion to the decrease in speed, causing them to fade in. This fade-in display period B21 is common to each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Then, the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the center decorative pattern display area 5C are temporarily displayed in that order. Furthermore, during the temporary display, a variable stop action is performed, and a loop action is repeatedly executed. After that, when the variable display ends and the small pattern is displayed as a static display, the decorative pattern loop action ends and the pattern is displayed as a static display. After that, a pattern determination period (e.g., 500 ms) has passed, and the next variable display can begin.

The fade-out display period A1, during which the first background image 002SG081 is faded out, is longer than the fade-out display period A21, which is the period from when the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R start scrolling until they begin to be displayed at high speed (fade-out display period A1 > fade-out display period A21).

Furthermore, the fade-in display period B1 during which the first predetermined background image 002SG081A is faded in is longer than the fade-in display period B21, which is the period from when the display speed of the scrolling decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R starts to slow down until they are temporarily stopped (fade-in display period B1 > fade-in display period B21).

In addition, when the variable display of decorative patterns is being executed, the movable body lamp 9d, main lamp 9a, and frame lamp 9b repeatedly emit light in the order of white, blue, and yellow based on loop light emission control (see Figure 137 (B)) corresponding to the background pattern. In addition, background BGM is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

(Second presentation mode)
Next, as shown in Figure 156, in the second performance mode, when the number of reserved memories is "2" or less and a variable display based on the non-reach miss variable pattern PA1-1 is executed, as the variable display of the special symbol begins, the small symbol is displayed variably at high speed, and the decorative symbol in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, the decorative symbol in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, and the decorative symbol in the center decorative symbol display area 5C are displayed in this order, and then a scrolling display is started. Also, a shift display of the reserved display is performed, and after the shift display ends, the scrolling display of the decorative symbols in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R begins (see Figure 158 (B)).

In addition, the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R gradually accelerate after scrolling begins, becoming faster, and as the speed increases, the transmittance (transparency) also increases in proportion to the increase in speed, causing the decorative patterns to fade out. This fade-out display period A22 is common to all decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Furthermore, if the switching conditions for switching the background image from first background image 002SG081 to first predetermined background image 002SG081A are met at the start of variable display, a fade-out display will begin in which the transmittance (transparency) of first background image 002SG081 gradually increases, while a fade-in display will begin in which the transmittance (transparency) of first predetermined background image 002SG081A gradually decreases until it becomes opaque.

As the stopping timing of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the center decorative pattern display area 5C gradually slow down and are displayed at a slower speed, and the transmittance (transparency) decreases in proportion to the decrease in speed, causing them to fade in. This fade-in display period B22 is common to each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Then, the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the center decorative pattern display area 5C are temporarily displayed in that order. Furthermore, during the temporary display, a variable stop action is performed, and a loop action is repeatedly executed. After that, when the variable display ends and the small pattern is displayed as a static display, the decorative pattern loop action ends and the pattern is displayed as a static display. After that, a pattern determination period (e.g., 500 ms) has passed, and the next variable display can begin.

The fade-out display period A1 during which the first background image 002SG081 is faded out is longer than the fade-out display period A22 from when the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R start scrolling until they begin displaying at high speed (fade-out display period A1 > fade-out display period A22). In this way, since the shorter the fade-out display, the more abrupt the impression of disappearance. Therefore, for fade-out displays that may be performed at the same time as the variable display of decorative patterns and the background change (for example, at the start of the variable display), the fade-out display of the decorative patterns is performed in a shorter period than the fade-out display of the background image, thereby drawing attention to the start of the variable display of the decorative patterns.

Furthermore, the fade-in display period B1 during which the fade-in display of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A is performed is set to be a longer period than the fade-in display period B22 from when the display speed starts to slow down in the scrolling display of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R until the display is temporarily stopped (fade-in display period B1 > fade-in display period B22). In this way, since the shorter the fade-in display, the more abrupt the impression it gives, for fade-in displays that may be performed at the same time as the variable display of the decorative pattern and the background change (for example, when the variable display is stopped), the fade-in display of the decorative pattern is performed in a shorter period of time than the fade-in display of the background, drawing attention to the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern.

Furthermore, the fade-out display period A22 when scrolling display is performed in the second presentation mode is longer than the fade-out display period A21 when scrolling display is performed in the first presentation mode (fade-out display period A21 < fade-out display period A22. See Figures 158 (A) and (B)). By doing this, not only is the manner in which the decorative pattern is scrolled differently in the second presentation mode compared to the first presentation mode, but the fade-out display period A22 from the start of the scrolling display until the decorative pattern becomes difficult to see as the display speed increases is longer, allowing the decorative pattern to be noticed for a longer period of time.

In this embodiment, as the variable display of the decorative symbols in the second presentation mode, a second scroll display that moves in a curved manner in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R from the back to the front has been exemplified as a special variable display that differs in appearance from the first scroll display that moves in a linear manner from top to bottom in the first presentation mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the special variable display that differs in appearance from the first scroll display is not limited to the above-mentioned one that moves in a curved manner in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R from the back to the front, but may also be a variety of scroll displays, such as one that moves in a curved manner in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R from the front to the back, as described in Variation 1 above, or a scroll display that moves in a linear or curved manner from bottom to top.

Furthermore, the fade-out display periods A21, A22 are different when the non-reach miss variation pattern PA1-1 is determined in the first presentation mode and when the non-reach miss variation pattern PA1-1 is determined in the second presentation mode. By doing this, the fade-out display period is the same despite the different presentation modes, making it difficult for the player to predict that the determined variation pattern is the non-reach miss variation pattern PA1-1, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, the fade-out display period A1 during which the first background image 002SG081 is faded out is different from the fade-out display period A22 from when the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R start scrolling until they begin displaying at high speed. In other words, the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-out display period A22 are not executed (synchronized) at the same time (for example, at the start of the variable display), which prevents it from becoming difficult to notice that the variable display of the decorative pattern has started. In more detail, if the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-out display period A22 were synchronized, the decorative pattern and first background image 002SG081 would disappear together, making it difficult to notice that the variable display of the decorative pattern has started. Therefore, by erasing the decorative pattern first, the decorative pattern can be made to stand out.

Furthermore, the fade-in display period B1 during which the fade-in display of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A is performed is different from the fade-in display period B22 from when the display speed starts to slow down in the scrolling display of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R until the display is temporarily stopped. In other words, the fade-in display period B1 and the fade-in display period B21 are not executed (synchronized) at the same time (for example, when the variable display is stopped), which prevents it from becoming difficult to notice that the variable display of the decorative pattern has started. In more detail, if the fade-in display period B1 and the fade-in display period B21 were synchronized, the decorative pattern and the first predetermined background image 002SG081A would appear together, making it difficult to notice that the variable display of the decorative pattern has stopped. Therefore, by making the decorative pattern appear first, the decorative pattern can be made to stand out.

In addition, when the variable display of decorative patterns is being executed, the movable body lamp 9d, main lamp 9a, and frame lamp 9b repeatedly emit light in the order of white, blue, and yellow based on loop light emission control (see Figure 137 (B)) corresponding to the background pattern. In addition, background BGM is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

(Third and fourth performance modes)
Next, as shown in Figure 157, in the third and fourth presentation modes, when a variable display based on the shortened non-reach miss variable pattern PA1-3 is executed, as the variable display of the special symbol begins, the small symbol is displayed variably at high speed, and the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R all begin to rotate or scroll simultaneously without any action to start the change. Also, a shift display of the reserved display is performed, and after the shift display ends, the scrolling display of the decorative symbols in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R begins (see Figure 158 (C)).

In addition, the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R gradually accelerate after scrolling display begins, becoming faster, and as the speed increases, the transmittance (transparency) also increases in proportion to the increase in speed, causing the decorative patterns to fade out. This fade-out display period A23 is common to all decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

As the stopping timing of decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R gradually slow down in unison and are displayed at a slower speed, and their transmittance (transparency) decreases in proportion to the decrease in speed, causing them to fade in. This fade-in display period B23 is common to all decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

After that, the decorative symbols in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are all displayed statically. In other words, the variable stop action and loop action seen in the first and second presentation modes are not performed, and the variable display ends as is, with the decorative symbols and small symbols displayed statically. After that, a symbol determination period (e.g., 500 ms) has elapsed, and the next variable display can begin.

Furthermore, the fade-out display period A21 when a scrolling display is performed in the first presentation mode is longer than the fade-out display period A23 when a rotating display is performed in the third presentation mode or a scrolling display is performed in the fourth presentation mode, and the fade-out display period A22 when a scrolling display is performed in the second presentation mode is longer than the fade-out display period A21 when a scrolling display is performed in the first presentation mode (fade-out display period A23 < fade-out display period A21 < fade-out display period A22. See Figures 158 (A) to (C)).

In addition, when the variable display of decorative patterns is being executed, the movable lamp 9d, main lamp 9a, and frame lamp 9b emit light in accordance with the output of the rhythm, melody, beat, etc. of the high-bass music based on light emission control corresponding to the high-bass music pattern. In addition, the high-bass music is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

In this embodiment, when variable display of decorative symbols is being executed in the high base state, the movable body lamp 9d, main lamp 9a, and frame lamp 9b are exemplified as being illuminated in accordance with the output of the rhythm, melody, beat, etc. of the high base music based on illumination control corresponding to the high base music pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Even when variable display of decorative symbols is being executed in the high base state, an illumination pattern of white, blue, and yellow may be repeatedly executed in order based on loop illumination control corresponding to the background pattern (see Figure 137 (B)), and background BGM may be output from speakers 8L and 8R. This simplifies the illumination control of the performance control CPU 120.

(Example of customer waiting demo performance)
Next, the customer waiting demo effect will be described with reference to Figures 159 to 160. Figure 159 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the customer waiting demo effect. Figure 160 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when a start winning occurs during the customer waiting demo effect.

As shown in Figure 159, the "waiting for customers demo effect" is an effect that notifies the player that they are in a waiting for customers (waiting to play) state, and is initiated by the effect control CPU 120 when a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has passed since the reception of the waiting for customers demo designation command output from the main board 11 without the reception of a control command such as a variable display start designation command.

Specifically, although not specifically shown, when the power is turned on, initial operations of movable bodies 32A, 32B, etc. are performed in the initial operation control process, and then menu/volume and light intensity adjustment display suggestion display 002SG480 is displayed (see FIG. 159(A)). Then, when a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has passed since the power was turned on without any variable display, menu/volume and light intensity adjustment display suggestion display 002SG480 is hidden, customer waiting demo performance image 002SG400 is displayed, and the customer waiting demo performance begins (see FIG. 159(B)).

In the customer waiting demo performance, after displaying moving images sequentially introducing the multiple ally characters (which may include enemy character images) appearing in various performances and the content itself (see Figures 159(B)-(E)), an image of a group of ally characters remains displayed (see Figure 159(F)), while movable body 32A descends from the origin position to the performance position, and after a predetermined time has passed, rises back to the origin position (see Figures 159(G)-(H)), and a first background image 002SG081 corresponding to the normal state is displayed as the background image, ending the performance (see Figure 159(I)). When the customer waiting demo performance ends, a menu/volume/light intensity adjustment display suggestion display 002SG480 is displayed (see Figure 159(J)).

If a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has passed since the customer waiting demo performance ended without any variable display being performed, the customer waiting demo performance will start again. Even after that, the customer waiting demo performance will be performed periodically as long as the standby state continues. The customer waiting demo performance may be performed repeatedly multiple times in the standby state, or may not be performed after being performed a predetermined number of times. The performance format of the customer waiting demo performance as a standby effect is optional and can be changed in various ways.

In addition, during the execution period of the customer waiting demo effect (see Figures 159 (B) to (H)), small symbols are continuously displayed in a static state in the display area 5S, while decorative symbols are hidden in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In this way, by displaying small symbols even when decorative symbols are hidden, the player is made aware that the variable display is in a static state.

We will explain an example of what happens when a starting win occurs while this kind of customer waiting demo effect is being performed.

As shown in Figure 160 (A), if the first start winning occurs (the conditions for starting the variable display are met) while the customer waiting demo performance is being executed, the variable display of small symbols will begin in the display area 5S while the customer waiting demo performance image 002SG400 is displayed, as shown in Figure 160 (B).

Next, as shown in Figure 160 (C), the customer waiting demo performance image 002SG400 is hidden and the first background image 002SG081 is displayed, and decorative symbols are displayed statically in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The special symbol reserved memory display area 5U and active display area 5F are also displayed, and the first reserved display 002SG101 is displayed in the first display area from the left of the special symbol reserved memory display area 5U. Then, the first reserved display 002SG101 begins to move (shift) from the special symbol reserved memory display area 5U to the active display area 5F, and the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R begin to change in the order of left, right, and center.

As shown in Figure 160 (D), when the shift display of the first pending display 002SG101 to the active display area 5F ends, as shown in Figure 160 (E), the decorative patterns in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R move upward in sequence, ending the change start action and starting the scrolling display (see Figure 160 (F)).

In this way, if a start win occurs while the customer waiting demo performance is being performed, the variable display of small symbols begins before the customer waiting demo performance image 002SG400 is hidden, and then the customer waiting demo performance image 002SG400 is hidden and switched to the background image corresponding to the performance mode at that time (here, the first background image 002SG081 corresponding to the first performance mode), after which the decorative symbols are displayed and the scrolling display begins.

In other words, if the scrolling display of the decorative symbols begins while the customer waiting demo effect image 002SG400 is still displayed, it will be difficult for the player to understand that the scrolling display has begun in response to the occurrence of the first start winning. Therefore, by starting the variable display of the small symbols, switching from the customer waiting demo effect image 002SG400 to the first background image 002SG081, and then starting the scrolling display after the shift display of the pending display has ended, the player can be made to recognize that the scrolling display has begun in response to the occurrence of the first start winning. On the other hand, if the customer waiting demo effect image 002SG400 is switched to the first background image 002SG081 and the scrolling display begins after the shift display has ended, there will be a large time lag between the occurrence of the first start winning and the start of the scrolling display. Therefore, the variable display of the small symbols will begin before the customer waiting demo effect image 002SG400 is hidden, ensuring a display that corresponds to the variable display of the decorative symbols.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in Figures 159(A), (I), and (J), when the customer waiting demo performance ends and the decorative symbols are displayed frozen in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, if the first or second performance mode is selected, a loop action (see Figure 136(C)) of the frozen decorative symbols is executed, and loop lighting control (see Figure 137(B)) is executed for the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and movable body lamp 9d. On the other hand, if the third or fourth performance mode is selected, the loop action (see Figure 136(C)) of the frozen decorative symbols is not executed, and lighting control is executed for the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and movable body lamp 9d in accordance with the rhythm, melody, and beat of the high-bass music.

In this way, in a low base state, the decorative symbol loop action is repeatedly executed at a shorter cycle than the loop light emission control, drawing attention to the decorative symbol, thereby encouraging the variable display of the decorative symbol, and thus encouraging the player to resume playing. Meanwhile, in a high base state, neither the decorative symbol loop action nor the loop light emission control is executed, drawing attention to the fact that a high base effect (third or fourth effect mode) is being performed. The decorative symbol loop action does not need to be executed in the first or second effect mode, and the decorative symbol loop action may be executed in the third or fourth effect mode.

Furthermore, the decorative pattern loop action is not executed while the variable display is stopped in the high base state because it is unlikely that a player will end play in the high base state, and it is more likely that they will simply leave their seat. Therefore, there is no need to appeal to the player to take a seat just because the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in an inoperable state without a variable display, and appealing with the loop action prevents other players from accidentally sitting down.

In addition, the "loop action" in this embodiment focuses solely on "movement," but for example, the decorative pattern does not change position, sway, or deform, but may instead remain stationary while a highlight moves across the decorative pattern, creating a sparkling animation.

In addition, in this embodiment, the third background image 002SG083, the fourth background image 002SG084, and effect images (not shown) such as character images displayed as background images in the high base state may be animated in time with the high base music, or by moving the background images at a predetermined speed. In this case, as described above, while the variable display is stopped in the high base state, the decorative pattern loop action is not executed, but the animation display of the third background image 002SG083 and the fourth background image 002SG084 may continue.

(Example of pseudo consecutive announcement)
Next, an example of the operation of the pseudo consecutive win notification will be described with reference to Figs. 161 to 162. Fig. 161 is a diagram showing the flow of the pseudo consecutive win notification. Fig. 162 shows (A) an example of the pseudo consecutive win count display and symbol color, (B) a diagram showing the types of pseudo consecutive win count display and symbol color, and (C) a diagram showing a pseudo consecutive win count display color determination table.

As shown in Figure 161, the "pseudo consecutive announcement" is a presentation that teases whether or not the decorative symbols will resume variable display after a temporary stop is displayed at a predetermined timing between the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols and the display result being derived and displayed, in other words, whether or not a single variable display will be made to appear as multiple variable displays.

As shown in Figure 162 (A), the pseudo consecutive prediction can be implemented in two ways: a "pseudo consecutive 1 pattern" in which the initial variable display and one re-variable display result in a total of 2 variable display times, and a "pseudo consecutive 2 pattern" in which the initial variable display and two re-variable displays result in a total of 3 variable display times. If the Super Reach (pseudo consecutive 1) variable display pattern is selected, the "pseudo consecutive 1 pattern" is executed, and if the Super Reach (pseudo consecutive 2) variable display pattern is selected, the "pseudo consecutive 2 pattern" is executed. Note that the probability of winning is higher with the "pseudo consecutive 2 pattern" than with the "pseudo consecutive 1 pattern."

Specifically, as shown in Figure 161 (A), when a variable display that executes a pseudo consecutive prediction is initiated, a decorative pattern is temporarily displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L at a timing when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the variable display was initiated, and then a decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern temporarily displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, entering a reach state (see Figure 161 (B)), after which a pseudo consecutive decorative pattern with the word "NEXT!" displayed on its surface is decelerated and displayed just before its stop position in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C (see Figure 161 (C)).

After that, in the case of a variable display in which a pseudo consecutive prediction is executed, a pseudo consecutive decorative symbol is temporarily displayed at the stop position in the center decorative symbol display area 5C (see FIG. 161(D)), and a pseudo consecutive number display 002SG212 of "x2" is displayed above the center decorative symbol display area 5C, indicating that the first re-variable display will begin, i.e., the second variable display will begin (see FIG. 161(F)), and variable display of decorative symbols will resume in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, center decorative symbol display area 5C, and right decorative symbol display area 5R (see FIG. 161(G)). Note that in the case of a variable display in which a pseudo consecutive prediction is not executed, the pseudo consecutive symbol passes the stop position in the center decorative symbol display area 5C, and decorative symbols with a number one larger than the temporarily displayed decorative symbol are temporarily displayed in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5C, and a losing variable display result is displayed (see FIG. 161(E)).

After the variable display of decorative symbols resumes in Figure 161 (G), in the case of a pseudo-consecutive prediction of a "pseudo-consecutive one-time pattern," after a predetermined time has elapsed, the decorative symbol that was variably displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is temporarily displayed as stopped (see Figure 161 (L)), and a decorative symbol with the same number as the decorative symbol temporarily displayed as stopped in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is temporarily displayed as stopped in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, resulting in a reach mode (see Figure 161 (M)), and the performance develops into an SP reach effect.

Furthermore, after the variable display of decorative symbols resumes in Figure 161 (G), in the case of a pseudo-consecutive prediction of a "pseudo-double-consecutive pattern," a decorative symbol is temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, and then a decorative symbol with the same number as the decorative symbol temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is temporarily displayed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, thereby returning to a reach state, after which a pseudo-consecutive decorative symbol with the word "NEXT!" displayed on its surface is decelerated and displayed just before its stop position in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C (see Figure 161 (H)).

Next, the pseudo consecutive decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C (see Figure 161 (I)), and the pseudo consecutive number of times display 002SG213, which reads "x3," is displayed above the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, indicating that the second re-variable display will begin, i.e., the third variable display will begin (see Figure 161 (J)). After that, the variable display of the decorative patterns resumes in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, middle decorative pattern display area 5C, and right decorative pattern display area 5R (see Figure 161 (K)).

After that, the decorative pattern that was variably displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed (see Figure 161 (L)), and a decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, resulting in a reach mode (see Figure 161 (M)), and the SP reach performance develops.

The pseudo consecutive announcement includes an introductory part, which is a period during which the variable display is aroused as to whether or not it will resume (see Figure 161 (A)-(C), (G), (J), (K), (L)), and a result announcement part, which is a period during which the result of whether or not the variable display has resumed is announced (see Figure 161 (D)-(F), (H), (I), (M)).

As shown in Figure 162 (B1), during the pseudo consecutive win preview, when the variable display resumes after the pseudo consecutive win decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the center decorative pattern display area 5C, a pseudo consecutive win count display is displayed that indicates the number of times the variable display has resumed. Specifically, a pseudo consecutive win count display 002SG212 (see Figures 161 (F) (G)) of "x2" is displayed, indicating that the first variable win re-display will begin, i.e., the second variable win display will begin, and a pseudo consecutive win count display 002SG213 (see Figures 161 (J) (K)) of "x3" is displayed, indicating that the second variable win re-display will begin, i.e., the third variable win display will begin.

The pseudo consecutive win count display 002SG212 shown in FIG. 162 (B1) and the pseudo consecutive win count display 002SG213 shown in FIG. 162 (B2) are sometimes displayed in blue and sometimes displayed in red. Also, as explained in FIG. 132, even-numbered regular symbols are displayed in blue, and odd-numbered special symbols are displayed in red. The display color of this pseudo consecutive win count display is determined using the pseudo consecutive win count display color determination table shown in FIG. 162 (C) in steps 002SGS278 and 002SGS280 of the variable display count setting process explained in FIG. 131.

Specifically, when determining the display color of the pseudo consecutive win count display 002SG212 in steps 002SGS278 and 002SGS280, if the variable display result is a "probable jackpot," a display color that is not the same as the symbol color of the decorative symbol determined in step 002SGS276 (for example, symbol color is blue and pseudo consecutive win count display color is red/symbol color is red and pseudo consecutive win count display color is blue) is determined 10% of the time, and a display color that is the same as the symbol color of the decorative symbol determined in step 002SGS276 (for example, symbol color and pseudo consecutive win count display color are blue/symbol color and pseudo consecutive win count display color are red) is determined 90% of the time.

Also, when the variable display result is a "non-probable jackpot," a display color that is not the same as the pattern color of the decorative pattern determined in step 002SGS276 (for example, pattern color is blue and pseudo consecutive number of times display color is red/pattern color is red and pseudo consecutive number of times display color is blue) is determined 30% of the time, and a display color that is the same as the pattern color of the decorative pattern determined in step 002SGS276 (for example, pattern color and pseudo consecutive number of times display color are blue/pattern color and pseudo consecutive number of times display color are red) is determined 70% of the time.

Also, when the variable display result is a "miss," a display color that is not the same as the pattern color of the decorative pattern determined in step 002SGS276 (for example, pattern color is blue and pseudo-consecutive number display color is red/pattern color is red and pseudo-consecutive number display color is blue) is determined 90% of the time, and a display color that is the same as the pattern color of the decorative pattern determined in step 002SGS276 (for example, pattern color and pseudo-consecutive number display color are blue/pattern color and pseudo-consecutive number display color are red) is determined 10% of the time.

In this way, in the pseudo consecutive win prediction, there are cases where the temporarily stopped decorative symbols and the pseudo consecutive win count display have a first combination of different colors, and cases where the temporarily stopped decorative symbols and the pseudo consecutive win count display have a second combination of the same color, and the probability of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state is higher when the variable display is resumed with the second combination than when the variable display is resumed with the first combination in the pseudo consecutive win prediction.

Specifically, when the variable display result is a jackpot and a normal pattern (blue) is determined as the stopping pattern in step 002SGS276, the rate at which the same color, blue, is determined as the pseudo-consecutive number display for the first pseudo-consecutive run and the second pseudo-consecutive run is higher than the rate at which the non-same color, red, is determined. On the other hand, when the variable display result is a miss and a normal pattern (blue) is determined as the stopping pattern in step 002SGS276, the rate at which the same color, blue, is determined as the pseudo-consecutive number display for the first pseudo-consecutive run and the second pseudo-consecutive run is lower than the rate at which the non-same color, red, is determined.

Furthermore, when the variable display result is a jackpot and a probability variable pattern (red) is determined as the stopping pattern in step 002SGS276, the probability that the same color red will be determined as the pseudo-consecutive number display for the first pseudo-consecutive run and the second pseudo-consecutive run is higher than the probability that the non-identical color blue will be determined. On the other hand, when the variable display result is a miss and a probability variable pattern (red) is determined as the stopping pattern in step 002SGS276, the probability that the same color red will be determined as the pseudo-consecutive number display for the first pseudo-consecutive run and the second pseudo-consecutive run is lower than the probability that the non-identical color blue will be determined.

Furthermore, when the variable display result is a jackpot and a normal symbol ("2", blue) is determined as the stopping symbol in step 002SGS276 (see FIG. 162 (B1)), for the first pseudo-consecutive spin in which pseudo-consecutive spin count display 002SG212 is "x2", the second combination ("x2", blue) in which the temporarily stopped decorative symbol and the pseudo-consecutive spin count display 002SG212 have the same number and display color, blue, is determined more frequently than the first combination ("x2", red) in which the temporarily stopped decorative symbol and the pseudo-consecutive spin count display 002SG212 have the same number but a different display color, red.

Furthermore, for the second pseudo-consecutive spin in which the pseudo-consecutive spin count display 002SG213 shows "x3", the third combination ("x3", blue), in which the decorative symbol displayed as a temporary stop and the number on the pseudo-consecutive spin count display 002SG212 are different but the display color is the same type, blue, is determined more frequently than the fourth combination ("x3", red), in which the decorative symbol displayed as a temporary stop and the number on the pseudo-consecutive spin count display 002SG213 are different, both in color and red.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss and the normal symbol ("2", blue) is determined as the stopping symbol in step 002SGS276, the probability that the same color, blue, will be determined as the pseudo-consecutive number display for the first pseudo-consecutive run and the second pseudo-consecutive run is lower than the probability that the non-same color, red, will be determined.

If the variable display result is a jackpot, and a probability variable symbol ("3", red) is determined as the stopping symbol in step 002SGS276, for the first pseudo-consecutive spin in which pseudo-consecutive spin count display 002SG212 is "x2", the third combination ("x2", red) in which the decorative symbol displayed as a temporary stop and the number in pseudo-consecutive spin count display 002SG212 are different but the display color is the same type, red, is determined more frequently than the fourth combination ("x2", blue) in which the decorative symbol displayed as a temporary stop and the number in pseudo-consecutive spin count display 002SG212 are different in color, blue.

Furthermore, for the second pseudo-consecutive spin in which the pseudo-consecutive spin count display 002SG213 shows "x3", the second combination ("x3", red), in which the decorative symbol displayed as a temporary stop and the number and display color of the pseudo-consecutive spin count display 002SG212 are the same type, is determined more frequently than the first combination ("x3", blue), in which the decorative symbol displayed as a temporary stop and the number of the pseudo-consecutive spin count display 002SG212 are the same type but the display color is different, blue.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, and a normal pattern ("3", blue) is determined as the stopping pattern in step 002SGS276, the probability that the same color, blue, will be determined as the pseudo-consecutive number display for the first pseudo-consecutive run and the second pseudo-consecutive run will be lower than the probability that a non-identical color, red, will be determined.

In this way, the pseudo consecutive prediction can result in a first combination in which the numbers of the decorative symbols displayed in the temporary stop mode and the numbers of the pseudo consecutive number displays 002SG212 and 002SG213 are the same type, but the display colors of the decorative symbols displayed in the temporary stop mode and the pseudo consecutive number display are different, or a second combination in which both the numbers and display colors of the decorative symbols displayed in the temporary stop mode and the pseudo consecutive number display are the same type. This means that the probability of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state is higher when the variable display is resumed in the second combination than when the variable display is resumed in the first combination during the pseudo consecutive prediction. This allows players to focus not only on whether or not the pseudo consecutive prediction is executed, but also, if executed, on the combination of the numbers of the decorative symbols displayed in the temporary stop mode and the numbers and colors of the pseudo consecutive number displays 002SG212 and 002SG213, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, in the pseudo consecutive prediction, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state is higher when a super reach fluctuation pattern of two pseudo consecutive wins is determined as the fluctuation pattern than when a super reach fluctuation pattern of one pseudo consecutive win is determined. Therefore, by making it more likely that the jackpot gaming state will be controlled when the decorative symbol provisionally stopped in the second pseudo consecutive win and the number and display color of the pseudo consecutive win count display are the same type of second combination than when the decorative symbol provisionally stopped in the first pseudo consecutive win and the number and display color of the pseudo consecutive win count display are the same type of second combination, it is possible to draw more attention to the number of pseudo consecutive wins and the number and display color of the pseudo consecutive win count display.

Furthermore, if the decorative symbol displayed as a temporary stop and the number and display color of the pseudo-consecutive number display during the second pseudo-consecutive match are both of the same type of second combination, the decorative symbol will become a probability variable symbol, so the probability of being controlled to a probability variable jackpot gaming state may be higher if a super reach fluctuation pattern of two pseudo-consecutive matches is determined as the fluctuation pattern than if a super reach fluctuation pattern of one pseudo-consecutive match is determined.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display color of the pseudo-consecutive win count display is determined from among multiple colors depending on the number of decorative symbols temporarily displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display color of the pseudo-consecutive win count display may be a display color that is predetermined for each pseudo-consecutive win count.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display format of the pseudo consecutive number displays 002SG212 and 002SG213 is exemplified as "x2" or "x3", but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pseudo consecutive number display can be changed to various formats as long as the number of pseudo consecutive numbers can be specified. For example, it can be displayed in various formats such as "nth consecutive number" (n is an integer of 2 or more), "nth time", "nth re-variation", etc.

In this embodiment, in the pseudo-consecutive prediction, the numbers on the decorative symbol displayed in the temporary stop and the numbers on the pseudo-consecutive count display are the same type and color in two cases: when the decorative symbol displayed in the temporary stop is a normal symbol ("2", blue) and the pseudo-consecutive count display 002SG212 ("x2", blue), and when the decorative symbol displayed in the temporary stop is a normal symbol ("3", red) and the pseudo-consecutive count display 002SG213 (x3, red). However, other patterns are also possible, such as when the decorative symbol displayed in the temporary stop is a normal symbol ("4", green) and the pseudo-consecutive count display (x4, green). The color of the numbers on the decorative symbol, the color of the numbers on the pseudo-consecutive count display, and the number of pseudo-consecutive times can be changed in various ways.

In addition, in this embodiment, even when the number of the decorative pattern temporarily displayed in the pseudo consecutive win prediction is a number other than "2" or "3" corresponding to the number in the pseudo consecutive win count display, a decision is made as to whether or not the pseudo consecutive win count display color will be the same color as the number of the decorative pattern temporarily displayed, and the expectation level is higher if the same color is decided than if a different color is decided. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the number of the decorative pattern temporarily displayed in the pseudo consecutive win prediction is a number other than "2" or "3" corresponding to the number in the pseudo consecutive win count display, the pseudo consecutive win count display color may not be decided, but may be uniformly decided to be a predetermined display color (for example, white, etc.).

In addition, in this embodiment, in the pseudo consecutive prediction, a decorative symbol with the same number as the decorative symbol temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is temporarily displayed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, entering a reach state, and then a pseudo consecutive decorative symbol with the word "NEXT!" displayed on its surface is temporarily displayed in a stopped position in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C, thereby starting a re-variable display. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode of the pseudo consecutive decorative symbol can be changed in various ways. Furthermore, after a decorative symbol with a different number than the decorative symbol temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is temporarily displayed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, the re-variable display may also be started by a decorative symbol temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L or the right decorative symbol display area 5R, or a pseudo consecutive decorative symbol, being temporarily displayed in a stopped position in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C.

The decorative symbols provisionally displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R during the pseudo consecutive prediction do not necessarily have to be the same as the final decorative symbols that are displayed when the variable display ends. For example, after a regular symbol is provisionally displayed during the first pseudo consecutive, a special symbol may be displayed during the second pseudo consecutive, i.e., a symbol different from the symbol displayed during the first pseudo consecutive. Furthermore, the number of pseudo consecutive times is not limited to two, and three or more pseudo consecutive times (re-variable display) may be possible.

(Example of reach effect operation)
Next, an example of the operation of the reach effect will be described with reference to Figures 163 to 165. Figure 163 is a diagram showing the flow of the reach effect. Figure 164 is a diagram showing the flow of the reach effect following Figure 163. Figure 165 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of each part in the reach effect. Note that, although an example of the operation of the reach effect in the first effect mode will be described below, similar reach effects may also be executable in the second to fourth effect modes.

As shown in Figure 163 (A), when a variable display based on a normal reach variable pattern or a super reach variable pattern is initiated, a decorative symbol is temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the variable display began (see Figure 163 (B)). Next, a decorative symbol with the same number as the decorative symbol temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is temporarily displayed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined reach mode, and the reach effect begins (see Figure 163 (C)). At this time, decorative symbols are displayed at high speed in the center decorative symbol display area 5C. In addition, the movable body lamps 9d of movable bodies 32A and 32B are lit based on the loop light emission control described above (see Figure 137 (B)).

Note that Figures 163 (B) and (C) illustrate a form in which the decorative patterns are temporarily displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L and then the right decorative pattern display area 5R, but the present invention is not limited to this, and decorative patterns may be temporarily displayed simultaneously in the left and right decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R.

As shown in Figure 163 (D), when the reach effect begins, the decorative symbols temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L and the right decorative symbol display area 5R are enlarged, and the reach line suggestion image, reach line effect display 002SG250, is displayed superimposed on the decorative symbol (which is nearly transparent and invisible) currently being variably displayed in the center decorative symbol display area 5C, thereby starting the reach line suggestion effect. The reach line effect display 002SG250 is a display that emphasizes the reach line connecting the decorative symbols temporarily displayed at the stop positions in the left decorative symbol display area 5L and the right decorative symbol display area 5R, and is a display that suggests that the decorative symbol in the center decorative symbol display area 5C will be displayed stationary on the reach line.

In Figure 163 (D), the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L and right decorative symbol display area 5R are not just enlarged as in the variable stop action described above, but rather the number display section 002SG051, character display section 002SG052, information display section 002SG053, and base display section 002SG054 that form the decorative symbol are all enlarged at the same ratio. In this way, by enlarging the display in a manner different from when the variable display is stopped, it can be recognized that the variable display has not stopped, but has entered a reach mode.

As shown in Figure 163(D), when the reach performance begins, the reach line effect display 002SG250 is displayed small near the stop position in the center decorative pattern display area 5C, superimposed on the decorative pattern being variably displayed, and then gradually extends linearly toward the stop positions (left and right) of the left and right decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R (see Figure 163(E)). After reaching the left and right edges of the display screen (see Figure 163(F)), the display changes so that the vertical dimensions expand (see Figure 163(G)), and the transmittance (transparency) gradually increases through a fade-out display (see Figure 163(H)), and finally disappears and is no longer displayed (see Figure 164(I)).

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 163 (F), in the reach line suggestion performance, it is possible to change the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250 (enlarge the display), and when the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250 is being changed, the movable body lamps 9d of the movable bodies 32A, 32B arranged on the periphery (nearby) of the display screen of the image display device 5 are turned off, making the periphery of the display screen darker than usual, thereby making the reach line effect display 002SG250 stand out more.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 163(D), after the decorative patterns temporarily displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R are enlarged and displayed, the left decorative pattern begins to move to the left and the right decorative pattern begins to move to the right, i.e., in directions away from each other (see Figure 163(E)). Furthermore, while moving away from each other, they rotate a predetermined angle around a rotation axis facing up and down (see Figure 163(F)), and when they reach the furthest position on the left and right of the display screen, the movement and rotational display ends and they are temporarily displayed (see Figure 163(G)).

Then, as shown in Figure 163 (H), the left and right decorative patterns that were displayed enlarged in the separated positions on the left and right are reduced in size and rotated while moving from the separated positions toward the decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, and are restored to their normal display positions.

Then, as shown in Figure 164 (I), when the decorative patterns are restored to the decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R and the reach line effect display 002SG250 is erased and no longer displayed, the decorative patterns that were variably displayed in the center decorative pattern display area 5C gradually decrease in scroll display speed and transmittance (transparency) as they fade in (see Figures 164 (J) to (K)), and finally the transmittance of the decorative patterns becomes 0% (opaque) and they are scrolled at a slow speed (see Figure 164 (L)).

As shown in FIG. 165, when executing a reach line suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 can execute an enlarged display that enlarges the decorative symbols temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L and the right decorative symbol display area 5R, and a separating display that separates the decorative symbols after executing the enlarged display.The second period te1 from the start to the end of the separating display is longer than the first period td1 from the start to the end of the enlarged display (td1<te1), allowing the player to recognize the decorative symbols that form the reach state.

Furthermore, the period td2 from the start of the enlarged display to the end of the enlarged display is longer than the period tf1 until the enlarged decorative symbol is restored to its original state (td2<tf1), so the player can be made aware of the decorative symbol that forms the reach state, and when restored, it can be quickly reduced in size to prepare for the next performance.

In addition, when the decorative patterns temporarily displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R are enlarged, the left-right dimension of the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, which focuses attention on which decorative pattern will be displayed in a stopped state, narrows, making it difficult to see the variable display of the decorative patterns. Therefore, by performing a moving display that separates the left and right decorative patterns, the left and right decorative patterns that have reached a reach state are highlighted by the enlarged display, and then attention is quickly drawn to the decorative pattern in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C.

Furthermore, the reach line effect display 002SG250 has been exemplified as being displayed immediately after the decorative symbols are temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L and the right decorative symbol display area 5R, resulting in a reach state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may also be displayed at the same time as the reach state is reached.

In addition, the movable body lamp 9d is shown as being turned off when the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250 changes after the decorative symbols are temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L and the right decorative symbol display area 5R and the reach line effect display 002SG250 is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this and the lamp may be turned off simultaneously with the display of the reach line effect display 002SG250. Furthermore, instead of being turned off, the lamp may be made less bright than when the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250 is changing.

In addition, in this embodiment, the movable body lamp 9d built into the movable bodies 32A and 32B located above and below the image display device 5 is used as the specific light-emitting means that is turned off when the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250 is changing. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The specific light-emitting means is not limited to lamps located on movable bodies that can operate as described above, as long as they are located around the image display device 5. For example, it may be multiple board-side lamps, including an attacca lamp 9c, located on the gaming board, or a main lamp 9a or frame lamp 9b located on the gaming machine frame 3. In particular, if the lamp is located near the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the display screen of the image display device 5, turning it off can make the reach line effect display 002SG250 stand out.

Furthermore, after the reach line effect display 002SG250 is executed, the transmittance (transparency) of the decorative pattern being variably displayed in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C is set to the second transmittance F2, which is lower than the first transmittance F1 before the reach line effect display 002SG250 was executed, after the reach line effect display 002SG250 has been erased from the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, so that the decorative pattern being variably displayed in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C does not interfere with the display of the reach line effect display 002SG250.

In addition, in this embodiment, an example is given in which the transparency of the decorative pattern in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C gradually decreases (fade-in display) after the reach line effect display 002SG250 is removed from the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, but the present invention is not limited to this. The reach line effect display 002SG250 may change to the second transparency F2 almost simultaneously when it is removed from the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, or the reach line effect display 002SG250 may change to the second transparency F2 after a predetermined time has elapsed after it is removed from the middle decorative pattern display area 5C.

(Example of SP reach effect)
Next, an example of operation of the SP reach effect will be described with reference to Figures 166 to 168. Figure 166 is a diagram showing the flow of the SP reach effect. Figure 167 is a diagram showing the flow of the SP reach effect following Figure 166. Figure 168 is a diagram showing an example of operation of each part in the SP reach effect.

As shown in Figure 166 (A), in the variable display of the Super Reach fluctuation pattern when controlled to a low base state, after the Reach state described in Figure 163 (C) is reached, the Reach title display 002SG070 indicating the type of SP Reach effect is displayed, thereby announcing the Reach title, and an SP Reach effect (e.g., a battle between an ally character and an enemy character) begins as an indication effect to notify whether or not the game state is controlled to a jackpot (see Figures 166 (B) and (C)). In the SP Reach effect, a fifth background image 002SG085 depicting space corresponding to the SP Reach effect is displayed, which is an image different from the first background image 002SG081 and second background image 002SG082, which are normal background images. Note that the fifth background image 002SG085 may be an image with a different appearance depending on the type of SP Reach effect.

Next, from the time the battle is concluded until the specified valid operation period has elapsed, an operation prompt display 002SG071 consisting of the text "PRESS!!" encouraging the operation of the push button 31B, and a button display 002SG072 imitating the push button 31B are displayed (see Figure 166 (D)).

When operation of the push button 31B is detected within the valid operation period, or when the valid operation period has elapsed without any operation being detected, the operation prompt display 002SG071 and button display 002SG072 are hidden and the game ends. If the variable display result is a jackpot, the movable body lamp 9d lights up in a specified light color, the movable body 32B rises from the origin position to the effect position, the effect display 002SG073 highlighting the movable body 32B is displayed, and a specified effect sound is output, indicating that the game has been controlled to a jackpot gaming state (see Figure 166 (E)).

Next, after a result display (not shown) is displayed indicating that the ally character has won the battle against the enemy character, the fifth background image 002SG085 corresponding to the SP reach effect is displayed as the background image, and the combination of symbols that confirms a jackpot (for example, "222") is displayed temporarily (see Figure 166 (F)).

As shown in Figure 166 (G), as the SP reach effect ends, the fifth background image 002SG085 disappears and the first background image 002SG081 appears, and while the first background image 002SG081 is displayed, the combination of symbols that confirm a jackpot (e.g., "222") is displayed temporarily. After that, a character 002SG074 appears holding a lit ignition device, frames in from the bottom right side of the display screen, and then runs to the left, igniting the number display portions 002SG051 of the decorative symbols that are temporarily displayed in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (see Figure 166 (H)).

As shown in Figure 168(A), specific image 002SG075, which depicts a flame displayed by igniting a predetermined position on the periphery of the number display section 002SG051 of each symbol, increases along the periphery of the number display section 002SG051 and is displayed near the numbers on the number display section 002SG051, as shown in Figures 168(B)-(D). Furthermore, as shown in the enlarged view in Figure 168(D), the flame image that constitutes specific image 002SG075 is displayed in a loop with three different images (specific image 002SG075A, specific image 002SG075B, and specific image 002SG075C), giving the appearance of a flickering flame. Finally, specific image 002SG075 disappears, the small symbols and decorative symbols are statically displayed, and the jackpot result is derived and displayed (see Figure 166(J)).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, the movable body 32B does not rise from the origin position to the presentation position, and a result notification display 002SG078 indicating that the ally character has lost the battle with the enemy character is displayed (see Figure 166 (K)). After that, when the fifth background image 002SG085 corresponding to the SP reach presentation is displayed as the background image in the presentation, a missing confirmed pattern combination (for example, "232") that is not a jackpot combination is displayed as a temporary stop (see Figure 166 (L)).

As shown in Figure 166 (M), as the notification effect (SP reach effect) ends, the fifth background image 002SG085 disappears and the first background image 002SG081 appears, and while the first background image 002SG081 is displayed, the winning combination (e.g., "232") is temporarily displayed. After that, the small symbols and decorative symbols are displayed statically without the specific image 002SG075 being displayed, and the losing result is derived and displayed (see Figure 166 (N)).

Furthermore, in the variable display of the Super Reach fluctuation pattern when controlled to a high base state, after a notification effect is produced to notify players that they have been controlled to a jackpot game state (see Figure 166 (E)), a result display (not shown) is displayed indicating that the ally character has won the battle against the enemy character, and then, when the fifth background image 002SG085 corresponding to the SP Reach effect is displayed as the background image in the notification effect, a combination of symbols that confirms a jackpot (for example, "222") is displayed in a provisionally stopped state (see Figure 167 (O)).

As shown in Figure 167 (P), upon completion of the notification effect (SP reach effect), the fifth background image 002SG085 is hidden and the fourth background image 002SG084 is displayed, and while the fourth background image 002SG084 is displayed, the jackpot confirmation symbol combination (e.g., "222") is temporarily displayed. After that, the decorative symbols are displayed statically without the specific image 002SG075 being displayed, and the jackpot display result is derived and displayed (see Figure 167 (Q)).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, the movable body 32B does not rise from the origin position to the performance position, and a result notification display 002SG078 indicating that the ally character has lost the battle with the enemy character is displayed (see Figure 166 (K)). After that, when the fifth background image 002SG085 corresponding to the SP reach performance is displayed as the background image in the notification performance, a miss confirmed pattern combination (for example, "232") that is not a jackpot combination is displayed temporarily (see Figure 167 (R)).

Then, as shown in Figure 167 (S), as the notification effect (SP reach effect) ends, the fifth background image 002SG085 is hidden and the fourth background image 002SG084 is displayed, and while the fourth background image 002SG084 is displayed, the winning combination (e.g., "232") is temporarily displayed. After that, the small symbols and decorative symbols are displayed statically without the specific image 002SG075 being displayed, and the losing display result is derived and displayed (see Figure 167 (T)).

In this way, in a low base state, the specific image 002SG075 is displayed in motion relative to the number display portion 002SG051 of the jackpot confirmation decorative pattern that is displayed after the notification effect has ended, thereby enhancing the presentation effect and creating excitement (see Figures 166 (H) and (I)). However, in a high base state where the average variable display period is short, the specific image 002SG075 is not displayed in motion relative to the number display portion 002SG051 of the decorative pattern that is displayed after the notification effect has ended (see Figure 167 (S)), giving the variable display a sense of speed.

In this embodiment, in a low base state, the specific image 002SG075 showing a flame is displayed in close proximity to the number display portion 002SG051 of the jackpot confirmation decorative pattern combination displayed after the SP reach performance ends. However, the specific image is not limited to the specific image 002SG075 showing a flame as described above, and images other than flames (for example, light, water, effects, characters, items, etc.) may also be applied.

In addition, the dynamic display of a specific image may not only refer to the flickering flame as described above, but may also include the specific image rotating around the numeric display unit 002SG051, or changing in shape or display color.

In addition, in this embodiment, an example has been given in which character 002SG074 acts on each decorative pattern that is temporarily displayed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R, thereby causing specific image 002SG075 to be displayed in motion around number display unit 002SG051. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific image may be displayed without character 002SG074 acting on each decorative pattern that is temporarily displayed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R.

(Variation 2)
Next, a second modification of the present invention will be described with reference to Fig. 169. In Fig. 169, (A1) to (A7) are diagrams showing the second modification of the present invention.

In the above embodiment, the variable stop action enlarges the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052 when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped at the stop position in the decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, or 5R. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the decorative symbol may be displayed moving in the opposite direction after passing the stop position in the decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, or 5R, and then returning to the stop position.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 169 (A1) and (A2), the decorative pattern moves gradually downward in the direction of the white arrow while decelerating towards the stopping position, and when it reaches the stopping position and is displayed as temporarily stopped (see Figure 169 (A3)), the base display unit 002SG054 and information display unit 002SG053 remain displayed as temporarily stopped at the stopping position, while the number display unit 002SG051 and character display unit 002SG052 continue to move downward past the stopping position.

At this time, the distance L2 traveled by the numeric display unit 002SG051 from the time it passes the stop position until it is displayed as temporarily stopped is greater than the distance L1 traveled by the character display unit 002SG052 from the time it passes the stop position until it is displayed as temporarily stopped (L1 < L2).

After that, having passed the stop position, the numeric display unit 002SG051 and character display unit 002SG052 each move upward, and while the character display unit 002SG052 is displayed temporarily stopped at the stop position (see FIG. 169 (A5)), the character display unit 002SG052 passes the stop position again and moves upward (see FIG. 169 (A6)). In this way, the movement distance L3 from when the numeric display unit 002SG051 passes upward through the stop position to when it is displayed temporarily stopped is smaller than the movement distance L2 from when the numeric display unit 002SG051 passes downward through the stop position to when it is displayed temporarily stopped (L3 < L2). Finally, the numeric display unit 002SG051 moves downward and is displayed temporarily stopped at the stop position (see FIG. 169 (A7)).

In addition, in Figure 169 (A6), the action in which only the character display part 002SG052 passes through the stopping position and moves upward is an upward action that differs in form from the fluctuation start action A4 shown in Figure 136 (A), and therefore allows the difference from the fluctuation start action to be recognized.

In this way, when the decorative pattern reaches the stopping position, rather than being displayed as temporarily stopped at the exact moment it reaches the stopping position, at least some of the multiple seed display parts that make up the decorative pattern are displayed as if they have passed the stopping position, then moved to the opposite side and returned to the stopping position. This makes it appear as if some of the display parts have passed by with force, adding a sense of realism.

Furthermore, by temporarily stopping the first display unit (e.g., base display unit 002SG054 and information display unit 002SG053) among the multiple display units at a stop position while having the other second display units (e.g., number display unit 002SG051 and character display unit 002SG052) pass through the stop position, movement can be imparted without making the stop position unclear. Furthermore, by varying the movement distances passed by one of the second display units, number display unit 002SG051, and the other, character display unit 002SG052, it is possible to display movement that matches the size and appearance of the display units.

(Variation 3)
Next, a third modification of the present invention will be described with reference to Fig. 170. Fig. 170 (A) to (D) are diagrams showing the third modification of the present invention.

In the above embodiment, when a decorative symbol is temporarily displayed at a stop position in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the first presentation mode, the decorative symbols before and after the decorative symbol temporarily displayed at that stop position are not temporarily displayed, as shown in Figure 134 (A2). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in a variable display based on a miss variation pattern, as shown in Figure 170 (B), when one of the decorative symbols (e.g., decorative symbol "3") is temporarily displayed at a stop position, some of the decorative symbols before and after it (e.g., decorative symbol "2", decorative symbol "4") may also be temporarily displayed.

When one of the decorative symbols that was variably displayed (for example, decorative symbol "3") is temporarily stopped at the stop position (see Figures 170 (A) and (B)), and a variable stop action is performed (see Figures 170 (C) and (D)), it is preferable that the variable stop action is performed on the decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped at the stop position, and that the variable stop action is not performed on decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped in areas other than the stop position.

By doing this, when a losing combination, which is a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to a losing display result, is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols, the decorative symbols tentatively displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily enlarged, thereby drawing the player's attention to the decorative symbols tentatively displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and keeping the player's gaze on the area where the decorative symbols are displayed, even when a losing combination that would not normally make sense to the player is derived. Furthermore, when the decorative symbols tentatively displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are enlarged, decorative symbols that are not located in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are not enlarged, allowing the player's gaze to be focused on the decorative symbols tentatively displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and also reducing the load on display control.

In addition, loop light emission control continues even when the decorative patterns temporarily displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are enlarged (see Figures 155 and 156), simplifying the control of the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and movable body lamp 9d. Furthermore, if multiple valid stop positions are set, a variable stop action may be executed for the decorative patterns temporarily displayed at each valid stop position.

(Other Modifications)
Furthermore, when the variable display mode becomes a reach mode and then develops into an SP reach performance, only the number display unit 002SG051 may be moved to a predetermined position on the display screen where the SP reach performance is displayed (for example, the upper left or right side of the display screen) by a specific action including a first predetermined action in which the left and right decorative patterns that form the reach mode move toward the front side of the display screen and a second predetermined action in which the decorative patterns move toward the back side of the display screen, and in this case, it is preferable that the moving speed of the decorative patterns is faster in the second predetermined action than in the first predetermined action.

In addition, when the variable display is stopped, the decorative pattern is displayed in the number display section 002SG051 and the information display section 002SG053. When the variable display starts, the number display section 002SG051 may be able to execute a number variable start action that is different from the scrolling display, and the information display section 002SG053 may also be able to execute an information display variable start action in conjunction with the number variable start action of the number display section 002SG051. In this case, the information display variable start action may end before the number variable start action ends, causing the information display section 002SG053 to be erased.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention are also included in the present invention.

For example, in the above embodiment, an example was given in which either the first or second presentation mode can be executed in a low base state, the third presentation mode can be executed in a low-probability high base state, and the fourth presentation mode can be executed in a high-probability high base state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and three or more presentation modes may be executable in a low base state, or three or more presentation modes may be executable in a high base state.

In addition, the above embodiment illustrates a form in which a first scrolling display in the vertical direction is executed in the first presentation mode, a second scrolling display that curves and moves from the back to the front in the second presentation mode, a rotating display in the third presentation mode, and a third scrolling display in the vertical direction in the fourth presentation mode, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the manner in which the decorative patterns are variable displayed in each presentation mode can be modified in various ways.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a form in which a jackpot game state is applied as an example of an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and advantageous states may also be a time-saving state, a probability variable state, a small jackpot game state, etc.

In addition, in this embodiment, an example is given in which the normal state is a low-probability, low-base state, and the special states, which are more likely to execute variable display than the normal state and have a shorter average variable display period, are a low-probability, high-base state and a high-probability, low-base state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the normal state may be a low-probability state, and the special state may be a high-probability state.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the game states are a normal state (low base state), a time-saving state (low probability high base state), and a probability variable state (high probability high base state), and an example is given of applying the present invention to a pachinko game machine 1 that can be controlled to the time-saving state or the probability variable state at the end of a jackpot game.However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention may also be applied to pachinko game machines that can be controlled to the time-saving state based on the variable display result being displayed as a specific result, which is part of the case where the variable display result is not a miss in a low probability state, or that can be controlled to the time-saving state based on the variable display being executed a predetermined number of times without being controlled to the advantageous state in a low probability state after the end of an advantageous state or RAM clear (cold start of pachinko game machine 1). In this case, for example, the time-saving state controlled after a jackpot game can be called time-saving state A, the time-saving state controlled after the end of an advantageous state or in a low-probability state after RAM clearing (a cold start of the pachinko gaming machine 1) based on the execution of a predetermined number of variable displays without being controlled to an advantageous state can be called time-saving state B, and the time-saving state controlled based on the variable display result being displayed as a specific result in some cases where the variable display result is not a miss in a low-probability state can be called time-saving state C.

Furthermore, in a pachinko gaming machine that can be controlled to enter the time-saving state C described above, multiple types of variable display results that can result in winning the time-saving state C may be provided, and the number of variable displays for which time-saving control is performed may be varied depending on the type of variable display result that results in winning the time-saving state C.

In addition, in the above embodiment, spherical gaming balls (pachinko balls) were used as an example of gaming media, but this is not limited to spherical gaming media and may also be non-spherical gaming media such as medals.

In addition, while the above embodiment applies to a pachinko gaming machine as an example of a gaming machine, the present invention can also be applied to slot machines in which, for example, a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using gaming value, one game ends when a variable display result is output to a variable display device that can variably display multiple types of individually identifiable symbols, and a prize can be awarded depending on the variable display result output to the variable display device. In the case of slot machines, the normal state corresponds to the non-AT state, the advantageous state corresponds to the big bonus, regular bonus, or assist time (AT), and the special state corresponds to assist time (AT), etc.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to enclosed gaming machines that enclose gaming media and award points based on winning, as well as slot machines. Furthermore, a gaming machine capable of playing games is one that at least allows games to be played, and is not limited to pachinko gaming machines or slot machines, and can also be a general gaming machine.

1 Pachinko gaming machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 100 Game control microcomputer 120 Performance control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can execute variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body and
A performance control means;
a movable body control means,
the movable body control means is capable of performing a confirmation operation control to operate the movable body by an operation to confirm that the movable body operates normally when power is turned on,
the effect control means is capable of performing an action promotion effect that prompts a player to take an action during variable display based on a specific variable display pattern;
The specific variable display pattern is
A first part until the action prompting performance is executed;
A second part is executed after the first part, and a result of the action prompting performance is notified.
The invention comprises:
The movable body control means
The confirmation operation control can be performed using a first operation control pattern that operates the movable body for a first period and a second operation control pattern that operates the movable body for a second period that is shorter than the first period,
When a power outage occurs immediately before the end of variable display before the start of variable display based on the specific variable display pattern, and the power is then turned on, the movable body can be controlled so that the confirmation operation control is performed using the second operation control pattern during the execution of variable display based on the specific variable display pattern, and the confirmation operation control ends before the start of the second part,
The game device further includes a game control means capable of performing specific identification information light emission control, which is control of a plurality of light emitting means that indicate the results of variable display of the specific identification information, when the power is turned on;
the movable body control means is capable of starting the confirmation operation control after the specific identification information light emission control has been started,
During the variable display, it is possible to execute a movable body effect using the movable body, and to display an effect display corresponding to the movable body effect,
When the variable display that executes the movable body performance is started while the confirmation operation control is being performed, the confirmation operation control is continued, and the movable body performance is restricted during the confirmation operation control to display the effect display.
A gaming machine characterized by: